RAM 2500/3500
2020 OWNER’S MANUAL
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects
or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the
engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash
your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may
also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and
equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or
make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling
1-866-726-4636 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada), or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect
manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S. residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting
www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase replacement kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1
INTRODUCTION..............................................................................................................................11
2
GET
TING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ..................................................................................15
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ......................................................103
4
SAFETY .........................................................................................................................................138
5
STARTING AND OPERATING ...............................................................................................201
6
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ....................................................................................................325
7
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................364
8
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................427
9
MULTIMEDIA .............................................................................................................................440
10
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .....................................................................................................522
11
INDEX.............................................................................................................................................526
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
2
INTRODUCTION
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ................................ 12
Essential Information.......................................12
Symbols.............................................................12
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ................................ 12
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS........................... 12
CONSUMER INFORMATION — TRUCK-CAMPER
LOADING................................................................. 12
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS.......... 14
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE USER GUIDE — IF EQUIPPED ................ 15
KEYS ........................................................................ 16
Key Fob .............................................................16
IGNITION SWITCH .................................................. 19
Keyless Push Button Ignition...........................19
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
(GASOLINE) ............................................................ 20
How To Use Remote Start................................21
Remote Start Abort Message ..........................21
To Enter Remote Start Mode...........................21
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without
Driving The Vehicle ..........................................21
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive
The Vehicle .......................................................22
Remote Start Comfort Systems —
If Equipped........................................................22
General Information.........................................22
REMOTE START— IF EQUIPPED (DIESEL)............22
How To Use Remote Start................................23
Remote Start Abort Message ..........................23
To Enter Remote Start Mode...........................23
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without
Driving The Vehicle...........................................23
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive
The Vehicle .......................................................24
Remote Start Comfort Systems —
If Equipped........................................................24
SENTRY KEY............................................................24
Key Programming ............................................24
Replacement Keys .........................................25
General Information.........................................25
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM (IF EQUIPPED) ........26
To Arm The System ..........................................26
To Disarm The System.....................................26
Rearming Of The System .................................26
Security System Manual Override...................26
DOORS ....................................................................27
Manual Door Locks ..........................................27
Power Door Locks — If Equipped ....................28
Power Side Steps — If Equipped .....................28
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry —
If Equipped .......................................................28
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped..............30
Child-Protection Door Lock .............................31
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS —
IF EQUIPPED .......................................................... 31
Programming The Memory Feature................32
Linking And Unlinking The Remote
Keyless Entry Key Fob To Memory..................32
Memory Position Recall ...................................32
SEATS .................................................................. 33
Manual Front Seat Adjustment.......................33
Manual Rear Seat Adjustment........................34
Power Driver Seat Adjustment —
If Equipped .......................................................34
Heated Seats — If Equipped............................36
Ventilated Seats — If Equipped .......................37
HEAD RESTRAINTS................................................ 38
Front Head Restraints......................................38
Front Head Restraint Removal........................39
Rear Head Restraint Adjustment....................39
Rear Head Restraint Removal.........................40
STEERING WHEEL .............................................. 40
Tilt Steering Column .......................................40
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped ...........41
DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS —
IF EQUIPPED .......................................................... 41
MIRRORS ............................................................... 42
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped ..........42
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped .....42
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 2
3
Automatic Dimming Mirror With Rear View
Camera Display — If Equipped ........................43
Outside Mirrors ................................................43
Power Mirrors — If Equipped ...........................44
Power Convex Mirror Switch — If Equipped ....44
Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped ..............45
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ........................45
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped......46
Power Folding Outside Mirrors For/’ Standard
And Trailer Tow — If Equipped .........................46
Illuminated Vanity Mirror — If Equipped..........47
EXTERIOR LIGHTS.................................................. 48
Multifunction Lever ..........................................48
Headlight Switch...............................................48
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) —
If Equipped ......................................................48
High/Low Beam Switch....................................49
Automatic High Beam Headlamp
Control — If Equipped.......................................49
Flash-To-Pass ..................................................49
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ..............50
Directional LED Headlamp
System — If Equipped.......................................50
Parking Lights And Panel Lights......................50
Headlights On With Wipers
(Available With Automatic Headlights Only) ...50
Headlight Delay ................................................50
Lights-On Reminder .........................................51
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped .......................51
Turn Signals......................................................51
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped..................51
Cargo Lights/Trailer Spotter Lights
With Bed Lights — If Equipped.........................51
Battery Saver....................................................52
INTERIOR LIGHTS ..................................................52
Courtesy Lights.................................................52
Illuminated Entry .............................................54
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS...............54
Windshield Wipers .........................................54
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ...............55
CLIMATE CONTROLS .............................................56
Manual Climate Control Overview ..................56
Automatic Climate Control Overview ..............60
Climate Control Functions ...............................66
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ..........66
Operating Tips .................................................67
WINDOWS ..............................................................68
Power Windows ...............................................68
Wind Buffeting .................................................70
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED ......................70
Single Pane Power Sunroof —
If Equipped .......................................................70
HOOD....................................................................... 72
To Open The Hood ...........................................72
To Close The Hood ...........................................72
TAILGATE ................................................................ 72
Opening.............................................................72
Closing ..............................................................73
Bed Step — If Equipped ...................................73
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED........... 74
Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink® ......................................................74
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming .........76
Using HomeLink® ............................................77
Security .............................................................77
Troubleshooting Tips........................................77
General Information.........................................77
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT ......................................... 78
Storage .............................................................78
Cupholders ......................................................83
Electrical Power Outlets .................................84
Power Inverter — If Equipped .........................85
Wireless Charging Pad — If Equipped ............87
Overhead Sunglass Storage............................87
PICKUP BOX .......................................................... 88
Cargo Camera — If Equipped...........................88
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 3
4
RAMBOX — IF EQUIPPED...................................... 90
RamBox Integrated Box Side Storage Bins ....90
RamBox Safety Warning ..................................91
Bed Divider — If Equipped................................92
Bed Rail Tie-Down System —
If Equipped .......................................................94
EASY-OFF TAILGATE ............................................. 95
Disconnecting The Rear Camera
And Remote Keyless Entry...............................95
Removing The Tailgate.....................................96
Locking Tailgate................................................96
TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER — IF EQUIPPED ...... 96
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Removal ....................97
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Installation ................99
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Cleaning ................. 102
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER —
GAS ENGINE .........................................................103
Base / Midline Instrument Cluster
Descriptions — Gas Engine........................... 104
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER —
GAS ENGINE......................................................... 105
Premium Instrument Cluster
Descriptions — Gas Engine........................... 106
BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER —
DIESEL ENGINE.................................................... 107
Base Instrument Cluster Descriptions —
Diesel Engine................................................. 108
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER —
DIESEL ENGINE.................................................... 110
Premium Instrument Cluster
Descriptions — Diesel Engine....................... 111
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY...................... 111
Instrument Cluster Display Controls ............ 112
Oil Life Reset ................................................ 113
Display Menu Items ...................................... 113
Diesel Messages And Warnings —
6.7L Cummins Diesel Engine ....................... 121
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
Message — Electrical Load Reduction
Actions — If Equipped.................................... 124
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES .................125
Red Warning Lights....................................... 125
Yellow Warning Lights................................... 128
Yellow Indicator Lights.................................. 132
Green Indicator Lights .................................. 134
White Indicator Lights................................... 135
Blue Indicator Lights..................................... 136
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM —
OBD II ....................................................................136
Onboard Diagnostic System
(OBD II) Cybersecurity................................... 136
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS...............................137
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES ..............................................138
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ..................... 138
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ....... 139
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ..........................146
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) —
If Equipped ................................................... 146
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation — If Equipped............................... 152
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) .............................................. 155
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 4
5
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ....................163
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ....... 163
Important Safety Precautions....................... 163
Seat Belt Systems ........................................ 164
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ...... 172
Child Restraints ........................................... 180
Transporting Pets ....................................... 197
SAFETY TIPS.........................................................197
Transporting Passengers.............................. 197
Exhaust Gas ............................................... 198
Safety Checks You Should Make
Inside The Vehicle ........................................ 198
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ...................................... 200
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE — GAS ENGINE ...........201
Automatic Transmission ............................... 201
Tip Start Feature ........................................... 201
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition ...................... 201
Normal Starting Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button ................................... 202
Cold Weather Operation
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) ............................ 204
After Starting.................................................. 204
STARTING THE ENGINE — DIESEL ENGINE ...... 205
Automatic Transmission ............................... 205
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition ...................... 205
Extreme Cold Weather .................................. 207
Normal Starting Procedure — Engine
Manifold Air Temperature Above 66° F
(19° C)........................................................... 208
Starting Procedure — Engine Manifold Air
Temperature 0°F To 66°F
(–18°C to 19°C)........................................... 208
Starting Procedure — Engine Manifold Air
Temperature Below 0°F (-18°C) ................. 209
Starting Fluids ............................................... 210
NORMAL OPERATION — DIESEL ENGINE......... 210
Cold Weather Precautions............................ 210
Engine Idling ................................................. 213
Noise .............................................................. 214
Stopping The Engine ..................................... 215
Idle Shutdown................................................ 215
Programmable Maximum Vehicle Speed .... 215
Operating Precautions .................................. 215
Cooling System Tips...................................... 216
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER..................................... 216
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
GAS ENGINE......................................................... 217
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
DIESEL ENGINE....................................................217
PARKING BRAKE ................................................217
DIESEL EXHAUST BRAKE — ENGINE
BRAKING (IF EQUIPPED) ....................................219
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION .............................220
Ignition Park Interlock................................... 221
Brake/Transmission Shift
Interlock System .......................................... 221
Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission —
If Equipped .................................................... 221
Six-Speed Automatic
Transmission — If Equipped ......................... 226
AUXILIARY SWITCHES — IF EQUIPPED .............232
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION ..........................232
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION —
IF EQUIPPED ........................................................232
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case
(Eight Speed Transmission) —
If Equipped ................................................... 232
Electronically Shifted Transfer
Case (Six Speed Transmission) —
If Equipped .................................................... 235
Manually Shifted Transfer Case —
If Equipped .................................................... 238
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 5
6
AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED.........................................................241
Description..................................................... 241
Air Suspension Modes .................................. 241
Instrument Cluster Display Messages ......... 242
Operation ....................................................... 242
AXLE LOCKER SYSTEM — POWER WAGON
MODELS ONLY (IF EQUIPPED) ...........................243
STABILIZER/SWAY BAR SYSTEM —
POWER WAGON ONLY........................................244
SAFE OFF-ROAD DRIVING — POWER WAGON
ONLY .....................................................................245
Off-Road Driving Tips And Vehicle
Characteristics ............................................. 245
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand................... 246
Crossing Obstacles
(Rocks And Other High Points) ..................... 247
Hill Climbing................................................... 248
Driving Through Water .................................. 250
Airing Down For Off-Road Driving................. 251
Vehicle Recovery ........................................... 251
After Driving Off-Road ................................... 253
LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL ............................254
WINCH USAGE — POWER WAGON ONLY
(IF EQUIPPED) ..................................................... 254
Things To Know Before Using
Your Winch..................................................... 254
Understanding The Features Of
Your Winch..................................................... 255
Winch Accessories ....................................... 256
Operating Your Winch .................................. 256
Rigging Techniques ...................................... 262
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY — GAS ENGINE
(IF EQUIPPED)...................................................... 263
SPEED CONTROL ................................................ 263
To Activate ..................................................... 264
To Set A Desired Speed ................................ 264
To Vary The Speed Setting............................ 264
To Accelerate For Passing ........................... 265
To Resume Speed......................................... 265
To Deactivate................................................. 265
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) —
IF EQUIPPED ..................................................... 265
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation..... 267
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)..... 267
To Activate/Deactivate ................................. 267
To Set A Desired ACC Speed ........................ 268
To Cancel ....................................................... 268
To Turn Off ..................................................... 269
To Resume..................................................... 269
To Vary The Speed Setting ........................... 269
Setting The Following Distance In ACC........ 270
Overtake Aid .................................................. 271
ACC Operation At Stop .................................. 271
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu ........... 272
Display Warnings And Maintenance............ 272
Precautions While Driving With ACC ............ 274
General Information...................................... 276
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control Mode................................................. 276
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED.........................................................278
ParkSense Sensors....................................... 278
ParkSense Warning Display ......................... 279
ParkSense Display ........................................ 279
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense.............. 281
Service The ParkSense Rear Park
Assist System ................................................ 282
Cleaning The ParkSense System ................. 282
ParkSense System Usage Precautions........ 282
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR
PARK ASSIST .......................................................284
ParkSense Sensors....................................... 284
ParkSense Warning Display ......................... 284
ParkSense Display ........................................ 284
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 6
7
Enabling And Disabling Front And/
Or Rear ParkSense........................................ 287
Service The ParkSense Front/Rear
Park Assist System........................................ 287
Cleaning The ParkSense System ................. 287
ParkSense System Usage Precautions........ 288
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED...............................289
LaneSense Operation ................................... 289
Turning LaneSense On Or Off....................... 289
LaneSense Warning Message...................... 290
Changing LaneSense Status ........................ 291
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ...............291
AUX Camera — If Equipped .......................... 293
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED.........................................................294
AUX Camera — If Equipped .......................... 299
ENGINE RUNAWAY — DIESEL ENGINE..............300
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — GAS ENGINE ........300
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message .................... 301
REFUELING THE VEHICLE —
DIESEL ENGINE ....................................................301
Diesel Exhaust Fluid...................................... 303
VEHICLE LOADING ............................................305
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) .......... 305
Payload .......................................................... 305
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)................ 305
Tire Size.......................................................... 305
Rim Size ......................................................... 305
Inflation Pressure.......................................... 306
Curb Weight ................................................... 306
Loading .......................................................... 306
TRAILER TOWING................................................ 306
Common Towing Definitions......................... 306
Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum
Trailer Weight ................................................ 310
Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)............... 310
Trailer And Tongue Weight .......................... 310
Towing Requirements .................................. 311
Towing Tips ................................................... 315
SNOWPLOW ........................................................ 316
Before Plowing............................................... 316
Snowplow Prep Package Model
Availability...................................................... 316
Over The Road Operation With
Snowplow Attached....................................... 317
Operating Tips ............................................... 317
General Maintenance ................................... 317
RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) ........................... 318
Towing This Vehicle Behind
Another Vehicle ............................................. 318
Recreational Towing — Two-Wheel
Drive Models.................................................. 319
Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel
Drive Models.................................................. 319
DRIVING TIPS .......................................................322
Driving On Slippery Surfaces ....................... 322
Driving Through Water .................................. 322
Off-Road Driving Tips ................................... 324
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ........................325
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED.........................................................325
General Information...................................... 329
BULB REPLACEMENT .........................................330
Replacement Bulbs....................................... 330
Replacing Exterior Bulbs............................... 332
FUSES....................................................................337
Power Distribution Center ............................ 337
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ........................344
Jack Location................................................. 344
Removal Of Jack And Tools .......................... 344
Removing The Spare Tire ............................. 346
Preparations For Jacking.............................. 347
Jacking Instructions ...................................... 348
To Stow The Flat Or Spare ........................... 352
Reinstalling The Jack And Tools................... 353
Hub Caps/Wheel Covers — If Equipped ...... 353
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 7
8
JUMP STARTING...................................................354
Preparations For Jump Start......................... 355
Jump Starting Procedure .............................. 355
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE — 6–SPEED
TRANSMISSION ..................................................357
MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 – SPEED
TRANSMISSION ..................................................358
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS............................359
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ...............................360
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE .........................361
Two-Wheel Drive Models............................... 362
Four-Wheel Drive Models.............................. 362
Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped .......... 363
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) ..................................................................363
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR).........................363
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING — GAS ENGINE .........364
Maintenance Plan — Gasoline Engine ......... 365
Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle .................... 368
SCHEDULED SERVICING— DIESEL ENGINE ..... 368
Oil Change Indicator System —
Cummins® Diesel ......................................... 369
Perform Service Indicator —
Cummins® Diesel ....................................... 369
Maintenance Plan — Cummins® Diesel
Engine ........................................................... 370
ENGINE COMPARTMENT.................................... 376
6.4L Engine .................................................. 376
6.7L Diesel Engine — Six-Speed 68RFE ..... 377
6.7L Diesel Engine — Six-Speed AISIN
(AS69RC HD) ................................................. 378
Checking Oil Level — Gas Engine ................ 379
Checking Oil Level — Diesel Engine ............. 379
Adding Washer Fluid ................................... 379
Maintenance-Free Battery ........................... 380
Pressure Washing ......................................... 380
DEALER SERVICE ............................................... 381
Engine Oil ...................................................... 381
Engine Oil Filter ........................................... 383
Engine Air Cleaner Filter ............................... 383
Air Conditioner Maintenance........................ 385
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection................... 387
Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter —
Diesel Engine ................................................ 388
Engine Mounted Fuel Filter
Replacement — Diesel Engine...................... 389
Underbody Mounted Fuel Filter
Replacement — Diesel Engine...................... 390
Priming If The Engine Has Run Out
Of Fuel — Diesel Engine................................ 391
Intervention Regeneration Strategy —
Message Process Flow ................................. 392
Diesel Exhaust Fluid ..................................... 392
Body Lubrication .......................................... 393
Windshield Wiper Blades ............................. 393
Exhaust System ............................................ 395
Cooling System ............................................. 396
Charge Air Cooler — Inter-Cooler .................. 399
Brake System ............................................... 399
Automatic Transmission ............................... 400
Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle
Fluid Level ................................................. 402
Transfer Case ............................................... 403
Noise Control System Required
Maintenance & Warranty ............................ 403
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 8
9
HOISTING .............................................................406
TIRES .....................................................................406
Tire Safety Information ................................. 406
Tires — General Information ........................ 412
Tire Types....................................................... 416
Spare Tires — If Equipped ............................ 416
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care......................... 418
Tire Chains And Traction Devices ................ 419
Tire Rotation Recommendations ................ 420
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES ....................421
Treadwear...................................................... 422
Traction Grades............................................. 422
Temperature Grades..................................... 422
STORING THE VEHICLE .......................................422
BODYWORK..........................................................423
Protection From Atmospheric Agents ......... 423
Body And Underbody Maintenance.............. 423
Preserving The Bodywork ............................. 423
INTERIORS ...........................................................425
Seats And Fabric Parts.................................. 425
Plastic And Coated Parts .............................. 426
Leather Parts ................................................. 426
Glass Surfaces .............................................. 426
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
IDENTIFICATION DATA........................................ 427
Vehicle Identification Number ..................... 427
BRAKE SYSTEM .................................................. 427
Hydraulic Brake Assist — If Equipped .......... 427
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS ............................................... 427
Torque Specifications ................................. 428
FUEL REQUIREMENTS — GAS ENGINE ............. 429
6.4L Engine ................................................... 429
Reformulated Gasoline ............................ 429
Materials Added To Fuel ............................. 429
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ....................... 429
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex
Fuel Vehicles ................................................. 430
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ...... 430
MMT In Gasoline ........................................... 430
Fuel System Cautions ................................... 430
Carbon Monoxide Warnings ........................ 431
FUEL REQUIREMENTS – DIESEL ENGINE ........ 431
Fuel Specifications ....................................... 431
Biodiesel Fuel Requirements ....................... 432
FLUID CAPACITIES — GAS ENGINE ................... 434
FLUID CAPACITIES — DIESEL ENGINE...............435
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — GAS ENGINE.......436
Engine ........................................................... 436
Chassis .......................................................... 437
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS —
DIESEL ENGINE....................................................437
Engine ........................................................... 437
Chassis .......................................................... 439
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS .........................................440
CYBERSECURITY..................................................440
UCONNECT SETTINGS .........................................441
Uconnect 3 Settings...................................... 441
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV Settings................. 457
Uconnect 4C NAV With 12-inch
Display Settings............................................. 480
SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION ............501
Safety Guidelines .......................................... 501
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 9
10
UCONNECT 3 WITH 5-INCH DISPLAY ................502
Introduction ................................................... 502
Radio Mode ................................................... 502
Media Mode................................................... 505
Phone Mode .................................................. 507
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
IF EQUIPPED ........................................................512
Radio Operation ............................................ 513
Media Mode................................................... 513
IPOD®/USB/MP3 CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED.........................................................513
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE
PHONES ...............................................................515
Regulatory And Safety Information .............. 515
VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS ..................... 516
Introducing Uconnect.................................... 516
Get Started .................................................... 516
Basic Voice Commands ................................ 517
Radio.............................................................. 518
Media ............................................................. 518
Phone............................................................. 518
Voice Text Reply — If Equipped..................... 518
Climate (4C/4C NAV) .................................... 519
Navigation (4C NAV)...................................... 519
Siri® Eyes Free — If Equipped ..................... 519
Using Do Not Disturb ................................... 520
Android Auto™ — If Equipped ...................... 520
Apple CarPlay® — If Equipped ..................... 520
General Information...................................... 521
Additional Information .................................. 521
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE ....................................................522
Prepare For The Appointment ...................... 522
Prepare A List ................................................ 522
Be Reasonable With Requests..................... 522
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ................................522
FCA US LLC Customer Center....................... 523
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center .............. 523
In Mexico Contact ......................................... 523
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands ............... 523
Customer Assistance For The Hearing
Or Speech Impaired
(TDD/TTY) ...................................................... 523
Service Contract ........................................... 523
WARRANTY INFORMATION ................................524
MOPAR PARTS.....................................................524
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ..........................524
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C............................................ 524
In Canada ...................................................... 524
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ..........................525
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 10
11
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on selecting your new vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and perform tasks that are not intended for conventional passenger vehicles. It handles and maneuvers
differently from many passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If equipped, the two-wheel drive version
of this vehicle was designed for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheel drive vehicle.
Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for braking, steering,
transmission, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills will improve with experience. When driving
off-road, or working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics. Always observe federal, state, provincial
and local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision. Refer to
the “Driving Tips” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your
vehicle. It is supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its
customers as well as the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before
driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help ensure safe and
enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the
text. Therefore, you should only consider the information which is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced
throughout the Owner’s Information, that may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”. All data contained in
this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced.
For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact an
authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Ram best, have factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and care about
your satisfaction.
1
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 11
12
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
ESSENTIAL INFORMATION
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the
information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment
ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle's
equipment.
The detailed Index at the back of this Owner's Manual contains a complete
listing of all subjects.
SYMBOLS
Some vehicle components have colored labels whose symbols indicate
precautions to be observed when using this component. Refer to “Warning
Lights And Messages” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information on the symbols used in your vehicle.
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains
WARNINGS against operating procedures that
could result in a collision, bodily injury and/or death. It also contains
CAUTIONS
against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not
read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important information. Observe
all Warnings and Cautions.
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS
The New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not apply to body modifications or
special equipment installed by van conversion/camper manufacturers/body
builders. US residents refer to the Warranty Information, Section 2.1.C.
Canadian residents refer to the “What Is Not Covered” section of the
Warranty Information. Such equipment includes video monitors, DVD/
Blu-Ray™, heaters, stoves, refrigerators, etc. For warranty coverage and
service on these items, contact the applicable manufacturer.
CONSUMER INFORMATION — TRUCK-CAMPER LOADING
This information is provided in fulfillment of the requirement by the United
States Government, Department of Transportation, National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration, that “every manufacturer of trucks that are capable of
accommodating slide-in campers, manufactured on or after April 1, 1973 shall
provide... at the time of original purchase to the first person who purchases
the truck”... information on Truck Camper Loading.
A slide-in camper document is provided in your vehicle’s glove compartment
that contains your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), truck model, cargo
weight rating, and the forward/rearward limit of a camper. To obtain additional
dimensional and technical specifications for your vehicle, please visit
https://www.ramtrucks.com.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 12
13
Figure 1 illustrates the dimensions describing the forward and rearward limits of the zone in which the Center of Gravity (CG) of a slide-in camper must be located,
to provide satisfactory vehicle handling and to prevent overload of the front and rear axles.
Figure 2 illustrates a proper match between truck and camper.
NOTE:
The camper Center of Gravity falls within the specified zone.
A — Forward Limit of Camper CG
B — Rearward Limit of Camper CG
1
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 13
14
When the truck is used to carry a slide-in camper, the total cargo load of the
truck consists of the manufacturer’s camper weight figure, the weight of
installed additional camper equipment not included in the manufacturer’s
camper weight figure, the weight of camper cargo, and the weight of
passengers in the camper. The total cargo load should not exceed the truck’s
cargo weight rating and the camper’s CG should fall within the truck’s
recommended CG zone when installed.
Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that could affect the balance of
your vehicle. When the truck camper is loaded, drive to a scale and weigh the
front and rear wheels separately, to determine axle loads. Individual axle loads
should not exceed either of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR). The total of
the axle loads should not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
If weight ratings are exceeded, move or remove items to get the total weight
below the ratings.
NOTE:
These ratings are also provided on the vehicle certification label located on the
driver’s side B-pillar. See “Vehicle Loading” in “Starting And Operating” for
more information.
For any additional instructions, please contact your conversion/camper
manufacturer or an authorized dealer.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its
roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious
injury or death.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 14
15
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE USER GUIDE — IF EQUIPPED
Access your Owner’s Information right through
your Uconnect 4C or 4C NAV touchscreen system
(if equipped).
To access the Vehicle User Guide on your Uconnect
Touchscreen: Press the Uconnect
Apps button.
From there, press the
Vehicle User Guide icon on
your touchscreen. No Uconnect registration is
required.
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Vehicle User
Guide Touchscreen Icon
NOTE:
Vehicle User Guide features are not available while
the vehicle is moving. If you try to access while the
vehicle is in motion, the system will display the
message “Feature not available while the vehicle
is in motion”.
Pre-Installed Features
Your User Guide — Updated in real-time
Touchscreen convenience
Maintenance schedules and information
Comprehensive icon and symbol glossary
Available when and where you need it
Customizable interface
Multilingual
Once you launch your Vehicle User Guide, you will
be able to explore your warranty information and
radio manual when and where you need them.
Your Uconnect system displays the Vehicle User
Guide on your touchscreen radio to assist in better
understanding your vehicle. There’s no app to
download, no phone to connect and no external
device needed for playback. Plus, it’s updated
throughout the year, in real-time, so it is never out
of date.
Features/Benefits
Pre-installed on your Uconnect touchscreen
radio
Enhanced search and browsing capability
Robust NAV application (if equipped)
Add selected topics to a fast-access
Favorites category
Icon and symbol glossary
Warranty information
Crucial driver information and assistance:
Operating Instructions
Warranty Information
Fluid Level Standards
Maintenance Schedules
Emergency Procedures
911 Contact and More
TIP:
When viewing a topic, tap the star icon to add it to
your Favorites, for easy access in the future.
2
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 15
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
KEY FOB
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. The
ignition system consists of a key fob and a START/
STOP push button ignition system. The Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) system consists of a key fob
and Keyless Enter-N-Go feature.
NOTE:
The key fob may not be detected if it is located next
to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic
device; these devices may block the key fob’s
wireless signal.
The key fob allows you to lock or unlock all doors,
tailgate, and the RamBox (if equipped), as well as
release the tailgate, and activate the Panic Alarm
from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m).
The key fob does not need to be pointed at the
vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE:
In the ON/RUN position, all key fob buttons will
work until the vehicle reaches 2 mph (4 km/h).
The key fob should not be placed next to the
wireless charging pad (if equipped).
Key Fob
In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the key fob may have a low or
fully depleted battery. A low key fob battery can be
verified by referring to the instrument cluster,
which will display directions to follow.
In a situation where the battery is low or fully
depleted, a back up method can be used to
operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side of the
key fob (side opposite of the emergency key)
against the START/STOP ignition button and
push to operate the ignition switch.
To Unlock The Doors And Tailgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob
once to unlock the driver’s door. Push the unlock
button twice within five seconds to unlock all
doors, the tailgate and the RamBox (if equipped).
The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the
unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will
also turn on.
NOTE:
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first
push of the unlock button. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
1 — LED Indicator
2 — Unlock
3 — Tailgate Release (If Equipped)
4 — Remote Lowering (If Equipped)
5 — Lock
6 — Remote Start
7 — PANIC
8 — Emergency Key
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
To Lock The Doors And Tailgate
Push and release the lock button on the key fob to
lock all doors, the tailgate, and the RamBox (if
equipped). The turn signal lights will flash and the
horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock —
If Equipped
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the
doors are locked with the key fob. This feature can
be turned on or turned off through the Uconnect
Settings.
NOTE:
Pushing the lock button on the key fob while you
are in the vehicle will activate the vehicle security
alarm system. Opening a door with the vehicle
security alarm system activated will cause the
alarm to sound. Push the unlock button to deac-
tivate the vehicle security alarm system.
Refer to “Vehicle Security Alarm” in this chapter for
further information.
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push the
Panic button on the key fob. When the Panic Alarm
is activated, the turn signals will flash, the horn will
pulse on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes
unless you turn it off by either pushing the Panic
button a second time or drive the vehicle at a
speed of 15 mph (24 km/h) or greater.
NOTE:
The interior lights will turn off if you place the
ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position while the
Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior
lights and horn will remain on.
You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from
the vehicle when using the key fob to turn off the
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises
emitted by the system.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob With
Remote Control
The replacement battery model is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
Customers are recommended to use a battery
obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin
battery dimensions may not meet the original
OEM coin battery dimensions.
Perchlorate Material — special handling may
apply. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard-
ouswaste/perchlorate
for further information.
Do not touch the battery terminals that are on
the back housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by pushing and
holding the release button located on the side
of the key fob while pulling the emergency key
out with your other hand.
Emergency Key Release
2. Slightly remove the emergency key from the
key fob, approximately 10 mm. The blade of
the emergency key should just become visible.
3. Holding the key fob with the button side facing
down, use the emergency key to pry up the
battery cover until the cover releases from the
key fob housing.
1 — Emergency Key
2 — Release Button
2
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 17
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
4. Remove the battery by using the emergency
key to pry the battery out of its housing.
NOTE:
When replacing the battery, ensure the (+) sign on
the battery is facing upward. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean
it with rubbing alcohol.
5. Replace the battery by pushing the new battery
down on an angle toward the top edge of the
opening. Then, push down on the remainder of
the battery to lock into place.
Key Fob Battery Replacement
6. To assemble the key fob case, line up the top
edge of the back cover with the top of the fob,
and press the edges into the interlocking
hinges until all edges snap together with no
large visual gaps.
NOTE:
The key fob battery should only be replaced by
qualified technicians. If the battery requires
replacement, see an authorized dealer.
Alternative Back Cover Removal Method:
The back cover of the key fob can also be removed
by inserting the emergency key into the left or right
side open slots, and twisting to pop off the cover.
NOTE:
The key fob battery should only be replaced by
qualified technicians. If the battery requires
replacement, see an authorized dealer.
Programming Additional Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an
authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to
another vehicle.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with Innovation, Science and Economic
Development Canada license-exempt RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
WARNING!
The integrated key fob contains a coin cell
battery. Do not ingest the battery; there is a
chemical burn hazard. If the coin cell battery is
swallowed, it can cause severe internal burns
in just two hours and can lead to death.
If you think a battery may have been swal-
lowed or placed inside any part of the body,
seek immediate medical attention.
Keep new and used batteries away from
children. If the battery compartment does not
close securely, stop using the product and
keep it away from children.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 18
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
IGNITION SWITCH
KEYLESS PUSH BUTTON IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition switch with the push of a button as long as
the Remote Keyless Entry key fob is in the
passenger compartment.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four
operating positions; three of which are labeled and
will illuminate when in position. The three positions
are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The fourth position is
START. During START, RUN will illuminate.
NOTE:
In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the key fob may have a low or
depleted battery. In this situation, a backup
method can be used to operate the ignition switch.
Put the nose side (side opposite of the emergency
key) of the key fob against the START/STOP
ignition button, with your foot applied on the brake
pedal, and push to operate the ignition switch.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
The push button ignition can be placed in the
following modes:
OFF
The engine is stopped.
Some electrical devices (e.g. Central locking,
alarm, etc.) are still available.
ACC
Engine is not started.
Some electrical devices are available.
1 — OFF
2 — ACC (Accessory)
3 — ON/RUN
2
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 19
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
RUN
Driving position.
All the electrical devices are available.
START
The engine will start.
The engine only runs in the ON/RUN ignition
position or from a remote start request.
In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the key fob may have a low or
depleted battery. In this situation, a backup
method can be used to operate the ignition switch.
Put the nose side (side opposite of the emergency
key) of the key fob against the START/STOP
ignition button and push to operate the ignition
switch.
Back Up Starting Method
NOTE:
The key fob may not be able to be detected by the
vehicle’s Keyless Enter-N-Go system if it is located
next to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic
device; these devices may block the key fob’s
wireless signal and prevent the Keyless Enter-N-Go
system from starting the vehicle.
Refer to "Starting The Engine" in "Starting And
Operating" for further information.
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
(GASOLINE)
This system uses the key fob to start the
engine conveniently from outside the
vehicle while still maintaining security.
The system has a range of approximately
300 ft (91 m).
NOTE:
Obstructions between the vehicle and the key fob
may reduce this range.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the
key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ON/RUN mode.
A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up
may cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves.
Always remove key fob from the vehicle and lock
all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 20
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
(Continued)
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
All of the following conditions must be met before
the engine will remote start:
Gear selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
PANIC button not pushed
Fuel meets minimum requirement
System not disabled from previous remote start
event
Vehicle security alarm not active
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is not
illuminated
REMOTE START ABORT MESSAGE
The following messages will display in the
instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to
remote start or exits remote start prematurely:
Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
Remote Start Cancelled — System Fault
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset
The instrument cluster display message stays
active until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position.
TO ENTER REMOTE START MODE
Push and release the Remote Start
button on the key fob twice within
five seconds. The parking lights will flash,
vehicle doors will lock, and the horn will
chirp twice (if programmed). Once the vehicle has
started, the engine will run for 15 minutes.
NOTE:
If your power door locks were unlocked,
Remote Start will automatically lock the doors.
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low,
the vehicle will start and then shut down in
10 seconds.
The park lamps will turn on and remain on
during Remote Start mode.
For security, power window and power sunroof
operation (if equipped) are disabled when the
vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
The engine can be started two consecutive
times (two 15 minute cycles) with the key fob.
However, the ignition must be placed in the ON/
RUN position before you can repeat the start
sequence for a third cycle.
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE
W
ITHOUT DRIVING THE VEHICLE
Push and release the remote start button one time
or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute
cycle.
NOTE:
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will
disable for two seconds after receiving a valid
Remote Start request.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and
colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and
can cause serious injury or death when
inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation
of the Remote Start System, windows, door
locks or other controls could cause serious
injury or death.
WARNING!
2
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 21
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE AND
D
RIVE THE VEHICLE
Before the end of the 15 minute cycle, push and
release the unlock button on the key fob to unlock
the doors and disarm the vehicle security alarm
system (if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the
15 minute cycle, place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position.
REMOTE START COMFORT SYSTEMS —
I
F EQUIPPED
When remote start is activated, the heated
steering wheel, and driver heated seat features will
automatically turn on in cold weather. In warm
weather, the driver vented seat feature will
automatically turn on when the remote start is
activated. These features will stay on through the
duration of remote start or until the ignition switch
is placed in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
The Remote Start Comfort system can be activated
and deactivated through the Uconnect system
under “Auto-On Comfort And Remote Start”.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information on Remote Start Comfort
System operation.
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with Innovation, Science and Economic
Development Canada license-exempt RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
REMOTE START— IF EQUIPPED (DIESEL)
This system uses the key fob to start the
engine conveniently from outside the
vehicle while still maintaining security.
The system has a range of approximately
300 ft (91 m).
NOTE:
Obstructions between the vehicle and the key
fob may reduce this range.
The Remote Start system will wait for the Wait
To Start indicator light to extinguish before
cranking the engine. This allows time for the
intake heater to preheat the incoming air, and is
normal operation in cold weather. Refer to “Wait
To Start Light”, located in “Warning Lights And
Messages” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” for more information.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 22
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
(Continued)
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
All of the following conditions must be met before
the engine will remote start:
Transmission in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
PANIC button not pushed
Fuel meets minimum requirement
Water In Fuel Indicator Light is not illuminated
Wait To Start Light Indicator Light is not illumi-
nated
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is not illumi-
nated
REMOTE START ABORT MESSAGE
The following messages will display in the
instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to
remote start or exits remote start prematurely:
Remote Start Aborted — Door Open
Remote Start Aborted — Hood Open
Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
Remote Start Aborted — System Fault
The instrument cluster display message is stored
until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
TO ENTER REMOTE START MODE
Push and release the Remote Start button on the
key fob twice, within five seconds. The parking
lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice
(if programmed). In cold ambient temperature
conditions, the diesel vehicle may delay crank up
to 30 seconds for the Intake Air Heater. Once the
vehicle has started, the engine will run for
15 minutes.
NOTE:
Crank may be delayed up to 75 seconds for
intake air heater operation at high altitudes,
and/or extreme cold.
The park lamps will turn on and remain on
during Remote Start mode.
For security, power window and power sunroof
operation (if equipped) are disabled when the
vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
Additional features, such as windshield wipers,
will also not be available while the vehicle is in
the Remote Start mode.
The engine can be started two consecutive
times (two 15 minute cycles) with the key fob.
However, the ignition switch must be placed in
the ON/RUN position before you can repeat the
start sequence for a third cycle.
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE
W
ITHOUT DRIVING THE VEHICLE
Push and release the Remote Start button one
time or allow the engine to run for the entire
15 minute cycle.
NOTE:
To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system will
disable for two seconds after receiving a valid
Remote Start request.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and
colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and
can cause serious injury or death when
inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation
of the Remote Start System, windows, door
locks or other controls could cause serious
injury or death.
WARNING!
2
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 23
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE AND
D
RIVE THE VEHICLE
To exit Remote Start Mode and drive the vehicle
before the end of the 15 minute cycle, push and
release the unlock button on the key fob to unlock
the door and disarm the vehicle security alarm
System (if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the
15 minute cycle, place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position.
NOTE:
The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
in order to drive the vehicle.
REMOTE START COMFORT SYSTEMS —
I
F EQUIPPED
When remote start is activated, the heated
steering wheel, and driver heated seat features will
automatically turn on in cold weather. In warm
weather, the driver vented seat feature will
automatically turn on when the remote start is
activated. These features will stay on through the
duration of remote start or until the ignition switch
is placed in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
The Remote Start Comfort system can be activated
and deactivated through the Uconnect system
under “Auto-On Comfort And Remote Start”.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information on Remote Start Comfort
system operation.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the
engine. The system does not need to be armed or
activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of
whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button
ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to
prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore,
only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The
system cannot reprogram a key fob obtained from
another vehicle.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for
three seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains
on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a
problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light
begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates
that someone attempted to start the engine with
an invalid key fob. In the event that a valid key fob
is used to start the engine but there is an issue
with the vehicle electronics, the engine will start
and shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than
10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the
electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle
serviced as soon as possible by an authorized
dealer.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle
have been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
KEY PROGRAMMING
Programming key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not
compatible with some aftermarket remote
starting systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
security protection.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 24
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
REPLACEMENT KEYS
NOTE:
Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle. Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle,
it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
NOTE:
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key fob to the vehicle elec-
tronics. A blank key fob is one that has never been
programmed.
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with Innovation, Science and Economic
Development Canada license-exempt RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage,
et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
CAUTION!
Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Ignition, always remember to
place the ignition in the OFF position.
2
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 25
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM (IF EQUIPPED)
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle
doors, tailgate, and ignition for unauthorized
operation. When the vehicle security alarm is
activated, interior switches for door locks are
disabled. The system will turn the horn off after 29
seconds, 5 seconds between cycles, up to 8 cycles
if the trigger remains active and then the vehicle
security alarm will rearm itself.
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security
alarm:
1. Remove the key from the ignition system.
Refer to "Starting The Engine" in "Starting And
Operating" for further information.
Make sure the vehicle ignition system is
OFF.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock
the vehicle:
Push the lock button on the interior power
door lock switch with the driver and/or
passenger door open.
Push the lock button on the exterior Passive
Entry Door Handle with a valid key fob avail-
able in the same exterior zone. Refer to
"Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry" in
“Doors” in this chapter for further information.
Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
The vehicle security alarm will set when you use
the power door locks, or use the key fob to lock the
doors. After all the doors are locked and closed,
the vehicle security light, in the instrument panel
cluster, will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to
indicate that the alarm is being set. After the alarm
is set, the vehicle security light will flash at a slower
rate to indicate that the system is armed.
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed using
any of the following methods:
1. Push the unlock button on the key fob.
2. Grasp the Passive Entry Door Handle with a
valid key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the Passive
Entry door handle. If equipped, refer to
"Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry" in
"Doors" in this chapter for further information.
3. Cycle the ignition out of the OFF position.
The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect
your vehicle. However, you can create conditions
where the system will give you a false alarm. If one
of the previously described arming sequences has
occurred, the vehicle security alarm will arm
regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not.
If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the
alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the vehicle
security alarm.
If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the
battery becomes disconnected, the vehicle
security alarm will remain armed when the battery
is reconnected; the exterior lights will flash, and
the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
vehicle security alarm.
REARMING OF THE SYSTEM
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is
taken to disarm it, the vehicle security alarm will
turn the horn off after 29 seconds, 5 seconds
between cycles, up to 8 cycles if the trigger
remains active and then the vehicle security alarm
will rearm itself.
SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL OVERRIDE
The vehicle security alarm will not arm/disarm if
you lock/unlock the doors using the manual door
lock.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 26
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
(Continued)
DOORS
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS
Front and rear doors may be locked by moving the
lock knob down. The lock knobs will unlock when
the interior handle is used to open the doors.
Door Lock Knob
Front doors may be opened with the inside door
handle without lifting the lock knob.
Doors locked before closing will remain locked
when closed.
The emergency key will unlock the driver door lock
on your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up
may cause serious injury or death.
For personal security and safety in the event
of an collision, lock the vehicle doors as you
drive as well as when you park and leave the
vehicle.
Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the auto-
matic transmission into PARK, apply the
parking brake, turn the vehicle OFF, remove
the key fobs from vehicle, and lock all doors.
and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving chil-
dren in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for
a number of reasons. A child or others could
be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
WARNING!
2
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 27
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER DOOR LOCKS — IF EQUIPPED
The power door lock switches are on each front
door trim panel. Use these switches to lock or
unlock the doors.
NOTE:
The key fob may not be able to be detected by the
vehicle Keyless Enter-N-Go system if it is located
next to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic
device; these devices may block the key fob’s
wireless signal and prevent the Keyless Enter-N-Go
system from starting the vehicle.
Power Door Lock Switches
While the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position,
if you push the power door lock switch, and any
front door is open, the power locks will not operate.
This prevents you from accidentally locking your
key fob in the vehicle. Removing the key fob or
closing the door will allow the locks to operate. A
chime will sound if the key fob is inside the vehicle
and a door is open, as a reminder to remove the
key fob.
POWER SIDE STEPS — IF EQUIPPED
The Power Side Steps will extend a step for easier
entry and exit of the vehicle.
When configured for “Auto” mode, under “Safety
And Driving Assistance” within Uconnect Settings,
the Power Side Steps will deploy when either the
driver’s or passenger’s side door is opened, or
when the deploy setting is activated through the
touchscreen. When configured for “Store” mode,
the steps will stay in their position but can also be
deployed manually through the Controls menu
within the radio touchscreen.
If the vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h), or if
the retract setting is selected in the touchscreen,
the steps will retract.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
additional information.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE
E
NTRY — IF EQUIPPED
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to
the vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry system and a
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go. This feature allows
you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without
having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
Passive Entry may be programmed on/off. Refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining/snowing on the Passive Entry door
handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected,
resulting in a slower response time.
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and
no door is opened within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will re-lock and if equipped will arm the
security alarm.
The vehicle security alarm can be armed/
disarmed by pushing the Passive Entry key fob
lock/unlock buttons (if equipped).
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 28
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
The key fob may not be able to be detected by
the vehicle Passive Entry system if it is located
next to a mobile phone, laptop or other elec-
tronic device; these devices may block the key
fob's wireless signal and prevent the Passive
Entry door handle from locking/unlocking the
vehicle.
To Unlock From The Driver's Side:
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver door handle, grab the front
driver door handle to unlock the driver's door
automatically. The interior door panel lock knob
will raise when the door is unlocked.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE:
Either the driver door only or all doors will unlock
when you grab hold of the front driver’s door
handle, depending on the selected setting. Refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the
front passenger door handle to unlock all doors
automatically. The interior door panel lock knob
will raise when the door is unlocked.
NOTE:
All doors will unlock when the front passenger door
handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting.
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry
Key Fob In Vehicle:
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally
locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle,
the Passive Entry system is equipped with an
automatic door unlock feature which will function if
the ignition switch is in the OFF position.
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door
panel switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all
open doors have been closed the vehicle checks
the inside and outside of the vehicle for any valid
Passive Entry key fobs. If one of the vehicle's
Passive Entry key fobs is detected inside the
vehicle, and no other valid Passive Entry key fobs
are detected outside the vehicle, the Passive Entry
system automatically unlocks all vehicle doors and
chirps the horn three times (on the third attempt
ALL doors will lock and the Passive Entry key fob
can be locked in the vehicle).
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors:
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front
door handles, push the door handle lock button to
lock all doors.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
2
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 29
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the
door handle lock button. This could unlock the
door(s).
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
NOTE:
After pushing the door handle lock button, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock or
unlock the doors, using either Passive Entry door
handle. This is done to allow you to check if the
vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle,
without the vehicle reacting and unlocking.
The Passive Entry system depends on a key fob
that is not fully discharged of its coin battery
capacity.
When the key fob battery is low, the instrument
cluster will display a message indicating that the
key fob battery is low. Refer to “Keys” in this
chapter for further information.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the
key fob lock button or the lock button located on
the vehicle’s interior door panel.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to
all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in
this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with Innovation, Science and Economic
Development Canada license-exempt RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS —
I
F EQUIPPED
The auto door lock feature default condition is
enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock
automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds
15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lock feature can
be enabled or disabled by an authorized dealer per
written request of the customer. Please see an
authorized dealer for service.
Automatic Doors Unlock — If Equipped
This feature unlocks all of the doors of the vehicle
when either front door is opened. This will occur
only after the vehicle has been shifted into the
PARK position after the vehicle has been driven
(shifted out of PARK and all doors closed).
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 30
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
Automatic Doors Unlock Programming —
If Equipped
The Automatic Doors Unlock feature can be
enabled or disabled within the Uconnect radio.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
NOTE:
Use the Auto Unlock Doors feature in accordance
with local laws.
CHILD-PROTECTION DOOR LOCK
To provide a safer environment for children riding
in the rear seat, the rear doors (if equipped) of your
vehicle have the Child-Protection Door Lock
system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat
blade screwdriver (or emergency key) and rotate
the dial to engage and disengage the
Child-Protection locks. When the system on a door
is engaged, that door can only be opened by using
the outside door handle even if the inside door lock
is in the unlocked position.
Child Lock Control
NOTE:
After setting the Child-Protection Door Lock
system, always test the door from the inside to
make certain it is in the desired position.
For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the door lock switch to the unlock posi-
tion, roll down the window, and open the door
with the outside door handle.
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to store up to two
different memory profiles for easy recall through a
memory switch. Each memory profile contains
desired position settings for the following features:
Driver seat position
Easy Entry/Exit seat (if equipped)
Side mirrors
Adjustable pedals (if equipped)
A set of desired radio station presets
NOTE:
If equipped with power convex mirrors, these
mirror positions will not set as part of a memory
profile. Refer to “Mirrors” in this chapter for
further information.
Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, each
can be linked to either memory position 1 or 2.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a
collision. Remember that the rear doors cannot
be opened from the inside door handle when the
Child Protection Door Locks are engaged.
2
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 31
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The memory settings switch is located on the
driver’s door trim panel. The switch consists of
three buttons:
The set (S) button, which is used to activate the
memory save function.
The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall
either of two saved memory profiles.
Driver Memory Settings Buttons
PROGRAMMING THE MEMORY FEATURE
To create a new memory profile, perform the
following:
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/RUN
position (do not start the engine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired
preferences (i.e., driver’s seat, outside mirrors,
adjustable pedals (if equipped), and radio
station presets).
3. Push and release the set (S) button on the
memory switch.
4. Within five seconds, push and release either of
the memory buttons (1) or (2). The instrument
cluster display will show which memory
position has been set.
NOTE:
Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in
PARK.
LINKING AND UNLINKING THE REMOTE
K
EYLESS ENTRY KEY FOB TO MEMORY
Your key fob can be programmed to recall one of
two saved memory profiles by pushing the unlock
button on the key fob.
NOTE:
Before programming your key fob you must select
the “Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob” feature
through the Uconnect Settings. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
To program your key fob, perform the following:
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF
position.
2. Select a desired memory profile, 1 or 2.
NOTE:
If a memory profile has not already been set, refer
to "Programming The Memory Feature" in this
section for instructions on how to set a memory
profile.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and
release the set (S) button on the memory
switch.
4. Push and release button (1) or (2) accordingly.
“Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the
instrument cluster.
5. Push and release the lock button on the key
fob within 10 seconds.
NOTE:
Your key fob can be unlinked from your memory
settings by pushing the set (S) button, followed by
pushing the unlock button on the key fob within
10 seconds.
MEMORY POSITION RECALL
NOTE:
The vehicle speed must be lower than 5 mph
(8 km/h) to recall memory positions. If a recall is
attempted when the vehicle speed is greater than
5 mph (8 km/h), a message will be displayed in the
instrument cluster display.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 32
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
To recall the memory settings for driver one or two,
push the desired memory button number (1 or 2)
or the unlock button on the key fob linked to the
desired memory position.
A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the
memory buttons during a recall (S, 1, or 2). When
a recall is canceled, the driver's seat and the
adjustable pedals (if equipped) stop moving.
A delay of one second will occur before another
recall can be selected.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint system
of the vehicle.
MANUAL FRONT SEAT ADJUSTMENT
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward
Adjustment
Both front seats are adjustable forward or
rearward. The manual seat adjustment handle is
located under the seat cushion at the front edge of
each seat.
Manual Seat Adjustment Bar
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and
slide the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar
once you have reached the desired position. Then,
using body pressure, move forward and rearward
on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have
latched.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could
result in loss of control which could cause a
collision and serious injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked.
Serious injury or death could result from a
poorly adjusted seat belt.
2
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 33
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment
The recline lever is located on the outboard side of
the seat. To recline the seat, lean forward slightly,
lift the lever, lean back to the desired position and
release the lever. To return the seatback to its
normal upright position, lean forward and lift the
lever. Release the lever once the seatback is in the
upright position.
Manual Recline Lever
40-20-40 Front Bench Seat — If Equipped
The seat is divided into three segments. The
outboard seat portions are each 40% of the total
width of the seat. On some models, the back of the
center portion (20%) easily folds down to provide
an armrest/center storage compartment.
MANUAL REAR SEAT ADJUSTMENT
Reclining Rear Seats — If Equipped
The recliner handle is located on the outside of the
seat cushion. To adjust the seatback, lift upward
on the handle, lean back on the seatback and
when you reach the desired position, release
the handle.
Rear Seat Recliner Handle
POWER DRIVER SEAT ADJUSTMENT —
I
F EQUIPPED
Some models may be equipped with an eight-way
power driver's seat. The power seat switches are
located on the outboard side of the driver's seat
cushion. There are two power seat switches that
are used to control the movement of the seat
cushion and the seatback.
WARNING!
Do not stand or lean in front of the seat while
actuating the handle. The seatback may swing
forward and hit you causing injury.
To avoid injury, place your hand on the seat-
back and actuate the handle, then position
the seatback in the desired position.
WARNING!
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top
of the seatback. This could impair visibility or
become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop
or collision.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious injury
or death.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 34
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
Power Seat Switches
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and
rearward. Push the seat switch forward or
rearward. The seat will move in the direction of the
switch. Release the switch when the desired
position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the rear of
seat switch, the seat will move in the direction of
the switch. Release the switch when the desired
position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in
four directions. Pull upward or push downward on
the front or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear
of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the
switch. Release the switch when the desired
position is reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward
or rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or
rearward, the seat will move in the direction of the
switch. Release the switch when the desired
position is reached.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger
seats may also be equipped with power lumbar.
The power lumbar switch is located on the
outboard side of the power seat. Push the switch
forward to increase the lumbar support. Push the
switch rearward to decrease the lumbar support.
Lumbar Control Switch
1 — Power Seat Switch
2 — Power Seatback Switch
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could
result in loss of control which could cause a
collision and serious injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked.
Serious injury or death could result from a
poorly adjusted seat belt.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may
become limited if movement is stopped by an
obstruction in the seat’s path.
2
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 35
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
This feature provides automatic driver’s seat
positioning to enhance driver mobility when
entering and exiting the vehicle.
The distance the driver’s seat moves depends on
where you have the driver’s seat positioned when
you place the ignition in the OFF position.
When you place the ignition in the OFF position,
the driver’s seat will move about 2.4 inches
(60 mm) rearward if the driver’s seat position is
greater than or equal to 2.7 inches (67.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to
its previously set position when you place the
ignition into the ACC or RUN position.
When you place the ignition in the OFF position,
the driver’s seat will move to a position
0.3 inches (7.7 mm) forward of the rear stop if
the driver’s seat position is between 0.9 inches
and 2.7 inches (22.7 mm and 67.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to
its previously set position when you place the
ignition to the ACC or RUN position.
The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled
when the driver’s seat position is less than
0.9 inches (22.7 mm) forward of the rear stop.
At this position, there is no benefit to the driver
by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry.
When enabled in Uconnect Settings, Easy Entry
and Easy Exit positions are stored in each memory
setting profile. Refer to “Driver Memory Settings —
If Equipped” in this chapter for further information.
NOTE:
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when
the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy
Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled)
through the programmable features in the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
HEATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
On some models, the front and rear seats may be
equipped with heaters located in the seat cushions
and seatbacks.
Front Heated Seats
The heated seats control buttons are located on
the center instrument panel below the
touchscreen, and are also located within the
climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is equipped with a 12-inch radio,
there will only be control buttons through the
touchscreen.
Push the heated seat button once to turn the
HI setting on.
Push the heated seat button a second time
to turn the MED setting on.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,
diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication,
alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical
condition must exercise care when using the
seat heater. It may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seatback
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket
or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to
overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been over-
heated could cause serious burns due to the
increased surface temperature of the seat.
WARNING!
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 36
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
Push the heated seat button a third time to
turn the LO setting on.
Push the heated seat button a fourth time to
turn the heating elements off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
The level of heat selected will stay on until the
operator changes it.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
driver’s seat can be programmed to come on
during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
Rear Heated Seats
On some models, the two outboard rear seats are
equipped with heated seats. The heated seat
switches for these seats are located on the rear of
the center console.
Rear Heated Seat Switches
There are two heated seat switches that allow
the rear passengers to operate the seats
independently. You can choose from HI, MED, LO,
or OFF heat settings. Amber indicator lights in each
switch indicate the level of heat in use.
Push the heated seat button once to turn the
HI setting on.
Push the heated seat button a second time
to turn the MED setting on.
Push the heated seat button a third time to
turn the LO setting on.
Push the heated seat button a fourth time to
turn the heating elements off.
NOTE:
The level of heat selected will stay on until the
operator changes it.
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
VENTILATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
Front Ventilated Seats
Located in the seat cushion are small fans that
draw the air from the passenger compartment and
move air through fine perforations in the seat
cover to help keep the driver and front passenger
cooler in higher ambient temperatures. The fans
operate at three speeds, HI, MED and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are
located on the center instrument panel below the
touchscreen, and are also located within the
climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is equipped with a 12-inch radio,
there will only be control buttons through the
touchscreen.
2
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 37
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Press the ventilated seat button once to
choose HI.
Press the ventilated seat button a second
time to choose MED.
Press the ventilated seat button a third time
to choose LO.
Press the ventilated seat button a fourth
time to turn the ventilation off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
driver’s seat can be programmed to come on
during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of
injury by restricting head movement in the event of
a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted
so that the top of the head restraint is located
above the top of your ear.
NOTE:
Do not reverse the head restraints (making the
rear of the head restraint face forward) in an
attempt to gain additional clearance to the back of
your head.
FRONT HEAD RESTRAINTS
Four-Way Head Restraints — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with front four-way
driver and passenger head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push
the adjustment button, located at the base of the
head restraint, and push downward on the head
restraint.
To adjust the head restraint forward, pull the top of
the head restraint toward the front of the vehicle
as desired and release. To adjust the head
restraint rearward, pull the top of the head
restraint to the forward most position and release.
The head restraint will return to the rear most
position.
Forward Adjustment
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a front bench seat,
the center head restraint is not adjustable or
removable.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until
the head restraints are placed in their proper
positions in order to minimize the risk of neck
injury in the event of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle
with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 38
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
(Continued)
Two-Way Head Restraints — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with front two-way
driver and passenger head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push
the adjustment button, located at the base of head
restraint, and push downward on the head
restraint.
Head Restraint Adjustment Button Location
FRONT HEAD RESTRAINT REMOVAL
To remove the head restraint, push the adjustment
button and the release button while pulling upward
on the whole assembly. To reinstall the head
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the
holes and adjust it to the appropriate height.
REAR HEAD RESTRAINT ADJUSTMENT
The rear seats are equipped with adjustable and
removable head restraints. To raise the head
restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To
lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button located on the base of the head restraint
and push downward on the head restraint.
Release/Adjustment Buttons
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until
the head restraints are placed in their proper
positions in order to minimize the risk of neck
injury in the event of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle
with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision.
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head restraints
in a location outside the occupant compart-
ment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in
the vehicle to properly protect the occupants.
Follow the reinstallation instructions above
prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a
seat.
WARNING!
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
2
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 39
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The rear center head restraint (Crew Cab) has
only one adjustment position that is used to aid
in the routing of a tether. Refer to “Occupant
Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further infor-
mation.
Do not reposition the head restraint
180 degrees to the incorrect position in an
attempt to gain additional clearance to the
back of the head.
REAR HEAD RESTRAINT REMOVAL
To remove the head restraint, push the adjustment
button and the release button while pulling upward
on the whole assembly. To reinstall the head
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the
holes and adjust it to the appropriate height.
NOTE:
To remove outboard restraints, the rear seat
bottom must be folded up.
STEERING WHEEL
TILT STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. The tilt lever is located on
the steering column, below the multifunction lever.
Pull the lever toward the steering wheel to unlock
the steering column. With one hand firmly on the
steering wheel, move the steering column up or
down, as desired. Release the lever to lock the
steering column firmly in place.
Tilt Steering Lever
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a colli-
sion or hard stop could cause serious injury or
death to occupants of the vehicle. Always
securely stow removed head restraints in a
location outside the occupant compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in
the vehicle to properly protect the occupants.
Follow the reinstallation instructions above
prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a
seat.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or
driving with the steering column unlocked, could
cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 40
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
I
F EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element
that helps warm your hands in cold weather. The
heated steering wheel has only one temperature
setting. Once the heated steering wheel has been
turned on, it will stay on until the operator turns it
off. The heated steering wheel may not turn on
when it is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is
located on the center instrument panel below the
touchscreen, as well as within the climate or
controls screen of the touchscreen.
Press the heated steering wheel button once
to turn the heating element on.
Press the heated steering wheel button a
second time to turn the heating element off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programmed to
come on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS —
IF EQUIPPED
The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow
a greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel
tilt and seat position. This feature allows the brake
and accelerator pedals to move toward or away
from the driver to provide improved position with
the steering wheel.
The adjustable pedal switch is located to the left
side of the steering column.
Adjustable Pedals Switch
The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
The pedals
cannot be adjusted when the vehicle
is in REVERSE or when the Speed Control system
is on.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,
diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication,
alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical
conditions must exercise care when using the
steering wheel heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods.
Do not place anything on the steering wheel
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket
or steering wheel covers of any type and mate-
rial. This may cause the steering wheel heater
to overheat.
2
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 41
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
If there is an attempt to adjust the pedals when the
system is locked out, the following messages may
appear in the instrument cluster display (if
equipped):
“Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control
Engaged”
“Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In
Reverse”
NOTE:
Always adjust the pedals to a position that
allows full pedal travel.
Further small adjustments may be necessary to
find the best possible seat/pedal position.
For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory
Settings, you can use your remote keyless entry
key fob or the memory switch on the driver’s
door trim panel to return the adjustable pedals
to saved positions. Refer to “Driver Memory
Settings — If Equipped” in this chapter for
further information.
MIRRORS
INSIDE DAY/NIGHT MIRROR —
I
F EQUIPPED
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left,
and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear
window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be
reduced by moving the small control under the
mirror to the night position (toward the rear of the
vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while set in
the day position (toward the windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
AUTOMATIC DIMMING MIRROR —
I
F EQUIPPED
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left,
and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear
window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight
glare from vehicles behind you.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is
moving. You could lose control and have an
accident. Always adjust the pedals while the
vehicle is parked.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable
pedals or impede its ability to move, as it may
cause damage to the pedal controls. Pedal
travel may become limited if movement is
stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable
pedal's path.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 42
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
NOTE:
The Automatic Dimming feature is disabled when
the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve rear view
viewing.
The Automatic Dimming feature can be turned on
or off through the touchscreen.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
AUTOMATIC DIMMING MIRROR WITH
R
EAR VIEW CAMERA DISPLAY —
I
F EQUIPPED
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle.
It is a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the
windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield
button with a counterclockwise rotation and
requires no tools for mounting. The mirror head
can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for
various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to
center on the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight
glare from vehicles behind you.
When the vehicle is placed into reverse gear, a
video display illuminates to display the image
generated by the rear view camera located on the
tailgate handle. The auto dimming feature is also
disabled to improve rear view viewing.
Automatic Dimming Mirror With Rear View Camera
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside
mirrors to center on the adjacent lane of traffic
with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the
inside mirror.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with puddle lamps
under the outside mirrors, they can be turned off
through the Uconnect display. For further infor-
mation, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia”.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning,
never spray any cleaning solution directly onto
the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth
and wipe the mirror clean.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the
passenger side convex mirror will look smaller
and farther away than they really are. Relying too
much on your passenger side convex mirror
could cause you to collide with another vehicle
or other object. Use your inside mirror when
judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in
the passenger side convex mirror. Some vehicles
will not have a convex passenger side mirror.
2
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 43
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
The controls for the power mirrors are located on
the driver's door trim panel.
Power Mirror Controls
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select
buttons and a four-way mirror control switch.
To adjust a mirror, push either the L (left) or
R (right) button to select the mirror that you want
to adjust.
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the
four arrows for the direction that you want the
mirror to move.
Power Mirror Movement
POWER CONVEX MIRROR SWITCH —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Power Convex Mirror Switch is located on the
door trim panel, above the power mirror controls.
The switch enables the movement of the convex
portion of both the driver and passenger outside
mirrors.
Power Convex Mirror Switch
To adjust the convex portion of the outside mirrors,
push the Power Convex Mirror Switch. Then, select
the mirror you want to adjust by using the L (left) or
R (right) buttons.
1 — Left Mirror Selection
2 — Mirror Direction Control
3 — Right Mirror Selection
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 44
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
To return the control to the large mirror, push the
Power Convex Mirror Switch a second time.
Trailer Tow Power Convex Mirror
NOTE:
If the Power Convex Mirror Switch is not pushed a
second time, the switch will automatically default
back to the larger portion of the outside mirrors
after a period of time.
TRAILER TOWING MIRRORS —
I
F EQUIPPED
These mirrors are designed with an adjustable
mirror head to provide a greater vision range when
towing extra-wide loads. To change position
inboard or outboard, the mirror head should be
rotated (flipped in or out).
Trailer Towing Position
NOTE:
Fold the trailer towing mirrors rearward prior to
entering an automated car wash.
A small blindspot mirror is located next to main
mirror and can be adjusted separately.
Blindspot Mirror
HEATED MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or
ice. This feature will be activated
whenever you turn on the rear window
defroster (if equipped).
Refer to “Climate Controls” in this chapter for
further information.
2
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 45
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
TILT SIDE MIRRORS IN REVERSE —
I
F EQUIPPED
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse provides automatic
outside mirror positioning which will aid the
driver’s view of the ground rearward of the front
doors. The outside mirrors will move slightly
downward from the present position when the
vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The outside
mirrors will then return to the original position
when the vehicle is shifted out of the REVERSE
position. Each stored memory setting will have an
associated Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse position.
NOTE:
The Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature is not
turned on when delivered from the factory.
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
POWER FOLDING OUTSIDE MIRRORS
F
OR STANDARD AND TRAILER TOW —
I
F EQUIPPED
If equipped with power folding mirrors, they can be
electrically folded rearward and unfolded into the
drive position.
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located
between the power mirror switches L (left) and
R (right). Push the switch once and the mirrors will
fold in, push the switch a second time and the
mirrors will return to the normal driving position.
If the mirror is manually folded after electrically
cycled, a potential extra button push is required to
get the mirrors back to the home position. If the
mirror does not electrically fold, check for ice or dirt
buildup at the pivot area which can cause
excessive drag.
Power Folding Mirror Switch
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if
the following occurs:
The mirrors are accidentally blocked while
folding.
The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/
unfolded.
The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.
The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving
speeds.
To Reset The Power Folding Mirrors:
1. Using the power folding mirror switch, move
the mirror to its normal driving (home)
position.
2. Using the power folding mirror switch, move
the mirror to the full retract position (this may
require multiple button pushes). This resets
them to their normal position.
NOTE:
The power fold mirrors are designed to operate
while the vehicle is stationary or traveling at
moderate speeds. If you attempt to power fold
the mirrors at high speeds they may not fully
open or close. You should slow down to a
moderate speed and complete the operation.
When pushing the power fold button 10 or more
times in one minute the system shuts down for
one minute to protect the motors from over-
heating.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 46
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are designed to be able to be
manually folded both forward and rearward to
prevent damage.
Folding Mirror
ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRROR —
I
F EQUIPPED
Illuminated vanity mirrors are located on each sun
visor. To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down
and swing the mirror cover upward. The lights will
turn on automatically. Closing the mirror cover
turns off the light.
Lift Cover For Illuminated Mirror
“Slide-On-Rod” Features Of Sun Visor —
If Equipped
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for
additional flexibility in positioning the visor to block
out the sun.
To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature, rotate the sun
visor downward and unclip it. Pull the sun visor
along the “Slide-On-Rod” until the sun visor is in
the desired position.
“Slide-On-Rod” Extender
CAUTION!
It is recommended to fold the mirrors into the
full rearward position to resist damage when
entering a car wash or a narrow location.
2
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 47
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
MULTIFUNCTION LEVER
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of
the steering column.
Multifunction Lever
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel. This switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights,
automatic headlights (if equipped), instrument
panel light dimming, cargo light/trailer spotter
lights (if equipped), and fog lights (if equipped).
Headlight Switch
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first
detent for parking light and instrument panel light
operation. Rotate the headlight switch to the
second detent for headlight, parking light, and
instrument panel light operation.
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS) —
I
F EQUIPPED
The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when
the engine is started and the transmission is in any
gear except PARK. This provides a constant "lights
on" condition until the ignition is placed in the OFF
position. The lights illuminate at less than half of
normal intensity. If the parking brake is applied,
the Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will turn off.
NOTE:
If allowed by law in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased, the Daytime Running
Lights can be turned on and off using the Ucon-
nect system, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime
Running Lights will automatically deactivate
when the front fog lights are turned on.
On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights
may deactivate, or reduce intensity, on one side
of the vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on
that side), or on both sides of the vehicle (when
the hazard warning lights are activated).
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Push Front Fog Light Control
3 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
4 — Instrument Panel Light Dimmer Control
5 — Push Cargo Light Control
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 48
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument
panel to switch the headlights to high beam.
Pulling the multifunction lever back toward the
steering wheel will turn the low beams back on, or
shut the high beams off.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLAMP
C
ONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
system provides increased forward lighting at night
by automating high beam control through the use
of a digital camera mounted on the inside rearview
mirror or forward facing camera. This camera
detects vehicle specific light and automatically
switches from high beams to low beams until the
approaching vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
can be turned on or off by selecting “ON” under
“Auto Dim High Beams” within your Uconnect
settings, as well as turning the headlight switch
to the AUTO position. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa-
tion.
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will
cause headlights to remain on longer (closer to
the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other obstruc-
tions on the windshield or camera lens will
cause the system to function improperly.
To opt out of the Advanced Auto High Beam
Sensitivity Control (default) and enter Reduced
High Beam Sensitivity Control (not recom-
mended), on vehicles equipped with mirror
controlled automatic high beams and without
the forward facing camera, toggle the high
beam lever six full on/off cycles within 10
seconds of placing the ignition in the ON posi-
tion. The system will return to the default setting
when the ignition is OFF.
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam
Headlamp Control mirror is replaced, the mirror
must be re-aimed to ensure proper performance.
See a local authorized dealer.
To Activate
1. The Automatic High Beams are enabled
through the Uconnect system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
2. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO
headlight position.
3. Push the multifunction lever away from you
(toward front of vehicle) to engage the high
beam mode.
NOTE:
The Automatic High Beams will not activate until
the vehicle is at or above 12 mph (20 km/h).
To Deactivate
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or
rearward in vehicle) to manually deactivate
the system (normal operation of low beams).
2. Push back on the multifunction lever to
reactivate the system.
The Automatic High Beams can also be
deactivated through the Uconnect system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
FLASH-TO-PASS
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights
by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you.
This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on,
and remain on, until the lever is released.
2
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 49
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
This system automatically turns your headlights on
or off based on ambient light levels. To turn the
system on, turn the headlight switch to the extreme
clockwise position aligning the indicator with the
AUTO on the headlight switch. When the system is
on, the Headlight Time Delay feature is also on.
This means your headlights will stay on for up to 90
seconds after the ignition is placed in the OFF
position. To turn the automatic system off, turn the
headlight switch counterclockwise to the O (off)
position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the headlights
will come on in the Automatic mode.
DIRECTIONAL LED HEADLAMP
S
YSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This is a system consisting of LED (low/high beam)
headlights that incorporate dynamic cornering with
5-degree inboard/15-degree outboard swivel. The
headlights continuously and automatically adapt
to the driving conditions around bends or when
cornering based on steering wheel angle.
The system directs the headlights to light up the
road in the best way, taking into account the speed
of the vehicle and the bend or corner angle, as well
as the speed of the vehicle while the steering
wheel is being turned.
The adaptive lights are automatically activated
when the vehicle is traveling above approximately
5 mph (8 km/h).
This system can be turned on/off through the
Uconnect Settings under “Steering Directed
Lights”. Refer to Uconnect Settings in
“Multimedia” for further information.
PARKING LIGHTS AND PANEL LIGHTS
To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel
lights, from the O (off) position, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise to the first detent. To turn off the
parking lights, rotate the headlight switch back to
the O (off) position.
HEADLIGHTS ON WITH WIPERS
(A
VAILABLE WITH AUTOMATIC
H
EADLIGHTS ONLY)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn
on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are
turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the
AUTO position. In addition, the headlights will turn
off when the wipers are turned off, if they were
turned on by this feature.
NOTE:
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
HEADLIGHT DELAY
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a
headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for
up to 90 seconds. This delay is initiated when the
ignition is turned off while the headlight switch is
on, and then the headlight switch is cycled off.
Headlight delay can be canceled by either turning
the headlight switch on then off, or by placing the
ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 50
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are
left on after the ignition is placed in the OFF
position, a chime will sound and a message will
appear in the instrument cluster display when the
driver’s door is opened.
FRONT FOG LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or low beam headlights and push in the
center of the headlight switch control knob.
Pushing the headlight switch control knob a
second time will turn the front fog lights off.
Front Fog Light Switch
TURN SIGNALS
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the
arrows on each side of the instrument cluster
display will flash to show proper operation of the
front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective
outside light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when
the lever is moved, it would suggest that the indi-
cator bulb is defective.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
Tap the multifunction lever up or down once,
without moving beyond the detent, and the turn
signal (right or left) will flash three times then
automatically turn off.
CARGO LIGHTS/TRAILER SPOTTER
L
IGHTS WITH BED LIGHTS —
I
F EQUIPPED
The cargo light and bed lights (if equipped), as well
as trailer spotter lights (if equipped) are turned on
by pushing the cargo lights button located on the
lower half of the headlight switch.
Cargo/Bed Lights Button On Headlight Switch
2
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 51
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
If equipped, and the vehicle’s speed is 0 mph
(0 km/h), these lights can also be turned on using
the switch located just inside the pickup box, on
the lower part of the bed light lens. A telltale will
illuminate in the instrument cluster display when
these lights are on. Pushing the switch a second
time will turn the lights off.
Bed Light Switch Without RamBox
Bed Light Switch With RamBox
The cargo light and bed lights (if equipped) will turn
on for approximately 30 seconds when a key fob
unlock button is pushed, as part of the Illuminated
Entry feature.
When these lights are activated using the button
on the headlight switch, the trailer spotter lights
will remain illuminated when the vehicle
transmission is in PARK, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE.
The trailer spotter lights will turn off when the
vehicle transmission is placed in DRIVE.
NOTE:
For vehicles shipped to or sold in the states of
California or Mississippi, the cargo, bed, and mirror
spotter lights will not work while the vehicle is in
motion. In every other state, the cargo and mirror
spotter lights will turn off when the vehicle is in
motion, but the bed light will remain on. In all
states, including California and Mississippi, if a
bed camera is deactivated, the bed lights will turn
back on.
BATTERY SAVER
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, load
shedding is provided for both the interior and
exterior lights.
If the ignition is OFF, the interior lights will
automatically turn off when:
Any door is left ajar for 10 minutes.
The Dome Defeat button is pushed.
The cargo, bed, and spotter lights are manually
activated by either the headlight switch or the
truck bed switch.
NOTE:
Battery saver mode is canceled if the ignition is ON.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is
placed in the OFF position, the exterior lights will
automatically turn off after eight minutes. If the
headlights are turned on and left on for eight
minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior lights
will automatically turn off.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
COURTESY LIGHTS
The courtesy, dome, cargo, and bed lights are
turned on when any door is opened. The courtesy
and dome lights are turned on when the Dome On
button is pushed on the overhead console. Also, if
your vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless
Entry, and the unlock button is pushed on the
key fob, the courtesy, dome, cargo, and bed lights
will turn on.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 52
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
Courtesy/Reading Lights
The overhead console lights can also be operated
individually as reading lights by pushing the
corresponding buttons.
Front Courtesy/Reading Lights
NOTE:
On vehicles equipped with an LED overhead
console, if both the Dome On and Dome Defeat
buttons are pushed, the Illuminated Entry with
door ajar feature will be disabled, but the Dome
Lights inside the vehicle will turn on.
Three types of Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights are
available for your vehicle:
Push button on/off
Push lens on/off
No on/off button, only Courtesy Light
Push Lens On/Off Rear Courtesy Light
NOTE:
The Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights will remain on
until the switch is pushed a second time, so be
sure they have been turned off before exiting the
vehicle. If the interior lights are left on after the
ignition is turned off, they will automatically turn off
after 10 minutes.
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer controls are part of the headlight
switch and are located on the left side of the
instrument panel.
Dimmer Controls
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating
the right dimmer control upward will increase the
brightness of the instrument panel lights. Rotating
the left dimmer control will adjust the interior and
ambient light levels.
NOTE:
The ambient lights are only active when the head-
lights or parking lights are on.
1 — Driver’s Reading Light On/Off Button
2 — Dome Defeat Button
3 — Dome On Button
4 — Passenger’s Reading Light On/Off Button
1 — Ambient Light Control
2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
2
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 53
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
key fob to unlock the doors or open any door.
This feature also turns on the puddle lamps
located beneath the outside mirrors (if equipped).
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30
seconds, or they will immediately fade to off once
the ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN
position from the OFF position.
The front courtesy overhead console and door
courtesy lights will not turn off if the Dome On
button on the overhead console is pushed.
The illuminated entry system will not operate if the
Dome Defeat button on the overhead console is
pushed.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with Illuminated
Approach lights under the outside mirrors, they can
also be turned off by pushing the Dome Defeat
button.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
WINDSHIELD WIPERS
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch
in the multifunction lever, and can only be
operated with the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
position. Turn the end of the lever to select the
desired wiper speed.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch
Rotate the end of the lever upward, to the first
detent past the intermittent settings for low-speed
wiper operation. Rotate the end of the lever
upward to the second detent past the intermittent
settings for high-speed wiper operation.
Intermittent Wiper System
The intermittent feature of this system was
designed for use when weather conditions make a
single wiping cycle, with a variable pause between
cycles, desirable. For maximum delay between
cycles, rotate the control knob upward to the first
detent.
The delay interval decreases as you rotate the
knob until it enters the low continual speed
position. The delay can be regulated from a
maximum of about 18 seconds between cycles, to
a cycle every one second. The delay intervals will
double in duration when the vehicle speed is
10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Windshield Washers
To use the windshield washer, push the washer
knob, located on the end of the multifunction lever,
inward to the second detent. Washer fluid will be
sprayed and the wiper will operate for two to three
cycles after the washer knob is released from this
position.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 54
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
If the washer knob is depressed while in the delay
range, the wiper will operate for several seconds
after the washer knob is released. It will then
resume the intermittent interval previously
selected. If the washer knob is pushed while in
the off position, the wiper will turn on and cycle
approximately three times after the washer knob is
released.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer
system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture
that meets or exceeds the temperature range of
your climate. This rating information can be found
on most washer fluid containers.
Mist Feature
When a single wipe to clear off road mist or spray
from a passing vehicle is needed, push the washer
knob, located on the end of the multifunction lever,
inward to the first detent and release. The wipers
will cycle one time and automatically shut off.
NOTE:
The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on
the windshield. The wash function must be used in
order to spray the windshield with washer fluid.
RAIN SENSING WIPERS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature senses moisture on the windshield
and automatically activates the wipers for the
driver. The feature is especially useful for road
splash or overspray from the windshield washers
of the vehicle ahead. Rotate the end of the
multifunction lever to one of five settings to
activate this feature.
NOTE:
This feature can be programmed on/off through
the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with
the multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is
the least sensitive, and wiper delay position 5 is
the most sensitive. Position 3 should be used for
normal rain conditions. Positions 1 and 2 can be
used if the driver desires less wiper sensitivity.
Positions 4 and 5 can be used if the driver desires
more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the
O (off) position when not using the system.
NOTE:
The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when
the wiper switch is in the low or high-speed posi-
tion.
The Rain Sensing feature may not function prop-
erly when ice, or dried salt water is present on
the windshield.
Use of products containing wax or silicone may
reduce Rain Sensing performance.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden
icing of the windshield during freezing weather,
warm the windshield with the defroster before
and during windshield washer use.
2
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 55
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The Rain Sensing system has protection features
for the wiper blades and arms, and will not operate
under the following conditions:
Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition
is first placed in the ON position, the Rain
Sensing system will not operate until the wiper
switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater than
0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside temperature is
greater than 32°F (0°C).
Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the
ignition is ON, and the transmission is in the
NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will
not operate until the wiper switch is moved,
vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h),
or the gear selector is moved out of the
NEUTRAL position.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles
equipped with Remote Starting system, Rain
Sensing wipers are not operational when the
vehicle is in the remote start mode. Once the
operator is in the vehicle and has placed the
ignition switch in the RUN position, Rain Sensing
wiper operation can resume, if it has been
selected, and no other inhibit conditions
(mentioned previously) exist.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to regulate
the temperature, air flow, and direction of air
circulating throughout the vehicle. The controls are
located on the touchscreen (if equipped), on the
sides of the touchscreen, or on the instrument
panel below the radio.
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL OVERVIEW
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Manual
Temperature Controls
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 56
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
Icon Description
MAX A/C Setting
Set the Temperature Control Knob to the MAX A/C setting to change the current setting to the coldest output of air.
Moving the temperature control knob away from the MAX A/C setting causes the MAX A/C operation to exit.
A/C Button
Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning (A/C). The A/C indicator illuminates when the A/C is on.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate, to change the system between
Recirculation mode and outside air mode. The Recirculation indicator and the A/C indicator illuminate when the Recirculation
button is pushed. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions, such as smoke, odors, dust, or humidity are present.
Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost. Recirculation may be unavailable if conditions exist that could create
fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this
mode is not recommended.
Temperature Control
Temperature Control regulates the temperature of the air forced through the Climate Control system. The temperature increases as
you turn the temperature control knob clockwise. The temperature decreases as you turn the temperature control knob
counterclockwise.
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of air forced through the Climate Control system. There are seven blower speeds available.
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower speed
decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.
2
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 57
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Mode Control
Turn the Mode Control knob to adjust the airflow distribution. The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the
instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air.
The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
There is a shut-off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor
outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
Icon Description
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 58
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that
require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Front Defrost Setting
Turn the Mode Control knob to the Front Defrost mode setting. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets.
When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for
best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
The Rear Defrost indicator illuminates when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off
after 15 minutes.
Climate Control OFF
To turn the Climate Controls off, turn the Blower Control knob to the O (off) position.
Icon Description
2
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 59
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL OVERVIEW
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Automatic
Temperature Controls
Uconnect 4C NAV With 12–inch Display Automatic
Temperature Controls
NOTE:
Icons and descriptions can vary based upon
vehicle equipment.
Icon Description
MAX A/C
Press and release the MAX A/C button on the touchscreen to change the current setting to the coldest output of air.
The MAX A/C indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Pressing the button again will cause the MAX A/C operation to exit.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C button is only available on the touchscreen.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 60
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
Faceplate A/C Button
Touchscreen A/C Button
A/C Button
Press and release the button on the touchscreen, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to change the current setting.
The A/C indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. The Recirculation indicator
illuminates when Recirculation is on. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes. Recirculation may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed
out) if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually without
disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window
fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
Icon Description
2
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 61
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Faceplate Auto Button
Touchscreen Auto
Button
AUTO
Set your desired temperature and press AUTO. AUTO will achieve and maintain your desired temperature by automatically adjusting
the blower speed and air distribution. AUTO mode is highly recommended for efficiency. You can press and release this button on
the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate, to turn AUTO on. The AUTO indicator illuminates when AUTO is on. Toggling
this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” within
this section for more information.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the Front Defrost button on the touchscreen, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to change the
current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The Front Defrost indicator illuminates when Front Defrost is on. Air comes from the
windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode
with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. When toggling the front defrost
mode button, the climate system will return to previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the Rear Defrost button on the touchscreen, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to turn on the rear
window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator illuminates when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 15 minutes.
Icon Description
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 62
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
Faceplate Temperature
Knobs
Touchscreen
Temperature Buttons
Driver and Passenger Temperature Up and Down Buttons
Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the red button (or rotate knob if equipped) on the
faceplate or touchscreen, or press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer
temperature settings. Push the blue button (or rotate knob if equipped) on the faceplate or touchscreen, or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
NOTE:
The numbers within the temperature display will only appear if the system is equipped with an automatic climate control system.
Up and down buttons are only available on vehicles equipped with a 12-inch display.
SYNC
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC indicator illuminates when SYNC is on.
SYNC synchronizes the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger’s temperature
setting while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC button is only available on the touchscreen.
Icon Description
2
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 63
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Faceplate Blower Knob
Touchscreen Blower
Buttons
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds available.
The speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting.
The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.
Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
NOTE:
On Uconnect 4C NAV With 12–inch display radios, pressing the blower control button below one turns the Climate Control system
OFF.
Faceplate Mode Button
Touchscreen Mode
Buttons
Mode Control
Mode Control regulates the airflow distribution. The airflow distribution outlets are: instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost
outlets, and demist outlets.
Faceplate: Push the Mode Button to change the airflow distribution mode.
Touchscreen: Press one of the “MODE” buttons to change the airflow distribution mode.
The Mode settings are as follows:
Icon Description
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 64
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air.
The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
There is a shut-off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor
outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that
require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control ON/OFF.
Icon Description
2
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 65
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CLIMATE CONTROL FUNCTIONS
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the
operator to manually activate or deactivate the air
conditioning system. When the air conditioning
system is turned on, cool dehumidified air will flow
through the outlets into the cabin. For improved
fuel economy, press the A/C button to turn off the
air conditioning and manually adjust the blower
and airflow mode settings. Also, make sure to
select only Panel, Bi-Level, or Floor modes.
NOTE:
For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in
Mix, Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be
turned off, but the A/C system shall remain
active to prevent fogging of the windows.
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side
glass, select Defrost mode, and increase blower
speed if needed.
If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C
condenser (located in front of the radiator), for
an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a
gentle water spray from the front of the radiator
and through the condenser.
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling
performance.
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and
the prior settings. The button illuminates when
MAX A/C is on.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position
can be adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing
other settings will cause the MAX A/C operation to
switch to the selected setting and MAX A/C to exit.
Recirculation
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The
Recirculation feature may be unavailable (button
on the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist
that could create fogging on the inside of the
windshield.
On systems with Manual Climate Controls, if
equipped, the Recirculation mode is not allowed in
Defrost mode to improve window clearing
operation. Recirculation is disabled automatically
if this mode is selected. Attempting to use
Recirculation while in this mode causes the LED in
the control button to blink and then turns off.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
(ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the
AUTO button on the touchscreen on the
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like
the system to maintain by adjusting the driver
and passenger temperature control buttons.
Once the desired temperature is displayed, the
system will achieve and automatically
maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the
settings. You will experience the greatest
efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature
settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system
automatically adjusts the temperature, mode,
and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly
as possible.
The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or
Metric units by selecting the U.S./Metric
customer-programmable feature. Refer to the
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 66
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
(Continued)
To provide you with maximum comfort in the
Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the blower
fan will remain on low until the engine warms up.
The blower will increase in speed and transition
into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual
override features. The AUTO symbol in the front
ATC display will be turned off when the system is
being used in the manual mode.
OPERATING TIPS
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather
conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with
a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper
corrosion protection and to protect against engine
overheating. OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster
performance, make sure the engine cooling
system is functioning properly and the proper
amount, type, and concentration of coolant is
used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode during
Winter months is not recommended, because it
may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run
the air conditioning system at idle for about five
minutes, in fresh air with the blower setting on
high. This will ensure adequate system lubrication
to minimize the possibility of compressor damage
when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild,
rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the
windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase
the front blower speed. Do not use the
Recirculation mode without A/C for long periods,
as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of
the windshield, is free of obstructions, such as
leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may
reduce airflow, and if they enter the plenum, they
could plug the water drains. In Winter months,
make sure the air intake is clear of ice, slush, and
snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The climate control system filters out dust and
pollen from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to
service your cabin air filter, and to have it replaced
when needed.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners
on the interior surface of the window. Use a
soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping
parallel to the heating elements. Labels can
be peeled off after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
CAUTION!
2
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 67
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Operating Tips Chart
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOWS
Power Window Controls
Power Window Switches
The power window controls located on the driver's
door trim panel have up-down switches that give
you fingertip control of all power windows. There is
a single opening and closing switch on the front
passenger door for passenger window control and
on the rear doors for rear window control. The
windows will operate when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC position, and for
up to 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in the
OFF position or until a front door is opened.
NOTE:
The Key Off Power Delay feature will allow the
power windows to operate for up to 10 minutes
after the ignition is placed in the OFF position. This
feature is cancelled when either front door is
opened.
Auto-Down
Both the driver and front passenger window switch
have an Auto-Down feature. Push the window
switch past the first detent, release, and the
window will go down automatically. To cancel the
Auto-Down movement, operate the switch in either
the up or down direction and release the switch.
To stop the window from going all the way down
during the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the
switch briefly.
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
Hot Weather And
Vehicle Interior Is
Very Hot
Set the mode control
to , on, and
blower on high. Roll
down the windows for a
minute to flush out the
hot air. Adjust the
controls as needed to
achieve comfort.
Warm Weather
Turn on and set the
mode control to the
position.
Cool Sunny
Operate in position.
Cool & Humid
Conditions
Set the mode control
to position and
turn on to keep
windows clear.
Cold Weather
Set the mode control
to the position.
If windshield fogging
starts to occur, move
the control to the
position.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle. Do
not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in
a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
Occupants, particularly unattended children,
can become entrapped by the windows while
operating the power window switches. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 68
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
To open the window part way, push the switch to
the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch
Protection — If Equipped
Pull the front driver’s or passenger’s side window
switch fully upward to the second detent, release,
and the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up
during the Auto-Up operation, push down on the
switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window
switch to the first detent and release when you
want the window to stop.
NOTE:
If the window runs into any obstacle during the
Auto-Closure, it will reverse direction and then go
back down. Remove the obstacle and use the
window switch again to close the window. Any
impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to
the first detent and hold to close the window
manually.
Reset Auto-Up
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the
window may need to be reset. To reset Auto-Up:
1. Make sure the door is fully closed.
2. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up
for an additional two seconds after the window
is closed.
3. Push the window switch down firmly to the
second detent to open the window completely
and continue to hold the switch down for an
additional two seconds after the window is
fully open.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver's door
allows you to disable the window control on the
rear passenger doors. To disable the window
controls on the rear passenger doors, push the
window lock switch into the latched or down
position. To enable the window controls, push the
window lock switch again and return the switch to
the released or up position.
Window Lockout Switch
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the
window is almost closed. Be sure to clear all
objects from the window before closing.
2
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 69
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Power Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped
The switch for the power sliding rear window is
located on the overhead console.
Power Sliding Rear Window Switch
Push the rearward portion of the switch to open the
window. Push the forward portion of the switch to
close the window.
Manual Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped
A locking device in the center of the window helps
to prevent entry from the rear of the vehicle.
Squeeze the lock to release the window.
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception
of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type
sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind
buffeting with the windows down, or the
sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially
open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the
rear windows open, open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the
sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open
any window.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
SINGLE PANE POWER SUNROOF —
I
F EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switches are located on the
overhead console between the courtesy/reading
lights.
Power Sunroof Switches
1 — Opening/Closing Sunroof
2 — Venting Sunroof
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children. Do not leave
the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
Occupants, particularly unattended children,
can become entrapped by the power sunroof
while operating the power sunroof switch.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury
or death.
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof.
You could also be seriously injured or killed.
Always fasten your seat belt properly and
make sure all passengers are also properly
secured.
Do not allow small children to operate the
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body
parts, or any object, to project through the
sunroof opening. Injury may result.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 70
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
Opening Sunroof
Express
Push the switch rearward and release it within
one-half second. The sunroof and sunshade will
open automatically and stop when the full open
position is reached. This is called “Express Open.”
During Express Open operation, any other
actuation of the sunroof switch will stop the
sunroof.
Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch
rearward. The sunroof will move rearward and
automatically stop at full open position. Any
release of the switch will stop the movement. The
sunroof and sunshade will remain in a partially
opened condition until the sunroof switch is
pushed again.
Closing Sunroof
Express
Push the switch forward and release it within
one-half second and the sunroof will close
automatically from any position. The sunroof will
close fully and stop automatically. This is called
“Express Close.” During Express Close operation,
any other actuation of the switch will stop the
sunroof.
Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch
forward. The sunroof will move forward and
automatically stop at full closed position. Any
release of the switch will stop the movement and
the sunroof will remain in a partially closed
condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception
of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound
in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting
with the windows down, or the sunroof (if
equipped) in certain open or partially open
positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be
minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the
sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open
any window.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However,
the sunshade will open automatically as the
sunroof opens.
NOTE:
The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the
closing of the sunroof during the Express Close
operation. If an obstruction in the path of the
sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically
retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will
disable and the sunroof must be closed in Manual
Mode.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Push and release the Vent button within one half
second and the sunroof will open to the vent
position. This is called “Express Vent”, and it will
occur regardless of sunroof position. During
Express Vent operation, any other actuation of the
switch will stop the sunroof.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to
clean the glass panel. Periodically check for and
clear out any debris that may have collected in the
tracks.
2
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 71
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Ignition Off Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up
to approximately 10 minutes after the ignition
switch is placed in the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature.
NOTE:
Ignition Off timing is programmable through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
HOOD
TO OPEN THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the hood release lever located below the
steering wheel at the base of the instrument
panel.
Hood Release
2. Reach into the opening beneath the center of
the hood and push the safety latch lever to the
left to release it, before raising the hood.
Safety Latch Location
TO CLOSE THE HOOD
Lower the hood to approximately 12 inches (30
cm) from the engine compartment and drop it.
Make sure that the hood is completely closed.
TAILGATE
OPENING
The power tailgate may be opened by pushing the
tailgate release pad located on the tailgate door.
The tailgate damper strut will lower the tailgate to
the open position (if equipped).
Electronic Tailgate Release — If Equipped
The key fob may be equipped with an
electronic release feature for the
tailgate, allowing hands-free tailgate
opening. To activate, push and release
the Tailgate Release button on the key fob twice
within five seconds. The tailgate door will unlatch,
and slowly lower into the open position.
If equipped, a button on the center overhead
console inside the vehicle can be used to release
the tailgate.
NOTE:
The Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover (if equipped) may
prevent Electronic Tailgate Release if installed.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving
your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it
could open when the vehicle is in motion and
block your vision. Failure to follow this warning
could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the
hood to close it. Use a firm downward push at
the front center of the hood to ensure that both
latches engage.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 72
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
The Tonneau Cover must be removed or folded up
before releasing the tailgate. Refer to “Tri-Fold
Tonneau Cover — If Equipped” in this chapter for
further information.
CLOSING
To close the tailgate, push it upward until both
sides are latched.
NOTE:
Pull back on the tailgate firmly after closing to
ensure it is securely latched.
BED STEP — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with an extendable
bed step on the driver’s side of the tailgate to
provide easier entry and exit into the truck bed.
Bed Step Location
Bed Step Components
To extend the bed step, place your foot on the
protruding foot tab located on the left edge of the
bed step, and push rearward. A small amount of
force will release the spring load, and extend the
bed step out and away from the tailgate.
NOTE:
Once the spring load is overcome, the bed step will
extend out quickly, so be sure to stand in a position
that will avoid coming into contact with the step as
it extends.
Bed Step (Extended)
To stow the bed step back under the tailgate, push
the bed step forward with your foot until the bed
step is retracted by the spring load.
1 — Bed Step
2 — Foot Tab
WARNING!
Do not attempt to stow the bed step with your
hands. The low clearance space between the
bed step and the rear bumper as the bed step
returns to the stowed position could result in
injury to your hands or fingers.
2
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 73
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held
transmitters that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home
security systems. The HomeLink® unit is powered
by your vehicle’s 12 Volt battery.
The HomeLink® buttons that are located on the
sun visor designate the three different HomeLink®
channels.
HomeLink® Buttons
NOTE:
HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security
Alarm is active.
NOTE:
Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener
that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required
by federal safety standards. This includes most
garage door opener models manufactured after
1982. Do not use a garage door opener without
these safety features. Call toll-free
1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for safety information or assis-
tance.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN PROGRAMMING
H
OMELINK®
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the
garage before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate
transmission of the Radio Frequency (RF) signal it
is recommended that a new battery be placed in
the hand-held transmitter of the device that is
being programmed to the HomeLink® system.
To erase the channels, place the ignition in the
ON/RUN position, and push and hold the two
outside HomeLink® buttons (I and III) for up to
20 seconds or until the orange indicator flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed
when programming HomeLink® for the first
time. Do not erase channels when programming
additional buttons.
If you have any problems, or require assistance,
please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the
Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or
assistance.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the universal
transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if
people, pets or other objects are in the path of
the door or gate. Only use this transceiver with
a garage door opener that has a “stop and
reverse” feature as required by Federal safety
standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982.
Do not use a garage door opener without
these safety features.
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a
dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the
garage while programming the transceiver.
Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 74
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were
manufactured after 1995. These garage door
openers can be identified by the “LEARN” or
“TRAIN” button located where the hanging
antenna is attached to the garage door opener.
NOTE:
It is NOT the button that is normally used to open
and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches
(3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button
you wish to program while keeping the
HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you
want to program while you push and hold the
hand-held transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the
indicator light. The HomeLink® indicator will
flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink®
has received the frequency signal from the
hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons
after the indicator light changes from slow to
rapid.
5. On the garage door opener (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This
can usually be found where the hanging
antenna wire is attached to the garage door
opener/device motor. Firmly push and release
the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some
garage door openers/devices, there may be a
light that blinks when the garage door opener/
device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the
programmed HomeLink® button twice
(holding the button for two seconds each
time). If the garage door opener/device
activates, programming is complete.
NOTE:
If the garage door opener/device does not
activate, push the button a third time (for two
seconds) to complete the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink®
buttons, repeat each step for each remaining
button. DO NOT erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button
until the indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds. Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with
“Programming A Rolling Code” step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
2
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 75
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers
manufactured before 1995.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches
(3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button
you wish to program while keeping the
HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Press and hold the HomeLink® button you
want to program while you press and hold the
hand-held transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the
indicator light. The HomeLink® indicator will
flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink®
has received the frequency signal from the
hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons
after the indicator light changes from slow to
rapid.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink®
button and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and the garage
door/device should activate when the
HomeLink® button is pressed.
To program the two remaining HomeLink®
buttons, repeat each step for each
remaining button. DO NOT erase the
channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Non-Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button
until the indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds. Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Programming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.
CANADIAN/GATE OPERATOR
P
ROGRAMMING
For programming transmitters in Canada/United
States that require the transmitter signals to
“time-out” after several seconds of transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter
signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds
of transmission – which may not be long enough
for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some
U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in the
same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the
cycling process to prevent possible overheating of
the garage door or gate motor.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches
(3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button
you wish to program while keeping the
HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink®
button, while you press and release (cycle)
your hand-held transmitter every two seconds
until HomeLink® has successfully accepted
the frequency signal. The indicator light will
flash slowly and then rapidly when fully
trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to
change flash rates. When it changes, it is
programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds or
longer in rare cases. The garage door may
open and close while you are programming.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink®
button and observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and the garage
door/device should activate when the
HomeLink® button is pressed.
To program the two remaining HomeLink®
buttons, repeat each step for each
remaining button. DO NOT erase the
channels.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 76
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
(Continued)
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device
for programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button
until the indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds. Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming”
step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
USING HOMELINK®
To operate, push and release the programmed
HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for
the programmed device (i.e. garage door opener,
gate operator, security system, entry door lock,
home/office lighting, etc.) The hand-held
transmitter of the device may also be used at
any time.
SECURITY
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or
turn in your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons
for 20 seconds until the orange indicator flashes.
Note that all channels will be erased. Individual
channels cannot be erased.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled
when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS
If you are having trouble programming
HomeLink®, here are some of the most common
solutions:
Replace the battery in the garage door opener
hand-held transmitter.
Push the LEARN button on the garage door
opener to complete the training for a Rolling
Code.
Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance,
please call toll-free
1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with Innovation, Science and Economic
Development Canada license-exempt RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a
dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the
garage while programming the transceiver.
Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.
Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the universal
transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if
people, pets or other objects are in the path of
the door or gate. Only use this transceiver with
a garage door opener that has a “stop and
reverse” feature as required by Federal safety
standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982.
Do not use a garage door opener without
these safety features.
WARNING!
2
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 77
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel and
features both an upper and lower storage area.
NOTE:
Not all vehicles are equipped with a door over the
upper storage area.
Glove Compartment
If equipped with a covered upper glove
compartment, push the release button to open.
To open the lower glove compartment, pull the
release handle.
Door Storage
Front Door Storage — If Equipped
Storage areas and bottle holders (driver’s side
only) are located in the door trim panels.
Rear Door Storage — If Equipped
Storage compartments are located in both the
driver and passenger rear door trim panels.
Center Storage Compartment —
If Equipped
The center storage compartment is located
between the driver and passenger seats.
The storage compartment provides an armrest and
contains both an upper and lower storage area.
1 — Upper Glove Compartment Release Button
(If Equipped)
2 — Upper Glove Compartment
3 — Lower Glove Compartment
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 78
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
Center Storage Compartment
Pull the upper handle on the front of the armrest to
raise the cover. The upper storage area contains a
USB port located at the rear of the area that can be
used to power small electrical devices, refer to
“Electrical Power Outlets” in this section for further
information.
With the upper lid closed, pull the lower handle to
open the lower storage bin. The lower bin contains
a power inverter outlet located in the forward
portion of the lower bin. There is also a fill line
located along the
rear inside wall of the lower bin.
Contents above the fill line may interfere with
cupholder placement if equipped with a premium
center console.
Forward Portion Of Lower Storage Bin
Premium Center Console — If Equipped
The premium center console is equipped with two
front storage bins located in front of the center
storage compartment. These storage bins may be
equipped with tandem doors. Push the front bin to
access the cupholders. Or push the rear bin to
access the coinholder/small storage bin.
Center Console Tandem Doors— If Equipped
WARNING!
This armrest is not a seat. Anyone seated on
the armrest could be seriously injured during
vehicle operation, or a collision. Only use the
center seating position when the armrest is
fully upright.
In a collision, the latch may open if the total
weight of the items stored exceeds about
10 lbs (4.5 kg). These items could be thrown
about endangering occupants of the vehicle.
Items stored should not exceed a total of
10 lbs (4.5 kg).
1 — Wireless Charging Pad
2 — Power Inverter
3 — Storage Area
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console
compartment lid in the open position. Driving
with the console compartment lid open may
result in injury in a collision.
1 — Push Front Bin Access
2 — Push Rear Bin Access
2
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 79
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Tandem Doors Open Position
Push the release button at the front of the
cupholder bin to slide tray rearward for access of
front lower storage bin, or forward to access the
rear lower storage bin with the center console lid in
the open position.
Push Release Button To Slide Tray
Front Bench Seat Storage — If Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with a front bench seat,
storage can be found by folding down the center
seatback. A console storage area and cupholders
are available. With the seatback in the upright
position, lifting the seat bottom also reveals a
storage location.
Front Bench Seat Storage Location
If equipped, there is also a storage drawer located
in the lower center of the instrument panel. It can
be released by pushing the access button above it.
The drawer is actuator assisted once the access
button is pushed. Pull the drawer outward to the
fully open position.
Storage Drawer Access Button
1 — Front Bin Open
2 — Rear Bin Open
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 80
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
Seatback Storage — If Equipped
Located in the back of both the driver and
passenger front seats are pockets that can be
used for storage.
Driver’s Side Seatback Storage
Second Row In-Floor Storage Bin —
If Equipped
In-floor storage bins are located in front of the
second row seats and can be used for extra
storage. The storage bins have removable liners
that can be easily removed for cleaning.
In-Floor Storage Bin And Latch
To open in-floor storage bin, remove the floor mat
(if equipped), and lift upward on the handle of the
latch and open the lid.
NOTE:
The front seat may have to be moved forward to
fully open the lid.
Opened Storage Bin
Storage Bin (Regular Cab)
The storage bin is located behind the front seats
and runs the length of the cab.
Storage Bin
2
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 81
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Fold Flat Load Floor — If Equipped
Crew Cab models with a 60/40 rear seat may be
equipped with a folding load floor.
Unfolding The Load Floor/Crew Cab
1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the upward
position.
Load Floor Legs In Stowed Position
2. Unfold both the legs using the straps.
Load Floor Legs In Opened Position
3. Lift the front panel until the load floor unfolds
into position.
Load Floor In Open Position
4. Reverse the procedure to store the load floor.
Positioning The Load Floor For Storage Access
Under The Seat
1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the upward
position.
2. Unsnap the securing snap located at either
side of the load floor.
3. Lift the load floor up to access storage under
the load floor.
Load Floor Securing Straps/Crew Cab
WARNING!
Do not operate the vehicle with loose items
stored on the load floor. While driving or in an
accident you may experience abrupt stopping,
rapid acceleration, or sharp turns. Loose objects
stored on the load floor may move around with
force and strike occupants, resulting in serious
or fatal injury.
WARNING!
Do not drive with the load floor in the up
position. When stopping fast or in an accident,
the load floor could move to the down position
causing serious injury.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 82
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83
4. Reverse the procedure to put the load floor
back in the secured down position before you
operate the vehicle.
Below Rear Seat Storage (Crew Cab)
The Crew Cab models provide additional storage
under the rear seats. Lift the seats to access the
storage compartment.
To open the storage compartments, unsnap the
securing snap located at either side of the load
floor and lift upward on the fold flat lid.
Crew Cab Storage
NOTE:
For more information on storage and the fold flat
floor, refer to “Fold Flat Load Floor” in this section.
CUPHOLDERS
Front Seat Cupholders
For vehicles equipped with a center console, two
cupholders are located in front of the console
storage bin.
Front Cupholders
NOTE:
If the vehicle is equipped with a premium center
console with double (tandem) doors, push the front
bin door to access the cupholders.
Vehicles Equipped With 40/20/40 Seats
The cupholders are located on the backside of the
center portion of the front seat (20). Fold down the
center section of the front seat to gain access to
the cupholders.
Front Cupholders With Bench Seat
Rear Cupholders — If Equipped
Some vehicles are equipped with rear cupholders
located in the center armrest.
Rear Armrest Cupholder
2
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 83
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Some vehicles may be equipped with a rear
cupholder that consists of two cup wells for rear
passenger convenience.
Rear Cup Wells
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
The auxiliary 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet can
provide power for in-cab accessories designed
for use with the standard “cigar lighter” plug. The
12 Volt power outlets and 5 Volt (2.5 Amp) USB
Port (Charge Only) have a cap attached to the
outlet indicating “12V DC”, together with either a
key symbol, battery symbol, or USB symbol.
A key symbol indicates that the key must be in the
ON/RUN or ACC position for the outlet to provide
power. The battery symbol indicates that the outlet
is connected to the battery, and can provide power
at all times.
An auxiliary power outlet can be found in the tray
on top of the center stack. This power outlet works
when the ignition is in the ON/RUN, ACC, or OFF
position.
Power Outlet — Top Of Center Stack
Power Outlet Fuse Locations:
F104 Fuse 20 A Yellow UCI Port/USB Rear
Center Console
F90 Fuse 20 A Yellow Instrument Panel Power
Outlet Battery Fed (If Equipped)
F91 Fuse 20 A Yellow Instrument Panel Power
Outlet Ignition Fed (If Equipped)
F93 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter/Instrument
Panel Power Outlet (If Equipped)
When the vehicle is turned off, be sure to unplug
any equipment as to not drain the battery of the
vehicle. All accessories connected to the outlet(s)
should be removed or turned off when the vehicle
is not in use to protect the battery against
discharge.
CAUTION!
Do not exceed the maximum power of
160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the
160 Watts (13 Amps) power rating is
exceeded, the fuse protecting the system will
need to be replaced.
Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not insert any other object in
the power outlets as this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage not covered
by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt
outlet.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 84
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
If equipped, a 115 Volt (400 Watts maximum)
inverter may be located inside the center console
toward the right hand side, just under the Wireless
Charging Pad (if equipped). This inverter can power
cellular phones, electronics and other low power
devices requiring power up to 400 Watts. Certain
high-end video game consoles exceed this power
limit, as will most power tools.
Center Console Power Inverter Outlet
There is also a second 115 Volt (400 Watts
maximum) power inverter located on the rear of
the center console. This inverter can power cellular
phones, electronics and other low power devices
requiring power up to 400 Watts. Certain high-end
video game consoles exceed this power limit, as
will most power tools.
All power inverters are designed with built-in
overload protection. If the power rating of
400 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter shuts
down. Once the electrical device has been
removed from the outlet the inverter should reset.
Rear Center Console Power Inverter Outlet
NOTE:
400 Watts is the maximum for the inverter, not
each outlet. If three outlets are in use, 400 Watts
is shared amongst the devices plugged in.
CAUTION!
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle's battery, even when
not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventu-
ally, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle's
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e.,
coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will
discharge the battery even more quickly. Only
use these intermittently and with greater
caution.
After the use of high power draw accessories,
or long periods of the vehicle not being started
(with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle
must be driven a sufficient length of time to
allow the generator to recharge the vehicle's
battery.
2
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 85
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
If your vehicle is equipped with a RamBox, a
115 Volt (400 Watts maximum) inverter will be
located inside the RamBox. The inverter can be
turned on by the Instrument Panel Power Inverter
switch located to the left of the steering wheel.
This inverter can power cellular phones,
electronics and other low power devices requiring
power up to 400 Watts. Certain high-end video
game consoles exceed this power limit, as will
most power tools.
RamBox Power Inverter
Instrument Panel Power Inverter Switch
If equipped, there may be a 115 Volt (400 Watts
maximum) inverter located to the right of the
center stack, just below the climate controls.
This inverter can power cellular phones,
electronics and other low power devices requiring
power up to 400 Watts. Certain high-end video
game consoles exceed this power limit, as will
most power tools.
Center Stack Power Inverter
To turn on the power outlet, simply plug in the
device. The outlet turns off when the device is
unplugged.
NOTE:
The Power Inverter only turns on if the ignition is
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
Due to built-in overload protection, the power
inverter shuts down if the power rating is
exceeded.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 86
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87
WIRELESS CHARGING PAD —
I
F EQUIPPED
Wireless Charging Pad
Your vehicle may be equipped with a 15W 3A Qi
wireless charging pad located inside of the center
console. This charging pad is designed to
wirelessly charge your Qi enabled mobile phone. Qi
is a standard that uses magnetic induction to
transfer power to your mobile device.
Your mobile phone must be designed for Qi
wireless charging. If the phone is not equipped
with Qi wireless charging functionality, an
aftermarket sleeve or a specialized back plate can
be purchased from your mobile phone provider or
a local electronics retailer. Please see your
phone’s owner’s manual for further information.
The wireless charging pad is equipped with an
anti-slip mat, an adjustable cradle to hold your
mobile phone in place and an LED indicator light.
NOTE:
The ignition much be in the ON/RUN or START
position and all vehicle doors must be closed for
the wireless charging pad to operate.
Using a phone case may interfere with wireless
charging.
OVERHEAD SUNGLASS STORAGE
At the front of the overhead console, a
compartment is provided for the storage of one
pair of sunglasses.
From the closed position, push the door latch to
open the compartment.
Overhead Sunglass Door
The door will slowly rotate to the full open position.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
The key fob should not be placed on the
charging pad or within 15 cm (150 mm) of it.
Doing so can cause excessive heat buildup and
damage to the fob. Placing the fob in close
proximity of the charging pad blocks the fob from
being detected by the vehicle and prevents the
vehicle from starting.
2
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 87
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
PICKUP BOX
The pickup box has many features designed for
utility and convenience.
Pickup Box Features
NOTE:
If you are installing a Toolbox, Ladder Rack or
Headache Rack at the front of the Pickup Box, you
must use Mopar® Box Reinforcement Brackets
that are available from an authorized dealer.
You can carry wide building materials (sheets of
plywood, etc.) by building a raised load floor. Place
lumber across the box in the indentations provided
above the wheel housings and in the bulkhead
dividers to form the floor.
There are stampings in the sheet metal on the
inner side bulkheads of the box in front of and
behind both wheel housings. Place wooden boards
across the box from side to side to create separate
load compartments in the pickup box.
There are four tie-down cleats bolted to the lower
sides of the pickup box that can sustain loads up
to 1000 lbs (450 kg) total.
CARGO CAMERA — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cargo
Camera that allows you to see an image of the
inside of the pickup box. The image will be
displayed in the Uconnect screen.
The Cargo Camera is located in the bottom center
area of the Center High Mounted Stop Lamp
(CHMSL).
A touchscreen button to indicate the current
active camera image being displayed is made
available whenever the Cargo Camera image is
displayed.
A touchscreen button to switch the display to
rear view camera image is made available
whenever the Cargo Camera image is displayed.
A touchscreen button "X" to disable display of the
camera image is made available when the vehicle
is not in REVERSE gear.
1 — Cleats
2 — Upper Load Floor Indents
3 — Bulk Head Dividers
4 — Anchors
WARNING!
The pickup box is intended for load carrying
purposes only, not for passengers, who should
sit in seats and use seat belts.
Care should always be exercised when oper-
ating a vehicle with unrestrained cargo.
Vehicle speeds may need to be reduced.
Severe turns or rough roads may cause
shifting or bouncing of the cargo that may
result in vehicle damage. If wide building
materials are to be frequently carried, the
installation of a support is recommended. This
will restrain the cargo and transfer the load to
the pickup box floor.
If you wish to carry more than 600 lbs (272 kg)
of material suspended above the wheelhouse,
supports must be installed to transfer the
weight of the load to the pickup box floor or
vehicle damage may result. The use of proper
supports will permit loading up to the rated
payload.
Unrestrained cargo may be thrown forward in
an accident causing serious or fatal injury.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 88
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89
A display timer is initiated when the Cargo Camera
image is displayed. The image will continue to be
displayed until the display timer exceeds
10 seconds and the vehicle speed is above
8 mph (13 km/h) or the touchscreen button "X" to
disable display of the Cargo Camera image is
pressed.
Cargo Camera With Dynamic Centerline (Available
With Surround View Camera Only) — If Equipped
The Dynamic Centerline feature provides an
overlay on the Cargo Camera display screen that
aligns to the center of the pickup box to aid in
hooking up a fifth wheel camper or gooseneck
trailer. The centerline auto aligns to the center of
the pickup box, and can also be manually adjusted.
The centerline will adjust in response to steering
angle inputs, and will not obstruct the gooseneck
receiver or an approaching trailer gooseneck in the
camera feed.
Activation
The Dynamic Centerline feature can be activated
through the Uconnect settings by pressing the
Cargo Camera soft button, followed by the “Adjust
Centerline” soft button on the touchscreen.
If the Dynamic Centerline feature is turned on, the
overlay will display anytime the Cargo Camera
image is displayed.
Adjusting Centerline
Follow the steps below to manually adjust the
centerline:
1. Press the “Adjust Centerline” soft button
located in the bottom right corner of the
Cargo Camera display.
2. Use the arrows on the bottom left corner of the
Cargo Camera display to adjust the centerline
horizontally or vertically.
3. Once the desired position is achieved, press
the “Accept” button to set the centerline to the
newly specified position.
Deactivation
The Dynamic Centerline feature will automatically
be deactivated whenever the Cargo Camera
display is deactivated. It can also be manually
deactivated through the Uconnect settings.
For further information, refer to “Surround View
Camera System” in “Starting And Operating.”
NOTE:
If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph
(13 km/h), the Cargo Camera image will be
displayed continuously until the touchscreen
button "X" to disable display of the Cargo
Camera image is pressed.
The touchscreen button “X” to disable the
display of the camera image is made available
ONLY when the vehicle is not in reverse.
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens,
rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not
cover the lens.
Turning Cargo Camera On Or Off —
With Uconnect 4C/4C NAV
1. Press the “Controls” button located on the
bottom of the Uconnect display.
2. Press the “Cargo Camera” button to turn
the Cargo Camera system on.
NOTE:
Once initiated by the "Cargo Camera" button, the
Cargo Camera image will be displayed until the
vehicle speed remains below 8 mph (13 km/h)
and the 10 second timer runs out. The image may
be deactivated by pressing the "X" soft button,
placing the ignition in the OFF position, placing the
gear selector in PARK, or pressing the image
defeat “X” button. On deactivation, the previous
selected screen will appear.
2
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 89
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
RAMBOX — IF EQUIPPED
The RamBox system is an integrated pickup box
storage and cargo management system consisting
of up to three features:
Integrated box side storage bins
Cargo divider (if equipped)
Bed rail tie-down system (if equipped)
There will also be a 115 Volt (400 Watt) power
inverter located in the RamBox. Refer to “Internal
Equipment” in this chapter for further information.
RAMBOX INTEGRATED BOX SIDE
S
TORAGE BINS
Cargo storage bins are located on both sides of the
pickup box. The cargo storage bins provide
watertight, lockable, illuminated storage for up to
300 lbs (136 kg) of evenly distributed cargo.
RamBox Cargo Storage Bins
To open a storage bin with the RamBox unlocked,
push and release the button located on the lid. The
RamBox lid will open upward to allow hand access.
Lift the lid to fully open.
NOTE:
RamBox will not open when the button is pushed if
the RamBox is locked.
RamBox Pushbutton And Lock
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the following items could cause
damage to the vehicle:
Assure that all cargo inside the storage bins is
properly secured.
Do not exceed cargo weight rating of 300 lbs
(136 kg) for 2500 and 3500 series vehicles
per bin.
CAUTION!
Leaving the lid open for extended periods of time
could cause the vehicle battery to discharge.
If the lid is required to stay open for extended
periods of time, it is recommended that the bin
lights be turned off manually using the on/off
switch.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 90
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 91
The interior of the RamBox will automatically
illuminate when the lid is opened. In addition to the
automatic illumination, there is a manual on/off
switch located at the rear of each storage bin.
Pushing the switch once will turn off the bin lights,
pushing the switch again will turn the lights back
on.
RamBox Light Switch
Cargo bins feature two removable drain plugs (to
allow water to drain from bins). To remove plug,
pull up on the edge. To install, push the plug
downward into drain hole.
NOTE:
Provisions are provided in the bins for cargo
dividers and shelf supports. These accessories (in
addition to other RamBox accessories) are
available from Mopar®.
Locking And Unlocking RamBox
Push and release the lock or unlock button on the
key fob to lock and unlock all doors, the tailgate
and the RamBox (if equipped). Refer to “Keys” in
this chapter for further details. The RamBox
storage bins can be locked using the vehicle key.
To lock and unlock the storage bin, insert the key
into the keyhole on the push button and turn
clockwise to lock or counterclockwise to unlock.
Always return the key to the upright (vertical)
position before removing the key from the push
button.
RAMBOX SAFETY WARNING
Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent
personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
CAUTION!
Ensure cargo bin lids are closed and latched
before moving or driving vehicle.
Loads applied to the top of the bin lid should
be minimized to prevent damage to the lid and
latching/hinging mechanisms.
Damage to the RamBox bin may occur due to
heavy/sharp objects placed in bin that shift
due to vehicle motion. In order to minimize
potential for damage, secure all cargo to
prevent movement and protect inside
surfaces of bin from heavy/sharp objects with
appropriate padding.
WARNING!
Always close the storage bin covers when
your vehicle is unattended.
Do not allow children to have access to the
storage bins. Once in the storage bin, young
children may not be able to escape. If trapped
in the storage bin, children can die from suffo-
cation or heat stroke.
In an accident, serious injury could result if the
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin
covers open.
Keep the storage bin covers closed and
latched while the vehicle is in motion.
Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie-down.
2
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 91
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
RamBox Storage Bin Cover Emergency
Release Lever — If Equipped
As a security measure, a Storage Bin Cover
Emergency Release is built into the storage bin
cover latching mechanism.
Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever
NOTE:
In the event of an individual being locked inside
the storage bin, the storage bin cover can be
opened from inside of the bin by pulling on the
glow-in-the-dark lever attached to the storage bin
cover latching mechanism.
BED DIVIDER — IF EQUIPPED
The bed divider has two functional positions:
Storage Position
Divider Position
Storage Position
The storage position for the bed divider is at the
front of the truck bed which maximizes the bed
cargo area when not in use.
To install the bed divider into the storage position,
perform the following:
1. Make sure the center handle is unlocked
using the vehicle key and rotate the center
handle vertically to release the divider side
gates.
Center Handle And Lock
2. With the side gates open, position the divider
fully forward in the bed against the front panel.
Storage Position
3. Rotate the side gates closed allowing the
outboard ends to be positioned in front of the
cargo tie-down loops.
Cargo Tie-Down Loop
1 — Center Handle Lock
2 — Handle
3 — Unlocked Position
4 — Locked Position
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 92
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 93
4. Rotate the center handle horizontally to secure
the side gates in the closed position.
Side Gates Closed
5. Lock the center handle using the vehicle key to
secure the panel into place.
Divider Position
The divider position is intended for managing your
cargo and assisting in keeping cargo from moving
around the bed. There are 11 divider slots along
the bed inner panels which allow for various
positions to assist in managing your cargo.
To install the bed divider into a divider position,
perform the following:
1. Make sure the center handle is unlocked
using the vehicle key and rotate the center
handle vertically to release the divider side
gates.
2. With the side gates open, position the divider
so the outboard ends align with the intended
slots in the sides of the bed.
Aligning Gate To Slots
3. Rotate the side gates closed so that the
outboard ends are secured into the intended
slots of the bed.
4. Rotate the center handle horizontally to secure
the side gates in the closed position.
Side Gates Closed
5. Lock the center handle to secure the panel
into place.
2
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 93
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
BED RAIL TIE-DOWN SYSTEM —
I
F EQUIPPED
NOTE:
This feature is only available for vehicles equipped
with a RamBox.
There are two adjustable cleats on each side of the
bed that can be used to assist in securing cargo.
Adjustable Cleats
Each cleat must be located and tightened down in
one of the detents, along either rail, in order to
keep cargo properly secure.
To move the cleat to any position on the rail, turn
the nut counterclockwise several turns. Then pull
out on the cleat and slide it to the detent nearest
the desired location. Make sure the cleat is seated
in the detent and tighten the nut.
Adjustable Cleat Assembly
Cleat Removal (With Tonneau Cover)
To remove the cleats from the utility rail, remove
the end cap screw located in the center of the end
cap, using a #T30 Torx head driver. Remove the
end cap and slide the cleat off the end of the rail.
End Cap Screw Location If Equipped With Tonneau Cover
CAUTION!
The maximum load per cleat should not exceed
250 lbs (113 kg) and the angle of the load on
each cleat should not exceed 45 degrees above
horizontal, or damage to the cleat or cleat rail
may occur.
1 — Utility Rail Detent
2 — Cleat Retainer Nut
3 — Utility Rail Cleat
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 94
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 95
Cleat Removal (Without Tonneau Cover)
Remove the end cap by pushing upward on the
release button located beneath the end cap while
pulling the cap away from the rail. The cleat can
now be removed by sliding it off the end of the rail.
End Cap Release Button If Not Equipped With
Tonneau Cover
Pull End Cap Away From Rail
EASY-OFF TAILGATE
To simplify mounting of a camper unit with an
overhang, the tailgate can be removed.
NOTE:
The electric connector at the bottom of the tailgate
must be disconnected prior to removing the
tailgate.
DISCONNECTING THE REAR CAMERA
A
ND REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY
1. Open the tailgate to access the rear camera
or Remote Keyless Entry connector bracket
located on the rear sill.
Connector Bracket Location
2. Remove the connector bracket from the sill by
pushing inward in the locking tab.
Locking Tab
3. Disconnect the chassis wiring harness,
ensuring the connector bracket does not fall
into the sill.
4. Connect the chassis plug and bracket
(provided in the glove compartment) to the
chassis wiring harness and insert the bracket
back into the sill.
5. Connect the tailgate plug (provided in the
glove compartment) to the tailgate wiring
harness to ensure that the terminals do not
corrode.
6. Tape the tailgate harness and bracket against
the forward-facing surface of the tailgate.
This will prevent damaging the connector and
bracket when storing or reinstalling the
tailgate.
2
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 95
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
REMOVING THE TAILGATE
1. Disconnect the wiring harness for the rear
camera and or power locks (if equipped).
NOTE:
Refer to “Disconnecting The Rear Camera And
Remote Keyless Entry” in this section.
2. Unlatch the tailgate and remove the support
cables by releasing the lock tang from the
pivot.
NOTE:
Make sure tailgate is supported when removing
support cables.
Locking Tang
3. Position the tailgate on a 45 degree angle.
4. Raise the right side of the tailgate until the
right side pivot clears the hanger bracket.
5. Slide the entire tailgate to the right to free the
left side pivot.
6. Remove the tailgate from the vehicle.
NOTE:
Do not carry the tailgate loose in the truck pickup
box.
LOCKING TAILGATE
The tailgate can be locked using the key fob lock
button.
TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tri-Fold
Tonneau Cover which consists of different
features:
Easy Tri-Fold cover
Tonneau fore aft locator
Crossbar inside bed locator
Front and rear clamps
Stowage strap
Locking capability
NOTE:
The Tonneau Cover can be folded up and
secured at the front of the box without removing
it completely.
WARNING!
To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide, which is
deadly, the exhaust system on vehicles
equipped with “Cap or Slide-In Campers” should
extend beyond the overhanging camper
compartment and be free of leaks.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 96
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 97
TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER REMOVAL
To remove the Tonneau Cover, follow the next
steps:
1. Open the tailgate to gain access to the rear
pair of Tonneau Cover clamps located on the
underside of the cover (left and right side).
Clamped Position
NOTE:
If clamp wire is damaged replace immediately.
2. Pull both clamp handles down to release the
Tonneau Cover’s rear panel.
Released Position
3. From the released position, send the clamps
to the Stowed Position by pushing from the
yellow bumper up. Listen for a “clicking” sound
to confirm the clamp has been properly
stowed.
Stowed Position
CAUTION!
Make sure the Tonneau Cover clamp and clamp
wire are in the proper stowed position. If the
clamp and clamp wire are not properly stowed,
damage to the Tonneau Cover material will
result.
2
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 97
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
4. Fold the rear panel up onto the center panel
(intermediate position).
Folded Rear Panel (Intermediate Position)
NOTE:
The vehicle cannot be driven when the Tonneau
Cover is in this position.
5. Fold the rear and center panels up onto the
front panel (Tri-Folded position).
Tri-Folded Position
NOTE:
When folding the center and rear panels, the
sections
MUST be held together to avoid damage
to the cover material.
Incorrect Folding — Will Cause Damage
Correct Folding — Hold Panels Together
NOTE:
Fold the panels gently. It is not recommended to
allow the panels to drop under their own weight.
6. Clip both stowage straps to prevent the
Tonneau Cover panels from unfolding.
Stowage Strap
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 98
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 99
7. Once in the Tri-Folded position, pull both front
clamp handles down to the Released Position.
Released Position
8. From the Released Position, send the clamps
to the Stowed Position by pushing from the
yellow bumper up. Listen for a “clicking” sound
to confirm the clamp has been properly
stowed.
Stowed Position
9. With two people, remove the Tonneau Cover.
NOTE:
Be sure the Tonneau Cover has been folded
completely before removing.
TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER
I
NSTALLATION
To install the Tonneau Cover follow the following
steps:
1. Position the folded Tonneau Cover on the
truck bed and push the cover forward against
the front of the truck bed. The Tonneau Cover
centers itself when placed on the vehicle.
NOTE:
Make sure to always push the Tonneau Cover all
the way forward on the truck bed. Failure to do so
might prevent proper clamp engagement, or
interfere with the tailgate auto drop function
(if equipped).
2
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 99
100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Pull down on the first set of clamp handles to
release the clamps from the stowed position.
Stowed Position
3. Push clamp wires up and under the flange of
the box (or flange of the RamBox rail, if
equipped) to the semi clamped position.
4. Push clamp handles upward to the clamped
position to properly engage the clamps.
Clamped Position
NOTE:
Once clamped, be sure the clamps are not
improperly attached to the truck bed flange.
Improper Clamp Position
5. Disengage the stowage straps.
6. Unfold the center and rear panels to the
intermediate position.
Intermediate Position (Vehicle Cannot Be Driven)
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 100
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 101
NOTE:
When folding the center and rear panels, the
sections
MUST be held together to avoid damage
to the cover material.
Incorrect Folding — Will Cause Damage
Correct Folding — Hold Panels Together
7. Completely unfold the Tonneau Cover.
Fully Unfolded Position
8. Pull the rear clamp handles down into the
released position.
Stowed Position
9. Push clamp wires up and under the flange of
box (or flange of RamBox rail, if equipped) to
the semi clamped position.
10. Push clamp handles upward to the clamped
position to properly engage the clamps.
Clamped Position
Improper Clamp Position
2
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 101
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Once clamped, be sure the clamps are not partially
clamped to the truck bed flange.
The Tonneau Cover clamps can be locked when in
the clamped position by placing a lock through the
locking hole.
Locking Hole
TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER CLEANING
For proper cleaning of the Tonneau Cover, use
Mopar® Whitewall & Vinyl Top Cleaner and
Mopar® Leather & Vinyl Conditioner/Protectant.
CAUTION!
It is the driver’s responsibility to ensure the
Tonneau Cover is properly installed on the
vehicle. Failure to follow this procedure can
result in detachment of the Tonneau Cover from
the vehicle and/or damage to the vehicle/
Tonneau Cover.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 102
103
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — GAS ENGINE
Base / Midline Instrument Cluster — Gas Engine
3
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 103
104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
D
ESCRIPTIONS — GAS ENGINE
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Voltmeter
When the vehicle is in the RUN state, the
gauge indicates the electrical system
voltage. The pointer should stay within the
normal range if the battery is charged. If the
pointer moves to either extreme left or right
and remains there during normal driving,
the electrical system should be serviced.
3. Instrument Cluster Display
When the appropriate conditions exist, this
display shows the instrument cluster
display messages. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
4. Oil Pressure Gauge
The pointer should always indicate the
oil pressure when the engine is running.
A continuous high or low reading under
normal driving conditions may indicate a
lubrication system malfunction. Immediate
service should be obtained from an autho-
rized dealer.
5. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
6. Temperature Gauge
The gauge pointer shows engine coolant
temperature. The pointer positioned within
the normal range indicates that the engine
cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a
higher temperature when driving in hot
weather, up mountain grades, or when
towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal oper-
ating range.
7. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position.
The fuel pump symbol points to
the side of the vehicle where the
fuel door is located.
Refer to “Refueling The Vehicle — Gas Engine” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized
dealer for service if your vehicle overheats. If you
decide to look under the hood yourself, refer to
the warnings under “Cooling System Pressure
Cap” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for further
information.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
reads “H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. If
the pointer remains on the “H,” turn the engine
off immediately and call an authorized dealer for
service.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 104
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 105
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — GAS ENGINE
Premium Instrument Cluster — Gas Engine
3
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 105
106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
D
ESCRIPTIONS — GAS ENGINE
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display
When the appropriate conditions exist, this
display shows the instrument cluster
display messages. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
3. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Temperature Gauge
The gauge pointer shows engine coolant
temperature. The pointer positioned within
the normal range indicates that the engine
cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a
higher temperature when driving in hot
weather, up mountain grades, or when
towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal oper-
ating range.
5. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position.
The fuel pump symbol points to
the side of the vehicle where the
fuel door is located.
Refer to “Refueling The Vehicle — Gas Engine” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized
dealer for service if your vehicle overheats. If you
decide to look under the hood yourself, refer to
the warnings under “Cooling System Pressure
Cap” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for further
information.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
reads “H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. If
the pointer remains on the “H,” turn the engine
off immediately and call an authorized dealer for
service.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 106
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 107
BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — DIESEL ENGINE
Base Instrument Cluster — Diesel Engine
3
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 107
108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
D
ESCRIPTIONS — DIESEL ENGINE
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Engine Coolant Temperature
This gauge shows the engine coolant
temperature. The gauge pointer will likely
show higher temperatures when driving in
hot weather, up mountain grades, or in
heavy stop and go traffic. If the red Warning
Light turns on while driving, safely bring the
vehicle to a stop, and turn off the engine.
DO NOT operate the vehicle until the cause
is corrected.
3. Instrument Cluster Display
When the appropriate conditions exist, this
display shows the instrument cluster
display messages. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
4. Oil Pressure Gauge
The pointer should always indicate some oil
pressure when the engine is running.
A continuous high or low reading under
normal driving conditions may indicate a
lubrication system malfunction. Immediate
service should be obtained from an autho-
rized dealer.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized
dealer for service if your vehicle overheats.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
reads greater “H,” pull over and stop the vehicle.
Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned
off until the pointer drops back into the normal
range. If the pointer remains on the “h,” turn the
engine off immediately and call an authorized
dealer for service.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 108
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 109
5. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
6. Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Gauge
The DEF Gauge displays the actual level of
Diesel Exhaust Fluid in the DEF tank. Diesel
Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is required to maintain
normal vehicle operation and emissions
compliance. If something is wrong with the
gauge, a DEF Warning Message or Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light (MIL) will be displayed.
More information is available in the instru-
ment cluster display section under the
heading of Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)
Warning Messages.
NOTE:
The gauge may take up to five seconds to
update after adding a gallon or more of
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) to the DEF tank.
If you have a fault related to the DEF
system, the gauge may not update to the
new level. See an authorized dealer for
service.
The DEF gauge may also not immediately
update after a refill if the temperature of the
DEF fluid is below 39°F (4°C). The DEF tank
heater will warm up the DEF fluid and allow
the gauge to update after a period of run
time. Under very cold conditions, it is
possible that the gauge may not reflect the
new fill level for several drives.
7. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the
ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to
the side of the vehicle where the
fuel filler door is located.
Refer to “Refueling The Vehicle — Gas Engine” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
3
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 109
110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — DIESEL ENGINE
Premium Instrument Cluster — Diesel Engine
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 110
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 111
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
D
ESCRIPTIONS — DIESEL ENGINE
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display
When the appropriate conditions exist,
this display shows the instrument cluster
display messages. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
3. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Gauge
The DEF Gauge displays the actual level of
Diesel Exhaust Fluid in the DEF tank. Diesel
Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is required to maintain
normal vehicle operation and emissions
compliance. If something is wrong with the
gauge, a DEF Warning Message or Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light (MIL) will be displayed.
More information is available in the instru-
ment cluster display section under the
heading of Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)
Warning Messages.
NOTE:
The DEF tank on these vehicles is designed
with a large amount of full reserve. So the
level sensor will indicate a full reading even
before the tank is completely full. To put it
another way, there’s additional storage
capacity in the tank above the Full mark
that’s not represented in the gauge. You
may not see any movement in the reading –
even after driving up to 200 miles
(322 kilometers) in some cases.
The gauge may take up to five seconds to
update after adding a gallon or more of
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) to the DEF tank.
If you have a fault related to the DEF
system, the gauge may not update to the
new level. See an authorized dealer for
service.
The DEF gauge may also not immediately
update after a refill if the temperature of the
DEF fluid is below 39°F (4°C). The DEF tank
heater will warm up the DEF fluid and allow
the gauge to update after a period of run
time. Under very cold conditions, it is
possible that the gauge may not reflect the
new fill level for several drives.
5. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the
ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to
the side of the vehicle where the
fuel filler door is located.
Refer to “Refueling The Vehicle — Gas Engine” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle will be equipped with an instrument
cluster display, which offers useful information to
the driver. With the ignition in the OFF mode,
opening/closing of a door will activate the display
for viewing, and display the total miles, or
kilometers, in the odometer. Your instrument
cluster display is designed to display important
information about your vehicle’s systems and
features. Using a driver interactive display located
on the instrument panel, your instrument cluster
display can show you how systems are working and
give you warnings when they are not. The steering
wheel mounted controls allow you to scroll through
the main menus and submenus. You can access
the specific information you want and make
selections and adjustments.
3
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 111
112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
C
ONTROLS
The instrument cluster display features a driver
interactive display that is located in the instrument
cluster.
Base Instrument Cluster Display
Premium Instrument Cluster Display
The instrument cluster display menu items may
consist of the following:
Speedometer
Vehicle Info
Driver Assist — If Equipped
Fuel Economy
Trip Info
Trailer Tow — If Equipped
Audio
Messages
Screen Set Up
Commercial Settings — If Equipped
The system allows the driver to select information
by pushing the following instrument cluster display
control buttons located on the left side of the
steering wheel:
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
Up Arrow Button
Push and release the
up arrow button
to scroll upward through the main
menu items, submenu screen, and
vehicle settings.
Down Arrow Button
Push and release the
down arrow
button to scroll downward through the
main menu items, submenu screen,
and vehicle settings.
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 112
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 113
Right Arrow Button
Push and release the
right arrow
button to access/select the informa-
tion screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item. Push and hold the
right arrow button for two seconds to reset
displayed/selected features that can be reset.
Left Arrow Button
Push and release the
left arrow button
to access/select the information
screens, submenu screens of a main
menu item, or to return to the main
menu.
OIL LIFE RESET
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required”
message will display in the instrument cluster
display after a single chime has sounded, to
indicate the next scheduled oil change interval.
The engine oil change indicator system is duty
cycle based, which means the engine oil change
interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your
personal driving style.
NOTE:
Use the steering wheel instrument cluster display
controls for the following procedure.
Oil Life Reset Procedure
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the
ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not start
the engine).
2. Push and release the down arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu to
“Vehicle Info.”
3. Push and release the
right arrow button to
access the ”Vehicle Info” screen, then scroll up
or down to select “Oil Life.”
4. Push and hold the
right arrow button to select
“Reset”.
5. Push and release the
down arrow button to
select “Yes,” then push and release the
right arrow button to reset the Oil Life to 100%.
6. Push and release the
up arrow button to exit
the instrument cluster display screen.
Secondary Method Of Resetting Engine Oil Life
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the
ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not start
the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three
times within ten seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button once to return the
ignition to the OFF position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you start
the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
DISPLAY MENU ITEMS
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
the desired selectable menu icon is highlighted in
the instrument cluster display.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in this
chapter for further information.
Speedometer
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
the speedometer menu item is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release the
right arrow button to cycle the display between
mph and km/h.
3
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 113
114 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicle Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
the Vehicle Info menu item is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release the
right arrow button to enter the submenus items of
Vehicle Info. Follow the directional prompts to
access or reset any of the following Vehicle Info
submenu items:
Tire Pressure
Coolant Temperature
Transmission Temperature — If Equipped
Oil Temperature
Oil Pressure
Exhaust Brake — If Equipped
Turbo Boost — If Equipped
Oil Life
Fuel Filter Life — If Equipped
Battery Voltage
Gauge Summary
Engine Hours
Driver Assist — If Equipped
The Driver Assist menu displays the status of the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) and LaneSense
systems.
Push and release the
up or down arrow button until
the Driver Assist menu is displayed in the
instrument cluster display.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Feature
The instrument cluster display displays the current
ACC system settings. The information displayed
depends on ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button (located on the steering wheel) until one of
the following displays in the instrument cluster
display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed
setting has not been selected, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the
steering wheel) and the following will display in the
instrument cluster display:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
instrument cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the
following:
Distance Setting Change
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) — If Equipped” in “Starting And
Operating.”
LaneSense — If Equipped
The instrument cluster display displays the current
LaneSense system settings. The information
displayed depends on LaneSense system status
and the conditions that need to be met. For further
information, refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped” in
“Starting And Operating.”
Fuel Economy
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
the Fuel Economy menu item is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push and Hold the
right arrow button to reset Average Fuel Economy.
Current Fuel Economy Gauge
Average Fuel Economy Value
Range To Empty
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 114
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 115
Trip A/Trip B
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
the Trip menu item is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display. Push and release the
right arrow
button to enter the submenus of Trip A and Trip B.
The Trip A or Trip B information will display the
following:
Distance
Average Fuel Economy
Elapsed Time
Push and hold
right arrow button to reset all
information.
Trailer Tow — If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
the Trailer Tow menu item is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release the
right arrow button and the next screen will display
the following trailer trip information:
Trip Distance (trailer specific): Push and hold
the
right arrow button to reset the distance.
Trailer Brake
Output
Type
Gain
Trailer Tire Pressure — If Equipped
Audio
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
the Audio Menu icon/title is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. This menu will display
the audio source information, including the Song
name, Artist name, and audio source with an
accompanying graphic.
Phone Call Status
When a call is incoming, a Phone Call Status
pop-up will display on the screen. The pop-up will
remain until the phone is answered or ignored.
NOTE:
The call status will temporarily replace the
previous media source information displayed on
the screen. When the pop-up is no longer
displayed, the display will return to the last used
screen.
Stored Messages
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
the Messages Menu item is highlighted. This
feature shows the number of stored warning
messages. Push and release the
right or left arrow
button to cycle through stored messages.
Screen Setup Menu Item
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
the Screen Setup menu item is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release the
right arrow button to enter the Screen Setup
submenu. The Screen Setup feature allows you to
change what information is displayed in the
instrument cluster as well as the location that
information is displayed.
Current Gear — If Equipped
Off (Default Setting)
On
Odometer
Unit Without Decimal (Default Setting)
Unit With Decimal
Favorite Menu
Speedometer
Vehicle Info
Driver Assist (Show/Hide) — If Equipped
Fuel Economy (Show/Hide)
Trip Info (Show/Hide)
Trailer Tow (Show/Hide) — If Equipped
Audio (Show/Hide)
3
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 115
116 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Messages
Screen Setup
Commercial Settings — If Equipped
NOTE:
Menus with (Show/Hide) can push the
Right arrow
button to choose whether to show or hide this
menu in the instrument cluster display.
Upper Left
None
Compass (Default Setting) — If Equipped
Outside Temp — If Equipped
Time
Range To Empty
Average MPG
Current MPG
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
Trailer Trip — If Equipped
Trailer Brake — If Equipped
Oil Pressure — If Equipped
Coolant Temperature — If Equipped
Oil Temperature — If Equipped
Battery Voltage — If Equipped
Transmission Temperature — If Equipped
Oil Life — If Equipped
Exhaust Brake — If Equipped
Turbo Boost — If Equipped
Fuel Filter Life — If Equipped
Center
None
Compass
Outside Temp
Time
Range To Empty
Average MPG
Current MPG
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
Trailer Trip — If Equipped
Audio
Speedometer (Default Setting)
Menu Title
Upper Right
None
Compass — If Equipped
Outside Temp (Default Setting) — If Equipped
Time
Range To Empty
Average MPG
Current MPG
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
Trailer Trip — If Equipped
Trailer Brake — If Equipped
Oil Pressure — If Equipped
Coolant Temperature — If Equipped
Oil Temperature — If Equipped
Battery Voltage — If Equipped
Transmission Temperature — If Equipped
Oil Life — If Equipped
Exhaust Brake — If Equipped
Turbo Boost — If Equipped
Fuel Filter Life — If Equipped
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 116
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 117
Left Side — If Equipped
None
Range
Average MPG
Menu Icon (Default Setting)
Coolant Temperature
Oil Temperature
Transmission Temperature
Oil Life
Fuel Filter Life — If Equipped
Right Side — If Equipped
None
Range (Default Setting)
Average MPG
Menu Icon
Coolant Temperature
Oil Temperature
Transmission Temperature
Oil Life
Fuel Filter Life — If Equipped
Lower Left — If Equipped
None
Compass
Outside Temp
Time
Range To Empty
Average MPG
Current MPG
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
Trailer Trip
Trailer Brake
Oil Pressure
Coolant Temperature
Oil Temperature
Battery Voltage (Default Setting)
Transmission Temperature
Oil Life
Exhaust Brake — If Equipped
Turbo Boost — If Equipped
Fuel Filter Life — If Equipped
Lower Right — If Equipped
None
Compass
Outside Temp
Time
Range To Empty
Average MPG
Current MPG
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
Trailer Trip
Trailer Brake
Oil Pressure (Default Setting)
Coolant Temperature
Oil Temperature
Battery Voltage
Transmission Temperature
Oil Life
Exhaust Brake — If Equipped
Turbo Boost — If Equipped
Fuel Filter Life — If Equipped
Restore Defaults
Cancel (Default Setting)
Restore
3
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 117
118 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Settings — If Equipped
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK.
Push and release the
up and down buttons until Settings displays in the instrument cluster display.
Follow the prompts to display and set any of the following Vehicle Settings.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following settings.
If equipped with a base radio (Non-Touchscreen) Vehicle Settings will be included in the instrument cluster display.
If equipped with a Touchscreen radio, the Vehicle Settings will be included in the radio head unit.
Setting Names
Setting Names Abbreviated
(Left Submenu Layer)
Submenus (Right Submenu Layer)
Language Select Language English, Spanish, French, Italian, German, Dutch, Arabic
Units Units U.S.; Metric
ParkSense ParkSense
Front Volume — Low; Medium; High
Rear Volume — Low; Medium; High
Tilt Mirror in Reverse Tilt Mirror in R On; Off
Rain Sensing Wipers Auto Wipers On; Off
Hill Start Assist Hill Start Assist On; Off
Headlights Off Delay Lights Off Delay 0 seconds; 30 seconds; 60 seconds; 90 seconds
Illuminated Approach Lights w/ Unlock 0 seconds; 30 seconds; 60 seconds; 90 seconds
Headlights On with Wipers Lights w/ Wipers On; Off
Automatic High Beams Auto High Beams On; Off
Daytime Running Lights Daytime Lights On; Off
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 118
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 119
Flash Lights with Lock Lights w/ Lock On; Off
Auto Lock Doors Auto Lock Doors On; Off
Auto Unlock Doors Auto Unlock Doors On; Off
Sound Horn with Remote Start Horn w/ Remote Start On; Off
Sound Horn with Remote Lock Horn w/ Remote Lock Off; 1st Press; 2nd Press
Remote Unlock Sequence Remote Unlock Driver Door; All Doors
Key Fob Linked to Memory Key in Memory On; Off
Passive Entry Passive Entry On; Off
Remote Start Comfort System Remote Start Comfort Off; Remote Start; All starts
Easy Exit Seat Easy Exit Seat On; Off
Key-off Power Delay Power Off Delay Off; 45 seconds; 5 minutes; 10 minutes
Commercial Settings Commercial
Aux Switches
Power Take-Off
PIN Setup
NOTE:
If the vehicle’s PIN is forgotten or not known, see an authorized dealer to have
the PIN reset.
Trailer Select Trailer Select Trailer 1; Trailer 2; Trailer 3; Trailer 4
Brake Type Brake Type Light Electric; Heavy Electric; Light EOH; Heavy EOH
Setting Names
Setting Names Abbreviated
(Left Submenu Layer)
Submenus (Right Submenu Layer)
3
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 119
120 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Trailer Name Trailer Name
Trailer # (# is equal to slot position)
Boat
Car
Cargo
Dump
Equipment
Flatbed
Gooseneck
Horse
Livestock
Motorcycle
Snowmobile
Travel
Utility
5th Wheel
Compass Variance Compass Var 1-15 increments of 1
Calibrate Compass Compass Cal Cancel; Calibrate
Fuel Saver Display Fuel Saver On; Off
Setting Names
Setting Names Abbreviated
(Left Submenu Layer)
Submenus (Right Submenu Layer)
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 120
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 121
Commercial Settings — If Equipped
Commercial Settings allows the driver to set and
recall additional features when the transmission is
in PARK (P).
Push and release the
up and down arrow buttons
until Commercial Settings displays in the
instrument cluster display.
Follow the prompts to enter the required PIN and
enter the Commercial Settings submenu.
Commercial Settings allows you to access the
following features (if equipped):
Backup Alarm — If Equipped
ParkSense — If Equipped
Aux Switches
PIN Setup
NOTE:
If the vehicle’s PIN is forgotten or not known, see
an authorized dealer to have the PIN reset.
DIESEL MESSAGES AND WARNINGS —
6.7L C
UMMINS DIESEL ENGINE
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Messages
The Cummins diesel engine meets all diesel
emissions standards, resulting in one of the lowest
emitting diesel engines ever produced. To achieve
these emissions standards, your vehicle is
equipped with a state-of-the-art engine and
exhaust system. These systems are seamlessly
integrated into your vehicle and managed by the
Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM
manages engine combustion to allow the exhaust
system’s catalyst to trap and burn Particulate
Matter (PM) pollutants, with no input or interaction
on your part.
Your vehicle has the ability to alert you to
additional maintenance required on your vehicle or
engine. The following messages may display in
your instrument cluster display:
Perform Service — Your vehicle will require emis-
sions maintenance at a set interval. To help
remind you when this maintenance is due, the
instrument cluster display will display “Perform
Service”. When the “Perform Service” message
is displayed in the instrument cluster display it is
necessary to have the emissions maintenance
performed. Emissions maintenance may
include replacing the Closed Crankcase
Ventilation (CCV) filter element.
The procedure for clearing and resetting the
"Perform Service" indicator message is located
in the appropriate Service Information.
Exhaust System — Regeneration Required Now
— "Exhaust Filter XX% Full Safely Drive at
Highway Speeds to Remedy" will be displayed in
the instrument cluster display if the exhaust
particulate filter reaches 80% of its maximum
storage capacity. Under conditions of exclusive
short duration and low speed driving cycles,
your Cummins diesel engine and exhaust
after-treatment system may never reach the
conditions required to remove the trapped
Particulate Matter (PM). If this occurs, the
“Exhaust Filter XX% Full Safely Drive at Highway
Speeds to Remedy” message will be displayed
in the instrument cluster display. If this
message is displayed, you will hear one chime
to assist in alerting you of this condition
By simply driving your vehicle at highway speeds
for as little as 45 minutes, you can remedy the
condition in the particulate filter system and
allow your Cummins diesel engine and exhaust
after-treatment system to remove the trapped
Particulate Matter (PM) and restore the system
to normal operating condition.
Exhaust System — Regeneration In Process
Exhaust Filter XX% Full — Indicates that the DPF
is self-cleaning. Maintain your current driving
condition until regeneration is completed.
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials
might be grass or leaves coming into contact with
your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your
vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can
contact anything that can burn.
3
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 121
122 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Exhaust System — Regeneration Completed —
This message indicates that the DPF
self-cleaning is completed. If this message is
displayed, you will hear one chime to assist in
alerting you of this condition.
Exhaust Service Required — See Dealer Now —
This message indicates regeneration has been
disabled due to a system malfunction. At this
point the engine Powertrain Control Module
(PCM) will register a fault code, the instrument
panel will display a MIL light.
Exhaust Filter Full — Power Reduced See Dealer
— This message indicates the PCM has derated
the engine to limit the likelihood of permanent
damage to the after-treatment system. If this
condition is not corrected and a dealer service is
not performed, extensive exhaust after-treat-
ment damage can occur. To correct this condi-
tion it will be necessary to have your vehicle
serviced by your local authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Failing to follow the oil change indicator, changing
your oil and resetting the oil change indicator by
0 miles remaining will prevent the diesel exhaust
filter from performing it's cleaning routine. This will
shortly result in a Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
and reduced engine power. Only an authorized
dealer will be able to correct this condition.
Cold Ambient Derate Mode Messages
The vehicle will display messages when a derate
(engine power reduction) is activated to protect the
engine during start up in cold ambient
temperatures.
Engine Power Reduced During Warm-Up — This
message will display during start up when the
ambient temperature is between 10°F (-12°C)
and -10°F (-23°C).
Engine Power Reduced Up To 30 Sec (Seconds)
During Warm-Up — This message will display
during start up when the ambient temperature
is between -10°F (-23°C) and -25°F (-32°C).
Engine Power Reduced Up To 2 Min (Minutes)
During Warm-Up — This message will display
during start up when the ambient temperature
is -25°F (-32°C) and below.
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine warm
up protection feature that may limit engine
performance after cold starting at low ambient
temperatures. The length of time engine speed
is limited is dependent upon engine coolant
temperature. Engine speed may be briefly
limited to 1000 RPM after starting with coolant
temperature below freezing conditions, and
may be limited to 1000 RPM for up to
approximately 2 minutes under more severe
cold conditions.
Coolant Low — This telltale will turn on to indi-
cate the vehicle coolant level is low. Refer to
“Dealer Service” in “Servicing And Mainte-
nance” for more information.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Warning
Messages
There are four different messages which are
displayed if the vehicle detects that the DEF
system has been filled with a fluid other than DEF,
has experienced component failures, or when
tampering has been detected. The vehicle may be
limited to a maximum speed of 5 MPH (8 km/H) if
the DEF system is not serviced within less than
200 miles (322 km) of the fault being detected.
CAUTION!
See an authorized dealer, as damage to the
exhaust system could occur soon with continued
operation.
CAUTION!
See an authorized dealer, as damage to the
exhaust system could occur soon with continued
operation.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 122
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 123
When the DEF system needs to be serviced the
following warnings will display:
DEF Low Refill Soon — This message will display
when the low level is reached, during vehicle
start up, and with increased frequency during
vehicle operation. It will be accompanied by a
single chime. Approximately 5 gallons
(19 Liters) of DEF is required to refill the tank
when this message is initially displayed. on
pickup applications, and approximately
7 gallons (26 Liters) are required on chassis-cab
applications.
Speed Limited to 5 MPH in XXX mi Refill DEF —
This message will continuously display if the
“DEF Low Refill Soon” message is ignored, and
the frequency of occurrence of the chime will
increase unless up to 2 gallons (7.5 Liters) of
DEF is added to the tank.
5 MPH Max Speed on Restart, Long Idle or
Refuel Refill DEF — This message will continu-
ously display when the counter reaches zero,
and will be accompanied by a periodic chime.
The vehicle will only be capable of a maximum
speed of 5 MPH upon the first of the following
conditions to occur:
If the vehicle is shutoff and restarted.
If the vehicle is idled for an extended period
of time, approximately one hour or greater.
If the system detects that the level of fuel in
the tank has increased.
Add a minimum of 2 gallons (7.5 Liters) of DEF
to the tank in order to avoid vehicle operation at
a maximum speed of 5 MPH (8 km/H).
NOTE:
A minimum of 2 gallons (7.5 Liters) may be
required to restore normal vehicle operation.
Although the vehicle will start normally and can be
placed in gear after this message has been initially
displayed, extreme caution should be utilized since
the vehicle will only be capable of maneuvering at
a maximum speed of 5 MPH (8 km/H).
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fault Warning
Messages
There are five different messages which are
displayed if the vehicle detects that the DEF
system has been filled with a fluid other than DEF,
has experienced component failures, or when
tampering has been detected. The vehicle may be
limited to a maximum speed of 5 MPH (8 km/H) if
the DEF system is not serviced within less than
200 miles (322 km) of the fault being detected.
When the DEF system needs to be serviced the
following warnings will display:
Service DEF System See Dealer — This message
will display when the fault is initially detected,
each time the vehicle is started, and periodically
during driving. The message will be accompa-
nied by a single chime. We recommend you
drive to your nearest authorized dealer and
have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible.
5 MPH Max Speed in 150 mi Service DEF
System See Dealer — This message will display
if the DEF system has not been serviced after
the “Service DEF System – See Dealer”
message is displayed. This message will contin-
uously display until the mileage counter reaches
zero, and will be accompanied by a periodic
chime. The message will continue to countdown
until it reaches zero unless the vehicle is
serviced. We recommend you drive to your
nearest authorized dealer and have your vehicle
serviced immediately.
NOTE:
Under some circumstances this mileage counter
may start with a value of less than 150 miles
(241 km). For example, if recurring faults are
detected in a time interval of less than 40 hours,
the counter may restart at the value where it
stopped when a previous fault was temporarily
remedied, or at a minimum of 50 miles (80 km).
5 MPH Max Speed on Restart, Long Idle or
Refuel Service DEF See Dealer — This message
will continuously display when the mileage
counter reaches zero, and will be accompanied
by a periodic chime.
3
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 123
124 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The vehicle will only be capable of a maximum
speed of 5 MPH upon the first of the following
conditions to occur:
If the vehicle is shutoff and restarted.
If the vehicle is idled for an extended period
of time, approximately one hour or greater.
If the system detects that the level of fuel in
the tank has increased.
5 MPH Max Speed Service DEF System See
Dealer — This message will continuously display,
and will be accompanied by a periodic chime.
Although the vehicle can be started and placed
in gear, the vehicle will only operate at a
maximum speed of 5 MPH. Your vehicle will
require towing, see an authorized dealer for
service.
NOTE:
When this message is displayed, the engine can
still be started. However, the vehicle will only
operate at a maximum speed of 5 MPH.
Incorrect DEF Detected See Dealer — This
message will display when the fault is initially
detected, each time the vehicle is started, and
periodically during driving. The message will be
accompanied by a single chime. We recom-
mend you drive to your nearest authorized
dealer and have your vehicle serviced as soon
as possible.
RAM Active Air System
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Ram
Active Air system that provides enhanced
performance, especially when towing under
demanding hot or high altitude conditions. If the
instrument cluster display displays the message
“Active Airbox Service Required See Dealer”,
vehicle performance may be reduced until service
is performed by an authorized RAM dealer.
BATTERY SAVER ON/BATTERY SAVER
M
ODE MESSAGE — ELECTRICAL LOAD
R
EDUCTION ACTIONS — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery
Sensor (IBS) to perform additional monitoring of
the electrical system and status of the vehicle
battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system
failure, or the vehicle battery conditions are
deteriorating, electrical load reduction actions will
take place to extend the driving time and distance
of the vehicle. This is done by reducing power to or
turning off non-essential electrical loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is
running. It will display a message if there is a risk
of battery depletion to the point where the vehicle
may stall due to lack of electrical supply, or will not
restart after the current drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message
“Battery Saver On Some Systems May Have
Reduced Power” will appear in the instrument
cluster.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a
low state of charge and continues to lose electrical
charge at a rate that the charging system cannot
sustain.
NOTE:
The charging system is independent from load
reduction. The charging system performs a
diagnostic on the charging system continuously.
If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may
indicate a problem with the charging system.
Refer to “Warning Lights And Messages” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
The electrical loads that may be switched off
(if equipped), and vehicle functions which can be
affected by load reduction:
Heated Seats/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
HVAC System
115 Volts AC Power Inverter System
Audio and Telematics System
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 124
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 125
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or
more of the following conditions:
The charging system cannot deliver enough
electrical power to the vehicle system because
the electrical loads are larger than the capability
of charging system. The charging system is still
functioning properly.
Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads
(e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior
lights, overloaded power outlets +12 Volts,
115 Volts AC, USB ports) during certain
driving conditions (city driving, towing, frequent
stopping).
Installing options like additional lights, upfitter
electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms
and similar devices.
Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by
long parking periods).
The vehicle was parked for an extended period
of time (weeks, months).
The battery was recently replaced and was not
charged completely.
The battery was discharged by an electrical load
left on when the vehicle was parked.
The battery was used for an extended period
with the engine not running to supply radio,
lights, chargers, +12 Volts portable appliances
like vacuum cleaners, game consoles and
similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction
action message is present (“Battery Saver On” or
“Battery Saver Mode”)
During a trip:
Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
Turn off redundant lights (interior or
exterior).
Check what may be plugged in to power
outlets +12 Volts, 115 Volts AC, USB ports.
Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature).
Check the audio settings (volume).
After a trip:
Check if any aftermarket equipment was
installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical
accessories, audio systems, alarms) and review
specifications if any (load and Ignition Off Draw
currents).
Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance,
driving time and parking time).
The vehicle should have service performed if
the message is still present during consecutive
trips and the evaluation of the vehicle and
driving pattern did not help to identify the cause.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the
instrument panel together with a dedicated
message and/or acoustic signal when applicable.
These indications are indicative and precautionary
and as such must not be considered as exhaustive.
Always refer to the information in this chapter in
the event of a failure indication. All active telltales
will display first if applicable. The system check
menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status.
Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the
driver or passenger seat belt is
unbuckled. When the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position and if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled,
a chime will sound and the light will turn on. When
driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt
remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will flash or remain on continuously and a chime
will sound.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information.
3
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 125
126 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault with the air bag, and will
turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb
check when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position. This light will
illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the
air bag has been detected, it will stay on until the
fault is cleared. If the light is either not on during
startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have
the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake
functions, including brake fluid level and
parking brake application. If the brake
light turns on it may indicate that the
parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level
is low, or that there is a problem with the Anti-Lock
Brake System reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has
been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full
mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates
a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or
that a problem with the Brake Booster has been
detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) /
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this
case, the light will remain on until the condition has
been corrected. If the problem is related to the
brake booster, the ABS pump will run when
applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation
may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking
capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the
hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual
brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning
Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level
in the master cylinder has dropped below a
specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level
conditions. The vehicle should have service
performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake
Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD
failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along
with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS
system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF
position to the ON/RUN position. The light should
illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light
should then turn off unless the parking brake is
applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does
not illuminate, have the light inspected by an
authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake
is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake appli-
cation.
Hood Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
hood is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have
failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You
could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked
immediately.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 126
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 127
Vehicle Security Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for
approximately 15 seconds when the
vehicle security alarm is arming, and
then will flash slowly until the vehicle
is disarmed.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
This warning light warns of an
overheated engine condition. If the
engine coolant temperature is too high,
this indicator will illuminate and a single
chime will sound. If the temperature reaches the
upper limit, a continuous chime will sound for four
minutes or until the engine is able to cool;
whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over
and stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C)
system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission
into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the
temperature reading does not return to normal,
turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
battery is not charging properly. If it stays
on while the engine is running, there may
be a malfunction with the charging
system. Contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the
electrical system or a related component.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate low engine oil pressure. If the
light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as
possible, and contact an authorized dealer.
A chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil
is in the engine. The engine oil level must be
checked under the hood.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the engine oil temperature is
high. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle and shut off the engine
as soon as possible. Wait for oil temperature to
return to normal levels.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)
Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a problem with the Electronic
Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the vehicle is
running, the light will either stay on or flash
depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the
ignition when the vehicle is safely and completely
stopped and the transmission is placed in the
PARK (P) position. The light should turn off. If the
light remains on with the vehicle running, your
vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and
brake pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
running, immediate service is required and you
may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/
ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
3
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 127
128 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
Trailer Brake has been disconnected.
Refer to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
Transmission Temperature Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to warn
of a high transmission fluid temperature.
This may occur with strenuous usage
such as trailer towing. If this light turns
on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or
slightly faster, with the transmission in PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N), until the light turns off. Once the light
turns off, you may continue to drive normally.
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a
door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single
chime.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault in the ACC system.
Contact a local authorized dealer for
service.
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)” in “Starting And Operating.”
Air Suspension Fault Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light will illuminate when a fault is
detected with the air suspension system.
Refer to “Air Suspension System — If Equipped” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Warning Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard
Diagnostic System called OBD II that
monitors engine and automatic
transmission control systems. This warning light
will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position before engine start. If the bulb does not
come on when turning the ignition switch from OFF
to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas
cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light
after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if
the light stays on through several typical driving
styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive
normally and will not require towing.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is
illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over,
come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light illuminated will
eventually cause severe transmission damage
or transmission failure.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 128
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 129
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to
alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced
by an authorized dealer as soon as possible if this
occurs.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when the
Electronic Stability Control system is
Active. The “ESC Indicator Light” in the
instrument cluster will come on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position, and when ESC is activated. It should go
out with the engine running. If the “ESC Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the
ESC system. If this warning light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer
as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indi-
cator Light” come on momentarily each time the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
This light will come on when the vehicle is in an
ESC event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or ACC/
ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it was
turned off previously.
LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense system provides the
driver with visual and steering torque
warnings when the vehicle starts to drift
out of its lane unintentionally without the
use of a turn signal.
When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift
situation, the LaneSense indicator changes
from solid green to solid yellow.
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane departure
situation, the LaneSense indicator changes
from solid white/green to flashing yellow.
Refer to “LaneSense – If Equipped” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as
referenced above, can reach higher
temperatures than in normal operating
conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could
result in death or serious injury to the driver,
occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the
vehicle control system. It also could affect fuel
economy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing,
severe catalytic converter damage and power
loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
3
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 129
130 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Service LaneSense Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
LaneSense system is not operating and
requires service. Please see an
authorized dealer.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
windshield washer fluid is low.
Refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for further information.
Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches
approximately 3.2 gal (12 L) this light will
turn on, and remain on until fuel is
added.
A single warning chime will sound with Low Fuel
Warning.
Low Coolant Level Warning Light
This telltale will turn on to indicate the
vehicle coolant level is low.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
fuel filler cap is loose. Properly close the
filler cap to disengage the light. If the
light does not turn off, please see an
authorized dealer.
Trailer Merge Assist Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate to
indicate when Trailer Merge Assist has
been activated.
Refer to “Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)” in
“Safety” for further information.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a
message is displayed to indicate that
the tire pressure is lower than the
recommended value and/or that slow
pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal
tire duration and fuel consumption may not be
guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition
mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should
be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the
inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle
manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of
a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure
for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is significantly
underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat
tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the
vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a
tire puncture occurs, repair immediately using
the dedicated tire repair kit and contact an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 130
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 131
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if underinflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system
is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction
indicator is combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximately one minute
and then remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When
the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
This warning light monitors the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/
RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is required as
soon as possible. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally,
assuming the Brake Warning Light is not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position,
have the brake system inspected by an authorized
dealer.
Rear Axle Locker Fault Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate when a rear axle locker fault has
been detected.
Refer to “Axle Locker System — Power Wagon
Models Only (If Equipped)” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault in the Forward Collision
Warning System. Contact an authorized
dealer for service.
Refer to "Forward Collision Warning (FCW)" in
"Safety" for further information.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warning have been established for the tire
size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable
system operation or sensor damage may result
when using replacement equipment that is not
of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket
wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to
become inoperable. After using an aftermarket
tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
3
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 131
132 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to signal
a fault with the 4WD system. If the light
stays on or comes on during driving, it
means that the 4WD system is not
functioning properly and that service is required.
We recommend you drive to the nearest service
center and have the vehicle serviced immediately.
Speed Control Fault Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the Speed Control System is not
functioning properly and service is
required. Contact an authorized dealer.
Sway Bar Fault Warning Light
This light will illuminate when there is a
fault in the sway bar disconnect system.
Refer to “Stabilizer/Sway Bar System — Power
Wagon Only” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to indicate
that Forward Collision Warning is off.
Refer to “Auxiliary Driving Systems” in “Safety” for
further information.
Air Suspension Payload Protection
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate to
indicate that the maximum payload may
have been exceeded or load leveling
cannot be achieved at its current ride
height. Protection Mode will automatically be
selected in order to “protect” the air suspension
system, air suspension adjustment is limited due
to payload.
TOW/HAUL Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when
TOW/HAUL mode is selected.
Refer to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
Cargo Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
the cargo light is activated by pushing the
cargo light button on the headlight
switch.
Cold Ambient Derate Mode Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when a
derate (engine power reduction) is
activated for protection of the
turbocharger in cold ambient
temperatures.
For further information, refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel”.
Diesel Exhaust Brake Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
the Diesel Exhaust Brake has been
activated, and is in full strength mode.
Refer to “Diesel Exhaust Brake (Engine Braking)”
in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 132
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 133
Sway Bar Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
the front sway bar is disconnected.
Refer to “Stabilizer/Sway Bar System — Power
Wagon Only” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
Snowplow Mode Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
Snowplow Mode has been activated.
Refer to “Snowplow” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
Air Suspension Alternate Trailer Height
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the air
suspension system is set to the Alternate
Trailer Height setting.
Refer to “Air Suspension System — If Equipped” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
Air Suspension Bed Lowering Mode
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the Bed
Lowering Mode procedure is complete.
Refer to “Air Suspension System — If Equipped” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
Air Suspension Ride Height Raising
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will blink and alert the driver
that the vehicle is changing to a higher
ride height.
Refer to “Air Suspension System — If Equipped” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
Air Suspension Ride Height Lowering
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will blink and alert the driver
that the vehicle is changing to a lower
ride height.
Refer to “Air Suspension System — If Equipped” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
Front And Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
This light indicates when the front, rear,
or both axles have been locked. The
telltale will display the lock icon on the
front and rear axles to indicate the
current lock status.
Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
This light indicates when the rear axle
lock has been activated.
Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation —
If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
4WD Lock Indicator Light
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle
is in the four-wheel drive LOCK mode.
The front and rear driveshafts are
mechanically locked together, forcing the
front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.
Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information on
four-wheel drive operation and proper use.
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle
is in the four-wheel drive LOW mode.
The front and rear driveshafts are
mechanically locked together forcing the
front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.
Low range provides a greater gear reduction ratio
to provide increased torque at the wheels.
Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation —
If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information on four-wheel drive operation and
proper use.
3
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 133
134 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4WD High Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle
is in the four-wheel drive HIGH mode.
The front and rear driveshafts are
mechanically locked together forcing the
front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.
NEUTRAL Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the 4WD
power transfer case is in the NEUTRAL
mode and the front and rear driveshafts
are disengaged from the powertrain.
Low Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Indicator
Light — If Equipped
The Low Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)
Indicator will illuminate if the vehicle is
low on Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF). Refer
to “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
Wait To Start Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate for
approximately two seconds when the
ignition is turned to the RUN position. Its
duration may be longer based on colder
operating conditions. Vehicle will not initiate start
until telltale is no longer displayed.
Refer to “Starting The Engine” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
NOTE:
The “Wait To Start” telltale may not illuminate if the
intake manifold temperature is warm enough.
Water In Fuel Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “Water In Fuel Indicator Light” will
illuminate when there is water detected
in the fuel filter. If this light remains on,
DO NOT start the vehicle before you drain
the water from the fuel filter to prevent engine
damage.
Refer to the “Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter”
section in “Dealer Service” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for further information.
GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
Target Light — If Equipped
This will display when the ACC is set and
a target vehicle is detected.
Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) —
If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No
Target Detected Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light will turn on when the Adaptive
Cruise Control is SET and there is no
target vehicle detected.
Refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) —
If Equipped" in "Starting And Operating" for further
information.
Automatic Diesel Exhaust Brake Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
the Diesel Exhaust Brake has been
activated, and has switched to
Automatic mode.
Refer to “Diesel Exhaust Brake — Engine Braking
(If Equipped)” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
ECO Mode Indicator Light
This light will turn on when ECO Mode
is active.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 134
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 135
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when
the park lights or headlights are turned
on.
Refer to “Exterior Lights” in “Getting To Know Your
Vehicle” for further information.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense indicator light illuminates
solid green when both lane markings
have been detected and the system is
“armed” and ready to provide visual and
torque warnings if an unintentional lane departure
occurs.
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
the front fog lights are on.
Refer to “Exterior Lights” in “Getting To
Know Your Vehicle” for further information.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is
activated, the turn signal indicator will
flash independently and the
corresponding exterior turn signal lamps
will flash. Turn signals can be activated when
the multifunction lever is moved down (left) or
up (right).
NOTE:
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if
either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
If equipped with fog lamps, the fog lamp on the
side of the activated turn signal will also illumi-
nate to provide additional light when turning.
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
the cruise control is set to the desired
speed. Refer to “Speed Control” in
“Starting And Operating” for further
information.
WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready
Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the vehicle
equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) has been turned on but not set.
Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If
Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
Cruise Control Ready Indicator
This indicator light will illuminate when
the cruise control is ready, but not set.
Refer to “Speed Control” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This indicator shows when the Hill
Descent Control (HDC) feature is turned
on. The lamp will be on solid when HDC is
armed. HDC can only be armed when the
transfer case is in the “4WD LOW” position and the
vehicle speed is less then 20 mph (32 km/h). If
these conditions are not met while attempting to
use the HDC feature, the HDC indicator light will
flash on/off.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON, but
not armed, the LaneSense indicator light
illuminates solid white. This occurs when
only left, right, or neither lane line has
been detected. If a single lane line is detected, the
system is ready to provide only visual warnings if
an unintentional lane departure occurs on the
detected lane line.
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
3
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 135
136 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to
indicate that the high beam headlights
are on. With the low beams activated,
push the multifunction lever forward
(toward the front of the vehicle) to turn on the high
beams. Pull the multifunction lever rearward
(toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the high
beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever
toward you for a temporary high beam on, "flash to
pass" scenario.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II.
This system monitors the performance of the
emissions, engine, and transmission control
systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine
emissions well within current government
regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the
OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and
other information to assist your service technician
in making repairs. Although your vehicle will
usually be drivable and not need towing, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
(OBD II) C
YBERSECURITY
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard
Diagnostic system (OBD II) and a connection port
to allow access to information related to the
performance of your emissions controls.
Authorized service technicians may need to access
this information to assist with the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle and emissions system.
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in
“Multimedia”.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control
system. It could also affect fuel economy and
driveability. The vehicle must be serviced
before any emissions tests can be performed.
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is
running, severe catalytic converter damage
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
WARNING!
ONLY an authorized service technician should
connect equipment to the OBD II connection
port in order to read the VIN, diagnose, or
service your vehicle.
If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
OBD II connection port, such as a
driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
Be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be
impaired or a loss of vehicle control could
occur that may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
Access, or allow others to access, infor-
mation stored in your vehicle systems,
including personal information.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 136
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 137
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to
pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions
control system. Failure to pass could prevent
vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies
the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” is
functioning and is not on when the
engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready.
The OBD II system may
not be ready if your vehicle
was recently serviced, recently had a depleted
battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II
system should be determined not ready for the
I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station.
To check if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready,
you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position,
but do not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the
ON position, you will see the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” symbol come on as part
of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two
things will happen:
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and
then return to being fully illuminated until
you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine.
This means that your vehicle's OBD II
system is
not ready and you should not
proceed to the I/M station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will remain
fully illuminated until you place the ignition
in the off position or start the engine. This
means that your vehicle's OBD II system is
ready and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
If your OBD II system is
not ready, you should see
an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your
vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery
failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing
more than drive your vehicle as you normally would
in order for your OBD II system to update. A
recheck with the above test routine may then
indicate that the system is
now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system
is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during
normal vehicle operation you should have your
vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station.
The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the
MIL is on with the engine running.
3
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 137
138
(Continued)
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides
increased vehicle stability and brake performance
under most braking conditions. The system
automatically prevents wheel lock, and enhances
vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that
the ABS is working properly each time the vehicle
is started and driven. During this self-check, you
may hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the system
detects one or more wheels begin to lock. Road
conditions such as ice, snow, gravel, bumps,
railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic stops may
increase the likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following when
ABS activates:
The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for
a short time after the stop)
The clicking sound of solenoid valves
Brake pedal pulsations
A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of
the stop
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
ABS is designed to function with the Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modification
may result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will
turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on
or comes on while driving, it indicates that the
anti-lock portion of the brake system is not
functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally if the “Anti-Lock Brake
Warning Light” is on.
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic
equipment that may be susceptible to interfer-
ence caused by improperly installed or high
output radio transmitting equipment. This
interference can cause possible loss of
anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by qual-
ified professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer.
Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you
need to slow down or stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
increase braking or steering efficiency beyond
that afforded by the condition of the vehicle
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, following another vehicle too closely, or
hydroplaning.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner that could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
WARNING!
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 138
SAFETY 139
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the
brake system should be serviced as soon as
possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock brakes.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” does not
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC)
S
YSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system. This system
includes Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD),
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake Assist
System (BAS), Hill Start Assist (HSA), Traction
Control System (TCS), Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These
systems work together to enhance both vehicle
stability and control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer
Sway Control (TSC) and Hill Descent Control (HDC).
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The Brake Assist System (BAS) is designed to
optimize the vehicle’s braking capability during
emergency braking maneuvers. The system
detects an emergency braking situation by sensing
the rate and amount of brake application and
then applies optimum pressure to the brakes.
This can help reduce braking distances. The BAS
complements the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS).
Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best
BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the
system, you must apply continuous braking
pressure during the stopping sequence (do not
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal
pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once
the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
Brake System Warning Light
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on
or comes on while driving, it indicates that the
brake system is not functioning properly and
that immediate service is required. If the “Brake
System Warning Light” does not come on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have the
light repaired as soon as possible.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
This function manages the distribution of the
braking torque between the front and rear axles by
limiting braking pressure to the rear axle. This is
done to prevent overslip of the rear wheels to avoid
vehicle instability, and to prevent the rear axle from
entering Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) before the
front axle.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and
stability of the vehicle under various driving
conditions. Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
corrects for oversteering or understeering of the
vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate
wheel(s) to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
understeer condition. Engine power may also
be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the
desired path.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. BAS cannot prevent
collisions, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the
user's safety or the safety of others.
4
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 139
140 SAFETY
(Continued)
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the
vehicle path intended by the driver and compares
it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual
path does not match the intended path, ESC
applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to
assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer
condition.
Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more
than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less
than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
located in the instrument cluster will start to flash
as soon as the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
also flashes when the TCS is active. If the
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible.
Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road condi-
tions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
planing. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to
inappropriate driver input for the conditions.
Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents. The capabilities of an
ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited
in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
maintain your vehicle, may change the
handling characteristics of your vehicle, and
may negatively affect the performance of the
ESC system. Changes to the steering system,
suspension, braking system, tire type and size
or wheel size may adversely affect ESC perfor-
mance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn
tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any
vehicle modification or poor vehicle mainte-
nance that reduces the effectiveness of the
ESC system can increase the risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
WARNING!
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 140
SAFETY 141
ESC Operating Modes
NOTE:
Depending upon model and mode of operation, the
ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC.
Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system
will be in this mode. This mode should be used for
most driving conditions. Alternate ESC modes
should only be used for specific reasons as noted
in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when
a more spirited driving experience is desired.
This mode may modify TCS and ESC thresholds for
activation, which allows for more wheel spin than
normally allowed. This mode may be useful if the
vehicle becomes stuck.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push
the “ESC OFF” switch and the “ESC OFF Indicator
Light” will illuminate. To turn the ESC on again,
momentarily push the “ESC OFF” switch and the
“ESC OFF Indicator Light” will turn off.
NOTE:
For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes, a
momentary button push will toggle the ESC mode.
Multiple momentary button pushes may be
required to return to “ESC On”.
Full Off — If Equipped
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road
use only and should not be used on any public
roadways. In this mode, TCS and ESC features are
turned off. To enter the “Full Off” mode, push and
hold the “ESC OFF” switch for five seconds while
the vehicle is stopped with the engine running.
After five seconds, a chime will sound, the
“ESC OFF Indicator Light” will illuminate, and the
“ESC OFF” message will display in the instrument
cluster. To turn ESC on again, momentarily push
the “ESC OFF” switch.
NOTE:
System may switch from ESC “Full Off” to “Partial
Off” mode when vehicle exceeds a predetermined
speed. When the vehicle speed slows below the
predetermined speed the system will return to
ESC “Full Off”.
ESC modes may also be affected by drive modes
(if equipped).
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS function-
ality of ESC, except for the limited slip feature
described in the TCS section, has been
disabled and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” will
be illuminated. When in “Partial Off” mode,
the engine power reduction feature of TCS is
disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability
offered by the ESC system is reduced.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when
the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
WARNING!
In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque
reduction and stability features are disabled.
Therefore, enhanced vehicle stability offered
by the ESC system is unavailable. In an emer-
gency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will
not engage to assist in maintaining stability.
ESC “Full Off” mode is intended for
off-highway or off-road use only.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road condi-
tions. ESC cannot prevent all accidents,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot
prevent collisions.
4
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 141
142 SAFETY
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster
will come on when the ignition is turned
to the ON mode. It should go out with the
engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the
engine running, a malfunction has been detected
in the ESC system. If this light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer
as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
(located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as
soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system
becomes active. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” also flashes when TCS is active.
If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible.
Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come
on momentarily each time the ignition is placed
in the ON position.
Each time the ignition is placed in the ON posi-
tion, the ESC system will be on even if it was
turned off previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive
following the maneuver that caused the
ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates
the customer has elected to have the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) in a
reduced mode.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift
by monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and
the speed of the vehicle. When Electronic Roll
Mitigation (ERM) determines that the rate of
change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s
speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift,
it then applies the appropriate brake and may also
reduce engine power to lessen the chance that
wheel lift will occur. ERM can only reduce the
chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or
evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent
wheel lift due to other factors, such as road
conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects
or other vehicles.
NOTE:
ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off”
mode (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Stability
Control (ESC)” in this section for a complete
explanation of the available ESC modes.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
Hill Descent Control (HDC) is intended for low
speed off road driving while in 4L Range. HDC
maintains vehicle speed while descending hills
during various driving situations. HDC controls
vehicle speed by actively controlling the brakes.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road
conditions and driving conditions, influence
the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur.
ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers,
especially those that involve leaving the roadway
or striking objects or other vehicles. The
capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user's safety
or the safety of others.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 142
SAFETY 143
HDC Has Three States:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not
activate)
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but
activation conditions are not met, or driver is
actively overriding with brake or throttle
application)
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively
controlling vehicle speed)
Enabling HDC
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but
the following conditions must also be met to
enable HDC:
Driveline is in 4L Range
Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h)
Parking brake is released
Driver door is closed
Activating HDC
Once HDC is enabled it will activate automatically
if driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude.
The set speed for HDC is selectable by the driver,
and can be adjusted by using the gear shift +/-.
The following summarizes the HDC set speeds:
HDC Target Set Speeds
P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but will
not activate.
R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
NOTE:
During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for
HDC target speed selection, but will not affect the
gear chosen by the transmission. When actively
controlling HDC the transmission will shift appro-
priately for the driver-selected set speed and
corresponding driving conditions.
Driver Override
The driver may override HDC activation with
throttle or brake application at any time.
Deactivating HDC
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any
of the following conditions occur:
Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or
brake application.
Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but
remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).
Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient
magnitude, is on level ground, or is on an
uphill grade.
Vehicle is shifted to PARK.
Disabling HDC
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of
the following conditions occur:
The driver pushes the HDC switch.
The driveline is shifted out of 4L Range.
The parking brake is applied.
The driver door opens.
The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds.
The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph
(64 km/h) (HDC exits immediately).
HDC detects excessive brake temperature.
4
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 143
144 SAFETY
Feedback To The Driver
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the
HDC switch has an LED icon, which offers feedback
to the driver about the state HDC is in.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate
and remain on solid when HDC is enabled or
activated. This is the normal operating condition
for HDC.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
several seconds then extinguish when the driver
pushes the HDC switch but enable conditions
are not met.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
several seconds then extinguish when HDC
disables due to excess speed.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash when
HDC deactivates due to overheated brakes. The
flashing will stop and HDC will activate again
once the brakes have cooled sufficiently.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The Hill Start Assist (HSA) system is designed to
mitigate roll back from a complete stop while on an
incline. If the driver releases the brake while
stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to hold the
brake pressure for a short period. If the driver does
not apply the throttle before this time expires, the
system will release brake pressure and the vehicle
will roll down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order for
HSA to activate:
The feature must be enabled.
The vehicle must be stopped.
The parking brake must be off.
The driver door must be closed.
The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
The gear selection must match vehicle uphill
direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in
forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in
REVERSE (R) gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
gears. The system will not activate if the trans-
mission is in PARK or NEUTRAL (N). For vehicles
equipped with a manual transmission, if the
clutch is pressed, HSA will remain active.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To
change the current setting, proceed as follows:
If disabling HSA using your instrument cluster
display, refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in
controlling vehicle speed when descending hills.
The driver must remain attentive to the driving
conditions and is responsible for maintaining a
safe vehicle speed.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start
Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling
may occur, such as on minor hills or with a
loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA is
not a substitute for active driving involvement.
It is always the driver’s responsibility to be
attentive to distance to other vehicles, people,
and objects, and most importantly brake
operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle
under all road conditions. Your complete
attention is always required while driving to
maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision or
serious personal injury.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 144
SAFETY 145
For vehicles not equipped with an instrument
cluster display, perform the following steps:
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels
pointing straight forward).
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Start the engine.
5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than
one-half turn to the left.
6. Push the “ESC OFF” switch located in the lower
switch bank below the climate control four
times within 20 seconds. The “ESC OFF
Indicator Light” should turn on and turn off
two times.
7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and
then an additional slightly more than one-half
turn to the right.
8. Place the ignition in the OFF mode and then
back to ON. If the sequence was completed
properly, the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” will
blink several times to confirm HSA is disabled.
9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this
feature to its previous setting.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll
back while towing a trailer.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of
each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is
detected, the Traction Control System (TCS) may
apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/
or reduce engine power to provide enhanced
acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS,
Brake Limited Differential (BLD) functions similar
to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel
spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven
axle is spinning faster than the other, the system
will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will
allow more engine power to be applied to the
wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain
enabled even if TCS and Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) are in a reduced mode.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) uses sensors in the
vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying trailer
and will take the appropriate actions to attempt to
stop the sway. TSC will become active automatically
once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized.
NOTE:
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always
use caution when towing a trailer and follow the
trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer to
“Trailer Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
WARNING!
If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there
may not be enough brake pressure to hold
both the vehicle and the trailer on a hill when
the brake pedal is released. In order to avoid
rolling down an incline while resuming accel-
eration, manually activate the trailer brake or
apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to
releasing the brake pedal.
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting your vehicle.
Also, be certain to place the transmission
in PARK.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision or serious personal injury.
4
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 145
146 SAFETY
When TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the engine
power may be reduced and you may feel the
brakes being applied to individual wheels to
attempt to stop the trailer from swaying.
TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the
“Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses
two radar-based sensors, located inside the
taillights, to detect highway licensable vehicles
(automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that enter
the blind spot zones from the rear/front/side of
the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light
will momentarily illuminate in both outside
rearview mirrors to let the driver know that the
system is operational. The BSM system sensors
operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear
and enters standby mode when the vehicle is
in PARK.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately
one lane width on both sides of the vehicle
12 ft (3.8 m). The zone length starts at the outside
rearview mirror and extends approximately
10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the vehicle.
The BSM system monitors the detection zones on
both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed
reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher
and will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver
about rapidly approaching vehicles that are
outside the detection zones.
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may
experience drop outs (blinking on and off) of the
side mirror warning indicator lamps when a
motorcycle or any small object remains at the
side of the vehicle for extended periods of time
(more than a couple of seconds).
The vehicle’s taillights, where the radar sensors
are located, must remain free of snow, ice, and
dirt/road contamination so that the BSM system
can function properly. Do not block the taillights
with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle
racks, etc.).
Radar Sensor Locations
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and
adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 146
SAFETY 147
If the system detects degraded performance due
to contamination or foreign objects, a message will
warn you of a blocked sensor and the warning
indicators in side view mirrors will be on. The
warning indicators will remain illuminated until
blockage clearing conditions are met. First clear
the taillights around the sensors of the blockage.
After removing the blockage, the following
procedure can be used to reset the system, cycle
the ignition from ON to OFF and then back ON.
If the blockage message is still present after
cycling the ignition and driving in traffic, check
again for a blockage.
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning
light located in the outside mirrors in addition to
sounding an audible (chime) alert and reducing the
radio volume. Refer to “Modes Of Operation” in
this section for further information.
Warning Light Location
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from
three different entry points (side, rear, front) while
driving to see if an alert is necessary. The BSM
system will issue an alert during these types of
zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from
either side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on
either side and enter the rear detection zone with
a relative speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Rear Monitoring
4
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 147
148 SAFETY
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative
speed less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle
remains in the blind spot for approximately
1.5 seconds, the warning light will be illuminated.
If the difference in speed between the two vehicles
is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the warning
light will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert
on stationary objects such as guardrails, posts,
walls, foliage, berms, snow banks, car washes, etc.
However, occasionally the system may alert on
such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that
are traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle
in adjacent lanes.
Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid
to help detect objects in the blind spot zones.
The BSM system is not designed to detect
pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your
vehicle is equipped with the BSM system, always
check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your
shoulder, and use your turn signal before
changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 148
SAFETY 149
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to
aid the driver when backing out of parking spaces
where their vision of oncoming vehicles may be
blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the
parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is
exposed. The RCP system will then have a clear
view of the cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle
is detected, alert the driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both
sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving
toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum
speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), to objects
moving a maximum of approximately 20 mph
(32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side.
If the sensors are blocked by other structures or
vehicles, the system will not be able to alert
the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are available
in the Uconnect System.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate
side view mirror based on a detected object.
However, when the system is operating in Rear
Cross Path (RCP) mode, the system will respond
with both visual and audible alerts when a
detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in
the appropriate side view mirror based on a
detected object. If the turn signal is then activated,
and it corresponds to an alert present on that side
of the vehicle, an audible chime will also be
sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected
object are present on the same side at the same
time, both the visual and audible alerts will be
issued. In addition to the audible alert the
radio (if on) will also be muted.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the
BSM system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall
respond with both visual and audible alerts when a
detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio is also muted. Turn/
hazard signal status is ignored; the RCP state
always requests the chime.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a back up
aid system. It is intended to be used to help a
driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking
lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you,
and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals,
other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots
before backing up. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
4
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 149
150 SAFETY
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or
RCP systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the
vehicle is started the previously stored mode will
be recalled and used.
Trailer Merge Assist
NOTE:
When Trailer Merge Assist is activated, Rear Cross
Path is disabled.
NOTE:
When a trailer with an electric brake is connected
to the vehicle, the instrument cluster display will
provide a menu to allow a selection of the trailer
type. There will be two options provided: Conven-
tional and Goose/Fifth Wheel. Goose/Fifth Wheel
Trailer is incompatible and when selected, the
BSM system will disable until the trailer is discon-
nected. If the wrong option is selected, the system
can be reset by either disconnecting and recon-
necting the trailer harness connector or disabling
then re-enabling the Blind Spot Monitoring system
in the customer settings in the Uconnect.
This will prompt the trailer selection menu again to
allow for the correct selection.
Trailer Merge Assist is a function of the Blind Spot
Monitoring (BSM) system that extends the blind
spot zone to work while pulling a trailer. Trailer
Merge Assist consists of three sub functions:
Automatic Trailer Detection
Trailer Length Detection
Trailer Merge Warning
Blind Spot Zones With Trailer Merge Assist
Automatic Trailer Detection
There are two modes of operation for the detection
of the trailer length:
Automatic Mode — When “Auto Mode” is
selected, the system will use the blind spot
sensors to automatically determine the pres-
ence and length of a trailer. The presence of a
trailer will be detected using the blind spot radar
within 90 seconds of forward movement of the
vehicle. The vehicle must be moving above
6 mph (10 km/h) to activate the feature. Once
the trailer has been detected, the system will
default to the maximum blind spot zone until the
length has been verified. You will see “Auto” in
the instrument panel cluster .
Maximum Mode — When “Max Mode” is
selected, the system will default to the
maximum blind spot zone regardless of what
size trailer is attached .
NOTE:
Selected setting is stored when the ignition is
placed in the OFF position. To change this setting,
it must be selected through the Uconnect Settings.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
1 — Vehicle
2 — Trailer
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 150
SAFETY 151
Trailer Length Detection
Once the trailer presence has been established,
the trailer length will be established (by making a
90 degree turn) and then the trailer length
category (e.g. 10-20 ft (3 m to 6 m)) will be
displayed. This can take up to 30 seconds after
completing the turn.
NOTE:
During the same ignition cycle, if the vehicle is at a
standstill for a minimum of 90 seconds, a new
“trailer detection request” is enabled by the
system once the vehicle resumes motion.
Maximum length supported by the Trailer Merge
Assist feature is 39.5 ft (12 m). Trailer length is
considered the forward most portion of the trailer
hitch to the rearward most portion of the body,
bumper, or ramp of the trailer.
Maximum width supported by the Trailer Merge
Assist feature is 8.5 ft (2.59 m). Trailer width is
measured at the widest portion of the trailer and
may include wheels, tires, finders, or rails.
NOTE:
Fifth wheel or gooseneck trailers are not supported
by Trailer Merge Assist.
Trailer Length Detection
Trailer length will be identified and placed into one
of the following categories:
Trailer length up to 10 ft (3 m) — Blind spot zone
will be adjusted to 10 ft (3 m) .
Trailer length between 10 ft to 20 ft (3 m to
6 m) — Blind spot zone will be adjusted to
20 ft (6 m) .
Trailer length between 20 ft to 30 ft (6 m to
9 m) — Blind spot zone will be adjusted to
30 ft (9 m) .
Trailer length between 30 ft and 39.5 ft (9 m to
12 m) — Blind spot zone will be adjusted to
MAX distance .
NOTE:
Trailer length is determined within +/- 3 ft (1 m) of
actual length. Trailers that are the same size as the
category limit, 10/20/30 ft (3/6/9 m), could be
subject to being placed in the category above or
below the correct one.
Trailer Merge Warning
Trailer Merge Warning is the extension of the blind
spot function to cover the length of the trailer, plus
a safety margin, to warn the driver when there is a
vehicle in the adjacent lane. The driver is alerted by
the illumination of the BSM warning light located in
the outside mirror on the side the other vehicle is
detected. In addition, an audible (chime) alert will
be heard and radio volume reduced. Refer to
“Modes Of Operation” in this section for further
information.
NOTE:
The Trailer Merge Alert system DOES NOT alert
the driver about rapidly approaching vehicles
that are outside the detection zones.
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may
experience drop outs (blinking on and off) of the
side mirror warning indicator lamps when a
motorcycle or any small object remains at the
1 — Trailer Length
2 — Trailer Hitch
3 — Trailer Width
4
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 151
152 SAFETY
side of the vehicle for extended periods of time
(more than a couple of seconds).
Crowded areas such as parking lots, neighbor-
hoods, etc. May lead to an increased amount of
false alerts. This is normal operation.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with Innovation, Science and Economic
Development Canada license-exempt RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
W
ITH MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) with
Mitigation system provides the driver with audible,
visual warnings (within the instrument cluster
display), and may apply a haptic warning in the
form of a brake jerk, to warn the driver when it
detects a potential frontal collision. The warnings
are intended to provide the driver with enough time
to react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as Electronic Brake
Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a
forward collision. When the system determines
that a forward collision is probable, the driver will
be provided with audible and visual warnings as
well as a possible haptic warning in the form of a
brake jerk.
If the driver does not take action based upon these
progressive warnings, then the system will provide
a limited level of active braking to help slow the
vehicle and mitigate the potential forward collision.
If the driver reacts to the warnings by braking and
the system determines that the driver intends to
avoid the collision by braking but has not applied
sufficient brake force, the system will compensate
and provide additional brake force as required.
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid
to help detect objects in the blind spot zones.
The BSM system is not designed to detect
pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your
vehicle is equipped with the BSM system, always
check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your
shoulder, and use your turn signal before
changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 152
SAFETY 153
When towing a trailer, the system will also respond
to activate the trailer brakes (if equipped).
If a FCW with Mitigation event begins at a speed
below 32 mph (52 km/h), the system may provide
the maximum braking possible to mitigate the
potential forward collision. If the Forward Collision
Warning with Mitigation event stops the vehicle
completely, the system will hold the vehicle at
standstill for two seconds and then release
the brakes.
FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with the
vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, the
warning message will be deactivated.
NOTE:
The minimum speed for FCW activation is
3 mph (5 km/h).
The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects
other than vehicles such as guard rails or sign
posts based on the course prediction. This is
expected and is a part of normal FCW activation
and functionality.
It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent
such misuse of the system, after four Active
Braking events within a key cycle, the Active
Braking portion of FCW will be deactivated until
the next key cycle.
The FCW system is intended for on-road use
only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW
system should be deactivated to prevent unnec-
essary warnings to the surroundings.
FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects
not in the path of the vehicle, stationary objects
that are far away, oncoming traffic, or leading
vehicles with the same or higher rate of speed.
FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavail-
able screens.
During a FCW event when towing a trailer, your
Electronic Brake system will respond, to acti-
vate the trailer brakes (if equipped).
Turning FCW On Or Off
The FCW button is located in the Uconnect display
in the control settings. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
To turn the FCW system on, press the forward
collision button once.
To turn the FCW system off, press the forward
collision button once.
NOTE:
When the FCW is “on”, this allows the system to
warn the driver of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front.
When the FCW is “off” prevents the system from
warning the driver of a possible collision with
the vehicle in front. If the FCW is set to “off”,
“FCW OFF" will be displayed in the instrument
cluster display.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended
to avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW
detect every type of potential collision. The driver
has the responsibility to avoid a collision by
controlling the vehicle via braking and steering.
Failure to follow this warning could lead to
serious injury or death.
4
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 153
154 SAFETY
When FCW status is set to “Only Warning”
prevents the system from providing limited
active braking, or additional brake support if the
driver is not braking adequately in the event of
a potential frontal collision.
When FCW status is set to “Warning and
Braking” this allows the system to warn the
driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front using audible/visual warnings and it
applies autonomous braking.
The FCW system state is defaulted to “Full On”
from one ignition cycle to the next. If the system
is turned off, it will reset to “Full On” when the
vehicle is restarted.
FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity
The FCW sensitivity and Active Braking status are
programmable through the Uconnect System.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
Far
When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the
“Far” setting and the system status is
“Warning and Braking”, this allows the
system to warn the driver of a possible more
distant collision with the vehicle in front
using audible/visual warnings.
More cautious drivers that do not mind
frequent warnings may prefer this setting.
Medium
When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the
“Medium” setting and the system status is
“Warning and Braking”, this allows the
system to warn the driver of a possible colli-
sion with the vehicle in front using audible/
visual warnings.
Near
When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the
“Near” setting and the system status is
“Warning and Braking”, this allows the
system to warn the driver of a possible
closer collision with the vehicle in front
using audible/visual warnings.
This setting provides less reaction time than
the “Far” and “Medium” settings, which
allows for a more dynamic driving experi-
ence.
More dynamic or aggressive drivers that
want to avoid frequent warnings may prefer
this setting.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster displays “ACC/FCW
Limited Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited
Functionality Clean Front Windshield”
momentarily, there may be a condition that limits
FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, the active
braking may not be fully available. Once the
condition that limited the system performance is
no longer present, the system will return to its full
performance state. If the problem persists, see an
authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
displays:
ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
conditions, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 154
SAFETY 155
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with Innovation, Science and Economic
Development Canada license-exempt RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
S
YSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will
warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the
vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.
NOTE:
The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active
road tires. In addition, the instrument cluster will
display a graphic showing the pressure values of
each tire with the low tire pressure values in a
different color, or the Uconnect radio will display a
TPMS message, when this occurs you must
increase the tire pressure to the recommended
cold placard pressure in order for the TPMS
Warning Light to turn off.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C).
This means that when the outside temperature
decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire
pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for
at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for
information on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s
tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the
vehicle is driven — this is normal and there should
be no adjustment for this increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure
warning limit for any reason, including low
temperature effects and natural pressure loss
through the tire.
4
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 155
156 SAFETY
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and
will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above
the recommended cold placard pressure. Once the
low TPMS Warning Light illuminates, you must
increase the tire pressure to the recommended
cold placard pressure in order for the TPMS
Warning Light to turn off. The system will
automatically update and the TPMS Warning Light
will turn off once the system receives the updated
tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven
for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in
order to turn the TPMS Warning Light off.
For example, your vehicle may have a
recommended cold (parked for more than three
hours) placard pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the
ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the
measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a
temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the
tire pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa).
This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to
turn on the TPMS Warning Light. Driving the
vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to
approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the
TPMS Warning Light will still be on. In this situation,
the TPMS Warning Light will turn off only after the
tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended
cold placard pressure value.
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire
care and maintenance or to provide warning of
a tire failure or condition.
If your vehicle is not equipped with the Tire Fill
Alert feature the TPMS should not be used as a
tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire
pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility
to maintain correct tire pressure using an accu-
rate tire pressure gauge, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination
of the TPMS Warning Light.
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire
pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual
tire pressure in the tire.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warning have been established for the tire
size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable
system operation or sensor damage may
result when using replacement equipment
that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor
damage.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an
aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended
that you take your vehicle to an authorized
dealership to have your sensor function
checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering
the valve stem, which could damage the
TPMS sensor.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 156
SAFETY 157
Example: Tire Pressure Monitoring Display
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) uses
wireless technology with wheel rim mounted
electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels.
Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the
valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the
receiver module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
Receiver module
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring sensors
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System
messages, which display in the instrument
cluster
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure
Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Warning
Light” will illuminate in the instrument
cluster when tire pressure is low in one or
more of the four active road tires.
In addition, the instrument cluster will display a
graphic showing the pressure values of each tire
with the low tire pressure values in a different
color. An "Inflate to XX" message will also be
displayed.
Example: Low Tire Pressure Display
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as
possible and inflate the tires with a low pressure
condition (those in a different color in the
instrument cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure inflation
value as shown in the "Inflate to XX" message.
Once the system receives the updated tire
pressures, the system will automatically update,
the graphic display in the instrument cluster will
return to its original color, and the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Warning Light” will turn off. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in
order to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Warning
Light off.
4
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 157
158 SAFETY
Service TPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Warning Light” will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addition,
the instrument cluster will display a "SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM" message for a minimum of five seconds
and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value to indicate which sensor is not
being received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will
repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the
system fault no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Warning Light” will no longer flash, and
the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will no
longer display, and a pressure value will display in
place of the dashes. A system fault can occur due
to any of the following:
Signal interference due to electronic devices or
driving next to facilities emitting the same radio
frequencies as the TPM sensors.
Installing aftermarket window tinting that
contains materials that may block radio wave
signals.
Accumulation of snow or ice around the
wheels or wheel housings.
Using tire chains on the vehicle.
Using wheels/tires not equipped with
TPM sensors.
A system fault may occur due to an incorrect TPM
sensor location condition. When a system fault
occurs due to an incorrect TPM sensor location,
the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Warning Light” will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid. The system fault will also sound a chime.
In addition, the instrument cluster will display a
“Tire Pressure Temporarily Unavailable” message
in place of the tire pressure display screen. If the
ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system
fault no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Warning Light” will no longer flash and
the tire pressure display screen will be displayed
showing the tire pressure values the correct
locations.
Vehicles With Non-Matching Full Size Spare Or
Compact Spare
The non-matching full size spare or compact
spare tire does not have a TPM sensor.
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the
pressure in the non-matching full size spare
or compact spare tire.
If you install the non-matching full size spare or
compact spare tire in place of a road tire that
has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the
TPM Warning Light and a “LOW TIRE” message
will remain on and a chime will sound.
In addition, the graphic in the instrument cluster
will still display a pressure value in a different
color and an “Inflate to XX” message.
After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h), the TPM Warning
Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid. In addition, the instrument
cluster will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM"
message for a minimum of five seconds and
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure
value.
For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a
chime will sound, the TPM Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain
on solid, and the instrument cluster will display
a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a
minimum of five seconds and then display
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
Once you repair or replace the original road tire
and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the non-
matching full size spare or compact spare, the
TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
TPM Warning Light will turn off and the graphic
in the instrument cluster will display a new pres-
sure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no
tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning
limit in any of the four active road tires.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order
for the TPMS to receive this information.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 158
SAFETY 159
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TTPMS) — If Equipped
The Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TTPMS) is a feature that displays the trailer tire
pressure values and warn the driver of a low tire
pressure event based on the drivers set target tire
pressure value, through TTPMS settings found in
the radio.
The TTPMS monitors the pressure of each tire and
warns the driver through the instrument cluster,
when either a low tire pressure condition falls
below 25% of the drivers set pressure or if a
system malfunction occurs. The instrument cluster
will display the actual tire pressure or dashes for
each of the trailer tires in the correct trailer
position, based on trailer configuration. The TTPMS
can support up to 12 trailer tires per configured
trailer on up to four configurable trailers. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Trailer Tire Pressure Sensor Pairing
In order use this feature, the provided tire pressure
sensors must be installed in the desired trailer
tires and the sensors must be paired to the truck.
If the target trailer requires more than the provided
four sensors, additional sensors can be purchased
at an authorized Ram dealership.
With the sensors installed and the trailer near or
connected to your Ram truck, initiate the pairing
process by entering the settings menu in the radio
and select trailer. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information. Select the
desired trailer profile to pair to, open the
“Tire Pressure” menu, and hit “Setup All Tires.”
NOTE:
The vehicle may not be driven until the pairing
process is complete.
Trailer Tire Pressure Settings
Trailer Tire Pressure Pairing
4
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 159
160 SAFETY
Follow the on screen prompts to select the number
of axles (1 - 3), the number of trailer tires (2, 4, 6,
8, or 12), and the set trailer tire pressure. The
range is selectable anywhere between 25-125 psi
(172-862 kPa).
Once psi (kPa) is programmed, the pairing screen
appears. Tire sensors must be paired in order
shown. Starting with Tire 1, deflate tire by
5 psi (34 kPa) and wait for a horn chirp. It may
take up to three minutes for the chirp to occur,
indicating that the sensor has paired. Repeat
process on each tire, in order, until complete.
Do not exit the pairing screen until process is
complete. If pairing was unsuccessful, a double
horn chirp will sound, and a prompt on the
touchscreen will allow you to retry the procedure;
“Retry” will only appear when setup fails. Each tire
must be successfully paired during a single pairing
process to receive the success screen.
NOTE:
If the pairing process times out after three minutes
of no communication with a sensor, a double horn
chip will occur indicating the pairing has failed and
a message will display on the radio indicating the
process was unsuccessful. Under certain circum-
stances, the double horn chirp may continue to
happen every three minutes indicating the failed
pairing. If this happens, the horn chirping may be
canceled by cycling the ignition button off and then
back to run position.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
When a tire pressure low in one or more of the
active road tires is detected, the instrument cluster
will display a message stating “Trailer Tire
Pressure Low”. The instrument cluster will then
display the TTPMS graphic showing the pressure
values of each tire with the low tire pressure values
in a different color.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as
possible and inflate the tires with a low pressure
condition (those in a different color in the
instrument cluster graphic) to the customer
programmed target tire pressure value as shown
at the top of the TTPMS instrument cluster graphic.
Once the tire(s) are inflated, the system will
automatically update the graphic display in the
instrument cluster, returning to its original color.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
10 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for
the TTPMS to receive the updated information.
Service TTPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the instrument cluster
will display a “Trailer Tire Pressure System Service
Required” message for a minimum of five seconds.
Once the system fault is corrected the "Trailer Tire
Pressure System Service Required" message will
no longer be displayed. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TTPMS to receive the
trailer tire pressure information.
Trailer Tire Pressure System Not Configured
A “Trailer Tire Pressure System Not Configured”
message will be displayed in the instrument
cluster on the TTPM instrument cluster graphic
when a trailer number is selected that has not had
trailer tire pressure sensors paired. To correct
this condition, see the trailer section in
“Uconnect Settings”.
Trailer Sensors Detected Do Not Match Active
Trailer
The “Trailer Sensors Detected Do Not Match
Active Trailer” message will be displayed in the
instrument cluster when the trailer sensors being
received by the TTPM module do not match the
trailer sensors paired to the current trailer number
selected. This message will be displayed when the
sensors being received completely match the
sensors paired to another trailer number
configured in the TTPM module.
To correct this condition, the correct trailer number
must be selected in the radio. Refer to the
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
System Limitations
TTPMS may have difficulty transmitting through
steel-walled tires or on trailers longer than 30 ft.
It is recommended to use standard tires and
trailers less than 30 ft long to avoid drop outs or
difficulty when pairing.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 160
SAFETY 161
NOTE:
The vehicle may not be driven until the pairing
process is complete.
Tire Fill Alert
This feature notifies the user when the placard tire
pressure is attained while inflating or deflating
the tire.
The customer may choose to disable or enable the
Tire Fill Alert feature through use of the customer
settings in the radio.
NOTE:
Only one tire can be filled at a time when using
the Tire Fill Alert system.
The Tire Fill Alert feature cannot be entered if an
existing TPMS fault is set to “active” or if the
system is in deactivation mode (if equipped).
The system will be activated when the system
detects a increase of tire pressure, while filling the
fire. The ignition must be in the RUN mode, with the
transmission in PARK (P).
NOTE:
It is not required to have the engine running to
enter Tire Fill Alert mode.
The hazard lamps will come on to confirm the
vehicle is in Tire Fill Alert mode.
If the hazard lamps do not come on while inflating
the tire, the TPM sensor may be in a inoperative
position, preventing the TPM sensor signal from
being received. In this case, the vehicle may need
to be moved slightly forward or backward.
When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire
pressure display screen will be displayed in the
instrument cluster.
Operation:
The horn will chirp once to let the user know
when to stop filling the tire, when it reaches
recommended pressure.
The horn will chirp three times if the tire is over
filled and will continue to chirp every five
seconds if the user continues to inflate the tire.
The horn will chirp once again when enough air
is let out to reach proper inflation level.
The horn will also chirp three times if the tire is
then under-inflated and will continue to chirp
every five seconds if the user continues to
deflate the tire.
SELECTABLE TIRE FILL ALERT (STFA)
The Selectable Tire Fill Alert (STFA) system is an
optional feature that is included as part of the
normal Tire Fill Alert system. The system is
designed to allow the customer to select a
pressure to inflate or deflate the vehicle's front
and rear axle tires to and to provide feedback to
the customer while inflating or deflating the
vehicle's tires.
In the Selectable Tire Fill Alert application, which is
located in the apps menu of the Uconnect System,
the customer will be able to select a pressure
setting for both the front and rear axle tire
pressures by scrolling through a pressure range
from XX to 15 psi in 1 psi increments for each axle
setting. XX = the vehicle’s cold placard pressure
values for the front and rear axles as shown on the
vehicle placard pressure label.
The customer may also store the pressure values
chosen for each axle in the radio as a preset
pressure. The customer will be allowed to store up
to two sets of preset values in the radio for the
front and rear axle pressure values.
Once the customer selects the tire pressures for
the front and rear axles that they want to inflate or
deflate to, they can begin inflating or deflating
one tire at a time.
NOTE:
The STFA system will only support inflating or
deflating one tire at a time.
The system will be activated when the TPM
receiver module detects a change in tire pressure.
The ignition must be in the RUN mode, with the
transmission in PARK (P).
The hazard lamps will come on to confirm the
vehicle is in Tire Fill Alert mode.
4
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 161
162 SAFETY
If the hazard lamps do not come on while inflating
or deflating the tire, the TPM sensor may be in a
inoperative position, preventing the TPM sensor
signal from being received. In this case, the vehicle
may need to be moved slightly forward or
backward.
When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire
pressure display screen will be displayed in the
instrument cluster.
Operation:
The horn will chirp once when the selected
pressure is reached to let the user know when to
stop inflating or deflating the tire.
The horn will chirp three times if the tire is over
inflated or over deflated and will continue to
chirp every five seconds if the user continues to
inflate or deflate the tire.
The horn will chirp once again when enough air
is added or removed to reach proper selected
pressure level.
Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS)
3500 Series Trucks
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tire Pressure
Information System (TPIS).
The Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS) uses
wireless technology with wheel rim mounted
electronic sensors to transmit tire pressure levels.
Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the
valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the
receiver module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPIS consists of the following components:
Receiver module
Four TPM sensors (Single Rear Wheel (SRW)
applications)
Six TPM sensors (Dual Rear Wheel (DRW)
applications)
Pressure display in the instrument cluster
The TPIS will display all four (Single Rear Wheel
(SRW) applications) or six (Dual Rear Wheel (DRW)
applications) tire pressure values in the instrument
cluster display.
If a system fault is detected, the instrument cluster
will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for
a minimum of five seconds and then display
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to
indicate which sensor is not being received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will
repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the
system fault no longer exists, the "SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM" message will no longer be displayed, and
a pressure value will display in place of the dashes.
A system fault can occur due to any of the
following:
Signal interference due to electronic devices or
driving next to facilities emitting the same radio
frequencies as the TPM sensors.
Installing aftermarket window tinting that
contains materials that may block radio wave
signals.
Accumulation of snow or ice around the
wheels or wheel housings.
Using tire chains on the vehicle.
Using wheels/tires not equipped with
TPM sensors.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with Innovation, Science and Economic
Development Canada license-exempt RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 162
SAFETY 163
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
F
EATURES
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on others.
If you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in
this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
system properly, to keep you and your passengers
as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should
always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear
the vehicle seat belt properly (Refer to
“Child Restraints” in this section for further
information) must be secured in the
appropriate child restraint or belt-positioning
booster seat in a rear seating position.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the
front passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible and use the proper child
restraint (Refer to “Child Restraints” in this
section for further information).
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt
behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with
your child restraint to make sure that you are
using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should
be moved back as far as practical to allow the
front air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment
occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully
into the space between occupants and the
door and occupants could be injured.
4
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 163
164 SAFETY
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person,
refer to the “Customer Assistance” section for
customer service contact information.
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver,
even on short trips. Someone on the road may be
a poor driver and could cause a collision that
includes you. This can happen far away from home
or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and
they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a
collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when
people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts
reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of
injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all
times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind
the driver and outboard front seat
passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle
their seat belts. The BeltAlert feature is active
whenever the ignition switch is in the START or
ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch
is first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime
will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the
START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard
front seat belts are buckled. The outboard front
passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when an
outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when
the vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle
speed range and the driver or outboard front seat
passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front
passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the
outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied). The
BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the
Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning
sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will remain on until the seat belts are
buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may
repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts
are buckled. The driver should instruct all
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the
vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence
will begin until the seat belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
active when the outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an
animal or other items are placed on the outboard
front passenger seat or when the seat is folded
flat (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be
restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat
belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 164
SAFETY 165
(Continued)
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an
authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not
recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn
on and remain on until the driver and outboard
front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions except the Mega Cab and
Crew Cab front center seating position have
combination lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows
the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely
with you under normal conditions. However, in a
collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk
of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown
out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, the air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have air bags.
In a collision, you and your passengers can
suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. You can strike the inte-
rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you
can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be
sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly. Occupants,
including the driver, should always wear their
seat belts whether or not an air bag is also
provided at their seating position to minimize
the risk of severe injury or death in the event
of a crash.
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could
even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and
to keep your passengers safe, too.
Two people should never be belted into a
single seat belt. People belted together can
crash into one another in a collision, hurting
one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder
belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no
matter what their size.
WARNING!
4
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 165
166 SAFETY
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back
and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of
the front seat, and next to your arm in the rear
seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat).
Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt.
Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
necessary to allow the seat belt to go around
your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk
of injury in a collision. The seat belt forces
won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones,
but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap
part of your seat belt as low as possible and
keep it snug.
A twisted seat belt may not protect you prop-
erly. In a collision, it could even cut into you.
Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body,
without twists. If you can’t straighten a seat
belt in your vehicle, take it to an authorized
dealer immediately and have it fixed.
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong
buckle will not protect you properly. The lap
portion could ride too high on your body,
possibly causing internal injuries. Always
buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest
you.
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too
far forward, increasing the possibility of injury.
Wear your seat belt snugly.
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the inside
surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,
increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt
worn under the arm can cause internal inju-
ries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
protect you from injury during a collision. You
are more likely to hit your head in a collision if
you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap
and shoulder belt are meant to be used
together.
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-
ately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat
belt system. If your vehicle is involved in a
collision, or if you have questions regarding
seat belt or retractor conditions, take your
vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or autho-
rized FCA Certified Collision Care Program
facility for inspection.
WARNING!
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 166
SAFETY 167
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert
the latch plate into the buckle until you hear
a “click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies
low across your hips, below your abdomen. To
remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on
the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is
too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap
belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding
under the seat belt in a collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it
is comfortable and not resting on your neck.
The retractor will withdraw any slack in the
shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle. The seat belt will automatically
retract to its stowed position. If necessary,
slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow
the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to
the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plate, grasp and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter the
slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is
no longer twisted.
4
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 167
168 SAFETY
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger seats,
the top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted
upward or downward to position the seat belt away
from your neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage
button to release the anchorage, and move it up or
down to the position that serves you best.
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower
position, and if you are taller than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher
position. After you release the anchorage button,
try to move it up or down to make sure that it is
locked in position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature
allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted
in the upward position without pushing or
squeezing the release button. To verify the
shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward
on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked
into position.
First Row Center Seat Belt Operating
Instructions (Regular Cab Only)
The first row center seat belt (Regular Cab only)
features a seat belt with a mini-latch plate and
buckle, which allows the seat belt to detach from
the lower anchor when the seat is folded. The latch
plate and regular latch plate can then be stored
out of the way in the seat for added convenience to
open up utilization of the storage areas behind the
front seats when the seat is not occupied.
1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regular latch
plate from its stowed position on the seat.
Connect Mini-Latch To Mini-Buckle
WARNING!
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could
even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and
to keep your passengers safe, too.
Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it
is comfortable and not resting on your neck.
The retractor will withdraw any slack in the
shoulder belt.
Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Always make all seat belt height adjustments
when the vehicle is stationary.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 168
SAFETY 169
Mini-Latch And Mini-Buckle Connected
2. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pull the seat
belt over the seat.
3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the
right head restraint.
4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert
the mini-latch plate into the mini-buckle until
you hear a “click.”
5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up
the webbing as far as necessary to allow the
seat belt to go around your lap.
6. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert
the latch plate into the buckle until you hear
a “click.”
7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies
low across your hips, below your abdomen. To
remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on
the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is
too tight, pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt
in a collision.
8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that
it is comfortable and not resting on your neck.
The retractor will withdraw any slack in the
seat belt.
9. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle.
10. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the
mini-buckle for storage, insert the regular latch
plate into the center red slot on the
mini-buckle. The seat belt will automatically
retract to its stowed position. If necessary,
slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow
the seat belt to retract fully. Insert the
mini-latch plate and regular latch plate into
its stowed position.
Detaching Mini-Buckle With Seat Belt Tongue
First Row Center Lap Belt Operating
Instructions — If Equipped
The center seating position for the Mega Cab and
Crew Cab front seat has a lap belt only. To buckle
the lap belt, slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a "click." To lengthen the lap belt, tilt
the latch plate and pull.
To remove slack, pull the loose end of the webbing.
Wear the lap belt snug against the hips. Sit back
and upright in the seat, then adjust the seat belt as
tightly as is comfortable.
WARNING!
If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are not
properly connected when the seat belt is used
by an occupant, the seat belt will not be able
to provide proper restraint and will increase
the risk of injury in a collision.
When reattaching the mini-latch plate and
mini-buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is
not twisted. If the webbing is twisted, follow
the preceding procedure to detach the
mini-latch plate and mini-buckle, untwist the
webbing, and reattach the mini-latch plate
and mini-buckle.
4
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 169
170 SAFETY
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly,
even when the webbing is fully extended and the
adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage
(if equipped) is in its lowest position, an authorized
dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt Extender.
The Seat Belt Extender should be used only if the
existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different
occupant, it must be removed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of
an accident is reduced for the mother and the
unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the
abdomen and across the strong bones of the hips.
Place the shoulder belt across the chest and away
from the neck. Never place the shoulder belt
behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a
collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack
from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in
child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still
must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the
pretensioners are single use items. A deployed
pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be
replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with an Energy Management feature that may help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a
collision. The seat belt system has a retractor
assembly that is designed to release webbing in a
controlled manner.
WARNING!
ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original
seat belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt
Extender if, when worn, the distance between
the front edge of the Seat Belt Extender
buckle and the center of the occupant’s body
is LESS than 6 inches.
Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed
can increase the risk of serious injury or death
in a collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender
when the lap belt is not long enough and only
use in the recommended seating positions.
Remove and store the Seat Belt Extender
when not needed.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 170
SAFETY 171
Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractors (ALR) — If Equipped
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
may be equipped with a Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a
child restraint system. For additional information,
refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints”
section of this manual. The figure below illustrates
the locking feature for each seating position.
Regular Cab Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
Mega Cab/Crew Cab Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) Locations
If the passenger seating position is equipped with
an ALR and is being used for normal usage, only
pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR
is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the
seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract
completely in this case and then carefully pull out
only the amount of webbing necessary to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a "click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child
restraint is installed in a seating position that has
a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 years old
and under should always be properly restrained in
the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward
until the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking Mode.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
4
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 171
172 SAFETY
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and
allow it to retract completely to disengage the
Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle
sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
(SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on others.
If you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in
a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and
interconnecting wiring associated with the
electrical Air Bag System Components. Your
vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag
System Components:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors — If Equipped
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the air bag system whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN
position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position
or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not on
and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system
that may deploy the air bag system even if the
battery loses power or it becomes disconnected
prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight
seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is
first in the ON/RUN position. After the self-check,
the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC
detects a malfunction in any part of the system,
it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either
momentarily or continuously. A single chime will
sound to alert you if the light comes on again after
initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will
illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning
Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect
the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the
nature of the malfunction. While the air bag system
is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
following occurs, have an authorized dealer
service the air bag system immediately.
WARNING!
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to
the procedures in the Service Manual.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to
restrain occupants who are wearing the seat
belt or children who are using booster seats.
The locked mode is only used to install
rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints
that have a harness for restraining the child.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 172
SAFETY 173
(Continued)
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on
during the four to eight seconds when the igni-
tion switch is first in the ON/RUN position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the
four to eight-second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit-
tently or remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled.
In this condition the air bags may not be ready to
inflate for your protection. Have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS),
the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will
illuminate on the instrument panel. The
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on until
the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will
sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light has come on and a fault has been
detected. If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
comes on intermittently or remains on while driving
have an authorized dealer service the vehicle
immediately.
For additional information regarding the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light refer to
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” section
of this manual.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder
belts for both the driver and front passenger. The
front air bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint systems. The driver front air bag is
mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment.
The words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are
embossed on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t have the
air bag system to protect you in a collision. If the
light does not come on as a bulb check when the
ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start
the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have
an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact Bolsters
WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or
instrument panel during front air bag deploy-
ment could cause serious injury, including
death. Air bags need room to inflate. Sit back,
comfortably extending your arms to reach the
steering wheel or instrument panel.
4
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 173
174 SAFETY
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features
2500 Series Truck
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system
provides output appropriate to the severity and
type of collision as determined by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive
information from the front impact sensors (if
equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately
during an impact that requires air bag deployment.
A low energy output is used in less severe
collisions. A higher energy output is used for more
severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or
front passenger seat belt buckle switch that
detects whether the driver or front passenger seat
belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may
adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air
Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or
front passenger seat track position sensors that
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front
Air Bags based upon seat position.
3500 Series Truck
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system
provides output appropriate to the severity and
type of collision as determined by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive
information from the front impact sensors (if
equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately
during an impact that requires air bag deployment.
A low energy output is used in less severe
collisions. A higher energy output is used for more
severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or
front passenger seat belt buckle switch that
detects whether the driver or front passenger seat
belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may
adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air
Bags.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near the
air bag on the instrument panel or steering
wheel because any such objects could cause
harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe
enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You
may damage the air bags and you could be
injured because the air bags may no longer be
functional. The protective covers for the air
bag cushions are designed to open only when
the air bags are inflating.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even
though you have air bags.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 174
SAFETY 175
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional
protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front
air bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury
in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front air bags
will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including
some that may produce substantial vehicle damage
— for example, some pole collisions, truck
underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and
location of impact, front air bags may deploy in
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but
that produce a severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle
deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage
by themselves are not good indicators of whether
or not an air bag should have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all
collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in
position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the
front air bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel separate
and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to
their full size. The front air bags fully inflate in
less time than it takes to blink your eyes.
The front air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees
of the driver and front passenger, and position the
front occupants for improved interaction with the
front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
are located in the outboard side of the front seats.
The SABs are marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat trim on the
outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant
injury during certain side impacts, in addition to
the injury reduction potential provided by the seat
belts and body structure.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the
outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The
inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into
the space between the occupant and the door. The
SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a
high force that it could injure occupants if they are
not seated properly, or if items are positioned in
the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
impact bolsters in any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee
impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos,
citizen band radios, etc.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the
performance could be adversely affected and/or
objects could be pushed into you, causing
serious injury.
4
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 175
176 SAFETY
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side
Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs) are located above the side windows. The
trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG”
or “AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other
injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants
in certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and
body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side
windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside
edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the
window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to
injure occupants if they are not belted and seated
properly, or if items are positioned in the area
where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even
greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through
side windows in certain side impact events.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the severity
and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid
the ORC in determining the appropriate response
to impact events. The system is calibrated to
deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the
vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag
occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air
Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side
impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether
or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side
collisions, including some collisions at certain
angles, or some side collisions that do not impact
the area of the passenger compartment. The Side
Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal
collisions where the front air bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time
than it takes to blink your eyes.
WARNING!
Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or
other cargo up high enough to block the
deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering
above the side windows where the SABIC and
its deployment path are located should
remain free from any obstructions.
In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do
not install any accessory items in your vehicle
which could alter the roof. Do not add an after-
market sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add
roof racks that require permanent attach-
ments (bolts or screws) for installation on the
vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 176
SAFETY 177
(Continued)
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are
designed to activate in certain rollover events. The
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether deployment in a particular rollover event
is appropriate, based on the severity and type of
collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good
indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags and seat
belt pretensioners should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners
will not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover
sensing system determines if a rollover event
may be in progress and whether deployment is
appropriate. In the event the vehicle experiences a
rollover or near rollover event, and deployment is
appropriate, the rollover sensing system will deploy
the side air bags and seat belt pretensioners on
both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through
side windows in certain rollover or side impact
events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors
the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring
associated with electrical Air Bag System
Components listed below:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors — If Equipped
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
WARNING!
Occupants, including children, who are up
against or very close to Side Air Bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants,
including children, should never lean on or
sleep against the door, side windows, or area
where the side air bags inflate, even if they are
in an infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appro-
priate) are necessary for your protection in all
collisions. They also help keep you in position,
away from an inflating Side Air Bag. To get the
best protection from the Side Air Bags, occu-
pants must wear their seat belts properly and
sit upright with their backs against the seats.
Children must be properly restrained in a child
restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for
the size of the child.
WARNING!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely
injured or killed.
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead
to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side
Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain
you properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt
even though you have Side Air Bags.
WARNING!
4
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 177
178 SAFETY
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all colli-
sions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air
bags, any or all of the following may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occu-
pants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or
those you might get sliding along a carpet or
gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent
and normally heal quickly. However, if you
haven’t healed significantly within a few days,
or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
As the air bags deflate, you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal
by-product of the process that generates the
non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These
airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes,
nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles
settle on your clothing, follow the garment
manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another collision,
the air bags will not be in place to protect you.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deploy-
ment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be taken
to an authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication
network remains intact, and the power remains
intact, depending on the nature of the event, the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) will determine
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response
System perform the following functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped)
Cut off battery power to the electric motor
(if equipped)
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has
power
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as
long as the battery has power or for 15 minutes
from the intervention of the Enhanced Accident
Response System
Unlock the power door locks
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any
of these other functions in response to the
Enhanced Accident Response System:
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC
Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners
cannot protect you in another collision. Have the
air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat
belt retractor assemblies replaced by an
authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the
Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced
as well.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 178
SAFETY 179
(Continued)
Cut off battery power to the:
Engine
Electric Motor (if equipped)
Electric power steering
Brake booster
Electric park brake
Automatic transmission gear selector
Horn
Front wiper
Headlamp washer pump
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to
the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key
from the ignition switch to avoid draining the
battery. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in
the engine compartment and on the ground near
the engine compartment and fuel tank before
resetting the system and starting the engine. If
there are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle
electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an
accident, reset the system by following the
procedure described below. If you have any doubt,
contact an authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System
Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response
System functions after an event, the ignition switch
must be changed from ignition START or ON/RUN
to ignition OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel
leaks in the engine compartment and on the
ground near the engine compartment and fuel
tank before resetting the system and starting
the engine.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You
could be injured if the air bag system is not
there to protect you. Do not modify the compo-
nents or wiring, including adding any kind of
badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub
trim cover or the upper passenger side of the
instrument panel. Do not modify the front
bumper, vehicle body structure, or add after-
market side steps or running boards.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone
who works on your vehicle that it has an air
bag system.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your
air bag system. The air bag may inflate
accidentally or may not function properly if
modifications are made. Take your vehicle to
an authorized dealer for any air bag system
service. If your seat, including your trim cover
and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
(including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to
an authorized dealer. Only manufacturer
approved seat accessories may be used. If it is
necessary to modify the air bag system for
persons with disabilities, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
WARNING!
4
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 179
180 SAFETY
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as
an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle,
data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s
systems performed. The EDR is designed to record
data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or
less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were oper-
ating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving condi-
tions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender,
age, and crash location) are recorded. However,
other parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the EDR data with the type of personally
identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or
the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at
all times, including babies and children. Every
state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in
proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you
can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to
crash statistics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost
large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check
the child seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you
have the correct seat for your child. Carefully read
and follow all the instructions and warnings in the
child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the
labels attached to the child restraint.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become
a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required
to hold even an infant on your lap could become
so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured or killed. Any child riding
in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for
the child’s size.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 180
SAFETY 181
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. You should also make sure that you
can install it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to http://www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call: 1–888–327–4236
Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
child-car-seat-safety.html
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and who
have not reached the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point
Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing
child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the
vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat
belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their
booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the
vehicle
4
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 181
182 SAFETY
(Continued)
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years
old or until they reach either the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of
child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant
carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth
until they reach the weight or height limit of the
infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used
either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle.
Convertible child seats often have a higher weight
limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who
have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less
than at least two years old. Children should remain
rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or
height allowed by their convertible child seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat
can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.
Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
children who are over two years old or who have
outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children
should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a
harness for as long as possible, up to the highest
weight or height allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s
seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with
knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while
the child’s back is against the seatback, they
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The
child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in
the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not install a rear-facing car seat using a
rear support leg in this vehicle. The floor of this
vehicle is not designed to manage the crash
forces of this type of car seat. In a crash, the
support leg may not function as it was designed
by the car seat manufacturer, and your child may
be more severely injured as a result.
WARNING!
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 182
SAFETY 183
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long
enough to bend over the front of the seat when
their back is against the seatback, should use the
seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test
to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s
seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the
back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
the front of the vehicle seat – while the child is
still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
shoulder between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not the
stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the
whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,”
then the child still needs to use a booster seat in
this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder
belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make sure
the seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s squirming
or slouching can move the belt out of position. If
the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move
the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in
a collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufac-
turer’s directions exactly when installing an
infant or child restraint.
After a child restraint is installed in the
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward
or rearward because it can loosen the child
restraint attachments. Remove the child
restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat
position. When the vehicle seat has been
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
When your child restraint is not in use, secure
it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH
anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle.
Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a
sudden stop or accident, it could strike the
occupants or seatbacks and cause serious
personal injury.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back. In a crash,
the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly,
which may result in serious injury or death.
A child must always wear both the lap and
shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
4
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 183
184 SAFETY
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of
the Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower Anchors
+ Top Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top Tether
Anchor
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X X
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 184
SAFETY 185
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint
anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for
Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The
LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for
installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There are
two lower anchorages located at the back of the
seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one
top tether anchorage located behind the seating
position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the
vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions
may have a top tether anchorage but no lower
anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat
belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to
install the child restraint. Please see the following
table for more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Regular Cab LATCH Positions
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
4
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 185
186 SAFETY
Crew Cab 60/40 Split Bench LATCH Positions Mega Cab LATCH Positions Crew Cab Full Bench LATCH Positions
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol
(2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol
(2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol
(2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of
the child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage
system to attach the child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the
combined weight of the child and the child restraint
is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether
anchor instead of the LATCH system once the
combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be
used together to attach a rear-facing or
forward-facing child restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a
rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH
anchorages if allowed by the booster seat
manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s
manual for more information.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 186
SAFETY 187
Can a child seat be installed in the center position
using the inner LATCH lower anchorages from the
outboard seating positions?
N/A – Regular Cab
No – Crew Cab Full Bench rear seat
Regular Cab Front / Crew Cab with full bench rear
seat: Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install
a child seat in the center seating position.
Crew Cab with split bench rear seat / Mega Cab:
Child restraints can be installed using the supplied
lower anchorages for the center seating position.
Can two child restraints be attached using a
common lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more
child restraints. If the center position does not have
dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat
belt to install a child seat in the center position
next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in
an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of
the front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front
passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer
also allows contact. See your child restraint
owner’s manual for more information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The head restraints can be removed in every
rear seating position if they interfere with the
installation of the child restraint. Refer to “Head
Restraints” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for
further information.
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
4
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 187
188 SAFETY
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars
that are found at the rear of the seat
cushion where it meets the seatback.
They are just visible when you lean into
the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will
easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap
between the seatback and seat cushion.
Mega Cab/Crew Cab Rear Outboard Seats (Driver Side)
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
Regular Cab models have tether strap
anchorages behind the front center and
right seats. Mega Cab and Crew Cab
models have tether strap anchorages
located behind each of the rear seats.
Regular Cab Tether Anchorages (Behind Covers)
Crew Cab Outboard Tether Anchorage
Crew Cab Center Tether Anchorage With
Head Restraint In Raised Position
Mega Cab Tether Anchorages (Behind Covers)
1 — Tether Strap Hook
2 — Tether Strap To Child Restraint
3 — Tether Anchor
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 188
SAFETY 189
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each
side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach
to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the
connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child
restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will
also be equipped with a tether strap. The tether
strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the
top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
Regular Cab Or Crew Cab Full Bench Rear Seat:
No Lower Center LATCH Anchorages Available
Crew Cab Split Bench Rear Seat Or Mega Cab Rear
Seat: Center LATCH Anchorages Available
If a child restraint installed in the center position
blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle for the
outboard position, do not use that outboard
position. If a child seat in the center position blocks
the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt, do not
install a child seat in that outboard position.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint.
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as
described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow
the seat belt, following the instructions below. See
the section “Installing Child Restraints Using the
Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what type of seat belt
each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and
on the tether strap of the child seat so that
you can more easily attach the hooks or
connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower
anchorages for that seating position. If the
second row seat can be reclined, you may
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint
(if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat
can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the child
seat. You may also move the front seat forward
to allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the
child restraint to the lower anchorages in the
selected seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect
it to the top tether anchorage. See the section
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Top
Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a
tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the
seat. Remove slack in the straps according to
the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
the belt path. It should not move more than
1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
WARNING!
Do not install a child restraint in the center
position using the LATCH system. This position
is not approved for installing child seats using
the LATCH attachments. You must use the
seat belt and tether anchor to install a child
seat in the center seating position.
Never use the same lower anchorage to
attach more than one child restraint. Please
refer to “To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint” for typical installation instructions.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach
more than one child restraint. Please refer to
“To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint”
for typical installation instructions.
4
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 189
190 SAFETY
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install
a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not
being used by other occupants or being used to
secure child restraints. An unused belt could injure
a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the
seat belt retractor. Before installing a child
restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the
child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
through the child restraint belt path and then
buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all
children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not
toys and that they should not play with them.
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion
of a lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the
restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufac-
turer’s directions exactly when installing an
infant or child restraint.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for adult
seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other
items or equipment to the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 190
SAFETY 191
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
are equipped with either a Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or
both. Both types of seat belts are designed to keep
the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the
child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a
locking clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched”
into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out
of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the
ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is
pulled back into the retractor. Refer to the
“Automatic Locking Mode” description in
“Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)”
under “Occupant Restraint Systems” for additional
information on ALR. The cinching latch plate is
designed to hold the lap portion of the seat belt
tight when webbing is pulled tight and straight
through a child restraint’s belt path.
Please see the table below and the following
sections for more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Regular Cab Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
Mega Cab/Crew Cab Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Cinching Latchplate — Cinching Latchplate
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
4
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 191
192 SAFETY
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion
of a lap/shoulder belt.
1.
For Mega and Crew Cab Models
Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. If the second row seat can be re-
clined, you may recline the seat and/or raise
the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a better
fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move
it to its rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front seat
forward to allow more room for the child seat.
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the
child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat
belt to attach a forward facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to
install a forward facing child restraint, up to the
recommended weight limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the
front passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and the child
restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer
also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The head restraints can be removed in every rear seating
position if they interfere with the installation of the child
restraint. Refer to “Head Restraints” in “Getting To Know
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt
against the belt path of the child restraint?
Yes – Cinching Latch Plate
No – ALR
In positions with cinching latch plates (CINCH), the buckle
stalk may be twisted up to 3 full turns. Do not twist the
buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 192
SAFETY 193
For Regular Cab Models
Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. Move the vehicle seat as far rearward
as possible to keep the child as far from the
passenger air bag as possible.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the
child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in
the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder
part of the belt until you have pulled all the
seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then,
allow the webbing to retract back into the
retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear
a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it
is locked, you should not be able to pull out any
webbing. If the retractor is not
locked, repeat
step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and
the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See
the section “Installing Child Restraints Using
the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
the belt path. It should not move more than
1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check
the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching
Latch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped:
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion
of a lap/shoulder belt.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. If the second row seat can
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or
raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may
wish to move it to its rear-most position to
make room for the child seat. You may also
move the front seat forward to allow more
room for the child seat.
2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing
from the retractor to pass it through the belt
path of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt
webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
4
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 193
194 SAFETY
4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.
5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and
the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See
the section “Installing Child Restraints Using
the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
the belt path. It should not move more than
1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check
the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close
to the belt path opening of the child restraint, you
may have trouble tightening the seat belt. If this
happens, disconnect the latch plate from the
buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt up to
three full turns to shorten it. Insert the latch plate
into the buckle with the release button facing out,
away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4 to
6, above, to complete the installation of the
child restraint.
If the belt still cannot be tightened after you
shorten the buckle, disconnect the latch plate from
the buckle, turn the buckle around one half turn,
and insert the latch plate into the buckle again. If
you still cannot make the child restraint installation
tight, try a different seating position.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage
Regular and Mega Cab Trucks:
In the regular cab truck, the top tether
anchorages are located behind the
center and right passenger seats.
In the mega cab truck, the top tether
anchorages are located behind each rear seating
position. There is a plastic cover over each
anchorage. To attach the tether strap of the
child restraint:
1. Place the child restraint on the seat and
adjust the tether strap so that it will reach
over the seat back, under the head restraint
and to the tether anchor directly behind the
seat.
Regular Cab Tether Anchorages
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car
seat to any location in front of the car seat,
including the seat frame or a tether anchorage.
Only attach the tether strap of a rear-facing car
seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for
that seating position, located behind the top of
the vehicle seat. See the section “Lower Anchors
and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint
System” for the location of approved tether
anchorages in your vehicle.
1 — Tether Strap Hook
2 — Tether Strap To Child Restraint
3 — Tether Anchor
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 194
SAFETY 195
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direct path between the anchorage and the
child seat. The tether strap should go between
the head restraint posts underneath the head
restraint. You may need to adjust the head
restraint to the upward position to pass the
tether strap underneath the head restraint
and between its posts.
3. Lift the cover (if so equipped), and attach the
hook to the square opening in the sheet metal.
Tighten the tether strap according to the
child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
Crew Cab Trucks:
The top tether anchorages in this vehicle
are tether strap loops located between
the rear glass and the back of the rear
seat. There is a tether strap loop located
behind each seating position. Follow the steps
below to attach the tether strap of the child
restraint.
Right Or Left Outboard Seats:
1. Raise the head restraint and reach between
the rear seat and rear glass to access the
tether strap loop.
Head Restraint In Raised Position
Tether Strap Loop With Center Head Restraint In
Raised Position
2. Place a child restraint on the seat and adjust
the tether strap so that it will reach over the
seat back, under the head restraint, through
the tether strap loop behind the seat and over
to the tether strap loop behind the center seat.
3. Pass the tether strap hook under the head
restraint behind the child seat, though the
tether strap loop behind the seat and over to
the center tether strap loop.
Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front
of an air bag. A deploying Passenger Front Air
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a
child 12 years or younger, including a child in
a rear-facing child restraint.
4
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 195
196 SAFETY
4. Attach the hook to the center tether strap loop
(see diagram). Tighten the tether strap
according to the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions.
Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop And
Attached To Center Tether Strap Loop
NOTE:
If there are child seats in both of the outboard (left
and right) seating positions, the tether strap hooks
of both child seats should be connected to the
center tether strap loop. This is the correct way to
tether two outboard child seats.
Center Seat:
1. Raise the head restraint and reach between
the rear seat and rear glass to access the
tether strap loop.
Tether Strap Loop With Head Restraint In Raised Position
2. Place a child restraint on the seat and adjust
the tether strap so that it will reach over the
seat back, under the head restraint, through
the tether strap loop behind the seat and over
to the tether strap loop behind either the right
or left outboard seat.
3. Pass the tether strap hook under the head
restraint behind the child seat, though the
tether strap loop behind the seat and over to
the right or left outboard tether strap loop.
Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop
4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap
loop (see diagram). Tighten the tether strap
according to the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions.
Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop And
Attached To Outboard Tether Strap Loop
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 196
SAFETY 197
Installing Three Child Restraints:
1. Place a child restraint on each outboard rear
seat. Route the tether straps following the
directions for right and left seating positions,
above.
2. Attach both hooks to the center tether strap
loop, but do not tighten the straps yet.
3. Place a child restraint on the center rear seat.
Route the tether strap following the directions
for the center seating position, above.
4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap
loop.
5. Tighten the tether straps according to the child
seat manufacturer’s instructions, tightening
the right and left tether straps before the
center tether strap.
Outboard And Center Seating Positions Shown
TRANSPORTING PETS
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about
and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during
panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
secured by seat belts.
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE
CARGO AREA.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
lead to increased head motion and possible
injury to the child. Use only the anchorage
position directly behind the child seat to
secure a child restraint top tether strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip
into the opening between the seatbacks as
you remove slack in the strap.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up
may cause serious injury or death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
4
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 197
198 SAFETY
EXHAUST GAS
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained
engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the
exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be
detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside
or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a
competent mechanic inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for
broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned
parts. Open seams or loose connections could
permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger
compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust
system each time the vehicle is raised for
lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE
I
NSIDE THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking
for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts
must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you
have questions regarding the seat belt or retractor
conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized
FCA dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision
Care Program facility for inspection.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you
unconscious and can eventually poison you.
To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to
move your vehicle in or out of the area.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/
liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all
windows are closed and the climate control
BLOWER switch is set at high speed.
DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with
the engine running, adjust your heating or
cooling controls to force outside air into the
vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 198
SAFETY 199
(Continued)
(Continued)
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is
either not on during starting, stays on, or turns on
while driving, have the system inspected at an
authorized dealer as soon as possible. After the
bulb check, this light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the Air Bag System has
been detected. It will stay on until the fault is
removed. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized
dealer service the vehicle immediately.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and
place the blower control on high speed. You should
be able to feel the air directed against the
windshield. See an authorized dealer for service if
your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
Only use a floor mat that does not interfere with the
operation of the accelerator, brake or clutch
pedals. Only use a floor mat that is securely
attached using the floor mat fasteners so it cannot
slip out of position and interfere with the
accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe
operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat
fasteners may cause your floor mat to interfere
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and
cause a loss of vehicle control. To prevent
SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install
your floor mat upside down or turn your floor
mat over. Lightly pull to confirm mat is
secured using the floor mat fasteners on a
regular basis.
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT
FROM THE VEHICLE before installing any
other floor mat. NEVER install or stack an
additional floor mat on top of an existing
floor mat.
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that cannot
be properly attached and secured to your
vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be replaced,
only use a FCA approved floor mat for the
specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the
driver’s side floor area. To check for interfer-
ence, with the vehicle properly parked with the
engine off, fully depress the accelerator, the
brake, and the clutch pedal (if present) to
check for interference. If your floor mat inter-
feres with the operation of any pedal, or is not
secure to the floor, remove the floor mat from
the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
trunk.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on
the passenger’s side floor area.
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide
into the driver’s side floor area when the
vehicle is moving. Objects can become
trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle
control.
WARNING!
4
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 199
200 SAFETY
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
M
AKE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven
wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or
other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall.
Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect
sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. Check the
wheel bolts for tightness. Check the tires (including
spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the
controls. Check turn signal and high beam
indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks.
Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should
be located and corrected immediately.
NEVER place any objects under the floor mat
(e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could
change the position of the floor mat and may
cause interference with the accelerator,
brake, or clutch pedals.
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet to
the floor and check the floor mat fasteners are
secure to the vehicle carpet. Fully depress
each pedal to check for interference with the
accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals then
re-install the floor mats.
It is recommended to only use mild soap and
water to clean your floor mats. After cleaning,
always check your floor mat has been properly
installed and is secured to your vehicle using
the floor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat.
WARNING!
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 200
201
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE — GAS ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten
your seat belt.
The starter should not be operated for more than
10-second intervals. Waiting a few seconds
between such intervals will protect the starter from
overheating.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Start the engine with the transmission in PARK
position. Apply the brake before shifting into any
driving range.
NOTE:
This vehicle is equipped with a transmission
shift interlocking system. The brake pedal must
be pressed to shift out of PARK.
If equipped with an eight-speed transmission,
starting the vehicle in NEUTRAL is not possible
unless the Manual Park Release has been
activated. For the Manual Park Release opera-
tion refer to Manual Park Release in “In Case Of
Emergency”.
TIP START FEATURE
Do not press the accelerator. Cycle the ignition
switch briefly to the START position and release it.
The starter motor will continue to run and will
automatically disengage when the engine is
running.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition switch with the push of a button, as long as
the Remote Start/Keyless Enter-N-Go key fob is in
the passenger compartment.
WARNING!
When leaving the vehicle, always make sure
the keyless ignition node is in the "OFF" mode,
remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock
the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up
may cause serious injury or death.
WARNING!
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 201
202 STARTING AND OPERATING
NORMAL STARTING USING ENGINE
START/STOP B
UTTON
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing
the ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start
the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the
starter will disengage automatically after
10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine
prior to the engine starting, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button again.
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/STOP
Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push
and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition will return to the OFF mode.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE
START/STOP button must be held for two
seconds or three short pushes in a row with
the vehicle speed above 5 mph (8 km/h)
before the engine will shut off. The ignition will
remain in the ACC mode until the gear selector
is in PARK and the button is pushed twice to
the OFF mode.
4. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the
ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once
with the vehicle speed above 5 mph (8 km/h),
the instrument cluster will display a “
Vehicle
Not In Park” message and the engine will
remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of
the PARK position, or it could roll.
NOTE:
If the gear selector is not in PARK, and the ENGINE
START/STOP button is pushed once with the
vehicle speed below 5 mph (8 km/h), the engine
will shut off and the ignition will remain in the ACC
position. If vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph
(1.9 km/h), the vehicle may AutoPark. See
AutoPark section for further details.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar
to an ignition switch. It has three modes: OFF, ACC,
and RUN. To change the ignition modes without
starting the vehicle and use the accessories, follow
these directions:
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF mode.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
place the ignition to the ACC mode.
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
second time to place the ignition to the
RUN mode.
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third
time to return the ignition to the OFF mode.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 202
STARTING AND OPERATING 203
AutoPark — Rotary Shifter and Eight-Speed
Transmission Only
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in
placing the vehicle in PARK should the situations
on the following pages occur. It is a back up system
and should not be relied upon as the primary
method by which the driver shifts the vehicle into
PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will engage
are outlined on the following pages.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns off
the engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions
are met:
Vehicle is equipped with a rotary shifter and an
eight-speed transmission
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Ignition switched from RUN to ACC
NOTE:
For Keyless Enter-N-Go equipped vehicles, the
engine will turn off and the ignition switch will
change to ACC mode. After 30 minutes the ignition
switches to OFF automatically, unless the driver
turns the ignition switch OFF.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the
vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle may
AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions
are met:
Vehicle is equipped with a rotary shifter and an
eight-speed transmission
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
Driver’s door is ajar
Brake pedal is not depressed
The message “
AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then
Shift to Gear” will display in the instrument cluster.
NOTE:
In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be
displayed in the instrument cluster, causing the
“
AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then Shift to Gear” to
not be seen. In these cases, the shifter must be
returned to “P” to select desired gear.
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the
vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage
ONLY when vehicle speed is
1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less.
The message “
Vehicle Speed is Too High to
Shift to P” will be displayed in the instrument
cluster if vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph
(1.9 km/h).
WARNING!
Driver inattention could lead to failure to place
the vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL
CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK by verifying
that a solid (not blinking) “P” is indicated in
the Instrument Cluster Display and near the
gear selector. If the “P” indicator is blinking,
your vehicle is not in PARK. As an added
precaution, always apply the parking brake
when exiting the vehicle.
AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not
designed to replace the need to shift your
vehicle into PARK. It is a back up system and
should not be relied upon as the primary
method by which the driver shifts the vehicle
into PARK.
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h),
the transmission will default to NEUTRAL until
the vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph
(1.9 km/h). A vehicle left in the NEUTRAL
position can roll. As an added precaution, always
apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 203
204 STARTING AND OPERATING
4WD LOW — If Equipped
AutoPark will be disabled when operating the
vehicle in 4WD LOW.
The message “
AutoPark Disabled” will be
displayed in the instrument cluster.
Additional customer warnings will be given when
all of these conditions are met:
Vehicle is not in PARK
Driver’s door is ajar
Vehicle is in 4WD LOW range
The message “
AutoPark Not Engaged” will be
displayed in the instrument cluster. A warning
chime will continue until you shift the vehicle into
PARK or the driver’s door is closed.
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK
that your vehicle is in
PARK by looking for the “P” in the Instrument
Cluster Display and near the shifter. As an added
precaution, always apply the parking brake when
exiting the vehicle.
If Engine Fails To Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed
the “Normal Starting” procedure, it may be
flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all the way to
the floor and hold it there while the engine is
cranking. This should clear any excess fuel in case
the engine is flooded.
The starter motor will engage automatically, run for
10 seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs,
release the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal,
wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal
Starting” procedure.
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run,
but not have enough power to continue running
when the ignition button/key is released. If this
occurs, continue cranking with the accelerator
pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release the
accelerator pedal and the ignition button/key once
the engine is running smoothly.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after a
10 second period of engine cranking with the
accelerator pedal held to the floor, wait 10 to
15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”
procedure.
COLD WEATHER OPERATION
(B
ELOW –22°F OR −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures,
use of an externally powered electric engine block
heater (available from an authorized dealer) is
recommended.
AFTER STARTING
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it
will decrease as the engine warms up.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an
attempt to start the vehicle. This could result
in flash fire causing serious personal injury.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to
get it started. Vehicles equipped with an auto-
matic transmission cannot be started this
way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic
converter and once the engine has started,
ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a start
from a booster battery or the battery in
another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly. Refer to “Jump
Starting Procedure” in “In Case Of Emergency”
for further information.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank
the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time.
Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 204
STARTING AND OPERATING 205
(Continued)
STARTING THE ENGINE — DIESEL ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten
your seat belts.
The starter should not be operated for more than
25-second intervals. Waiting a few minutes
between such intervals will protect the starter from
overheating.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Start the engine with the transmission in the
NEUTRAL or PARK position. Apply the brake before
shifting to any driving range.
Tip Start Feature
Do not press the accelerator. Cycle the ignition
switch briefly to the START position and release it.
The starter motor will continue to run and will
automatically disengage when the engine is
running.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition switch with the push of a button, as long as
the Remote Start/Keyless Enter-N-Go key fob is in
the passenger compartment.
Normal Starting
USING THE ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON
1. The transmission must be in PARK or
NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing
the ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start
the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the
starter will disengage automatically after
25 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine
prior to the engine starting, remove your foot
from the brake pedal and push the ENGINE
START/STOP button again.
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing
the accelerator pedal.
Under cold weather conditions, the engine may
not immediately crank if the “Wait To Start” tell-
tale is illuminated. This is normal operation. For
vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, the
vehicle will automatically crank when the “Wait
To Start” time has elapsed. See the section
“Starting Procedure — Engine Manifold Air
Temperature 0°F to 66°F (-18°C to 19°C)” for
more information.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up
may cause serious injury or death.
When leaving the vehicle, always make sure
the keyless ignition node is in the “OFF” mode,
remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock
the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing
children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
WARNING!
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 205
206 STARTING AND OPERATING
TO TURN OFF THE ENGINE USING ENGINE
START/STOP BUTTON
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push
and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition will return to the OFF mode.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the
ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once,
the instrument cluster will display a “Vehicle
Not In Park” message and the engine will
remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of
the PARK position, or it could roll.
4. If the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, and the
vehicle speed below 5 mph (8 km/h), pushing
the ENGINE START/STOP button once will turn
the engine off. The ignition will remain in the
ACC mode.
5. If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h),
the ENGINE START/STOP button must be held
for two seconds (or three short pushes in a
row) to turn the engine off. The ignition will
remain in the ACC mode (NOT the OFF mode) if
the engine is turned off when the transmission
is not in PARK.
NOTE:
If the ignition is left in the ACC or ON/RUN
(engine not running) mode and the transmission is
in PARK, the system will automatically time out
after 30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition
return to the OFF mode.
ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON FUNCTIONS —
WITH DRIVER’S FOOT OFF THE BRAKE PEDAL
(IN PARK OR NEUTRAL POSITION)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar
to an ignition switch. It has three positions, OFF,
ACC, RUN. To change the ignition switch positions
without starting the vehicle and use the
accessories follow these steps:
1. Starting with the ignition in the OFF position:
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
change the ignition to the ACC position.
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
second time to change the ignition to the RUN
position.
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third
time to return the ignition to the OFF position.
Keyless Enter-N-Go Starting Procedure —
Engine Manifold Air Temperature 0° F To
66° F (–18° C to 19° C)
NOTE:
The temperature displayed in the instrument
cluster does not necessarily reflect the engine
manifold air temperature. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information. When
engine temperatures fall below 66°F (19°C) the
“Wait To Start” telltale will remain on indicating the
intake air heater system is active.
Follow the steps in the “Normal Starting”
procedure except:
1. Pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button with
the driver’s foot on the brake will move the
ignition from OFF or ACC to RUN, and will
illuminate the “Wait To Start” telltale. The
engine will not immediately crank, this is
normal operation.
2. The “Wait To Start” telltale will remain on for a
period of time that varies depending on the
engine temperature.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 206
STARTING AND OPERATING 207
3. While the “Wait to Start” telltale is on, the
instrument cluster will additionally display a
gauge or bar whose initial length represents
the full “Wait to Start” time period. Its length
will decrease until it disappears when the
“Wait to Start” time has elapsed.
4. After the engine “Wait To Start” telltale goes
off, the engine will automatically crank.
5. After engine start-up, check to see that there is
oil pressure.
6. Release the parking brake and drive.
NOTE:
Engine idle speed will automatically increase to
1,000 RPM and engage the Variable Geometry
Turbocharger at low coolant temperatures to
improve engine warm-up.
The engine will not automatically crank after the
engine “Wait To Start” telltale goes off if a door
or the hood is ajar.
If the engine stalls, or if the ignition switch is left
ON for more than two minutes after the “Wait To
Start” telltale goes out, reset the intake air
heater by turning the ignition switch to the OFF
position for at least 5 seconds and then back
ON. Repeat steps 1 through 7 of “Keyless
Enter-N-Go Starting Procedure – Engine
Manifold Air Temperature Below 66° F (19° C).”
EXTREME COLD WEATHER
The Cummins® Turbo Diesel engine is equipped
with several features designed to assist cold
weather starting and operation:
The engine block heater is a resistance heater
installed in the water jacket of the engine just
above and behind the oil filter. It requires a
110–115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
NOTE:
The engine block heater cord is a factory installed
option. If your vehicle is not equipped, heater cords
are available from an authorized Mopar® dealer.
A 12 Volt heater built into the fuel filter housings
aid in preventing fuel gelling. It is controlled by a
built-in thermostat.
A intake air heater system both improves engine
starting and reduces the amount of white
smoke generated by a warming engine.
CAUTION!
If the “Water in Fuel Indicator Light” remains on,
DO NOT START the engine before you drain the
water from the fuel filters to avoid engine
damage. Refer to “Draining Fuel/Water
Separator Filter” in “Servicing And Maintenance”
for further information.
CAUTION!
Do not crank engine for more than 25 seconds
at a time or starter motor damage may result.
Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and
wait at least two minutes for the starter to cool
before repeating start procedure.
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 207
208 STARTING AND OPERATING
NORMAL STARTING PROCEDURE —
E
NGINE MANIFOLD AIR TEMPERATURE
A
BOVE 66° F (19° C)
Observe the instrument panel cluster lights when
starting the engine.
1. Always apply the parking brake.
2. Shift into PARK for an automatic transmission.
3. Place the ignition switch in the ON position and
watch the instrument panel cluster lights.
4. Place the ignition switch in the START position
and crank the engine. Do not press the
accelerator during starting.
5. Check that the oil pressure warning light has
turned off.
6. Release the parking brake.
STARTING PROCEDURE — ENGINE
M
ANIFOLD AIR TEMPERATURE 0°F TO
66°F (–18°C
TO 19°C)
NOTE:
The temperature displayed in the instrument
cluster does not necessarily reflect the engine
manifold air temperature. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information. When
engine temperatures fall below 66°F (19°C) the
“Wait To Start Light” will remain on indicating the
intake air heater system is active.
Follow the steps in the “Normal Starting”
procedure except:
1. The “Wait To Start” telltale will remain on for
a period of time that varies depending on the
engine temperature.
2. While the “Wait To Start” telltale is on, the
instrument cluster will additionally display a
gauge or bar whose initial length represents
the full “Wait To Start” time period. Its length
will decrease until it disappears when the
“Wait To Start” time has elapsed.
3. After the “Wait To Start” telltale goes off, place
the ignition switch in the START position.
Do not press the accelerator during starting.
CAUTION!
If the “Water in Fuel Indicator Light” remains on,
DO NOT START the engine before you drain the
water from the fuel filters to avoid engine
damage. Refer to “Draining Fuel/Water
Separator Filter” in “Servicing And Maintenance”
for further information.
CAUTION!
Do not crank engine for more than 25 seconds
at a time or starter motor damage may result.
Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and
wait at least two minutes for the starter to cool
before repeating start procedure.
CAUTION!
If the “Water in Fuel Indicator Light” remains on,
DO NOT START the engine before you drain the
water from the fuel filters to avoid engine
damage. Refer to “Draining Fuel/Water
Separator Filter” in “Servicing And Maintenance”
for further information.
CAUTION!
Do not crank engine for more than 25 seconds
at a time or starter motor damage may result.
Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and
wait at least two minutes for the starter to cool
before repeating start procedure.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 208
STARTING AND OPERATING 209
4. After engine start-up, check that the oil
pressure warning light has turned off.
5. Release the parking brake and drive.
NOTE:
Engine idle speed will automatically increase to
1,000 RPM and engage the Variable Geometry
Turbocharger at low coolant temperatures to
improve engine warm-up.
Automatic equipped vehicles with optional
Keyless Enter-N-Go – If the start button is
pushed once while in park with the ignition off
and driver’s foot on the brake pedal, the vehicle
will automatically crank and start after the Wait
to Start time has elapsed. If it is desired to abort
the start process before it completes, the
driver’s foot should be fully removed from the
brake pedal prior to pushing the start button
again in order for the ignition to move directly
to off.
If the engine stalls, or if the ignition switch is left
ON for more than two minutes after the “Wait To
Start” telltale goes out, reset the intake air
heater by turning the ignition switch to the OFF
position for at least five seconds and then back
ON. Repeat steps 1 through 5 of “Starting Proce-
dure – Engine Manifold Air Temperature Below
66°F (19°C).”
STARTING PROCEDURE — ENGINE
M
ANIFOLD AIR TEMPERATURE BELOW
0°F (-18°C)
In extremely cold weather below 0°F (-18°C) it
may be beneficial to cycle the intake air heater
twice before attempting to start the engine. This
can be accomplished by turning the ignition OFF
for at least 5 seconds and then back ON after the
“Wait To Start” telltale has turned off, but before
the engine is started. However, excessive cycling of
the intake air heater will result in damage to the
heater elements or reduced battery voltage.
NOTE:
If multiple pre-heat cycles are used before starting,
additional engine run time may be required to
maintain battery state of charge at a satisfactory
level.
1. If the engine stalls after the initial start, the
ignition must be turned to the OFF position for
at least five seconds and then to the ON
position to recycle the intake air heater.
NOTE:
Excessive white smoke and poor engine perfor-
mance will result if intake air heater are not
recycled.
2. Heat generated by the intake air heater
dissipates rapidly in a cold engine. If more than
two minutes pass between the time the
“Wait To Start” telltale turns off and the engine
is started, recycle the intake air heater by
turning the ignition switch to the OFF position
for at least five seconds and then back ON.
3. If the vehicle is driven and vehicle speed
exceeds 19 mph (31 km/h) before the intake
air heater post-heat (after start) cycle is
complete, the intake air heater will shut off.
4. If the engine is cranked for more than
10 seconds, the post-heat cycle will turn off.
NOTE:
Engine idle speed will automatically increase to
1,000 RPM and engage the Variable Geometry
Turbocharger at low coolant temperatures to
improve engine warm-up.
When a diesel engine is allowed to run out of
fuel or the fuel gels at low temperatures, air is
pulled into the fuel system. If your engine has
run out of fuel, refer to “Dealer Service/Priming
If The Engine Has Run Out Of Fuel” in “Servicing
And Maintenance” for further information.
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 209
210 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the engine stalls, or if the ignition switch is left
ON for more than two minutes after the “Wait To
Start” telltale goes out, reset the intake air
heater by turning the ignition switch to the OFF
position for at least 5 seconds and then back
ON. Repeat steps 1 through 5 of “Starting
Procedure – Engine Manifold Air Temperature
Below 66°F (19°C).”
STARTING FLUIDS
The engine is equipped with an automatic electric
air preheating system. If the instructions in this
manual are followed, the engine should start in all
conditions.
NORMAL OPERATION — DIESEL ENGINE
Observe the following when the engine is
operating:
All message center lights are off.
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is off.
Engine oil pressure is above 10 psi (69 kPa)
at idle.
Voltmeter operation:
The voltmeter may show a gauge fluctuation at
various engine temperatures. This cycling
operation is caused by the post-heat cycle of the
intake manifold heater system. The number of
cycles and the length of the cycling operation is
controlled by the engine control module. Post-heat
operation can run for several minutes, and then
the electrical system and voltmeter needle will
stabilize.
The cycling action will cause temporary dimming of
the headlamps, interior lamps, and also a
noticeable reduction in blower motor speed.
COLD WEATHER PRECAUTIONS
Operation in ambient temperature below 32°F
(0°C) may require special considerations. The
following charts suggest these options:
WARNING!
Starting fluids or flammable liquids must never
be used in the Cummins® diesel engine (see
Warning label). Never pour diesel fuel,
flammable liquid, starting fluids (ether) into the
air cleaner canister, air intake piping, or
turbocharger inlet in an attempt to start the
vehicle. This could result in a flash fire and
explosion causing serious personal injury and
engine damage.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up
may cause serious injury or death.
When leaving the vehicle, always make sure
the keyless ignition node is in the “OFF” mode,
remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock
the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 210
STARTING AND OPERATING 211
Fuel Operating Range
NOTE:
Use “Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuels”
ONLY.
Fuel Operating Range Chart
*No. 1 Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel should only be used where extended arctic conditions (0°F/-18°C) exist”.
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 211
212 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Use of Climatized Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel or
Number 1 Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel results in
a noticeable decrease in fuel economy.
Climatized Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel is a
blend of Number 2 Ultra Low Sulfur and Number
1 Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuels which reduces
the temperature at which wax crystals form in
fuel.
The fuel grade should be clearly marked on the
pump at the fuel station.
The engine requires the use of
“Ultra Low Sulfur
Diesel Fuel”. Use of incorrect fuel could result in
engine and exhaust system damage. Refer to
“Fuel Requirements” in “Technical Specifica-
tions” for further information.
If climatized or diesel Number 1 ULSD fuel is not
available, and you are operating below
(20°F/-6°C), in sustained arctic conditions,
Mopar® Premium Diesel Fuel Treatment
(or equivalent) is recommended to avoid gelling
(see Fuel Operating Range Chart).
Under some circumstances increased engine
noise may be audible in the seconds following a
cold start. This is most likely to occur when using
fuel that isn't blended for the ambient tempera-
ture present. This may occur on an unseason-
ably cold day or when a truck is fueled in a
warmer climate and driven to a colder climate.
The noise can typically be prevented by using
Mopar® Premium Diesel Fuel Treatment as
recommended (see Fuel Operating Range
Chart).
Engine Oil Usage
Refer to “Dealer Service” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for the correct engine oil viscosity.
Winter Front Cover Usage
A Winter front or cold weather cover is to be used
in ambient temperatures below 32°F (0°C),
especially during extended idle conditions. This
cover is equipped with four flaps for managing
total grille opening in varying ambient
temperatures. If a Winter front or cold weather
cover is to be used the flaps should be left in the
full open position to allow air flow to the charge air
cooler and automatic transmission oil cooler.
When ambient temperatures drop below 0°F
(-17°C) the four flaps need to be closed. A suitable
cold weather cover is available from your Mopar®
dealer.
Battery Blanket Usage
A battery loses 60% of its cranking power as the
battery temperature decreases to 0°F (-18°C).
For the same decrease in temperature, the engine
requires twice as much power to crank at the
same RPM.
The use of 120 VAC powered battery blankets will
greatly increase starting capability at low
temperatures. Suitable battery blankets are
available from an authorized Mopar® dealer.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 212
STARTING AND OPERATING 213
Engine Warm-Up
Avoid full throttle operation when the engine is
cold. When starting a cold engine, bring the engine
up to operating speed slowly to allow the oil
pressure to stabilize as the engine warms up.
NOTE:
High-speed, no-load running of a cold engine can
result in excessive white smoke and poor engine
performance. No-load engine speeds should be
kept under 1,000 RPM during the warm-up period,
especially in cold ambient temperature conditions.
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine warm up
protection feature that may limit engine
performance after cold starting at low ambient
temperatures. The length of time engine speed is
limited is dependent upon engine coolant
temperature. Engine speed may be briefly limited
to 1000 RPM after starting with coolant
temperature below freezing conditions, and may
be limited to 1000 RPM for up to approximately
2 minutes under more severe cold conditions.
NOTE:
If ambient temperatures are low and the coolant
temperature is below 180°F (82°C), the engine
idle speed will slowly increase to 1,000 RPM after
two minutes of idle, if the following conditions are
met:
Foot is off brake pedal and throttle pedal.
Automatic transmission is in PARK.
Vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
Applying the throttle will cancel fast idle.
Operating the exhaust brake at idle will greatly
improve warm up rate and will help keep the
engine close to operating temperature during
extended idle.
ENGINE IDLING
Avoid prolonged idling, long periods of idling may
be harmful to your engine because combustion
chamber temperatures can drop so low that the
fuel may not burn completely. Incomplete
combustion allows carbon and varnish to form on
piston rings, engine valves, and injector nozzles.
Also, the unburned fuel can enter the crankcase,
diluting the oil and causing rapid wear to the
engine.
If the engine is allowed to idle or the truck is driven
on low engine speed drive cycles for more than
2 hours, the system will automatically enter an
emissions operating mode that will increase the
engine idle speed to 900 RPM. While in this mode,
which is designed to help maintain the diesel
particulate filter, the engine idle speed will return
to normal when the brake pedal is applied. A small
change in engine tone or a slight change in engine
performance while accelerating may also be
noticeable at speeds below 20 mph (32 km/h).
This operating mode may last for up to an hour of
idle time, or around 20 minutes of driving time.
Your truck may have been ordered with an optional
voltage monitoring idle up feature. If a load is
placed on the electrical system while the truck is in
park, this feature will attempt to maintain normal
system voltage by automatically increasing engine
idle speed. You may notice several consecutive
increases in idle speed, up to a maximum of
1,450 RPM, as the system will attempt to utilize
the smallest increase in idle speed necessary to
maintain normal system voltage. The idle speed
will return to normal when either the electrical load
is removed, or when the brake pedal is applied.
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 213
214 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
For instrument cluster display messages related to
the vehicle's exhaust system, refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
Idle-Up Feature
The driver-controlled high idle speed feature will
help increase cylinder temperatures and provide
additional cab heat, however, excessive idling may
still cause the exhaust aftertreatment system to
not properly regenerate. Extended periods of idle
time should be avoided.
The Idle-Up feature uses the Speed Control
switches to increase engine idle speed and quickly
warm the vehicle's interior.
1. With the transmission in PARK, the parking
brake applied, and the engine running, push
the speed control switch to the ON position,
then push the SET switch.
2. The engine RPM will go up to 1,100 RPM.
To increase the RPM, push and hold the
ACCEL/RESUME switch and the idle speed
will increase to approximately 1,500 RPM.
To decrease the RPM, push and hold the
DECEL switch and the idle speed will decrease
to approximately 1,100 RPM.
3. To cancel the Idle–Up feature, either push the
CANCEL switch, push the ON/OFF switch, or
press the brake pedal.
NOISE
Diesel engines can create noises that may seem
concerning. The nature of a diesel engine is
compression ignition where compressed air and
fuel are mixed and ignited. Weather, barometric
pressure, altitude, and temperature will affect how
fuel is ignited in the engine. Engines will sound
different from day to day or previous model years.
Clicking, ticking, or light knocking is normal and will
change from day to day, as the engine breaks in,
and can vary with changes in ambient
temperature. Clicking sound from under the hood
shortly after vehicle shutdown is normal as
actuators such as the EGR valve are cycled. Fuel
pump noise may increase during low speed/light
load conditions when ambient temperature is
above 100°F (38°C), and when fuel tank level is
below 10% which is a normal condition of the fuel
system and controls strategy.
Diesel equipped vehicles also have an exhaust
after-treatment system to reduce emissions
utilizing a DPF (refer to “Odor” in this section for
further information) and a Selective Reduction
Catalyst (SCR). The SCR reduces Nitrogen Oxides
(NOx) using the Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) system.
DEF is injected directly into the SCR through a
dosing module. This process will create a clicking
sound and at times, will make noise even with the
vehicle shut off. This is normal as the DEF dosing
module is purging DEF. If at any time the check
engine light is on, please visit an authorized dealer.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 214
STARTING AND OPERATING 215
STOPPING THE ENGINE
Idle the engine a few minutes before routine shutdown. After full load operation, idle the engine three to five minutes before shutting it down. This idle period
will allow the lubricating oil and coolant to carry excess heat away from the combustion chamber, bearings, internal components, and turbocharger. This is
especially important for turbocharged, charge air-cooled engines. Refer to the following chart for proper engine shutdown:
IDLE SHUTDOWN
This feature can be enabled so that the truck will
automatically shutdown when the truck has been
idling for a set period of time when the engine is at
operating temperature. Idle time can be set in
5 minute increments between 5 and 60 minutes.
See an authorized dealer to enable this feature.
NOTE:
The idle shut down timer is disabled while the
PTO is active.
PROGRAMMABLE MAXIMUM VEHICLE
S
PEED
This feature allows the owner to set a maximum
vehicle speed for the vehicle. The 2500 and
3500 Series maximum vehicle speed can be set
between 40 mph (64 km/h) and 87 mph
(140 km/h). The 4500/5500 Series maximum
vehicle speed can be set between 40 mph
(64 km/h) and 85 mph (136 km/h). See an
authorized dealer to enable this feature.
NOTE:
DO NOT set the maximum vehicle speed to a value
greater than what the vehicle tires are rated for.
OPERATING PRECAUTIONS
Avoid Overheating The Engine
The temperature of the engine coolant (antifreeze)
(a mixture of 50% ethylene-glycol and 50% water)
must not exceed the normal range of the
temperature gauge 240°F (116°C) with a 21 psi
(145 kPa) coolant pressure cap.
Driving Condition Load Turbocharger Temperature
Idle Time (min.) Before Engine
Shutdown
Stop and Go Empty Cool Less than One
Stop and Go Medium - One
Highway Speeds Medium Warm Two
City Traffic Maximum GCWR - Three
Highway Speeds Maximum GCWR - Four
Uphill Grade Maximum GCWR Hot Five
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 215
216 STARTING AND OPERATING
Usually the engine coolant (antifreeze)
temperature indicated during operation will be to
the left of center in the normal range of the gauge.
Avoid Low Coolant Temperature Operation
Continual operation at low engine coolant
(antifreeze) temperature below the normal range
on the gauge 140°F (60°C) can be harmful to the
engine. Low engine coolant (antifreeze)
temperature can cause incomplete combustion
which allows carbon and varnish to form on piston
rings and injector nozzles. Also, the unburned fuel
can enter the crankcase, diluting the lubricating oil
and causing rapid wear to the engine.
COOLING SYSTEM TIPS
To reduce potential for engine and transmission
overheating in high ambient temperature
conditions, take the following actions:
City Driving — When stopped, shift the transmis-
sion into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle
speed.
Highway Driving — Reduce your speed.
Up Steep Hills — Select a lower transmission
gear.
Air Conditioning — Turn it off temporarily.
Do Not Operate The Engine With Low Oil
Pressure
When the engine is at normal operating
temperature, the minimum oil pressures required
are:
Do Not Operate The Engine With Failed
Parts
All engine failures give some warning before the
parts fail. Be on the alert for changes in
performance, sounds, and visual evidence that the
engine requires service. Some important clues are:
Engine misfiring or vibrating severely.
Sudden loss of power.
Unusual engine noises.
Fuel, oil or coolant leaks.
Sudden change, outside the normal operating
range, in the engine operating temperature.
Excessive smoke.
Oil pressure drop.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER
The engine block heater warms the engine, and
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the
cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical
outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater cord is routed through the
grille by the right front tow hook.
It includes a removable cap that is secured by a
tethered strap. It also has a c-clip that is used for
storage when not in use for the Winter months.
During Winter months, remove the heater cord
wiring assembly from itself on the c-clip.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at
least one hour to have an adequate warming effect
on the engine.
Idle 700 to 800 RPM
10 psi
(69 kPa)
Full speed and load
30 psi
(207 kPa)
CAUTION!
If oil pressure falls to less than normal readings,
shut the engine off immediately. Failure to do so
could result in immediate and severe engine
damage.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block
heater cord before driving. Damage to the
110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause
electrocution.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 216
STARTING AND OPERATING 217
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
GAS ENGINE
A long break-in period is not required for the engine
and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your
vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are
desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within
the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good
break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low
gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory
is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant.
Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated
climate conditions under which vehicle operations
will occur. For the recommended viscosity and
quality grades, refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in
“Technical Specifications”.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its first
few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in
and not interpreted as a problem. Please check
your oil level with the engine oil indicator often
during the break in period. Add oil as required.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
DIESEL ENGINE
The Cummins® Turbo Diesel engine does not
require a break-in period due to its construction.
Normal operation is allowed, providing the
following recommendations are followed:
Warm up the engine before placing it under
load.
Do not operate the engine at idle for prolonged
periods.
Use the appropriate transmission gear to
prevent engine lugging.
Observe vehicle oil pressure and temperature
indicators.
Check the coolant and oil levels frequently.
Vary throttle position at highway speeds when
carrying or towing significant weight.
NOTE:
Light duty operation such as light trailer towing or
no load operation will extend the time before the
engine is at full efficiency. Reduced fuel economy
and power may be seen at this time.
For additional vehicle break-in requirements, refer
to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting And Operating” of
the Owners Manual.
Because of the construction of the Cummins®
Turbo Diesel engine, engine run-in is enhanced by
loaded operating conditions which allow the
engine parts to achieve final finish and fit during
the first 6,000 miles (10,000 km).
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the
parking brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to
leave the transmission in PARK.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral
Oil in the engine or damage may result.
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 217
218 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
The foot-operated parking brake is located below
the lower left corner of the instrument panel. To
apply the park brake, firmly push the park brake
pedal fully. To release the parking brake, pull the
parking brake release handle.
Parking Brake Release
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in the
instrument cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
When the parking brake is applied and the
transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake
Warning Light” will flash. If vehicle speed is
detected, a chime will sound to alert the driver.
Fully release the parking brake before
attempting to move the vehicle.
This light only shows that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade
and away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply
the parking brake before placing the gear selector
in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission
locking mechanism may make it difficult to move
the gear selector out of PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied whenever the driver is
not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute
for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible injury
or damage.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving unat-
tended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A
child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to
brake failure and a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when
leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause
damage or injury. Also, be certain to leave the
transmission in PARK. Failure to do so may
cause the vehicle to roll and cause damage or
injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on
with the parking brake released, a brake system
malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system
serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING!
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 218
STARTING AND OPERATING 219
DIESEL EXHAUST BRAKE — ENGINE
BRAKING (IF EQUIPPED)
The purpose of the exhaust brake (engine braking)
feature is to supply negative (braking) torque from
the engine. Typically, the engine braking is used
for, but not limited to, vehicle towing applications
where vehicle braking can be achieved by the
internal engine power, thereby sparing the
mechanical brakes of the vehicle.
Benefits of the exhaust brake are:
Vehicle driving control.
Reduced brake fade.
Longer brake life.
Faster cab warm-up.
The exhaust brake feature will only function when
the driver toggles it on by pushing the exhaust
brake button until the “Exhaust Brake Indicator” is
illuminated. Normal (Full Strength) exhaust brake
mode is indicated by a yellow “Exhaust Brake
Indicator”.
Exhaust Brake Switch
Once the “Exhaust Brake Indicator” is illuminated
and the vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph
(8 km/h); the exhaust brake will automatically
operate when the driver removes pressure from
the accelerator pedal. Exhaust braking is most
effective when the engine RPM is higher. The
automatic transmission will downshift more
aggressively in TOW/HAUL mode when the exhaust
brake is enabled to increase brake performance.
NOTE:
For optimum braking power it is recommended to
use the exhaust brake while in TOW/HAUL mode.
The exhaust brake feature can also be used to
reduce the engine warm up time. To use the
exhaust brake as a warm-up device, the vehicle
must be stopped or moving less than 5 mph
(8 km/h), the "Exhaust Brake Indicator" must be
on, and the coolant temperature must be below
180°F (82°C) and ambient temperature below
60°F (16°C).
Automatic “Smart” Exhaust Brake
Automatic “Smart” Exhaust Brake technology
delivers smoother, less aggressive exhaust
braking characteristics during downhill descents.
Although it can apply full exhaust braking force if
needed, Automatic “Smart” Exhaust Brake may
not apply obvious braking if the vehicle speed is
not increasing. Automatic “Smart” Exhaust Brake
is intended to maintain vehicle speed, while Full
Exhaust Brake is intended to reduce vehicle speed.
WARNING!
Do not use the exhaust brake feature when
driving in icy or slippery conditions as the
increased engine braking can cause the rear
wheels to slide and the vehicle to swing around
with the possible loss of vehicle control, which
may cause an accident possibly resulting in
personal injury or death.
CAUTION!
Use of aftermarket exhaust brakes is not
recommended and could lead to engine damage
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 219
220 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
Automatic “Smart” Exhaust Brake can be enabled
by pushing the exhaust brake button (on the center
stack) again anytime after the normal Full Exhaust
Brake has been turned on. The “Exhaust Brake
Indicator” in the instrument cluster display will
change from Yellow to Green when Automatic
“Smart” Exhaust Brake is enabled. Pushing the
exhaust brake button again will toggle the exhaust
brake mode to off.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute
for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to
guard against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if the
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and
verify that the transmission gear position indi-
cator solidly indicates PARK (P) without
blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely
stopped, and the PARK position is properly
indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all
vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while
the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle,
always come to a complete stop, then apply
the parking brake, shift the transmission into
PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the
ignition is in the OFF mode, the transmission
is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against
unwanted movement.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
sion gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children), and do
not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
WARNING!
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 220
STARTING AND OPERATING 221
NOTE:
You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park
Interlock which requires the transmission to be in
PARK before the ignition can be turned to the OFF
mode. This helps the driver avoid inadvertently
leaving the vehicle without placing the
transmission in PARK. This system also locks the
transmission in PARK whenever the ignition is in
the OFF mode.
NOTE:
The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when the
ignition is in the ACC mode (even though the
engine will be off). Ensure that the transmission is
in PARK, and the ignition is OFF (not in ACC mode)
before exiting the vehicle.
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT
I
NTERLOCK SYSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission
Shift Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the
transmission gear selector in PARK unless the
brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of
PARK, the engine must be running and the brake
pedal must be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from
NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle
is stopped or moving at low speeds.
EIGHT-SPEED AUTOMATIC
T
RANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
The transmission is controlled using a rotary
electronic gear selector located on the instrument
panel. The transmission gear range (PRND) is
displayed both above the gear selector and in the
instrument cluster. To select a gear range, simply
rotate the gear selector. You must press the brake
pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK
(or NEUTRAL, when the vehicle is stopped or
moving at low speeds). To shift past multiple gear
ranges at once (such as PARK to DRIVE), simply
rotate the gear selector to the appropriate detent.
Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.
NOTE:
In the event of a mismatch between the gear
selector position and the actual transmission gear
(for example, driver selects PARK while driving),
the position indicator will blink continuously until
the selector is returned to the proper position, or
the requested shift can be completed.
The electronically-controlled transmission adapts
its shift schedule based on driver inputs, along
with environmental and road conditions. The
transmission electronics are self-calibrating;
therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may
be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition,
and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when
the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is
stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
pedal when shifting between these gears.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
following precautions are not observed:
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above
idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 221
222 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
The transmission gear selector has only PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and DRIVE positions. Manual
downshifts can be made using the Electronic
Range Select (ERS) shift control. Pressing the
GEAR -/GEAR + switches (on the steering wheel)
while in the DRIVE position will select the highest
available transmission gear, and will display that
gear limit in the instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc.
Refer to “Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation”
in this section for further information. Some
models will display both the selected gear limit,
and the actual current gear, while in ERS mode.
Electronic Transmission Gear Selector
Gear Ranges
Do not depress the accelerator pedal when shifting
from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before acceler-
ating. This is especially important when the engine
is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be
started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK
while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking
brake when exiting the vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the
parking brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an
added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb
on an uphill grade.
NOTE:
On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the
transfer case is in a drive position.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
Apply the parking brake.
Shift the transmission into PARK.
Turn the engine off.
Remove the key fob.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute
for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to
guard against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 222
STARTING AND OPERATING 223
(Continued)
The following indicators should be used to ensure
that you have properly engaged the transmission
into the PARK position:
Look at the transmission gear position display
and verify that it indicates the PARK position (P),
and is not blinking.
With brake pedal released, verify that the gear
selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward.
Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come
to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running. Apply
the parking brake and shift the transmission into
PARK if you must exit the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if the
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and
verify that the transmission gear position indi-
cator solidly indicates PARK (P) without
blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely
stopped, and the PARK position is properly
indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all
vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while
the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle,
always come to a complete stop, then apply
the parking brake, shift the transmission into
PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the
ignition is in the OFF mode, the transmission
is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against
unwanted movement.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
sion gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children), and do
not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as
this can damage the drivetrain.
Before moving the transmission gear selector
out of PARK, you must start the engine, and
also press the brake pedal. Otherwise,
damage to the gear selector could result.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing
traffic or road conditions. You might lose control
of the vehicle and have a collision.
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 223
224 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and
highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts
and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The
transmission automatically upshifts through all
forward gears. The DRIVE position provides
optimum driving characteristics under all normal
operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such
as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading
conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong
head winds, or while towing a heavy trailer), select
TOW/HAUL mode or use the Electronic Range
Select (ERS) shift control refer to "Electronic Range
Select [ERS] Operation" in this section for further
information to select a lower gear range. Under
these conditions, using a lower gear range will
improve performance and extend transmission life
by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
During extremely cold temperatures
(-22°F [-30°C] or below), transmission operation
may be modified depending on engine and
transmission temperature as well as vehicle
speed. Normal operation will resume once the
transmission temperature has risen to a suitable
level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically
for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected
that could result in transmission damage,
Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated. In this
mode, the transmission may operate only in
certain gears, or may not shift at all. Vehicle
performance may be severely degraded and the
engine may stall. In some situations, the
transmission may not re-engage if the engine is
turned off and restarted. The Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A message in the
instrument cluster will inform the driver of the
more serious conditions, and indicate what actions
may be necessary.
In the event of a momentary problem, the
transmission can be reset to regain all forward
gears by performing the following steps:
NOTE:
In cases where the instrument cluster message
indicates the transmission may not re-engage after
engine shutdown, perform this procedure only in a
desired location (preferably, at an authorized
dealer).
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible.
If not, shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the
engine turns off.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the
transmission will return to normal operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recommend that you visit an authorized dealer at
your earliest possible convenience. An authorized
dealer has diagnostic equipment to assess the
condition of your transmission.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized
dealer service is required.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL
can cause severe transmission damage. Refer to
“Recreational Towing” in “Starting And
Operating” and “Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in
“In Case Of Emergency” for further information.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 224
STARTING AND OPERATING 225
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control
allows the driver to limit the highest available gear
when the transmission is in DRIVE. For example, if
you set the transmission gear limit to 4 (FOURTH
gear), the transmission will not shift above
FOURTH gear (except to prevent engine
overspeed), but will shift through the lower gears
normally.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at
any vehicle speed. When the transmission gear
selector is in DRIVE, the transmission will operate
automatically, shifting between all available gears.
Tapping the GEAR – switch (on the steering wheel)
will activate ERS mode, display the current gear in
the instrument cluster, and set that gear as the top
available gear. Once in ERS mode, tapping the
GEAR – or GEAR + switch will change the top
available gear.
ERS Control
To exit ERS mode, simply push and hold the
GEAR + switch until the gear limit display
disappears from the instrument cluster.
When to Use TOW/HAUL Mode
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying
a heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission
shifting occurs, push the TOW/HAUL switch to
activate TOW/HAUL mode. This will improve
performance and reduce the potential for
transmission overheating or failure due to
excessive shifting.
TOW/HAUL Switch
1 — GEAR + Switch
2 — GEAR – Switch
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking
on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could
lose their grip and the vehicle could skid,
causing a collision or personal injury.
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 225
226 STARTING AND OPERATING
The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in
the instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL
mode has been activated. Pushing the switch a
second time restores normal operation. Normal
operation is always the default at engine start-up.
If TOW/HAUL mode is desired, the switch must be
pushed each time the engine is started.
SIX-SPEED AUTOMATIC
T
RANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
Pickup models may use either AISIN (AS69RC)
transmission, or the 68RFE transmission (which
has no PTO access cover).
The transmission gear position display (located in
the instrument cluster) indicates the transmission
gear range. The gear selector is mounted on the
right side of the steering column. You must press
the brake pedal to move the gear selector out of
PARK; refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
System” in this section. To drive, move the gear
selector from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE
position. Pull the gear selector toward you when
shifting into REVERSE or PARK, or when shifting
out of PARK.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides
a precise shift schedule. The transmission
electronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the first
few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat
abrupt. This is a normal condition, and precision
shifts will develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when
the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is
stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
pedal when shifting between these gears.
The transmission gear selector has only PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions.
Manual downshifts can be made using the
Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control.
Pressing the ERS (-/+) switches (on the steering
wheel) while in the DRIVE position will select the
highest available transmission gear, and will
display that gear limit in the instrument cluster as
1, 2, 3, etc. Refer to "Electronic Range Select (ERS)
Operation" in this section for further information.
Some models will display both the selected gear
limit, and the actual current gear, while in ERS
mode.
Gear Ranges
Do not depress the accelerator pedal when shifting
from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before acceler-
ating. This is especially important when the engine
is cold.
WARNING!
Do not use the “TOW/HAUL” feature when
driving in icy or slippery conditions. The
increased engine braking can cause the rear
wheels to slide, and the vehicle to swing around
with the possible loss of vehicle control, which
may cause an accident possibly resulting in
personal injury or death.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 226
STARTING AND OPERATING 227
(Continued)
(Continued)
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be
started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK
while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking
brake when exiting the vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the
parking brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
before shifting the transmission to PARK,
otherwise the load on the transmission locking
mechanism may make it difficult to move the gear
selector out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn
the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
Apply the parking brake.
Shift the transmission into PARK.
Turn the engine off.
Remove the key fob.
NOTE:
On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the
transfer case is in a drive position.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute
for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to
guard against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the trans-
mission is in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all
vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while
the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle,
always come to a complete stop, then apply
the parking brake, shift the transmission into
PARK, turn the engine off, and remove the key
fob. When the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF (key
removal) position (or, with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
when the ignition is in the OFF mode), the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement.
When leaving the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
sion gear selector.
WARNING!
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 227
228 STARTING AND OPERATING
The following indicators should be used to ensure
that you have properly engaged the transmission
into the PARK position:
When shifting into PARK, pull the gear selector
toward you and move it all the way counterclock-
wise until it stops.
Release the gear selector and make sure it is
fully seated in the PARK gate.
Look at the transmission gear position display
and verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
With brake pedal released, verify that the gear
selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward.
Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come
to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running. The
engine may be started in this range. Apply the
parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK
if you must exit the vehicle.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and
highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts
and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The
transmission automatically upshifts through
underdrive first, second, and third gears, direct
fourth gear and overdrive fifth and sixth gears. The
DRIVE position provides optimum driving
characteristics under all normal operating
conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such
as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading
conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong
head winds, or while towing a heavy trailer), use
the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control
refer to “Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation”
in this section for further information to select a
lower gear range. Under these conditions, using a
lower gear range will improve performance and
extend transmission life by reducing excessive
shifting and heat buildup.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children), and do
not leave the ignition (in a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go) in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Before moving the transmission gear selector
out of PARK, you must turn the ignition to the
ON/RUN mode, and also press the brake
pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as
this can damage the drivetrain.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing
traffic or road conditions. You might lose control
of the vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL
can cause severe transmission damage. Refer to
“Recreational Towing” in “Starting And
Operating” and “Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in
“In Case Of Emergency” for further information.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 228
STARTING AND OPERATING 229
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal
operating limits, the powertrain controller will
modify the transmission shift schedule and expand
the range of torque converter clutch engagement.
This is done to prevent transmission damage due
to overheating.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot or is in
danger of overheating, the “Transmission
Temperature Warning Light” may illuminate and
the transmission may operate differently until the
transmission cools down.
NOTE:
Use caution when operating a heavily loaded
vehicle at low speeds (such as towing a trailer up a
steep grade, or in stop-and-go traffic) during hot
weather. In these conditions, torque converter slip
can impose a significant additional heat load on
the cooling system. Downshifting the transmission
to the lowest possible gear (when climbing a
grade), or shifting to NEUTRAL (when stopped in
heavy traffic) can help to reduce this excess heat
generation.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation
may be modified depending on engine and
transmission temperature as well as vehicle
speed. This feature improves warm up time of the
engine and transmission to achieve maximum
efficiency. Engagement of the torque converter
clutch is inhibited until the transmission fluid is
warm refer to the “Note” under “Torque Converter
Clutch” in this section. On Pickup models with
68RFE transmission, top overdrive gear is also
inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm,
and during extremely cold temperatures
(-16°F [-27°C] or below), operation may briefly be
limited to first and direct gears only. On trucks with
AISIN (AS69RC) transmission, fifth and sixth gears
may be inhibited briefly on cold starts below 41°F
(5°C), and during very cold temperatures
(-4°F [-20°C] or below), operation may briefly be
limited to third gear only. During this condition, the
ability of the vehicle to accelerate under heavily
loaded conditions may be reduced. In all cases,
normal operation will resume once the
transmission temperature has risen to a
suitable level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically
for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected
that could result in transmission damage,
Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated. In this
mode, the transmission remains in fourth gear (for
68RFE transmission) or third gear (for AISIN
(AS69RC) transmission) regardless of which
forward gear is selected. If an AISIN (AS69RC)
equipped truck enters Limp Home Mode at
highway speeds, it will initially engage fifth gear,
until the vehicle slows to a speed where third gear
can be engaged. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL
will continue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode
allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized
dealer for service without damaging the
transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the
transmission can be reset to regain all forward
gears by performing the following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition off.
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 229
230 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the
transmission will return to normal operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recommend that you visit an authorized dealer at
your earliest possible convenience. An authorized
dealer has diagnostic equipment to assess the
condition of your transmission.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized
dealer service is required.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control
allows the driver to limit the highest available gear
when the transmission is in DRIVE. For example, if
you set the transmission gear limit to 4 (FOURTH
gear), the transmission will not shift above
FOURTH gear, but will shift through the lower gears
normally.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at
any vehicle speed. When the gear selector is in the
DRIVE position, the transmission will operate
automatically, shifting between all available gears.
Tapping the ERS (-) switch will activate ERS mode,
display the current gear in the instrument cluster,
and set that gear as the top available gear. Once in
ERS mode, tapping the ERS (-) or (+) switch will
change the top available gear.
Electronic Range Select
To exit ERS mode, simply push and hold the ERS
(+) switch until the gear limit display disappears
from the instrument cluster.
NOTE:
To select the proper gear position for maximum
deceleration (engine braking), simply push and
hold the ERS (-) switch. The transmission will shift
to the range from which the vehicle can best be
slowed down.
1 — GEAR + Switch
2 — GEAR – Switch
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking
on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could
lose their grip and the vehicle could skid,
causing a collision or personal injury.
Transmission
Gear Limit
Display
1 2 3 4 5 6 D
Actual Gear(s)
Allowed
1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 1-6 1-6
CAUTION!
When using ERS for engine braking while
descending steep grades, be careful not to
overspeed the engine. Apply the brakes as
needed to prevent engine overspeed.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 230
STARTING AND OPERATING 231
Overdrive Operation
The automatic transmission includes an
electronically controlled Overdrive (fifth and sixth
gears). The transmission will automatically shift
into Overdrive if the following conditions are
present:
The gear selector is in the DRIVE position.
The transmission fluid has reached an
adequate temperature.
The engine coolant has reached an adequate
temperature.
The vehicle speed is sufficiently high.
The driver is not heavily pressing the
accelerator.
When To Use TOW/HAUL Mode
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying
a heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission
shifting occurs, push the TOW/HAUL switch to
activate TOW/HAUL mode. This will improve
performance and reduce the potential for
transmission overheating or failure due to
excessive shifting. When operating in TOW/HAUL
mode, transmission upshifts are delayed, and the
transmission will automatically downshift (for
engine braking) when the throttle is closed and/or
during steady braking maneuvers.
TOW/HAUL Switch
The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in
the instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL
mode has been activated. Pushing the switch a
second time restores normal operation. Normal
operation is always the default at engine start-up.
If TOW/HAUL mode is desired, the switch must be
pushed each time the engine is started.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has
been included in the automatic transmission on
your vehicle. A clutch within the torque converter
engages automatically at calibrated speeds. This
may result in a slightly different feeling or response
during normal operation in the upper gears. When
the vehicle speed drops or during some
accelerations, the clutch automatically
disengages.
NOTE:
The torque converter clutch will not engage,
until the transmission fluid and engine coolant
are warm [usually after 1 to 3 miles (2 to 5 km)
of driving]. Because engine speed is higher
when the torque converter clutch is not
engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is
not shifting properly when cold. This is normal.
Using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift
control, when the transmission is sufficiently
warm, will demonstrate that the transmission is
able to shift into and out of Overdrive.
WARNING!
Do not use the “TOW/HAUL” feature when
driving in icy or slippery conditions. The
increased engine braking can cause the rear
wheels to slide, and the vehicle to swing around
with the possible loss of vehicle control, which
may cause an accident possibly resulting in
personal injury or death.
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 231
232 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the vehicle has not been driven for several
days, the first few seconds of operation after
shifting the transmission into gear may seem
sluggish. This is due to the fluid partially
draining from the torque converter into the
transmission. This condition is normal and will
not cause damage to the transmission. The
torque converter will refill within five seconds
after starting the engine.
AUXILIARY SWITCHES — IF EQUIPPED
There can be up to six auxiliary switches located in
the lower switch bank of the instrument panel
which can be used to power various electronic
devices and PTO (Power Take Off) – If Equipped.
If Power Take Off is equipped, it will take the place
of the sixth Auxiliary switch. Connections to the
switches are found under the hood in the
connectors attached to the auxiliary Power
Distribution Center.
You have the ability to configure the functionality of
the auxiliary switches via the instrument cluster
display. All switches can now be configured for
setting the switch type operation to latching or
momentary, power source of either battery or
ignition, and ability to hold last state across key
cycles.
NOTE:
Holding last state conditions are met when switch
type is set to latching and power source is set to
ignition.
For further information on using the auxiliary
switches, please refer to the Ram Body Builders
Guide by accessing
www.rambodybuilder.com
and choosing the appropriate links.
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION
Your vehicle is equipped with an Active Noise
Cancellation system that cannot be turned off. This
system is designed to address exhaust and engine
noise. The system relies on four microphones
embedded in the headliner, which monitor exhaust
and engine noise, and assists an onboard
frequency generator, which creates counteracting
sound waves in the audio system’s speakers. This
helps keep the vehicle quiet at idle and during
drive. The system is deactivated when the windows
are rolled down.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION —
IF EQUIPPED
Four-wheel drive trucks are equipped with either a
manually shifted transfer case or an electronically
shifted transfer case. Refer to the operating
instructions for your transfer case, located in this
section for further information.
ELECTRONICALLY SHIFTED TRANSFER
C
ASE (EIGHT SPEED TRANSMISSION) —
I
F EQUIPPED
This is an electronic shift transfer case and is
operated by the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer
Case Switch), which is located on the instrument
panel.
Four-Position Transfer Case
This electronically shifted transfer case provides
four mode positions:
Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD)
Four-Wheel Drive High Range (4WD HIGH)
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW)
N (Neutral)
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 232
STARTING AND OPERATING 233
For additional information on the appropriate use
of each transfer case mode position, see the
information below:
2WD
Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for
normal street and highway driving on dry hard
surfaced roads.
4WD HIGH
Four-Wheel Drive High Range — This range
provides torque to the front driveshaft (engages
four-wheel drive) which allows front and rear
wheels to spin at the same speed. This provides
additional traction for loose, slippery road surfaces
only.
4WD LOW
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides
low speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque
(increased torque over 4WD HIGH) to the front
driveshaft, allowing front and rear wheels to rotate
at the same speed. This range provides additional
traction and maximum pulling power for loose,
slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h) in this range.
N (Neutral)
N (Neutral) — This range disengages both the front
and rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be
used for flat towing behind another vehicle. Refer
to “Recreational Towing” in this section for further
information.
This electronically shifted transfer case is designed
to be driven in the two–wheel drive position (2WD)
for normal street and highway conditions on dry
hard surfaced roads. Driving the vehicle in 2WD
will have greater fuel economy benefits as the front
axle is not engaged in 2WD.
When additional traction is required, the transfer
case 4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW positions can be
used to maximize torque to the front driveshaft,
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. This is accomplished by pushing the
desired position on the 4WD control switch.
Refer to “Shifting Procedure” in this section for
specific shifting instructions.
The 4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW positions are
designed for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
Driving in the 4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW positions
on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased
tire wear and damage to the driveline components.
NOTE:
The transfer case NEUTRAL button is located in the
center of the 4WD Control Switch and is pushed by
using a ballpoint pen or similar object. The transfer
case NEUTRAL position is to be used for recre-
ational towing only. Refer to “Recreational Towing”
in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
(4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW) are located in the
instrument cluster and indicate the current and
desired transfer case selection.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
case in the NEUTRAL (N) position without first
fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer
case NEUTRAL (N) position disengages both
the front and rear drive shaft from the power-
train, and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if
the transmission is in PARK. The parking
brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if the
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and
verify that the transmission gear position indi-
cator solidly indicates PARK (P) without
blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely
stopped, and the PARK position is properly
indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 233
234 STARTING AND OPERATING
When you select a different transfer case position,
the indicator lights will do the following:
If All Of The Following Shift Conditions Are Met:
1. The current position indicator light will turn
off.
2. The selected position indicator light will flash
until the transfer case completes the shift.
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light
for the selected position will stop flashing and
remain on.
If One Or More Of The Following Shift Conditions
Are Not Met:
1. The indicator light for the current position will
remain on.
2. The newly selected position indicator light will
continue to flash.
3. The transfer case
will not shift.
NOTE:
Before retrying a selection, make certain that all
the necessary requirements for selecting a new
transfer case position have been met. To retry the
selection, push the current position, wait five
seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift
requirements, refer to the “Shifting Procedure” for
your transfer case, located in this section.
The “SVC 4WD Warning Light” monitors the
electronic shift four-wheel drive system. If this light
remains on after engine start up or illuminates
during driving, it means that the four-wheel drive
system is not functioning properly and that service
is required.
NOTE:
Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front
or rear wheels are spinning. This could cause
damage to driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the
engine speed is approximately three times that of
the 2WD or 4WD HIGH positions at a given road
speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine and
do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
depends on tires of equal size, type and
circumference on each wheel. Any difference in
tire size can cause damage to the drivetrain.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved
traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning
and stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road
conditions permit.
Shifting Procedure
NOTE:
If any of the requirements to select a new
transfer case position have not been met, the
transfer case will not shift. The position indi-
cator light for the previous position will remain
on and the newly selected position indicator
light will continue to flash until all the require-
ments for the selected position have been met.
If all the requirements to select a new transfer
case position have been met, the current posi-
tion indicator light will turn off, the selected posi-
tion indicator light will flash until the transfer
case completes the shift. When the shift is
complete, the position indicator light for
the selected position will stop flashing and
remain on.
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the “SVC 4WD Warning Light”
is illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake
may allow the vehicle to roll which may cause
personal injury or death.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 234
STARTING AND OPERATING 235
2WD TO 4WD HIGH
Push the desired position on the 4WD control
switch to shift the transfer case. Shifts between
2WD and 4WD HIGH can be done with the vehicle
stopped or in motion. With the vehicle in motion,
the transfer case will engage/disengage faster if
you momentarily release the accelerator pedal
after turning the control switch. If the vehicle is
stopped, the ignition switch must be in the ON
position with the engine either running or off. This
shift cannot be completed if the ignition switch is in
the ACC position.
NOTE:
The four-wheel drive system will not allow shifts
between 2WD/4WD HIGH if the front and/or rear
wheels are spinning (no traction). In this situation,
the selected position indicator light will flash and
the original position indicator light will remain on.
At this time, reduce speed and stop spinning the
wheels to complete the shift.
2WD OR 4WD HIGH TO 4WD LOW
NOTE:
When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some gear
noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling
2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped.
You can use either of the following procedures:
Preferred Procedure
1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to
2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. While still rolling, push the desired position on
the transfer case control switch.
4. After the desired position indicator light is on
(not flashing), shift the transmission back into
gear.
Alternate Procedure
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. With the ignition switch in the ON position and
the engine running, shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL.
3. Push the desired position on the transfer case
control switch.
4. After the desired position indicator light is on
(not flashing), shift the transmission back into
gear.
NOTE:
If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alter-
nate Procedure are not satisfied prior to
attempting the shift, then the desired position
indicator light will flash continuously while the
original position indicator light is on, until all
requirements have been met.
The ignition switch must be in the ON position
for a shift to take place and for the position indi-
cator lights to be operable. If the ignition switch
is not in the ON position, the shift will not take
place and no position indicator lights will be on
or flashing.
ELECTRONICALLY SHIFTED TRANSFER
C
ASE (SIX SPEED TRANSMISSION) —
I
F EQUIPPED
The electronic shift transfer case is operated by
the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer Case Switch),
which is located on the instrument panel.
Four-Position/On-Demand Transfer Case
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 235
236 STARTING AND OPERATING
This electronically shifted transfer case provides
four mode positions:
Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD)
Four-Wheel Drive High Range (4WD HIGH)
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW)
Neutral (NEUTRAL)
For additional information on the appropriate use
of each transfer case mode position, see the
information below:
2WD
Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for
normal street and highway driving on dry, hard
surfaced roads.
4WD HIGH
Four-Wheel Drive High Range — This range
maximizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing
the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
speed. This range provides additional traction for
loose, slippery road surfaces only.
4WD LOW
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides
low speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to
the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range
provides additional traction and maximum pulling
power for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not
exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
NEUTRAL (N)
Neutral — This range disengages both the front and
rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used
for flat towing behind another vehicle. Refer to
“Recreational Towing” in this section for further
information.
This electronically shifted transfer case is designed
to be driven in the two-wheel drive position (2WD)
for normal street and highway conditions on dry,
hard surfaced roads.
When additional traction is required, the transfer
case 4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW positions can be
used to maximize torque to the front driveshaft,
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. This is accomplished by rotating the
4WD Control Switch to the desired position.
Refer to “Shifting Procedure” in this section for
specific shifting instructions.
The 4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW positions are
designed for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
Driving in the 4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW positions
on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased
tire wear and damage to the driveline components.
NOTE:
The transfer case NEUTRAL button is located on
the lower left hand corner of the 4WD Control
Switch. The transfer case NEUTRAL position is to
be used for recreational towing only. Refer to
“Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating”
for further information.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
(4WD and 4LOW) are located in the instrument
cluster and indicate the current and desired
transfer case selection. When you select a
different transfer case position, the indicator lights
will do the following:
If All Of The Following Shift Conditions Are Met:
1. The current position indicator light will turn
OFF.
2. The selected position indicator light will flash
until the transfer case completes the shift.
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light
for the selected position will stop flashing and
remain ON.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully
engaging the parking brake. The transfer case
NEUTRAL position disengages both the front and
rear drive shafts from the powertrain and will
allow the vehicle to roll, even if the transmission
is in PARK. The parking brake should always be
applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 236
STARTING AND OPERATING 237
If One Or More Of The Following Shift Conditions
Are Not Met:
1. The indicator light for the current position will
remain ON.
2. The newly selected position indicator light will
continue to flash.
3. The transfer case
will not shift.
NOTE:
Before retrying a selection, make certain that all
the necessary requirements for selecting a new
transfer case position have been met. To retry the
selection, turn the control switch back to the
current position, wait five seconds, and retry
selection. To find the shift requirements, refer to
the "Shifting Procedure" for your transfer case,
located in this section.
The “SVC 4WD Warning Light” monitors the
electronic shift four-wheel drive system. If this light
remains on after engine start up or illuminates
during driving, it means that the four-wheel drive
system is not functioning properly and that service
is required.
NOTE:
Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front
or rear wheels are spinning, as this can cause
damage to driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the
engine speed is approximately three times that of
the 2WD or 4WD HIGH positions at a given road
speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine and
do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
depends on tires of equal size, type and
circumference on each wheel. Any difference in
tire size can cause damage to the drivetrain.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved
traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning
and stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road
conditions permit.
Shifting Procedure
NOTE:
If any of the requirements to select a new
transfer case position have not been met, the
transfer case will not shift. The position indi-
cator light for the previous position will remain
ON and the newly selected position indicator
light will continue to flash until all the require-
ments for the selected position have been met.
To retry a shift: return the control switch back to
the original position, make certain all shift
requirements have been met, wait five seconds
and try the shift again.
If all the requirements to select a new transfer
case position have been met, the current posi-
tion indicator light will turn OFF, the selected
position indicator light will flash until the
transfer case completes the shift. When the
shift is complete, the position indicator light for
the selected position will stop flashing and
remain ON.
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the “SVC 4WD Warning Light”
is illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake
may allow the vehicle to roll, which may cause
personal injury.
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 237
238 STARTING AND OPERATING
2WD TO 4WD HIGH
Push the desired position on the 4WD control
switch to shift the transfer case. Shifts between
2WD and 4WD HIGH can be done with the vehicle
stopped or in motion. With the vehicle in motion,
the transfer case will engage/disengage faster if
you momentarily release the accelerator pedal
after turning the control switch. If the vehicle is
stopped, the ignition switch must be in the ON
position with the engine either running or off. This
shift cannot be completed if the ignition switch is in
the ACC position.
NOTE:
The four-wheel drive system will not allow shifts
between 2WD/4WD HIGH if the front and/or rear
wheels are spinning (no traction). In this situation,
the selected position indicator light will flash and
the original position indicator light will remain on.
At this time, reduce speed and stop spinning the
wheels to complete the shift.
2WD OR 4WD HIGH TO 4WD LOW
NOTE:
When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some gear
noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling
2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped.
You can use either of the following procedures:
Preferred Procedure
1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to
2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. While still rolling, push the desired position on
the transfer case control switch.
4. After the desired position indicator light is on
(not flashing), shift the transmission back into
gear.
Alternate Procedure
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. With the ignition switch in the ON position and
the engine running, shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL.
3. Push the desired position on the transfer case
control switch.
4. After the desired position indicator light is
on (not flashing), shift the transmission back
into gear.
NOTE:
If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alter-
nate Procedure are not satisfied prior to
attempting the shift, then the desired position
indicator light will flash continuously while the
original position indicator light is on, until all
requirements have been met.
The ignition switch must be in the ON position
for a shift to take place and for the position indi-
cator lights to be operable. If the ignition switch
is not in the ON position, the shift will not take
place and no position indicator lights will be on
or flashing.
MANUALLY SHIFTED TRANSFER CASE —
I
F EQUIPPED
The transfer case provides four mode positions:
Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2H)
Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range (4H)
N (Neutral)
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4L)
For additional information on the appropriate use
of each transfer case mode position, see the
information below:
2H
Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for
normal street and highway driving on dry, hard
surfaced roads.
4H
Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range — This range
locks the front and rear driveshafts together
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. Additional traction for loose, slippery
road surfaces only.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 238
STARTING AND OPERATING 239
N (Neutral)
N (Neutral) — This range disengages both the front
and rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be
used for flat towing behind another vehicle. Refer
to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
4L
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range locks
the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the
front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.
Additional traction and maximum pulling power for
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed
25 mph (40 km/h).
This transfer case is intended to be driven in the
2H position for normal street and highway
conditions such as dry, hard surfaced roads.
When additional traction is required, the 4H and 4L
positions can be used to lock the front and rear
driveshafts together and force the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is
accomplished by simply moving the gear selector
to the desired positions once the appropriate
speed and gear requirements are met. Refer to
“Shifting Procedure – Manually Shifted Transfer
Case” in this section for further information.
The 4H and 4L positions are intended for loose,
slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4H and
4L positions on dry, hard surfaced roads may
cause increased tire wear and damage to the
driveline components.
The “Transfer Case Position Indicator Light” in the
instrument cluster will alert the driver that the
vehicle is in four-wheel drive and that the front and
rear driveshafts are locked together. This light will
illuminate when the transfer case is shifted into
either the 4H or 4L position. There is no light for the
2H or NEUTRAL positions on some models.
When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the 2H
or 4H positions at a given road speed. Take care
not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed
25 mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
depends on tires of equal size, type and
circumference on each wheel. Any difference will
adversely affect shifting and can cause damage to
the drivetrain.
NOTE:
Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front
or rear wheels are spinning, as this can cause
damage to driveline components.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved
traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning
and stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road
conditions permit.
NOTE:
Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be expe-
rienced due to uneven tire wear, low or uneven tire
pressures, excessive vehicle loading, or cold
temperatures.
Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2H)
Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for
normal street and highway driving on dry hard
surfaced roads.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully
engaging the parking brake. The transfer case
NEUTRAL position disengages both the front and
rear drive shafts from the powertrain and will
allow the vehicle to roll, even if the transmission
is in PARK. The parking brake should always be
applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 239
240 STARTING AND OPERATING
Four-Wheel Drive High Range (4H)
Four-Wheel Drive High Range — This range locks
the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the
front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.
Additional traction for loose, slippery road surfaces
only.
N (Neutral)
N (Neutral) — This range disengages the front and
rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used
for flat towing behind another vehicle. Refer to
“Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating”
for further information.
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4L)
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range locks
the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the
front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.
Additional traction and maximum pulling power for
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed
25 mph (40 km/h).
Shifting Procedure — Manually Shifted
Transfer Case
2H TO 4H
Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with
the vehicle stopped or in motion. If the vehicle
is in motion, shifts can be made up to 55 mph
(88 km/h). With the vehicle in motion, the transfer
case will engage/disengage faster if you
momentarily release the accelerator pedal after
completing the shift. Apply a constant force when
shifting the transfer case lever.
2H OR 4H TO 4L
NOTE:
When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some gear
noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h),
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL. While the
vehicle is coasting at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h),
shift the transfer case lever firmly to the desired
position. Do not pause in transfer case Neutral.
NOTE:
Pausing in transfer case NEUTRAL in vehicles
equipped with an automatic transmission may
require shutting the engine off to avoid gear
clash while completing the shift. If difficulty
occurs, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL,
hold your foot on the brake, and turn the engine
off. Complete the range shift to the desired
mode.
Shifting into or out of 4WD LOW is possible with
the vehicle completely stopped, however diffi-
culty may occur due to the mating clutch teeth
not being properly aligned. Several attempts
may be required for clutch teeth alignment and
shift completion to occur. The preferred
method is with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph
(3 to 5 km/h). Avoid attempting to engage or
disengage 4WD LOW with the vehicle moving
faster than 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
Do not attempt to shift into or out of 4WD LOW
while the transmission is in gear.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Light
The “Transfer Case Position Indicator Light” in the
instrument cluster is used to alert the driver that
the front axle is fully engaged and all four wheels
are driving.
CAUTION!
Do not use 4L (Low) range when operating the
vehicle on dry pavement. Driveline hardware
damage can result.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 240
STARTING AND OPERATING 241
AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
DESCRIPTION
This air suspension system is a rear leveling ride
height system. The main purpose of this system is
to maintain the truck’s rear ride height level. There
are two selectable heights that can be chosen
based on your operating conditions.
The system requires that the ignition be in the
ON/RUN position or the engine running with zero
vehicle speed for all user requested changes and
load leveling.
Rear Leveling Ride Height Switch
Normal Ride Height (NRH) – This is the standard
position of the suspension and is meant for normal
driving. It will automatically adjust to maintain the
rear ride height as conditions change.
Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) – Lowers the vehicle
approximately 1 inch (25 mm) for a level truck, to
be used as required while trailer towing. It will
automatically adjust to maintain the rear ride
height as conditions change.
Trailer Decoupling/Unloading - The air suspension
system will continue to load level after the vehicle
has been turned off for 10 minutes without
compressor activation. This allows for easy
removal of a trailer and/or load from the back of
the truck by maintaining the ride height. After
10 minutes you will need to turn the ignition to the
run position for the air suspension to re-level due
to addition/removal of load in the vehicle. If the air
suspension system is disabled using the settings
menu (Tire Jack Mode, Transport Mode, Alignment
Mode, or Bed Lowering Mode) the system will
remain disabled when the vehicle is turned off.
Reactivating the air suspension can be
accomplished via the settings menu or driving the
vehicle above 5 mph (8 km/h) for Tire Jack Mode,
Alignment Mode, Transport Mode and Bed
Lowering Mode.
NOTE:
Most 3500 models will not lower to Alternate
Trailer Height (ATH) when unloaded.
Refer to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
AIR SUSPENSION MODES
The air suspension system has multiple modes to
protect the system in unique situations:
Tire/Jack Mode
To assist with changing a tire, the air suspension
system has a feature which allows the automatic
leveling to be disabled. This mode is intended to be
enabled with the engine running. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” or “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” (if equipped with a touch screen
radio) for further information.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with the
engine running.
WARNING!
The air suspension system uses a high pressure
volume of air to operate the system. To avoid
personal injury or damage to the system, see an
authorized dealer for service.
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 241
242 STARTING AND OPERATING
Transport Mode
For towing your vehicle with four wheels off the
road, the air suspension system has a feature
which will put the vehicle below Normal Ride
Height (NRH) and disable the automatic load
leveling system. This mode is intended to be
enabled with engine running. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” or “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” if
equipped with a touch screen radio for further
information.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with the
engine running.
Wheel Alignment Mode
Before performing a wheel alignment this mode
must be enabled. Refer to “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” or “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
(if equipped with a touch screen radio) for further
information.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with the
engine running.
Bed Lowering Mode
This setting is used to lower the rear suspension
to the lowest possible height and disable the
air suspension system. It enables easier
loading/unloading of the truck and makes it easier
to hook up trailers. Refer to “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” or “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” if equipped with a touch
screen radio for further information.
Protection Strategy
In order to “protect” the air suspension system, the
vehicle will disable load leveling as required
(suspension overloaded, battery charge low, etc.).
Load leveling will automatically resume as soon as
system operation requirements are met. See an
authorized dealer if system does not resume.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
M
ESSAGES
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message
will appear in the instrument cluster display. Refer
to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
An audible chime will be heard whenever a system
error has been detected.
See an authorized dealer for system service if
normal operation does not resume.
OPERATION
Pushing the Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) button
once while at Normal Ride Height (NRH), will lower
the vehicle to Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) and will
illuminate the LED.
NOTE:
The LED will continuously blink until vehicle
Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) has been achieved
and the LED will turn on.
Pushing the Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) again
will raise the vehicle to Normal Ride Height (NRH).
NOTE:
The LED will continuously blink until Normal Ride
Height (NRH) has been achieved and the LED will
turn off.
Transport Mode – No indicator lamps will be illu-
minated. Transport Mode is disabled by driving
the vehicle, or deselecting the mode via the
interface.
Tire/Jack Mode – No indicator lamps will be illu-
minated. Tire/Jack Mode is disabled by driving
the vehicle, or by deselecting the mode via the
interface.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 242
STARTING AND OPERATING 243
(Continued)
Wheel Alignment Mode – No indicator lamps will
be illuminated. Wheel Alignment Mode is
disabled by driving the vehicle, or by deselecting
the mode via the interface.
Bed Lowering Mode – Telltale on the cluster will
be illuminated. Bed Lowering Mode is disabled
by driving the vehicle, or deselecting the mode
via the interface.
AXLE LOCKER SYSTEM — POWER WAGON
MODELS ONLY (IF EQUIPPED)
This vehicle is equipped with electronically locking
front and rear differentials. These differentials,
when engaged, mechanically lock together the axle
shafts forcing the wheels to spin at an equal rate.
This allows the vehicle to maintain its momentum
and prevents it from becoming stuck. The locking
front and rear differentials should only be engaged
during low-speed, extreme off-road situations
where one wheel is likely to not be in contact with
the ground. It is not recommended to drive the
vehicle with the differentials locked on pavement
due to the reduced ability to turn and speed
limitations.
Axle Lock Selector
The locking axles are controlled by the axle lock
buttons.
Under normal driving conditions, the vehicle
should be left in the AXLE UNLOCK position.
NOTE:
Even when the axles are in the AXLE UNLOCK
position, the limited slip differential in the rear axle
still provides torque biasing capability for
moderate low traction environments.
During the command to lock the axle, the indicator
light will flash until the axle is locked. After the lock
command has been successfully executed, the
light will remain on solid.
To lock the rear axle, place the vehicle in 4WD
LOW, 4WD HIGH or 2WD. Refer to “Four Wheel
Drive Operation” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information. Push the REAR LOCK button
while traveling less than 10 mph (16 km/h). The
REAR LOCK indicator light will remain on when the
rear axle is locked.
1 — FRONT/REAR LOCK – the front and rear axles
are locked
2 — REAR LOCK – the rear axle is locked
3 — AXLE UNLOCK – the front and rear axles are
unlocked
CAUTION!
Do not lock the front or rear axle on hard
surfaced roads. The ability to steer the vehicle
is reduced and damage to the drivetrain may
occur when the axles are locked on hard
surfaced roads.
Do not try to lock the rear axle if the vehicle is
stuck and the tires are spinning. You can
damage drivetrain components. Lock the rear
axle before attempting situations or navi-
gating terrain, which could possibly cause the
vehicle to become stuck.
CAUTION!
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 243
244 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Left to right wheel speed difference may be
necessary to allow the axle to fully lock. If the indi-
cator light is flashing after placing the vehicle in
the REAR LOCK or FRONT/REAR LOCK position,
drive the vehicle in a turn or on loose gravel to
expedite the locking action.
To lock the front axle, push the FRONT/REAR LOCK
button while traveling less than 10 mph (16 km/h)
in 4WD LOW. The FRONT/REAR LOCK indicator
light will be solid when the front axle is locked.
NOTE:
The rear axle must be locked before the front axle
will lock.
When both the axles are locked, to unlock the front
axle, push the REAR LOCK button while in 4WD
LOW. The FRONT/REAR LOCK indicator light will go
out when the axle is unlocked.
NOTE:
The axle lockers could be torque locked due to side
to side loads on the axle. Driving slowly while
turning the steering wheel from a left hand turn to
a right hand turn or driving in REVERSE for a short
distance may be required to release the torque
lock and unlock the axles.
To unlock the rear axle, push the AXLE UNLOCK
button. The REAR LOCK indicator light will go out
when the rear axle is unlocked.
STABILIZER/SWAY BAR SYSTEM — POWER
WAGON ONLY
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic
disconnecting stabilizer/sway bar. This system
allows greater front suspension travel in off-road
situations.
Due to the use of taller springs, this vehicle has an
increased ride height of approximately 1.9 inches
(48.3 mm) in the front and 1.5 inches (38.1 mm)
in the rear. A major advantage to increasing
ride height is the positive effect it has on
approach/departure and break over angles.
This system is controlled by the electronic control
sway bar switch located below the instrument
panel.
Sway Bar Disconnect Button
Push the SWAY BAR switch to activate the system.
Push the switch again to deactivate the system.
The “Sway Bar Indicator Light” (located in the
instrument cluster) will illuminate when the bar is
disconnected. The “Sway Bar Indicator Light” will
flash during activation transition, or when
activation conditions are not met. The stabilizer/
sway bar should remain in on-road mode during
normal driving conditions.
WARNING!
Do not use the locked axle position for normal
driving. A locked front axle is intended for
off-road driving only. Locking the front axle
during on-road driving will reduce the steering
ability. This could cause a collision and you may
be seriously injured.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 244
STARTING AND OPERATING 245
To disconnect the stabilizer/sway bar, shift to either
4WD HIGH or 4WD LOW and push the SWAY BAR
button to obtain the Off-Road position. Refer to “Four
Wheel Drive Operation” in “Starting And Operating”
for further information. The “Sway Bar Indicator
Light” will flash until the stabilizer/sway bar has been
fully disconnected.
NOTE:
The stabilizer/sway bar may be torque locked due to
left and right suspension height differences. This
condition is due to driving surface differences or
vehicle loading. In order for the stabilizer/sway bar to
disconnect/reconnect, the right and left halves of the
bar must be aligned.
This alignment may require that the vehicle be driven
onto level ground or rocked from side to side.
To return to the On-Road mode, push the SWAY BAR
button again.
SAFE OFF-ROAD DRIVING — POWER
WAGON ONLY
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS AND VEHICLE
C
HARACTERISTICS
Your vehicle has excellent on and off-road
capabilities. These off-road capabilities will allow
you to explore those wilderness trails where few
travel, providing a source of exciting and satisfying
recreation. Before you venture out, you should
contact your local governmental agency to
determine the designated Off-Road Vehicle (ORV)
trails or recreation areas.
You should always tread lightly and only use
established roads, trails or ORV recreational areas.
The National Forest Service, Bureau of Land
Management, or local Department of Natural
Resources are a wealth of information and usually
have maps with marked trails.
Skid Plates And Underbody Protection
Steel skid plates protect the major driveline
components of the truck including the fuel tank,
transfer case and steering damper. In addition,
this vehicle is equipped with boxed cross members
and fore/aft rails. This additional protection allows
the vehicle to be utilized in severe off-road
situations that would be considered impassable by
a normal truck.
Ramp Travel Index (RTI)
The RTI is the distance, in inches, that you can
drive your vehicle with one wheel on a 20-degree
ramp without lifting any other wheel off the ground.
This distance up the ramp divided by the
wheelbase of the vehicle and multiplied by
1,000 is the RTI. This vehicle has an RTI of
429 (connected sway bar) or an RTI of 538
(disconnected sway bar), which means you can
articulate one front wheel 22 inches (56 cm) or
27.5 inches (70cm) in the air while the other three
wheels remain in contact with the ground.
WARNING!
Do not disconnect the stabilizer bar and drive on
hard surfaced roads or at speeds above 18 mph
(29 km/h), you may lose control of the vehicle,
which could result in serious injury or death. The
front stabilizer bar enhances vehicle stability
and assists in maintaining control of the vehicle.
The system monitors vehicle speed and will
attempt to reconnect the stabilizer bar at speeds
over 18 mph (29 km/h). This is indicated by a
flashing off road light and solid on road light.
Once vehicle speed is reduced below 14 mph
(22 km/h), the system will attempt to return to
the Off-Road mode.
WARNING!
If the stabilizer/sway bar will not return to
On-Road mode, vehicle stability is reduced.
Do not attempt to drive the vehicle over 18 mph
(29 km/h). Driving faster than 18 mph
(29 km/h) may cause loss of control of the
vehicle, which could result in serious injury or
death. Contact your local service center for
assistance.
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 245
246 STARTING AND OPERATING
Water Fording Characteristics
Water fording characteristic is the vehicle's ability
to cross a body of still water, where the powertrain
and drivetrain are safe from water ingestion. This
vehicle has high water fording characteristics with
the ability to cross a pool of water, without
stopping, 24 inches (60 cm) deep at a maximum
speed of 10 mph (16 km/h) and a pool of water
30 inches (76 cm) deep at a maximum speed of
5 mph (8 km/h), both with an entrance ramp angle
of 1.3 degrees.
Simultaneous Brake And Throttle
Operation
Many off-road driving conditions require the
simultaneous use of the brake and throttle (two
footed driving). When climbing rocks, logs, or other
stepped objects, using light brake pressure with
light throttle will keep the vehicle from jerking or
lurching. This technique is also used when you
need to stop and restart a vehicle on a steep
incline.
The Basics Of Off-Road Driving
You will encounter many types of terrain driving
off-road. You should be familiar with the terrain
and area before proceeding. There are many types
of surface conditions: hard packed dirt, gravel,
rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow and ice. Every
surface has a different effect on your vehicle's
steering, handling and traction. Controlling your
vehicle is one of the keys to successful off-road
driving, so always keep a firm grip on the steering
wheel and maintain a good driving posture. Avoid
sudden accelerations, turns or braking. In most
cases there are no road signs, posted speed limits
or signal lights. Therefore you will need to use your
own good judgment on what is safe and what isn't.
When on a trail you should always be looking
ahead for surface obstacles and changes in
terrain. The key is to plan your future driving route
while remembering what you are currently driving
over.
When To Use Low Range
When driving off-road, shift into 4WD LOW for
additional traction or to improve handling and
control on slippery or difficult terrain. Due to the
lower gearing, low range will allow the engine to
operate in a higher power range. This will allow you
to idle over obstacles and down hills, with
improved control and less effort. Also, use 4WD
LOW in rain, ice, snow, mud, and sand to get heavy
loads rolling, improve traction, or whenever 4WD
HIGH traction will not do the job.
DRIVING IN SNOW, MUD AND SAND
There is a drastic reduction in traction when driving
in snow, mud or sand. The vehicle will be less
responsive to steering, acceleration and braking
inputs. Therefore you should accelerate slowly,
leave greater stopping distances and avoid abrupt
vehicle maneuvers. You want to keep a slow
constant steady pace. The key is to maintain the
vehicle's momentum.
CAUTION!
The door sill height is 25 inches (63.5 cm).
Water may intrude into the interior of the vehicle
at greater depths.
WARNING!
Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down
cargo. Unsecured cargo can become projectiles
in an off-road situation.
CAUTION!
Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
combustible materials. The heat from your
vehicle exhaust system could cause a fire.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 246
STARTING AND OPERATING 247
Snow – In heavy snow or for additional control
and traction at slower speeds, shift the trans-
mission to a low gear and shift the transfer case
to 4WD LOW if necessary. Do not shift to a lower
gear than necessary to maintain headway.
Over-revving the engine can spin the wheels and
traction will be lost. If you start to slow to a stop,
try turning your steering wheel no more than a
quarter turn quickly back and forth, while still
applying throttle. This will allow the tires to get a
fresh "bite" and help maintain your momentum.
Mud – Deep mud creates a great deal of suction
around the tires and is very difficult to get
through. You should use 4WD LOW with a gear
low enough to maintain your momentum
without shifting. If you start to slow to a stop, try
turning your steering wheel no more than a
quarter turn quickly back and forth for addi-
tional traction. Mud holes pose an increased
threat of vehicle damage and getting stuck.
They are normally full of debris from previous
vehicles getting stuck.
As a good practice before entering any mud
hole, get out and determine how deep it is, if
there are any hidden obstacles and if the
vehicle can be safely recovered if stuck.
Sand – Soft sand is very difficult to travel
through with full tire pressure. When crossing
soft sandy spots in a trail, maintain your
vehicle's momentum and do not stop. The key to
driving in soft sand is using the appropriate tire
pressure, accelerating slowly, avoiding abrupt
maneuvers and maintaining the vehicle's
momentum. If you are going to be driving on
large soft sandy areas or dunes, reduce your tire
pressure to a minimum of 15 psi (103 kPa) to
allow for a greater tire surface area. Reduced
tire pressure will drastically improve your trac-
tion and handling, while driving on the soft sand,
but you must return the tires to normal air pres-
sure before driving on pavement or other hard
surfaces. Be sure you have a way to air the tires
back up prior to reducing the pressure.
CROSSING OBSTACLES
(R
OCKS AND OTHER HIGH POINTS)
While driving off road, you will encounter many
types of terrain. These varying types of terrain bring
different types of obstacles. Before proceeding
review the path ahead to determine the correct
approach and your ability to safely recover the
vehicle if something goes wrong. Keeping a firm
grip on the steering wheel, bring the vehicle to a
complete stop and then inch the vehicle forward
until it makes contact with the object. Apply the
throttle lightly while holding a light brake pressure
and ease the vehicle up and over the object.
Using A Spotter
There are many times where it is hard to see the
obstacle or determine the correct path.
Determining the correct path can be extremely
difficult when you are confronting many obstacles.
In these cases have someone guide you over,
through, or around the obstacle. Have the person
stand a safe distance in front of you where they
can see the obstacle, watch your tires and
undercarriage, and guide you through.
CAUTION!
On icy or slippery roads, do not downshift at high
engine RPMs or vehicle speeds because engine
braking may cause skidding and loss of control.
CAUTION!
Reduced tire pressures may cause tire
unseating and total loss of air pressure. To
reduce the risk of tire unseating, while at a
reduced tire pressure, reduce your speed and
avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
WARNING!
Crossing obstacles can cause abrupt steering
system loading which could cause you to lose
control of your vehicle.
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 247
248 STARTING AND OPERATING
Crossing Large Rocks
When approaching large rocks, choose a path
which ensures you drive over the largest with your
tires. This will lift your undercarriage over the
obstacle. The tread of the tire is tougher and
thicker than the side wall and is designed to take
the abuse. Always look ahead and make every
effort to cross the large rocks with your tires.
Crossing A Ravine, Gully, Ditch, Washout
Or Rut
When crossing a ravine, gully, ditch, washout or a
large rut, the angled approach is the key to
maintaining your vehicle's mobility. Approach
these obstacles at a 45-degree angle and let each
tire go through the obstacle independently. You
need to use caution when crossing large obstacles
with steep sides. Do not attempt to cross any large
obstacle with steep sides at an angle great enough
to put the vehicle at risk of a rollover. If you get
caught in a rut, dig a small trench to the right or left
at a 45-degree angle ahead of the front tires. Use
the removed dirt to fill the rut ahead of the turnout
you just created. You should now be able to drive
out following the trench you just created at a
45-degree angle.
Crossing Logs
To cross a log, approach it at a slight angle
(approximately 10 to 15 degrees). This allows one
front tire to be on top of the log while the other just
starts to climb the log. While climbing the log,
modulate your brake and accelerator to avoid
spinning the log out from under your tires. Then
ease the vehicle off the log using your brakes.
Getting High Centered
If you get hung up or high centered on an object,
get out of the vehicle and try to determine what the
vehicle is hung up on, where it is contacting the
underbody and what is the best direction to
recover the vehicle. Depending on what you are in
contact with, jack the vehicle up and place a few
rocks under the tires so the weight is off of the high
point when you let the vehicle down. You can also
try rocking the vehicle or winching the vehicle off
the object.
HILL CLIMBING
Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good
understanding of your abilities and your vehicle's
limitations. Hills can cause serious problems.
Some are just too steep to climb and should not be
attempted. You should always feel confident with
the vehicle and your abilities. You should always
climb hills straight up and down. Never attempt to
climb a hill on an angle.
CAUTION!
Never attempt to straddle a rock that is large
enough to strike your axles or undercarriage.
Never attempt to drive over a rock which is
large enough to contact the door sills.
WARNING!
There is an increased risk of rollover when
crossing an obstacle, at any angle, with steep
sides.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to cross a log with a greater
diameter than the running ground clearance or
the vehicle will become high centered.
CAUTION!
Winching or rocking the vehicle off hard objects
increases the risk of underbody damage.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 248
STARTING AND OPERATING 249
Before Climbing A Steep Hill – As you approach
a hill consider its grade or steepness. Determine
if it is too steep. Look to see what the traction is
on the hill side trail. Is the trail straight up and
down? What is on top and the other side? Are
there ruts, rocks, branches or other obstacles
on the path? Can you safely recover the vehicle
if something goes wrong? If everything looks
good and you feel confident, then change trans-
mission into a lower gear, shift the transfer case
into 4WD LOW and proceed with caution. You
should use first gear and 4WD LOW for very
steep hills.
Driving Uphill – Once you have determined your
ability to proceed and have shifted into the
appropriate gear, line your vehicle up for the
straightest possible run. Accelerate with an easy
constant throttle and apply more power as you
start up the hill. Do not race forward into a steep
grade, the abrupt change of grade could cause
you to lose control. If the front end begins to
bounce, ease off the throttle slightly to bring all
four tires back on the ground. As you approach
the crest of the hill ease off the throttle and
slowly proceed over the top. If the wheels start
to slip as you approach the crest of a hill, ease
off the accelerator and maintain headway by
turning the steering wheel no more than a
quarter turn quickly back and forth.
This will provide a fresh "bite" into the surface
and will usually provide enough traction to
complete the climb. If you do not make it to the
top, place the vehicle in REVERSE and back
straight down the grade using engine resistance
along with the vehicle brakes.
Driving Downhill – Before driving down a steep
hill you need to determine if it is too steep for a
safe descent. What is the surface traction? Is
the grade too steep to maintain a slow
controlled descent? Are there obstacles? Is it a
straight descent? Is there plenty of distance at
the base of the hill to regain control if the vehicle
descends too fast? If you feel confident in your
ability to proceed then make sure you are in
4WD LOW with the transmission in FIRST gear
(manually select FIRST gear on automatic trans-
missions) and proceed with caution. Allow
engine braking to control the descent and apply
your brakes if necessary, but do not allow the
tires to lock.
Driving Across An Incline – If at all possible
avoid driving across an incline. If it is necessary,
know your vehicle's abilities. Driving across an
incline places more weight on the downhill
wheels, which increases the possibilities of a
downhill slide or rollover. Make sure the surface
has good traction with firm and stable soils. If
possible transverse the incline at an angle
heading slightly up or down.
WARNING!
Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn
around on a steep grade. Driving across an
incline increases the risk of a roll over, which
may result in severe injury or death.
WARNING!
Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL. Use
vehicle brakes in conjunction with engine
braking. Descending a grade too fast could
cause you to lose control and be seriously
injured or killed.
WARNING!
Driving across an incline increases the risk of a
rollover, which may result in severe injury.
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 249
250 STARTING AND OPERATING
If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway – If you
stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a
steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop
and immediately apply the brake. Restart the
engine and shift into REVERSE. Back slowly
down the hill allowing the compression braking
of the engine and transmission to help regulate
your speed. If the brakes are required to control
vehicle speed, apply them lightly and avoid
locking or skidding the tires.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of
water. Water crossings should be avoided if
possible and only be attempted when necessary, in
a safe responsible manner. You should only drive
through areas which are designated and approved.
You should tread lightly and avoid damage to the
environment. You should know your vehicle's
abilities and be able to recover it if something goes
wrong. You should never stop or shut a vehicle off
when crossing deep water unless you ingested
water into the engine air intake. If the engine stalls
do not attempt to restart it. Determine if it has
ingested water first. The key to any crossing is low
and slow. You want to use FIRST gear in 4WD LOW
and proceed very slowly with a constant slow
speed (3-5 mph [5–8 km/h] maximum) and light
throttle. Keep the vehicle moving; do not try to
accelerate through the crossing. After crossing any
water higher than the bottom of the axle
differentials, you should inspect all of the vehicle
fluids for signs of water ingestion.
Before You Cross Any Type Of Water – As you
approach any type of water you need to deter-
mine if you can cross it safely and responsibly. If
necessary, get out and walk through the water
or probe it with a stick. You need to be sure of its
depth, approach angle, current and bottom
condition. Be careful of murky or muddy waters,
check for hidden obstacles. Make sure you will
not be intruding on any wildlife and you can
recover the vehicle if necessary. The key to a
safe crossing is the water depth, current and
bottom conditions. On soft bottoms the vehicle
will sink in, effectively increasing the water level
on the vehicle. Be sure to consider this when
determining the depth and the ability to safely
cross.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or
cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade,
never attempt to turn around. To do so may
result in tipping and rolling the vehicle, which
may result in severe injury. Always back carefully
straight down a hill in REVERSE. Never back
down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the vehicle
brakes. Never drive diagonally across a hill,
always drive straight up or down.
CAUTION!
Water ingestion into the axles, transmission,
transfer case, engine or vehicle interior can
occur if you drive too fast or through too deep of
water. Water can cause permanent damage to
engine, driveline or other vehicle components
and your brakes will be less effective once wet
and/or muddy.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 250
STARTING AND OPERATING 251
Crossing Puddles, Pools, Flooded Areas Or
Other Standing Water – Puddles, pools, flooded
or other standing water areas normally contain
murky or muddy waters. These water types
normally contain hidden obstacles and make it
difficult to determine an accurate water depth,
approach angle, and bottom condition. Murky or
muddy water holes are where you want to hook
up tow straps prior to entering. This makes for a
faster, cleaner and easier vehicle recovery. If
you are able to determine you can safely cross,
than proceed using the low and slow method.
Crossing Ditches, Streams, Shallow Rivers Or
Other Flowing Water – Flowing water can be
extremely dangerous. Never attempt to cross a
fast running stream or river even in shallow
water. Fast moving water can easily push your
vehicle downstream sweeping it out of control.
Even in very shallow water, a high current can
still wash the dirt out from around your tires
putting you and your vehicle in jeopardy. There
is still a high risk of personal injury and vehicle
damage with slower water currents in depths
greater than the vehicle's running ground clear-
ance. You should never attempt to cross flowing
water which is deeper than the vehicle's running
ground clearance. Even the slowest current can
push the heaviest vehicle downstream out of
control if the water is deep enough to push on
the large surface area of the vehicle's body.
Before you proceed determine the speed of the
current, the water's depth, approach angle,
bottom condition and if there are any obstacles,
then cross at an angle heading slightly
upstream using the low and slow technique.
AIRING DOWN FOR OFF-ROAD DRIVING
Running lower tire pressure off-road can improve
your ride comfort and vehicle traction. Reducing
the tire air pressure allows the tire to bulge slightly,
improving its surface area for better flotation and
ability to mold or form to the ground contour.
Different terrain, tires, and vehicles require
different tire pressure. Hard surfaces like rock and
heavier vehicles require higher pressures than
softer surfaces such as sand and lighter vehicles.
You will need to experiment to determine what is
right for your situation. It is easier and faster to let
air out than it is to replace it. Start high and lower
it as required. Remember you must return the tires
to normal air pressure before driving on road or at
highway conditions. Be sure you have a way to
return the tires to their normal on road air
pressure.
VEHICLE RECOVERY
If you drive off-road, you may encounter a situation
where you will need to recover your vehicle. Vehicle
recovery should always be given consideration
before attempting a questionable obstacle. You
should never go off-road driving without the ability
to recover your vehicle from a situation. Having
another vehicle with you usually works best for
most situations. The first thing to do is assess the
situation. Why are you stuck? Are you hung up on
something? Would it be easier to go forward or to
go backward?
CAUTION!
Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system
effectiveness by depositing debris onto the
radiator.
WARNING!
Never drive through fast moving deep water. It
can push your vehicle downstream, sweeping it
out of control. This could put you and your
passengers at risk of injury or drowning.
CAUTION!
Reduced tire pressure increases the risk of tire
damage and may cause tire unseating with total
loss of air pressure. To reduce the risk of tire
unseating, while at a reduced tire pressure,
drive at slower speeds and avoid sharp turns or
abrupt maneuvers.
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 251
252 STARTING AND OPERATING
Can you still move the vehicle? Is there an anchor
point to winch to? Are you alone or do you have
another vehicle to help? Is there high risk of
vehicle damage during the recovery process?
Answering these questions will help you determine
the best method of recovery. If you can still move
the vehicle slightly and the only issue is slick
ground, then rock cycling your vehicle would be the
first choice. If you have ample room, an additional
vehicle and there is low risk of vehicle impact on
the surroundings, then using a tow strap to the
vehicle tow hooks would be fast and easy. If the
vehicle is severely hung up or in a situation where
great care needs to be taken during the recovery,
then nothing can do the job better than a winch. If
you are severely hung up on something you should
jack the vehicle up and stack something under the
wheels to allow the vehicle to roll off the object
without causing further damage. This should be
tried before attempting any recovery method.
Rock Cycling Your Vehicle – Rock cycling your
vehicle is one of the easiest, fastest and most
commonly used methods. This simply involves
shifting your vehicle from DRIVE to REVERSE,
while applying throttle after each shift. During
this process, for additional traction, try turning
your steering wheel quickly left and right no
more than a quarter turn. If you are stuck in
mud, sand, or snow try spinning your tires during
this process to clean the debris from the tread
and improve the traction. You want to create a
rocking motion with the vehicle. This helps build
vehicle momentum, which hopefully gets you
out. Remember to ease off and on the acceler-
ator before and after the shift. If after a few rock
cycles your vehicle is not free, stop and try
another method of recovery. Continuous rock
cycling will only cause unnecessary damage to
your vehicle and the environment.
Using The Tow Hooks With A Tow Strap – Tow
straps are a quick and easy way to recover your
vehicle from minor situations if you have a
secondary vehicle which is not stuck. The tow
hooks on your vehicle are designed to take the
abusive force generated during vehicle
recovery. Do not use the bumper or any other
vehicle component as an attachment point.
Using tow straps requires coordination between
the two drivers. Good communication and line
of sight are required for a safe recovery. First
connect the tow strap to the correct attachment
points on both vehicles. There should be a least
20 to 30 feet (6 to 9 meters) between the vehi-
cles to allow for a safe recovery. If necessary
join two tow straps together using a 1.5 inch
hard wood dowel. This will keep the straps from
becoming knotted and is safer than using a
clevis pin if the strap breaks. Next have the tow
vehicle backup, leaving two to three feet worth
of slack in the strap. Then the tow vehicle, using
light throttle, should accelerate tightening the
strap providing the pulling force needed to free
the vehicle. The vehicle being recovered should
assist in the recovery, at the time of the snap, by
slowly spinning the tires in the same direction as
the pulling vehicle.
CAUTION!
Pulling the vehicle off an obstacle, without first
clearing the object, may result in additional
underbody damage.
CAUTION!
Damage can occur when spinning your tires at
an excessive high speed. Do not spin your tires
faster than an indicated 30 mph (48 km/h).
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 252
STARTING AND OPERATING 253
After the vehicle becomes free, the driver of the
previously stuck vehicle should signal they are
free and should hit their brakes stopping both
vehicles. The driver of the pulling vehicle should
let off the throttle without using the brakes,
once signaled by the other driver. This sequence
is important to avoid having the recovered
vehicle hit the pulling vehicle.
Winching (Refer To “Winch Operation” For
Additional Information) – Winching is most
commonly used in the following situations:
there is no support vehicle available, a high
controlled force is required to recover the
vehicle, there is a high risk of environmental or
vehicle damage, or where nothing else seems to
work. A winch can deliver a high pulling force
with a great deal of control.
It allows you to walk the vehicle out of the situa-
tion in a slow controlled manner. This control
works well for avoiding further vehicle damage.
Once you decide it is time to use the winch look
for a good anchor point. It needs to be strong
enough to hold more than the vehicle's weight
and provide a direction of pull as straight as
possible. Use block and tackle if necessary to
improve the angle of pull or increase the winch's
pulling force. If the anchor point is a tree use a
strap around its base and hook the cable to the
strap. If it is another vehicle, then place that
vehicle in PARK and block the front tires. If you
cannot find an anchor point within reach try
using your spare tire by burying it. Once you
have determined an anchor point hook up the
cable, ensuring there are a least five wraps of
cable left on the drum, and place a floor mat or
something else over the strung out cable.
Placing something over the strung out cable
helps keep the cable on the ground if it breaks.
Next, place the vehicle in FIRST gear and apply
a very light throttle as you power the winch in.
Be careful not to allow slack in the cable as you
recover the vehicle. Do not try to guide the cable
into the drum. If it starts to bunch up on one
end, let it. You can re-spool the cable after-
wards. Never use a winch cable as a tow strap
and always stand back while winching.
AFTER DRIVING OFF-ROAD
Off-road operation puts more stress on your
vehicle than does most on-road driving. After going
off-road, it is always a good idea to check for
damage. That way you can get any problems taken
care of right away and have your vehicle ready
when you need it.
Completely inspect the underbody of your
vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering,
suspension, and exhaust system for damage.
Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and
clean as required.
WARNING!
Never use tow straps with end hooks or link two
straps with a clevis pin. These heavy metal
objects could become projectiles if a strap
breaks, which could cause severe injury. Never
leave more than 2 to 3 feet (0.60 to 1 meter) of
slack in the strap. More slack than this greatly
increases the risk of injury and vehicle damage.
Always keep everyone at least 30 feet (9 meters)
away from a strapping or winching situation.
WARNING!
Winch cables are under high tension when in
use and can become a projectile if they fail.
Never stand over or straddle the winch cable.
Never jerk or overload the winch cable. Never
stand in front of the vehicle while winching.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in
serious or fatal injury.
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 253
254 STARTING AND OPERATING
Check threaded fasteners for looseness, partic-
ularly on the chassis, drivetrain components,
steering, and suspension. Retighten them, if
required, and torque to the values specified in
the Service Manual.
Check for accumulations of plants or brush.
These things could be a fire hazard. They might
hide damage to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle
pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan,
brake rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle
yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as
possible.
If you experience unusual vibration after driving
in mud, slush or similar conditions, check the
wheels for impacted material. Impacted mate-
rial can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing
the wheels of it will correct the situation.
LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL
The limited-slip differential provides additional
traction on snow, ice, mud, sand and gravel,
particularly when there is a difference between the
traction characteristics of the surface under the
right and left rear wheels. During normal driving
and cornering, the limited-slip unit performs
similarly to a conventional differential. On slippery
surfaces, however, the differential delivers more of
the driving effort to the rear wheel having the
better traction.
The limited-slip differential is especially helpful
during slippery driving conditions. With both rear
wheels on a slippery surface, a slight application of
the accelerator will supply maximum traction.
When starting with only one rear wheel on an
excessively slippery surface, slight momentary
application of the parking brake may be necessary
to gain maximum traction.
Care should be taken to avoid sudden
accelerations when both rear wheels are on a
slippery surface. This could cause both rear wheels
to spin, and allow the vehicle to slide sideways on
the crowned surface of a road or in a turn.
WINCH USAGE — POWER WAGON ONLY
(IF EQUIPPED)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE USING YOUR
W
INCH
General Winch Information
Your vehicle is equipped with an electric vehicle
recovery winch. This winch uses the electrical
power from the vehicle charging system to power a
motor that winds the winch rope onto the winch
drum via planetary gear reduction. By nature, a
winch is capable of generating very high forces and
should be used with care. Do not operate the winch
without reading and understanding the complete
winch owner's manual.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may
cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking.
You might not have full braking power when you
need it to prevent a collision. If you have been
operating your vehicle in dirty conditions, get
your brakes checked and cleaned as necessary.
WARNING!
On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip
differential never run the engine with one rear
wheel off the ground since the vehicle may drive
through the rear wheel remaining on the ground.
You could lose control of the vehicle.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 254
STARTING AND OPERATING 255
Tensioning The Winch Rope
The winch rope must be properly tensioned before
use. Follow the instructions below to tension
the rope:
1. Un-spool the rope leaving five wraps of rope
on the winch drum.
2. Attach the hook to a suitable anchor point.
3. Apply at least 1,000 lb (454 kg) of tension to
the rope while winding the rope. Always use
care to ensure the rope does not pile up on one
side of the drum and is neatly wound onto the
drum.
Low Voltage Interrupt
Your winch is equipped with a device that will
interrupt winch function if the vehicle charging
system voltage drops to a low level. The winch will
not power-in or out for 30 seconds if this device is
tripped. If the interrupt is tripped, the vehicle
should be operated at high idle for a few minutes
to allow the vehicle charging system to recover
before continuing to winch.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF
Y
OUR WINCH
Winch Components
1.
Motor:
The winch motor is powered by the
vehicle charging system.
2. Remote Socket: The remote socket (which will
be located on the bumper assembly) allows
the remote control to be attached to the
control pack to allow the winch to function.
3.
Winch Drum With Integral Brake: The winch
drum allows the rope to be stored on the winch
and transmits force to the rope. The winch is
equipped with an integral brake that will stop
rotation of the winch drum if the winch motor
is stopped.
4.
Synthetic Rope: The synthetic rope allows the
winch to be connected to an anchor to provide
a pulling force. This synthetic rope is highly
flexible, lightweight, and it floats.
5.
Clutch Lever: The clutch lever allows the winch
drum to be disconnected from the winch motor
to allow the rope to be pulled from the winch by
hand.
CAUTION!
Be certain the anchor will withstand the load
required to tension the winch rope.
CAUTION!
The winch rope must spool on the winch drum in
the direction indicated on the drum rotation
decal on the winch.
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 255
256 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
6. Remote Control: The remote control provides
the interface between the winch operator and
the winch. The remote control provides the
ability to power the winch in, out, and stop the
winch. To operate the winch, the toggle switch
is pressed down to power the winch in and up
to power the winch out. The winch will stop if
the switch is left in the neutral (center)
position.
Fairlead: The hawse fairlead acts as a guide for the
synthetic rope and minimizes damage to the rope.
WINCH ACCESSORIES
The following accessories are necessary to attach
the winch to anchors, change direction of pull, and
for safe winching.
Gloves: It is extremely important to wear
protective gloves while operating the
winch or handling the winch rope. Avoid
loose fitting clothes or anything that
could become entangled in the rope and other
moving parts.
Snatch/Block Pulley: Used properly, the
multi-purpose snatch block allows you to
(1) increase the winch's pulling power;
and (2) change your pulling direction
without damaging the winch rope. Proper use of
the snatch block is covered in "Before You Pull."
Clevis/D-Shackles: The D-Shackle is a
safe means of connecting the looped
ends of cables, straps and snatch blocks.
The shackle's pin is threaded to allow
easy removal.
Tree Trunk Protector: Typically made of
tough, high-quality nylon, it provides the
operator an attachment point for the
winch rope to a wide variety of anchor
points and objects, as well as protect living trees.
Abrasion Sleeve: The abrasion sleeve is provided
with the synthetic rope and must be used with the
synthetic rope at all times to protect the rope from
potential abrasion wear. The sleeve has a loose fit
so it can easily be positioned along the synthetic
rope to protect from rough surfaces and sharp
corners.
OPERATING YOUR WINCH
CAUTION!
If not installed, the hook strap must be placed
on the hook.
WARNING!
Failure to observe any of these warnings
regarding proper winch usage may result in
severe injury.
Always use supplied hook strap to hold the
hook when spooling wire rope in or out.
Never use as a hoist.
Never use to move persons.
Never exceed winch or synthetic rope rated
capacity.
Always wear heavy leather gloves when
handling the synthetic rope.
Never touch synthetic rope or hook while in
tension or under load.
Never engage or disengage clutch if winch is
under load, synthetic rope is in tension, or
rope drum is moving.
Always stand clear of synthetic rope and load
and keep others away during winching.
Always keep hands and clothing clear of the
synthetic rope, hook and fairlead opening
during operation and when spooling.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 256
STARTING AND OPERATING 257
(Continued)
General Information
Practice using your winch before you get stuck.
Some key points to remember when using your
winch are:
Always take your time to assess the situation
and plan your pull carefully.
Always take your time when using a winch.
Use the right equipment for the situation.
Always wear leather gloves and do not allow the
synthetic rope to slip through your hands when
handling the rope.
Only the operator should handle the synthetic
rope and remote control.
Think safety at all times.
Vehicle Recovery Using The Winch
Never wrap synthetic rope back onto itself.
Always use a choker chain, wire choker rope or
tree trunk protector on the anchor.
Never attach a recovery strap to the winch
hook to increase the length of a pull.
Never attempt to tow a vehicle with the
recovery strap attached directly to the winch
hook.
Never use bungee or kinetic straps that
develop tremendous and potentially
dangerous amounts of force when stretched.
Always disconnect the remote control when
not in use.
Never winch when there are less than
10 wraps of synthetic rope around the
winch drum.
Always pass remote control through a window
to avoid pinching lead in door, when using
remote inside a vehicle.
Never leave the remote control plugged into
the winch while free spooling, rigging or sitting
idle.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Always know your winch: Take the time to fully
read and understand the included Installation
and Operations Guide, and Basic Guide to
Winching Techniques, in order to understand
your winch and the winching operation.
Always inspect winch installation and
synthetic rope condition before operating the
winch. Frayed, kinked or damaged rope must
be replaced immediately. Loose or damaged
winch installation must be corrected
immediately.
Always be sure any element which can inter-
fere with safe winching operations is removed
prior to initiating winching.
Always keep remote control lead clear of the
drum, synthetic rope and rigging.
Inspect for cracks, pinches, frayed rope, or
loose connections. Replace if damaged.
Be careful not to pull the winch rope collar
through the rollers. Watch and listen to winch
for proper snugness.
Never power hook through fairlead. Could
cause damage.
CAUTION!
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 257
258 STARTING AND OPERATING
1. Inspect the winch, winch mount, and
synthetic rope for damage. Do not use the
winch if the mount is loose or rope shows
excessive wear, frays, or damage.
Winch Rope
2. Put on gloves.
3. Disengage the clutch to allow free spooling of
the winch drum, rotate the clutch lever on the
winch to disengage. Freespooling conserves
battery power.
Free Spool Lever
4. Free the winch hook and attach the hook
strap. Free the winch hook from its anchor
point. Attach the hook strap to the hook (if not
attached).
Hook Strap
5. Pull the wire to the anchor point. Pull out
enough wire rope to reach your anchor point.
To prevent losing the end, hold the hook strap
while you work.
Pulling Synthetic Rope
WARNING!
Never touch winch rope or hook while
someone else is at the control switch or during
winching operation.
Never touch winch rope or hook while under
tension or under load.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 258
STARTING AND OPERATING 259
6. Secure to the anchor point. Once you have
established your anchor point, secure the
tree-trunk protector or choker-chain around
the object.
Tree Trunk Protector
NOTE:
How to choose an anchor point: A secure anchor is
critical to winching operations. An anchor must be
strong enough to hold while winching. Natural
anchors include trees, stumps and rocks. Hook the
cable as low as possible. If no natural anchors are
available when recovering another vehicle, your
vehicle becomes the anchor point. In this case, be
sure to put the transmission in NEUTRAL, apply the
hand brake and block its wheels to prevent your
vehicle from moving. Ideally, you'll want an anchor
point that will enable you to pull straight in the
direction the vehicle will move. This allows the
synthetic rope to wind tightly and evenly onto the
spooling drum. An anchor point as far away as
possible will provide the winch with its greatest
pulling power.
7. Attach the Clevis/D-Shackle and Tree Trunk
Protector. Attach the shackle to the two ends
of the strap or chain and through the hook,
being careful not to over tighten (tighten and
back-off 1/2 turn).
Clevis/D-Shackles
8. Lock the clutch. Lock the winch drum by
rotating the clutch lever on the winch to
engage.
NOTE:
Always ensure the clutch is fully engaged or
disengaged.
9. Connect the remote control to the winch
control box, located on the front bumper.
Be careful not to let the remote control cord
dangle in front of the winch. If you choose to
control the winch from inside your vehicle,
always pass the remote through a window to
avoid pinching the cord in the door. Always
disconnect the remote control when not in use.
Winch Box Remote Control Connector
CAUTION!
Always be certain the anchor you select will
withstand the load.
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 259
260 STARTING AND OPERATING
10. Put synthetic rope under tension. Using the
remote control switch, slowly wind the rope
until no slack remains. Once the rope is under
tension, stand well clear of it and never step
over it.
Pulling Synthetic Rope Under Tension
11. Check your anchor. Make sure all connections
are secured and free of debris before
continuing with the winching procedure.
12. Check synthetic rope. The rope should be
neatly wound around the spooling drum.
Improper winding can cause damage to the
synthetic rope.
Synthetic Rope Neatly Wound Around The Spooling Drum
Heavy Blanket Over Rope
In certain situations you may decide to throw a
heavy blanket or similar object over the rope. A
heavy blanket can absorb energy should the
synthetic rope break. Place it on the rope mid-
way between the winch and the anchor point.
Do this before the rope is put under tension.
Do not approach or move the blanket once ten-
sion is applied. Do not allow it to get pulled into
the fairlead. If it is necessary to move or re-
move the blanket, slack the tension on the
rope first.
13. Establish "no people" zones: Make your
intentions clear. Be sure that everyone in the
immediate vicinity surrounding the winching
operation is completely aware of your
intentions before you pull.
Declare where the
spectators should not stand — never behind or
in front of the vehicle and never near the
synthetic rope or snatch block. Your situation
may have other "no people" zones.
No People Zones
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 260
STARTING AND OPERATING 261
14. Begin winching. With the winching vehicles
engine on and light tension already on the
synthetic rope, begin winching slowly and
steadily. Be sure that the rope is winding
evenly and tightly around the spooling drum.
For additional assistance, the winched vehicle
can be slowly driven while being pulled by the
winch. Continue pulling until the vehicle is on
stable ground. If you are able to drive the
vehicle, the winching operation is complete.
Using The Remote Control
NOTE:
Avoid overheating the winch motor. For
extended winching, stop at reasonable
intervals to allow the winch motor to cool
down.
What to look for under load: The synthetic
rope must always spool onto the drum as
indicated by the drum rotation decal on the
winch. As you power-in, make sure the
synthetic rope winds evenly and tightly on
the drum. This prevents the outer rope
wraps from drawing into the inner wraps,
binding and damaging the synthetic rope.
Avoid shock loads by using the control
switch intermittently to take up rope slack.
Shock loads can momentarily far exceed
the winch and synthetic rope ratings. During
side pulls the synthetic rope tends to stack
up at one end of the drum. This stack can
become large enough to cause serious
damage to the winch. So, line up pulls as
straight ahead as possible and stop
winching if the synthetic rope comes close
to the tie rods or mounting plate. To fix an
uneven stack, spool out that section of the
rope and reposition it to the opposite end of
the drum, which will free up space for
continued winching.
15. Secure vehicle. Once recovery of the vehicle is
complete, be sure to secure the vehicle's
brakes and shift the transmission to PARK.
Release tension in the synthetic rope.
16. Disconnect the synthetic rope, and disconnect
from the anchor.
17. Rewind the synthetic rope. The person
handling the synthetic rope should walk the
rope in and not let it slide through the hand,
control the winch at all times.
Rewinding The Synthetic Rope
WARNING!
To prevent serious injury, NEVER put your fingers
inside the hook area as you are powering-in.
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 261
262 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
How to spool under no load: Arrange the remote
control lead so it cannot be caught in the winch.
Arrange the synthetic rope so it will not kink or
tangle when spooled. Be sure any synthetic rope
already on the spooling drum is wound tightly and
evenly layered. Tighten and straighten the layer if
necessary. Keep the synthetic rope under light
tension and spool the rope back and onto the
winch drum in even layers. Stop frequently to
tighten and straighten the layers as necessary.
Repeat this process until the winch hook is the
same distance as the full length of the remote
control from the winch. Pinch the hook between
your thumb and forefinger and attach the hook
strap. Hold the hook strap between the thumb and
forefinger to keep tension on the synthetic rope.
Walk the synthetic rope towards the fairlead, care-
fully spooling in the remaining rope by pulsing the
remote control switch.
18. Store the hook on the most outboard loop of
the hawse fairlead.
Hook In Stored Position
19. Disconnect the remote control. Disconnect the
remote control cord from the control box and
store in a clean and dry place. Winching
operations are now complete. Put the cap on
the solenoid plug-in.
NOTE:
Always store the remote control in a protected,
clean, dry area.
RIGGING TECHNIQUES
Various winching situations will require application
of other winching techniques. These could range
from too little distance to achieve maximum pull
using straight line rigging, simply increasing pulling
power, or maintaining a straight-line pulling
situation. You will have to assess what technique
is correct for your situation. Think "safety" at
all times.
How To Change The Pulling Direction
Change Pulling Directions
All winching operations should have a straight line
from the winch to the object being pulled. This
minimizes the synthetic rope collecting on one side
of the drum affecting pulling efficiency and
damaging synthetic rope. A snatch block, secured
to a point directly in front of the vehicle will enable
you to change your pulling direction while still
allowing the synthetic rope to be at 90° to wind
properly onto the spooling drum.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 262
STARTING AND OPERATING 263
Increasing Pulling Power
In some cases, you may find yourself needing more
pulling power. The use of snatch blocks increases
mechanical advantage and that increases your
pulling power.
Double Line
Wire Rope Routing
Because pulling power decreases with the number
of layers of synthetic rope on the winch drum, you
can use a snatch block to double line out more
rope. This decreases the number of layers of
synthetic rope on the drum, and increases pulling
power. Start by feeding out enough synthetic rope
to free the winch hook. Attach the hook to your
vehicle's frame/tow hook and run the rope through
a snatch block.
Disengage the clutch and, using the snatch block,
pull out enough synthetic rope to reach your
anchor point. Do not attach the hook to the
mounting kit. Secure to the anchor point with a
tree trunk protector or choker chain. Attach the
clevis/shackle. Attach the shackle to the two ends
of the strap/chain, being careful not to over tighten
(tighten and back-off 1/2 turn).
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY — GAS ENGINE
(IF EQUIPPED)
This feature offers improved fuel economy by
shutting off four of the engine's eight cylinders
during light load and cruise conditions. The system
is automatic with no driver inputs or additional
driving skills required.
NOTE:
This system may take some time to return to full
functionality after a battery disconnect.
SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than
20 mph (32 km/h), or 25 mph (40 km/h),
depending on the powertrain used.
The Speed Control buttons are located on the right
side of the steering wheel.
Speed Control Buttons
NOTE:
In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed
Control system has been designed to shut down if
multiple speed control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Speed Control
system can be reactivated by pushing the Speed
Control on/off button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
1 — On/Off Button
2 — CANCEL
3 — RES (+)
4 — SET (-)
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 263
264 STARTING AND OPERATING
TO ACTIVATE
Push the on/off button to activate the Speed
Control. The cruise indicator light in the instrument
cluster display will illuminate. To turn the system
off, push the on/off button a second time. The
cruise indicator light will turn off. The system
should be turned off when not in use.
TO SET A DESIRED SPEED
Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle has
reached the desired speed, push the SET (-) button
and release. Release the accelerator and the
vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
NOTE:
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pushing the SET (-)
button.
TO VARY THE SPEED SETTING
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase
speed by pushing the RES (+) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings (if
equipped). Refer to “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for more information. The speed
increment shown is dependent on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a
1 mph increase in set speed. Each subsequent
tap of the button results in an increase of
1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase until the button
is released, then the new set speed will be
established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a
1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent
tap of the button results in an increase of
1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase until the button
is released, then the new set speed will be
established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease
speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings (if
equipped). Refer to “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for more information. The speed
decrement shown is dependent on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a
1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subsequent
tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease until the button
is released, then the new set speed will be
established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a
1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease of
1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease until the button
is released, then the new set speed will be
established.
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when not
in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set
the system or cause it to go faster than you
want. You could lose control and have an
accident. Always leave the system off when you
are not using it.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 264
STARTING AND OPERATING 265
TO ACCELERATE FOR PASSING
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When
the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the
set speed.
Using Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to
maintain the vehicle set speed.
NOTE:
The Speed Control system maintains speed up and
down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills
is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may
occur so it may be preferable to drive without
Speed Control.
TO RESUME SPEED
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
TO DEACTIVATE
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate the Speed Control without
erasing the set speed from memory.
Pushing the on/off button, or placing the ignition in
the OFF position, erases the set speed from
memory.
The following conditions will also deactivate the
Speed Control without erasing the set speed from
memory:
Vehicle parking brake is applied
Stability event occurs
Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE
Engine overspeed occurs
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) —
IF EQUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
convenience provided by cruise control while
traveling on highways and major roadways.
However, it is not a safety system and not designed
to prevent collisions.
Speed Control function
performs differently. Please refer to the proper
section within this chapter.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in
light to moderate traffic conditions without the
constant need to reset your cruise control. ACC
utilizes a radar sensor and a forward facing camera
designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of
you, ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC
will apply limited braking or accelerate (not to
exceed the original set speed) automatically to
maintain a preset following distance, while
matching the speed of the vehicle ahead.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your
vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and
you could lose control and have an accident. Do
not use Speed Control in heavy traffic or on
roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or
slippery.
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 265
266 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an
appropriate distance between vehicles.
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode for
cruising at a constant preset speed. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed)
Cruise Control Mode” in this section.
NOTE:
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control will not react to
preceding vehicles. Always be aware of the mode
selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise
Control buttons. The two control modes function
differently. Always confirm which mode is selected.
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driver
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsi-
bility to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather
conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the
vehicle ahead and, most importantly, brake
operation to ensure safe operation of the
vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete
attention is always required while driving to
maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision
and death or serious personal injury.
The ACC system:
Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming
vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a
stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled
vehicle).
Cannot take street, traffic, and weather
conditions into account, and may be limited
upon adverse sight distance conditions.
Does not always fully recognize complex
driving conditions, which can result in
wrong or missing distance warnings.
Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop
while following a target vehicle and hold the
vehicle for approximately two seconds in
the stop position. At this point, there will be
an “ACC may cancel soon” chime and
warning to the driver. When ACC is
canceled, the system will release the
brakes and the driver must take over
braking. The system can be resumed when
the target vehicle drives off by releasing the
brake and pushing the resume button on
the steering wheel.
You should switch off the ACC system:
When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow,
sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving situa-
tions (i.e., in highway construction zones).
When entering a turn lane or highway off-ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or
downhill slopes.
When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
When circumstances do not allow safe driving at
a constant speed.
WARNING!
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 266
STARTING AND OPERATING 267
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)
O
PERATION
The speed control buttons (located on the right
side of the steering wheel) operate the ACC
system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
NOTE:
Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications
to the vehicle will affect the performance of the
Adaptive Cruise Control and Forward Collision
Warning System.
ACTIVATING ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
(ACC)
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is
above 0 mph (0 km/h).
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is
20 mph (32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready
state, the instrument cluster display will read
“ACC Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster
display will read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Off.”
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following
conditions:
When in Four-Wheel Drive Low.
When you apply the brakes.
When the parking brake is applied.
When the automatic transmission is in PARK,
REVERSE or NEUTRAL.
When the vehicle speed is outside of the speed
range.
When the brakes are overheated.
When the driver door is open at low speed.
When the driver seat belt is unbuckled at low
speed.
When the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Full
Off mode is active.
TO ACTIVATE/DEACTIVATE
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) on/off button. The ACC menu in the
instrument cluster displays “ACC Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
1 — Adaptive Cruise Control On/Off Button
2 — Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control On/Off
Button
3 — CANCEL
4 — Distance Button
5 — RES (+)
6 — SET (-)
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 267
268 STARTING AND OPERATING
To turn the system off, push and release the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again.
At this time, the system will turn off and the
instrument cluster display will show “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
TO SET A DESIRED ACC SPEED
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push
the SET (-) button and release. The instrument
cluster display will show the set speed.
If the system is set when the vehicle speed is below
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be
defaulted to 20 mph (32 km/h). If the system is
set when the vehicle speed is above 20 mph
(32 km/h), the set speed shall be the current
speed of the vehicle.
NOTE:
ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle in
front of your vehicle in close proximity.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal after
the ACC has been set. If you do not, the vehicle may
continue to accelerate beyond the set speed. If this
occurs:
The message “ACC DRIVER OVERRIDE” will
display in the instrument cluster display.
The system will not be controlling the distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
The vehicle speed will only be determined by the
position of the accelerator pedal.
TO CANCEL
The following conditions cancel the system:
The brake pedal is applied.
The CANCEL button is pushed.
An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
position.
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control
System (ESC/TCS) activates.
The vehicle parking brake is applied.
Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds.
Driver door is opened at low speeds.
A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs.
The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode.
The braking temperature exceeds normal range
(overheated).
The trailer brake is applied manually
(if equipped).
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
system on when not in use is dangerous. You
could accidentally set the system or cause it to
go faster than you want. You could lose control
and have a collision. Always leave the system off
when you are not using it.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 268
STARTING AND OPERATING 269
TO TURN OFF
The system will turn off and clear the set speed in
memory if:
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
is pushed.
The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off
button is pushed.
The ignition is placed in the OFF position.
You switch to Four-Wheel Drive Low.
TO RESUME
If there is a set speed in memory push the RES (+)
button and then remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. The instrument cluster display
will display the last set speed.
NOTE:
While in ACC mode when the vehicle comes to a
complete stop longer than two seconds, the
system will cancel. The driver will have to apply
the brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill.
ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary
vehicle in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
TO VARY THE SPEED SETTING
To Increase Speed
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
pushing the RES (+) button.
The speed increment shown is dependent on the
chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a
1 mph increase in set speed. Each subsequent
tap of the button results in an increase of
1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase in 5 mph incre-
ments until the button is released. The increase
in set speed is reflected in the instrument
cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a
1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent
tap of the button results in an increase of
1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase in 10 km/h
increments until the button is released. The
increase in set speed is reflected in the instru-
ment cluster display.
To Decrease Speed
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased
by pushing the SET (-) button.
The speed decrement shown is dependent on the
chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a
1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subsequent
tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph
decrements until the button is released. The
decrease in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if
traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming a
set speed that is too high or too low for
prevailing traffic and road conditions could
cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too
sharply for safe operation. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 269
270 STARTING AND OPERATING
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a
1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease of
1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease in 10 km/h
decrements until the button is released. The
decrease in set speed is reflected in the instru-
ment cluster display.
NOTE:
When you override and push the RES (+) button
or SET (-) button, the new set speed will be the
current speed of the vehicle.
When you use the SET (-) button to decelerate, if
the engine’s braking power does not slow the
vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed, the
brake system will automatically slow the
vehicle.
The ACC system applies the brake down to a full
stop when following the vehicle in front. If your
vehicle follows the vehicle in front to a standstill,
your vehicle will release the brakes two seconds
after coming to a full stop.
The ACC system maintains set speed when
driving uphill and downhill. However, a slight
speed change on moderate hills is normal. In
addition, downshifting may occur while climbing
uphill or descending downhill. This is normal
operation and necessary to maintain set speed.
When driving uphill and downhill, the ACC
system will cancel if the braking temperature
exceeds normal range (overheated).
SETTING THE FOLLOWING DISTANCE IN
ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set
by varying the distance setting between four bars
(longest), three bars (long), two bars (medium) and
one bar (short). Using this distance setting and the
vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the
distance to the vehicle ahead. This distance
setting displays in the instrument cluster display.
Distance Setting
The system automatically defaults to the longest
distance setting. To decrease the distance setting,
push the Distance Button and release. Each time
the button is pushed, the distance setting
decreases by one bar. Once the shortest setting is
reached, if the button is pushed again it will reset
to the default setting (longest).
1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars)
2 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)
3 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars)
4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 270
STARTING AND OPERATING 271
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will
maintain the set speed. If a slower moving vehicle
is detected in the same lane, the instrument
cluster displays the ACC Set With Target Indicator
Light, and the system adjusts vehicle speed
automatically to maintain the distance setting,
regardless of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance
until:
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above
the set speed.
The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or
view of the sensor.
The distance setting is changed.
The system disengages. Refer to “Activating
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in this chapter.
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited;
however, the driver can always apply the brakes
manually, if necessary.
NOTE:
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC
system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC
predicts that its maximum braking level is not
sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this
occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE!” will flash in the
instrument cluster display and a chime will sound
while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
capacity.
Brake Alert
NOTE:
The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster
display is a warning for the driver to take action
and does not necessarily mean that the Forward
Collision Warning system is applying the brakes
autonomously.
Trailer Detect — If Equipped
When a trailer is detected, the ACC system
automatically defaults to the longest setting (four
bars). The setting can be overridden by pushing the
Distance Button on the steering wheel.
OVERTAKE AID
When driving with ACC engaged and following a
vehicle, the system will provide an additional
acceleration up to the ACC set speed to assist in
passing the vehicle.
This additional acceleration is triggered when the
driver utilizes the left turn signal and will only be
active when passing on the left hand side.
ACC OPERATION AT STOP
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill
while following a vehicle ahead, your vehicle will
resume motion, without any driver interaction, if
the vehicle ahead starts moving within two
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill.
If the vehicle in front does not start moving within
two seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill,
the ACC with Stop system will cancel and the
brakes will release. A cancel message will display
on the instrument cluster display and produce a
warning chime. The driver must now manually
operate the vehicle’s accelerator and brakes.
While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a
standstill, if the driver seat belt is unbuckled or the
driver door is opened, the ACC with Stop system
will cancel and the brakes will release. A cancel
message will display on the instrument cluster
display and produce a warning chime. The driver
must now manually operate the vehicle’s
accelerator and brakes.
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 271
272 STARTING AND OPERATING
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)
M
ENU
The instrument cluster display will show the
current ACC system settings. The instrument
cluster display is located in the center of the
instrument cluster. The information it displays
depends on ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button (located on the steering wheel) until one of
the following appears in the instrument cluster
display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed
setting has not been selected, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the RES (+) or the SET(-) button (located on
the steering wheel) is pushed, the display will read
“ACC SET.”
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the
instrument cluster display.
The ACC screen may display once again if any of
the following ACC activity occurs:
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will return to the
last display selected after five seconds of no
ACC display activity.
DISPLAY WARNINGS AND
M
AINTENANCE
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of
Vehicle” Warning
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning will display and a chime will
sound when conditions temporarily limit system
performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility,
such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may
also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these
cases, the instrument cluster display will display
“ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
and the system will deactivate.
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” message can sometimes be displayed
while driving in highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels
with reflective tiles, or ice and snow). The ACC
system will recover after the vehicle has left these
areas. Under rare conditions, when the radar is not
tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this
warning may temporarily occur.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver
must ensure that there are no pedestrians,
vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision and death or serious personal injury.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 272
STARTING AND OPERATING 273
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed)
Cruise Control is still available. For additional infor-
mation refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control Mode” in this section.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the sensor. It may require cleaning
or removal of an obstruction. The sensor is located
in the camera in the center of the windshield, on
the forward side of the rearview mirror.
To keep the ACC system operating properly, it is
important to note the following maintenance
items:
Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully clear
the windshield.
Do not remove any screws from the sensor.
Doing so could cause an ACC system malfunc-
tion or failure and require a sensor realignment.
Do not attach or install any accessories near the
sensor, including transparent material or
aftermarket grilles. Doing so could cause an
ACC system failure or malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system is
no longer present, the system will return to the
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off” state and will resume
function by simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain,
mud, or other obstruction, have the radar
sensor realigned at your authorized dealer.
Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an
aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not
recommended. Doing so may block the sensor
and inhibit ACC/FCW operation.
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” warning will display and a chime will
sound when conditions temporarily limit system
performance. This most often occurs at times of
poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain and
fog. The ACC system may also become temporarily
blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or
ice on windshield, driving directly into the sun and
fog on the inside of glass. In these cases, the
instrument cluster display will show “ACC/FCW
Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield” and
the system will have degraded performance.
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” message can sometimes be displayed
while driving in adverse weather conditions. The
ACC/FCW system will recover after the vehicle has
left these areas. Under rare conditions, when the
camera is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its
path this warning may temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the windshield and the camera
located on the back side of the inside rearview
mirror. They may require cleaning or removal of an
obstruction.
When the condition that created limited
functionality is no longer present, the system will
return to full functionality.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
than once on every trip) without any snow, rain,
mud, or other obstruction, have the windshield and
forward facing camera inspected at your autho-
rized dealer.
Service ACC/FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
displays “ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required”
or “Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required”,
there may be an internal system fault or a
temporary malfunction that limits ACC
functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable
under normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily
unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again
later, following an ignition cycle. If the problem
persists, see your authorized dealer.
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 273
274 STARTING AND OPERATING
PRECAUTIONS WHILE DRIVING WITH
ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have
detection issues. In these cases, ACC may brake
late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert
and may need to intervene.
NOTE:
Aftermarket add-ons such as snow plows, lift
kits, and brush/grille bars can hinder module
performance. Ensure the radar/camera has no
obstructions in the field of view.
Height modifications can limit module perfor-
mance and functionality.
Do not put stickers or easy passes over the
camera/radar field of view.
Any modifications to the vehicle that may
obstruct the field of view of the radar/camera
are not recommended.
Cleaning Instructions
Dust and dirt can accumulate on the cover and
block the camera lens. Clean the camera lens with
a soft microfiber cloth, being careful not to damage
or scratch the module.
Towing A Trailer
ACC while towing a trailer is recommended only
with an Integrated Trailer Brake Controller.
Aftermarket trailer brake controllers will not
activate the trailer brakes when ACC is braking.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that
is offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle
merging in from a side lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. The offset
vehicle may move in and out of the line of travel,
which can cause your vehicle to brake or
accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the
system may decrease the vehicle speed and
acceleration for stability reasons, with no target
vehicle detected. Once the vehicle is out of the
curve the system will resume your original set
speed. This is a part of normal ACC system
functionality.
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
Turn Or Bend Example
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 274
STARTING AND OPERATING 275
Using ACC On Hills
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle
in your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load,
traffic conditions, and the steepness of the hills,
ACC performance may be limited.
ACC Hill Example
Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely
in the lane in which you are traveling. In the
illustration shown, ACC has not yet detected the
vehicle changing lanes and it may not detect the
vehicle until it's too late for the ACC system to take
action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is
completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be
attentive and ready to apply the brakes if
necessary.
Lane Changing Example
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer
edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not
detected until they have moved fully into the lane.
There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle
ahead.
Narrow Vehicle Example
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 275
276 STARTING AND OPERATING
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
ACC does not react to stationary objects and
stationary vehicles. For example, ACC will not react
in situations where the vehicle you are following
exits your lane and the vehicle ahead is stopped in
your lane. Always be attentive and ready to apply
the brakes if necessary.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with Innovation, Science and Economic
Development Canada license-exempt RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage,
et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
NORMAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE
C
ONTROL MODE
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is
available for cruising at fixed speeds. The Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is designed to
maintain a set cruising speed without requiring the
driver to operate the accelerator. Speed Control
can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above
20 mph (32 km/h).
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 276
STARTING AND OPERATING 277
To change between the different control modes,
push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button which turns the ACC on and the Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control off. Pushing of the
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off button
will result in turning on (changing to) the Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control on. When the vehicle has
reached the desired speed, push the
RES (+) or SET (-) button and release.
Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
Once a speed has been set a message “CRUISE
CONTROL SET TO MPH (km/h)” will appear
indicating what speed was set. This light will turn
on when the system is turned on via the on/off
control. It turns green when the cruise control is
set.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is
set, you can increase speed by pushing the RES (+)
button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for more information. The
speed increment shown is dependent on the
speed of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a
1 mph increase in set speed. Each subsequent
tap of the button results in an increase of
1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase in 5 mph incre-
ments until the button is released. The increase
in set speed is reflected in the instrument
cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the RES (+) button once will result
in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase in 10 km/h
increments until the button is released. The
increase in set speed is reflected in the instru-
ment cluster display.
To Decrease Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is
set, you can decrease speed by pushing the SET (-)
button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for more information. The
speed decrement shown is dependent on the
speed of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a
1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subsequent
tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph decre-
ments until the button is released. The decrease
in set speed is reflected in the instrument
cluster display.
WARNING!
In the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
mode, the system will not react to vehicles
ahead. In addition, the proximity warning does
not activate and no alarm will sound even if you
are too close to the vehicle ahead since neither
the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be sure
to maintain a safe distance between your vehicle
and the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which
mode is selected.
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 277
278 STARTING AND OPERATING
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a
1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease of
1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease in 10 km/h
decrements until the button is released.
The decrease in set speed is reflected in
the instrument cluster display.
To Cancel
The following conditions will cancel the Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control without clearing the
memory:
The brake pedal is applied.
The CANCEL button is pushed.
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control
System (ESC/TCS) activates.
The vehicle parking brake is applied.
The braking temperature exceeds normal range
(overheated).
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
position.
The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
memory if:
The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off
button is pushed.
The ignition is placed in the OFF position.
You engage Four-Wheel Drive Low.
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
is pushed.
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides
visual and audible indications of the distance
between the rear fascia and a detected obstacle
when backing up (e.g. during a parking maneuver).
Refer to “ParkSense System Usage Precautions” in
this section for limitations of this system and
recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the system state (enabled or
disabled) from the previous ignition cycle when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear
selector is in REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at
this gear selector position, the system will remain
active until the vehicle speed is increased to
approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. When in
REVERSE and above the system's operating speed,
a warning will appear within the instrument cluster
display indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. The
system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than
approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
PARKSENSE SENSORS
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view.
The sensors can detect obstacles from
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the
horizontal direction, depending on the location,
type and orientation of the obstacle.
NOTE:
If equipped as a dually, the ParkSense system has
six rear sensors to assist in detection around the
dually flares.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 278
STARTING AND OPERATING 279
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within
the instrument cluster display. It provides visual
warnings to indicate the distance between the rear
fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning
display will turn on indicating the system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
showing a single arc in the left and/or right rear
regions based on the object’s distance and
location relative to the vehicle.
If an object is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single solid arc in the
left and/or right rear region and the system will
produce a tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the
object, the display will show the single arc moving
closer to the vehicle and the tone will change from
a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to
continuous.
Single 1/2 Second Tone
Slow Tone
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 279
280 STARTING AND OPERATING
Slow Tone Fast Tone
Fast Tone
Continuous Tone
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 280
STARTING AND OPERATING 281
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert
operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
The rear chime volume settings are programmable
through the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
The chime volume settings include low, medium,
and high. The factory default volume is medium.
ENABLING AND DISABLING PARKSENSE
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the
ParkSense switch.
When the gear selector is moved to
REVERSE and the system is disabled, the
instrument cluster display will show the
vehicle graphic with “Off” over the arcs
for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches
(200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
None
Single 1/2
Second Tone
Slow Slow Fast Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs-Center None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 281
282 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
The ParkSense system will automatically disable
when the system detects that a trailer with trailer
brakes has been connected to the Integrated
Trailer Brake Module. The instrument cluster
display will show an “Off” message over the arcs if
the ParkSense system is off, or a “Trailer” message
if the system is on, for as long as the vehicle is in
REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when
ParkSense is disabled or defective. The ParkSense
switch LED will be off when the system is enabled.
If the ParkSense switch is pushed, and the system
is disabled or requires service, the ParkSense
switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the
LED will be on.
SERVICE THE PARKSENSE REAR PARK
A
SSIST SYSTEM
During vehicle start up, when the Rear ParkSense
System has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster display will show the "Rear
ParkSense Unavailable Service Required" or the
"Rear ParkSense Unavailable Wipe Sensors"
message.
When the gear selector is moved into REVERSE, a
vehicle graphic will show in the instrument cluster
display, along with the display overlay “Rear
ParkSense Unavailable Wipe Sensors.” If the
system needs service, the display overlay will read
“Rear ParkSense Unavailable Service Required”
Under this condition, ParkSense will not operate.
If "Rear ParkSense Unavailable Wipe Sensors"
appears in the instrument cluster display make
sure the outer surface and the underside of the
rear fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice,
mud, dirt or other obstruction, and then cycle the
ignition. If the message continues to appear, see
an authorized dealer.
If "Rear ParkSense Unavailable Service Required"
appears in the instrument cluster display, see an
authorized dealer.
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash
soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard
cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE
P
RECAUTIONS
NOTE:
Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice,
mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense
system operating properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibra-
tions could affect the performance of Park-
Sense.
When you move the gear selector into REVERSE
with ParkSense turned off, the instrument
cluster display will show "Off" on the vehicle
graphic arcs for as long as the vehicle is in
REVERSE.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of
the radio when it is sounding a tone.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 282
STARTING AND OPERATING 283
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking
care not to scratch or damage them. The
sensors must not be covered with ice, snow,
slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can
result in the system not working properly. The
ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle
behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a
false indication that an obstacle is behind the
fascia/bumper.
Ensure the ParkSense system is off if objects
such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc., are
placed within 18 inches (45 cm) of the rear
fascia/bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure
to do so can result in the system misinterpreting
a close obstacle as a sensor problem, causing
the "Rear ParkSense Unavailable Service
Required" message to appear in the instrument
cluster display.
On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, ParkSense
should be disabled when the tailgate is in the
lowered or open position and the vehicle is in
REVERSE. A lowered tailgate could provide a
false indication that an obstacle is behind the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be
sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for safety and
must continue to pay attention to your
surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom-
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly be disconnected from the vehicle
when the vehicle is not used for towing.
Failure to do so can result in injury or damage
to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball
will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the vehicle sounds the
continuous tone. Also, the sensors could
detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly,
depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle, including
small obstacles. Parking curbs might be
temporarily detected or not detected at all.
Obstacles located above or below the sensors
will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recom-
mended that the driver looks over his/her
shoulder when using ParkSense.
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 283
284 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between
the rear, and/or front fascia/bumper, and a
detected obstacle when backing up or moving
forward (e.g. during a parking maneuver).
Refer to “ParkSense System Usage Precautions” in
this section for limitations of this system and
recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the system state (enabled or
disabled) from the previous ignition cycle when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear
selector is in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is
enabled at one of these gear selector positions,
the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph
(11 km/h) or above. A warning will appear in the
instrument cluster display when the vehicle is in
REVERSE, indicating the vehicle is above
ParkSense operating speed. The system will
become active again if the vehicle speed is
decreased to speeds less than approximately
6 mph (9 km/h).
PARKSENSE SENSORS
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view.
The sensors can detect obstacles from
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the
horizontal direction, depending on the location,
type and orientation of the obstacle.
NOTE:
If equipped as a dually, the ParkSense system has
six rear sensors to assist in detection around the
dually flares.
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front
fascia/bumper, monitor the area in front of the
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. The
sensors can detect obstacles from approximately
12 inches (30 cm) up to 47 inches (120 cm) from
the front fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction,
depending on the location, type and orientation of
the obstacle.
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within
the instrument cluster display. It provides visual
warnings to indicate the distance between the rear
fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper and
the detected obstacle. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
The warning display will turn on indicating the
system status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or
when the vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle has
been detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
showing a single arc in the left and/or right rear
regions based on the obstacle’s distance and
location relative to the vehicle.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 284
STARTING AND OPERATING 285
Front/Rear ParkSense Arcs
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear region, the display will show a single arc in the left and/or right rear region and the system will
produce a tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will change
from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to continuous.
1 — No Tone/Solid Arc 6 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
2 — No Tone/Flashing Arc 7 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 8 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
4 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 9 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
5 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 10 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 285
286 STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation
when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches
(200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
None
Single 1/2
Second Tone
Slow Slow Fast Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs-Center None 10th Solid 9th Solid 8th Solid 7th Flashing 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT
Front Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than 47 inches
(120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than 12 inches
(30 cm)
Audible Alert Chime None None None Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs-Center None 1st Solid 2nd Flashing 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Radio Volume Reduced No No No Yes Yes
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 286
STARTING AND OPERATING 287
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist
audible alert (chime) after approximately three
seconds when an obstacle has been detected, the
vehicle is stationary, and brake pedal is applied.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
The Front and Rear chime volume settings are
programmable through the Uconnect system.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
The chime volume settings include low, medium,
and high. The factory default volume is medium.
ENABLING AND DISABLING FRONT
A
ND/OR REAR PARKSENSE
Front ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with
the Front ParkSense switch.
Rear ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with
the Rear ParkSense switch.
When the gear selector is moved to
REVERSE and the Front or Rear system is
disabled, the instrument cluster display
will show a vehicle graphic with an “Off”
message overlay over the system that is off (Front
or Rear system). This vehicle graphic will be
displayed for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
The Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will be on
when Front or Rear ParkSense is disabled or
requires service. The Front or Rear ParkSense
switch LED will be off when the Front or Rear
system is enabled. If the Front or Rear ParkSense
switch is pushed, and the system requires service,
the Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will blink
momentarily, and then the LED will be on.
SERVICE THE PARKSENSE FRONT/
R
EAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM
During vehicle start up, when the Front/Rear
ParkSense System has detected a faulted
condition, the instrument cluster display will show
the "Front/Rear ParkSense Unavailable Service
Required" or the "Front/Rear ParkSense
Unavailable Wipe Sensors" message.
When the gear selector is moved into REVERSE, a
vehicle graphic will show in the instrument cluster
display, along with the display overlay “Wipe
Sensors.” If the system needs service, the display
overlay will read “Service.” Under this condition,
ParkSense will not operate.
If "Front/Rear ParkSense Unavailable Wipe
Sensors" appears in the instrument cluster display
make sure the outer surface and the underside of
the rear fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow,
ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction, and then cycle
the ignition. If the message continues to appear,
see an authorized dealer.
If "Front/Rear ParkSense Unavailable Service
Required" appears in the instrument cluster
display, see an authorized dealer.
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash
soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard
cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 287
288 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE
P
RECAUTIONS
NOTE:
Ensure that the front and rear bumpers are free
of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the
ParkSense system operating properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other
vibrations could affect the performance of
ParkSense.
When you move the gear selector to the
REVERSE position and Front or Rear ParkSense
is turned off, the instrument cluster display will
show "Off" on the vehicle graphic arcs. This
vehicle graphic will be displayed for as long as
the vehicle is in REVERSE.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of
the radio when it is sounding a tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking
care not to scratch or damage them. The
sensors must not be covered with ice, snow,
slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can
result in the system not working properly. The
ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle
is behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense
system off if obstacles such as bicycle carriers,
trailer hitches, etc. are placed within 18 inches
(45 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to
do so can result in the system misinterpreting a
close obstacle as a sensor problem, causing the
“Front/Rear ParkSense Unavailable Service
Required” message to be appear in the instru-
ment cluster display.
On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, ParkSense
should be disabled when the tailgate is in the
lowered or open position. A lowered tailgate
could provide a false indication that an obstacle
is behind the vehicle.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be
sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for safety and
must continue to pay attention to your
surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom-
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly be disconnected from the vehicle
when the vehicle is not used for towing.
Failure to do so can result in injury or damage
to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball
will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the vehicle sounds the
continuous tone. Also, the sensors could
detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly,
depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle, including
small obstacles. Parking curbs might be
temporarily detected or not detected at all.
Obstacles located above or below the sensors
will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recom-
mended that the driver looks over his/her
shoulder when using ParkSense.
WARNING!
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 288
STARTING AND OPERATING 289
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
LANESENSE OPERATION
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds
above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(180 km/h). It uses a forward looking camera to
detect lane markings and measure vehicle
position within the lane boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the
driver unintentionally drifts out of the lane while no
turn signal has been applied OR the driver departs
the lane on the opposite side of the applied turn
signal (if the left turn signal is applied and the
vehicle departs to the right), the LaneSense
system provides a haptic warning in the form of
torque applied to the steering wheel to prompt the
driver to remain within the lane boundaries. The
LaneSense system will also provide a visual
warning through the instrument cluster display to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane
boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic
warning by applying torque to the steering wheel at
any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and
the driver unintentionally drifts across that lane
marking (no turn signal applied), the LaneSense
system provides a visual warning through the
instrument cluster display to prompt the driver to
remain within the lane. When only a single lane
marking is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will
not be provided.
NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s
hands are on the steering wheel and provides an
audible and visual warning to the driver when the
driver’s hands are not detected on the steering
wheel. The system will cancel if the driver does not
return their hands to the wheel.
TURNING LANESENSE ON OR OFF
The LaneSense button is located on the
switch panel below the Uconnect display.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a 12–inch
Uconnect Display screen, the LaneSense button is
located above the display.
To turn the LaneSense system on, push the
LaneSense button (LED turns off). A “LaneSense
On” message is shown in the instrument cluster
display.
Lane Sense On Message
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the
LaneSense button again (LED turns on).
NOTE:
The LaneSense system will retain the last system
state (on or off) from the last ignition cycle when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 289
290 STARTING AND OPERATING
LANESENSE WARNING MESSAGE
The LaneSense system will indicate the current
lane drift condition through the instrument cluster
display.
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines
are gray when both of the lane boundaries have
not been detected and the LaneSense telltale
is solid white.
System ON (Gray Lines) With White Telltale
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the Lane-
Sense Telltale is solid white when only the
left lane marking has been detected and the
system is ready to provide visual warnings in the
instrument cluster display if an unintentional
lane departure occurs on the left side.
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane departure
situation, the visual warning in the instrument
cluster display will show the left lane line
flashing yellow (on/off). The LaneSense
telltale changes from solid white to flashing
yellow.
Lane Crossed (Flashing Yellow Lane Line) With
Yellow Telltale
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only the
right lane marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lane Lines Detected
When the LaneSense system is on and both the
lane markings have been detected, the system
is "armed" to provide visual warnings in the
instrument cluster display and a torque warning
in the steering wheel if an unintentional lane
departure occurs. The lane lines turn from gray
to white and the LaneSense telltale is solid
green.
Lanes Sensed (White Lines) With Green Telltale
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 290
STARTING AND OPERATING 291
When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift
situation, the left lane line turns solid yellow.
The LaneSense telltale changes from solid
green to solid yellow. At this time torque is
applied to the steering wheel in the opposite
direction of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the
lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Approached (Solid Yellow Lane Line) With Solid
Yellow Telltale
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane departure
situation, the left lane line flashes yellow
(on/off). The LaneSense telltale changes
from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this time
torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the
lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Crossed (Flashing Yellow Lane Line) With Flashing
Yellow Telltale
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
CHANGING LANESENSE STATUS
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the
intensity of the torque warning and the warning
zone sensitivity (Early/Medium/Late) that you can
configure through the Uconnect system screen.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
NOTE:
When enabled the system operates above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(180 km/h).
Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings.
The system will not apply torque to the steering
wheel whenever a safety system engages
(Anti-Lock Brakes, Traction Control System,
Electronic Stability Control, Forward Collision
Warning, etc.).
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView
Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle
whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE or
whenever it is initiated through the "Backup
Camera" button in the "Controls" menu.
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 291
292 STARTING AND OPERATING
Whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE,
the image will be displayed in the rearview mirror
display (if equipped) or Uconnect display (if
equipped). If the image is displayed on the
Uconnect display, a caution note to “Check Entire
Surroundings” will display across the top of the
screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.
Manual Activation Of The Rear View
Camera:
1. Press the "Controls" button located on the
bottom of the Uconnect display.
2. Press the "Backup Camera" icon to turn the
Rear View Camera system on.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with
Camera delay turned off), the rear Camera mode is
exited and the previous screen appears again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with
Camera delay turned on), the rear Camera image
will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting
to another gear, unless the vehicle speed exceeds
8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
PARK, the ignition is placed in the OFF position, or
the touchscreen button “X” to disable display of
the Rear View Camera image is pressed.
Whenever the Rear View Camera image is
activated through the "Backup Camera" button in
the "Controls" menu, and the vehicle speed is
greater than, or equal to, 8 mph (13 km/h), a
display timer for the image is initiated. The image
will continue to be displayed until the display timer
exceeds 10 seconds.
NOTE:
If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph
(13 km/h), the Rear View Camera image will be
displayed continuously until deactivated via the
touchscreen button "X", the transmission is
shifted into PARK, or the ignition is placed in the
OFF position.
The touchscreen button "X" to disable display of
the camera image is made available ONLY when
the vehicle is not in REVERSE.
Cargo Camera Icons — If Equipped
Backup Camera Touchscreen Button
Cargo Camera Touchscreen Button
AUX Camera Touchscreen Button
If equipped with a Cargo Camera, a touchscreen
button is made available to indicate the current
active Camera image being displayed whenever
the Rear View Camera image is displayed.
If equipped with a Cargo Camera, a touchscreen
button to switch the display to Cargo Camera
image is made available whenever the Rear View
Camera image is displayed.
A touchscreen button "X" to disable display of the
camera image is made available when the vehicle
is not in REVERSE gear.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on
the backup camera image to illustrate the width of
the vehicle and its projected backup path based on
the steering wheel position. The active guidelines
will show separate zones that will help indicate the
distance to the rear of the vehicle.
NOTE:
For further information about how to access and
change the programmable features of the
ParkView Rear Backup Camera, refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia.”
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 292
STARTING AND OPERATING 293
A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of
the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a
hitch/receiver. The following table shows the
approximate distances for each zone:
The ParkView Camera is located in the center of
the tailgate handle.
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the
lens.
Zoom View
When the Rear View Camera image is
being displayed, and the vehicle speed
is below 8 mph (13 km/h) while in any
gear selector position, Zoom View is
available. By pressing the “magnifying glass” icon
in the upper left of the display screen, the image
will zoom in to four times the standard view.
Pressing the icon a second time will return the view
to the standard Backup Camera display.
When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is in
REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera delay
view will display the standard Backup Camera
view. If the vehicle is then returned to REVERSE
gear from DRIVE, the Zoom View selection will
automatically resume.
Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain
the selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as
the vehicle is below 8 mph (13 km/h).
If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available
until the gear selector is placed in DRIVE or
REVERSE.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE,
and speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph
(13 km/h), Zoom View is unavailable and the
icon will appear gray.
While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be
visible.
AUX CAMERA — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with one or two
AUX Cameras, which display rearview and side
view images from the trailer on the touchscreen.
Zones
Distance To The Rear
Of The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow
1 ft - 6.5 ft
(30 cm - 2m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater
(2 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera.
Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for the safety of
your surroundings and must continue to pay
attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should
only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView
camera is unable to view every obstacle or
object in your drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able
to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is
recommended that the driver look frequently
over his/her shoulder when using ParkView.
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 293
294 STARTING AND OPERATING
Activation
The AUX Camera is activated by first pressing the
Backup Camera, Cargo Camera (if equipped), or
Surround View Camera (if equipped) button on the
touchscreen, followed by the AUX button located in
the upper left corner of the rearview display. The
AUX camera can also be activated when the
vehicle is in REVERSE by pressing the AUX button.
If equipped with two AUX Cameras, you can switch
between each camera by pressing the AUX1 or
AUX2 buttons on the Trailer Camera display.
AUX1 Camera Button
AUX2 Camera Button
Deactivation
The AUX Camera is deactivated by pressing the “X”
in the upper right corner of the touchscreen. This
will return the display back to the previously
displayed screen.
NOTE:
If the AUX button is pressed and no AUX Camera
is connected, the touchscreen will display a blue
screen along with the message “Camera
System Unavailable.” The screen can be exited
out by pressing the “X” in the upper right hand
corner. This will return the display back to the
previously displayed screen.
Zoom View is not available with the AUX Camera
feature.
The display will always default to the Trailer
Camera display (AUX 1).
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Surround
View Camera system that allows you to see an
on-screen image of the surroundings and Top View
of your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put
into REVERSE or manually activated via the
Uconnect system. The Top View of the vehicle will
show which doors are open. The image will be
displayed on the touchscreen display along with a
caution note “Check Entire Surroundings” across
the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note
will disappear. The Surround View Camera system
is comprised of four sequential cameras located in
the front grille, rear tailgate and side mirrors.
NOTE:
The Surround View Camera system has program-
mable settings that may be selected through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, the Rear
View and Top View is the default view of the system
(Automatic Activation).
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with camera delay turned on), the Rear View will
continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds,
unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph
(13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK or the
ignition is placed in the OFF position. There is a
touchscreen button “X” to disable the display of
the camera image.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with
camera delay turned off), the Surround View
system is exited and the last known screen
appears again.
While the Rear View is displayed and guidelines
are enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on the
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle,
including the side view mirrors and its projected
backup path based on the steering wheel position.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to
the rear of the vehicle.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 294
STARTING AND OPERATING 295
The following table shows the approximate
distances for each zone:
Modes Of Operation
The Rear View can be manually activated by
selecting “Backup Camera” through the Controls
menu within the Uconnect system.
Refer to “Parkview Rear Back Up Camera” in this
section for more information on activation
conditions.
Top View
The Top View will show in the Uconnect system with
Rear view and Front View in a split screen display.
There are integrated ParkSense arcs in the image
at the front and rear of the vehicle. The arcs will
change color from yellow to red corresponding the
distance zones to the oncoming object.
The fifth button of the ParkSense Camera View
screen will change based on the features present
in the vehicle. If not equipped with a Cargo Camera
or Trailer Reverse Guidance, the Backup Camera
soft button will be displayed. If equipped with a
Cargo Camera but no Trailer Reverse Guidance,
the Cargo Camera soft button will be displayed,
and if equipped with both a Cargo Camera and
Trailer Reverse Guidance, the Cargo/Trailer
Reverse Guidance soft button will be displayed.
ParkSense Camera View
NOTE:
Front tires will display on the image when the
tires are turned.
Due to wide angle cameras in mirrors, the image
will appear distorted.
Top View will show which doors are open.
Open front doors will cancel the outside image.
Rear View
This is the Default view of the system in
REVERSE and is always paired with the
Top View of the vehicle with optional
active guidelines for the projected path
when enabled.
Rear Cross Path View
Pressing the Rear Cross Path soft key will
give the driver a wider angle view of the
rear camera system. The Top View will be
disabled when this is selected.
Front View
The Front View will show you what is
immediately in front of the vehicle and is
always paired with the Top View of the
vehicle.
Front Cross Path View
Pressing the Front Cross Path soft key
will give the driver a wider angle view of
the front camera system. The Top View
will be disabled when this is selected.
Rear View Camera
Pressing the Backup Camera soft key will
provide a full screen rear view with Zoom
View.
Zone
Distance To The Rear Of
The Vehicle
Red
0 - 1 ft
(0 - 30 cm)
Yellow
1 ft - 6.5 ft
(30 cm - 2 m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater
(2 m or greater)
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 295
296 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
If the Backup Camera view was selected through
the Surround View menu, exiting out of the Rear
View Camera screen will return to the Surround
View screen. If the Backup Camera was manually
activated through the Controls menu of the
Uconnect system, exiting out of the display screen
will return to the Controls menu.
Cargo Camera
Pressing the Cargo Camera soft key will
provide a full screen view of the cargo
area.
NOTE:
If the Cargo Camera view was selected through the
Surround View screen, exiting out of the Cargo
Camera screen will return to the Surround View
screen. If the Cargo Camera was manually acti-
vated through the Controls menu of the Uconnect
system, exiting out of the display screen will return
to the Controls menu.
Trailer Reverse Guidance
Pressing the Trailer Reverse Guidance
soft key will provide a full screen view of
the cargo area and trailer.
Pressing the Left & Right Tow Mirror Split
Screen View button within the Trailer
Reverse Guidance screen will display a
split screen to allow the driver to see both
sides of the trailer at the same time. This view
allows the driver to pan left/right to better frame
the trailer in the image.
NOTE:
Trailer Reverse Guidance can only be selected
through the Surround View screen; exiting out of
the Trailer Reverse Guidance screen will return to
the Surround View screen.
Zoom View
When the Rear View Camera image is
being displayed, and the vehicle speed is
below 8 mph (13 km/h) while in any
gear, Zoom View is available. By pressing
the “magnifying glass” icon in the upper left of the
display screen, the image will zoom in to four times
the standard view. Pressing the icon a second time
will return the view to the standard Backup Camera
display.
When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is in
REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera delay
view will display the standard Backup Camera
view. If the vehicle is then returned to REVERSE
gear from DRIVE, the Zoom View selection will
automatically resume.
Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain
the selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as
the vehicle is below 8 mph (13 km/h).
Zoom View is available until the gear selector is
placed in DRIVE or REVERSE and speeds are at or
above 8 mph (13 km/h).
NOTE:
If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE,
and speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph
(13 km/h), Zoom View is unavailable and the
icon will appear gray.
While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be
visible.
Deactivation
The system is deactivated in the following
conditions if it was activated
automatically:
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with camera delay turned on), the camera
image will continue to be displayed for up to
10 seconds, unless the vehicle speed exceeds
8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into
PARK or the ignition is placed in the OFF posi-
tion. There is a touch screen button “X” to
disable the display of the camera image.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with camera delay turned off), the Surround
View Camera mode is exited and the last known
screen appears again.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 296
STARTING AND OPERATING 297
The system is deactivated in the following
conditions if it was activated
manually from the
Uconnect controls menu via the Surround View
button, Backup Camera button, Cargo Camera
button or Forward Facing Camera button:
The "X" button on the display is pressed
Vehicle is shifted into PARK
Ignition is placed in the OFF position
Vehicle speed is over 8 mph (13 km/h) for
10 seconds
NOTE:
If the Surround View Camera, Cargo Camera,
Backup Camera, or Forward Facing Camera is
activated manually, and the vehicle is shifted into
REVERSE, deactivation methods for automatic
activation are assumed.
The camera delay system is turned off manually
through the Uconnect Settings menu. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lenses, clean the
lenses, rinse with water, and dry with a soft
cloth. Do not cover the lenses.
If a malfunction with the system has occurred,
see an authorized dealer.
Cargo Camera With Dynamic Centerline —
If Equipped
The Dynamic Centerline feature provides an
overlay on the Cargo Camera display screen that
aligns to the center of the pickup box to aid in
hooking up a fifth wheel camper or gooseneck
trailer. The centerline auto aligns to the center of
the pickup box, and can also be manually adjusted.
The centerline will adjust in response to steering
angle inputs, and will not obstruct the gooseneck
receiver or an approaching trailer gooseneck in the
camera feed.
Activation
The Dynamic Centerline feature can be activated
through the Uconnect settings by pressing the
Cargo Camera soft button, followed by the
“Dynamic Centerline” soft button on the
touchscreen.
If the Dynamic Centerline feature is turned on, the
overlay will display anytime the Cargo Camera
image is displayed.
Adjusting Centerline
Follow the steps below to manually adjust the
centerline:
1. Press the “Adjust Centerline” soft button
located in the bottom right corner of the
Cargo Camera display.
2. Use the arrows on the bottom left corner of the
Cargo Camera display to adjust the centerline
horizontally or vertically.
3. Once the desired position is achieved, press
the “Accept” button to set the centerline to the
newly specified position.
Deactivation
The Dynamic Centerline feature will automatically
be deactivated whenever the Cargo Camera
display is deactivated. It can also be manually
deactivated through the Uconnect settings.
Cargo Camera Zoom View
When the Cargo Camera image is being
displayed, and the vehicle speed is below
8 mph (13 km/h) while in any gear
selector position, Zoom View is available.
By pressing the “magnifying glass” icon in the
upper left of the display screen, the image will
zoom in to four times the standard view. Pressing
the icon a second time will return the view to the
standard Cargo Camera display.
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 297
298 STARTING AND OPERATING
When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is in
REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera delay
view will display the standard Cargo Camera view.
If the vehicle is then returned to REVERSE gear
from DRIVE, the Zoom View selection will
automatically resume.
Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain
the selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as
the vehicle is below 8 mph (13 km/h).
Zoom View is available until the gear selector is
placed in DRIVE or REVERSE and speeds are at or
above 8 mph (13 km/h).
NOTE:
If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE,
and speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph
(13 km/h), Zoom View is unavailable and the
icon will appear gray.
While in Zoom View, the dynamic centerline will
not be visible.
Forward Facing Camera With Tire Lines —
If Equipped
The Forward Facing Camera displays a front view
image of the road ahead, along with tire lines to
guide the driver when driving on narrow roads. Tire
lines can be activated/deactivated through the
Uconnect Settings.
Activation
The Forward Facing Camera can be activated by
pressing the Forward Camera soft button on the
touchscreen.
Once activated, the camera image will remain on
as long as the vehicle speed is below 8 mph
(13 km/h) and the vehicle is not in 4WD Low.
Deactivation
The Forward Facing Camera is deactivated in the
following conditions:
The vehicle is not in 4WD Low and the
vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h) for
10 seconds.
The “X” button on the display is pressed.
Vehicle is shifted into PARK.
Ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is in 4WD Low, the Forward Facing
Camera image will be displayed until the “X” button
is pressed or the ignition is placed in the OFF
position. If the vehicle goes out of 4WD Low, then
the regular deactivation conditions listed above
are applied.
Trailer Reverse Guidance — If Equipped
The Trailer Reverse Guidance feature assists the
driver in backing up a trailer by providing
adjustable camera views of the trailer and
surrounding area. The cameras are mounted on
the side mirrors and the images will be displayed
side-by-side on the touchscreen. Left and right
camera images are swapped and mirrored on the
touchscreen to show the equivalent area behind
the vehicle as though the driver is using the side
mirrors.
Activation
The Trailer Reverse Guidance feature can be
activated by pressing the Trailer Reverse Guidance
button on the Backup/Cargo Camera Display.
Deactivation
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with camera delay turned on), the camera image
will continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds,
unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph
(13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK or the
ignition is placed in the OFF position. There is a
touchscreen button “X” to disable the display of
the camera image.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 298
STARTING AND OPERATING 299
(Continued)
If Trailer Reverse Guidance is selected through
manually activated Surround View, Backup
Camera, or Cargo Camera, the below deactivation
conditions apply:
The “X” button on the display is pressed
The vehicle is shifted into PARK
The ignition is placed in the OFF position
The vehicle speed is over 8 mph (13 km/h) for
10 seconds
NOTE:
If the vehicle is not equipped with a Pickup Box:
The bottom wedge of the Top View will be
displayed in black.
The Rear Cross Path soft button will be grayed
out.
The guidelines will not be overlaid on Top View/
Rear View and Full Screen of Backup Camera
view.
Black video will be displayed for the right side of
the Top and Rear View, and full screen of the
Backup Camera view when the Rear View
Camera is not connected.
AUX CAMERA — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with one or two
AUX Cameras, which display rearview and side
view images from the trailer on the touchscreen.
Activation
The AUX Camera is activated by first pressing the
Backup Camera, Cargo Camera (if equipped), or
Surround View Camera (if equipped) button on the
touchscreen, followed by the AUX button located in
the upper left corner of the rearview display. The
AUX camera can also be activated when the
vehicle is in REVERSE by pressing the AUX button.
If equipped with two AUX Cameras, you can switch
between each camera by pressing the AUX1 or
AUX2 buttons on the Trailer Camera display.
AUX1 Camera Button
AUX2 Camera Button
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the Surround View Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for the safety of
your surroundings and must continue to pay
attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, Surround View
should only be used as a parking aid. The
Surround View camera is unable to view every
obstacle or object in your drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using Surround View to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen.
It is recommended that the driver look
frequently over his/her shoulder when using
Surround View.
CAUTION!
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 299
300 STARTING AND OPERATING
Deactivation
The AUX Camera is deactivated by pressing the “X”
in the upper right corner of the touchscreen. This
will return the display back to the previously
displayed screen.
NOTE:
If the AUX button is pressed and no AUX Camera
is connected, the touchscreen will display a blue
screen along with the message “Camera
System Unavailable.” The screen can be exited
out by pressing the “X” in the upper right hand
corner. This will return the display back to the
previously displayed screen.
Zoom View is not available with the AUX Camera
feature.
The display will always default to the Trailer
Camera display (AUX 1).
ENGINE RUNAWAY — DIESEL ENGINE
Diesel engine runaway is a rare condition affecting
diesel engines, where the engine consumes its
own lubrication oil and runs at higher and higher
RPM until it overspeeds to a point where it destroys
itself due to either mechanical failure or engine
seizure through lack of lubrication.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — GAS ENGINE
The fuel filler cap (gas cap) is located behind the
fuel filler door, on the left side of the vehicle. Open
the fuel door and remove the fuel filler cap by
turning it counter-clockwise.
Fuel Filler Cap
NOTE:
When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door.
WARNING!
In case of engine runaway due to flammable
fumes from fuel spills or turbocharger oil leaks
being sucked into the engine, do the following to
help avoid personal injury and/or vehicle
damage:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
2. Using a CO2 or dry chemical type fire
extinguisher, direct the spray from the fire
extinguisher into the grille on the driver side so
that the spray enters the engine air intake.
The inlet for the engine air intake is located
behind the drivers side headlamp and receives
air through the grille.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed
or the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine
is running.
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle.
You could be burned. Always place gas
containers on the ground while filling.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 300
STARTING AND OPERATING 301
NOTE:
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the
fuel tank is full.
Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking”
sound. This is an indication that the gas cap is
tightened properly. The MIL in the instrument
cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not secured
properly. Make sure that the gas cap is tight-
ened each time the vehicle is refueled.
LOOSE FUEL FILLER CAP MESSAGE
If the vehicle diagnostic system
determines that the fuel filler cap is
loose, improperly installed, or damaged,
a loose gASCAP indicator will display in
the instrument cluster telltale display area. Refer
to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and
push the RIGHT button to turn off the message. If
the problem continues, the message will appear
the next time the vehicle is started.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — DIESEL ENGINE
1. Open the fuel filler door.
Fill Locations
NOTE:
There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the
filler pipe seals the system.
2. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler
pipe – the nozzle opens and holds the flapper
door while refueling.
CAUTION!
Damage to the fuel system or emissions
control system could result from using an
improper fuel tank filler tube cap.
A poorly fitting fuel filler cap could let impuri-
ties into the fuel system.
A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on.
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
“top off” the fuel tank after filling. When the
fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
WARNING!
Always place container on the ground
before filling.
Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the
container when you are filling it.
Use only approved containers for
flammable liquid.
Do not leave container unattended
while filling.
A static electric charge could cause a spark
and fire hazard.
1 — Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fill Location
2 — Diesel Fuel Fill Location
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 301
302 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
4. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel
door.
Emergency Fuel Can Refueling
NOTE:
In the event that you run the vehicle out of fuel,
once refueled, place the ignition in the ON position
for 30 seconds, then turn the ignition OFF and wait
30 seconds. Repeat this procedure three times,
prior to cranking the engine.
Most fuel cans will not open the flapper door.
A funnel is provided to open the flapper door to
allow emergency refueling with a fuel can.
1. Retrieve fuel funnel from the jack kit located
under the front passenger seat.
2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as
the fuel nozzle.
Fill Locations And Funnel Usage
NOTE:
Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper door
open.
3. Pour fuel into funnel opening.
4. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior
to putting back in the jack kit.
1 — Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fill Location
2 — Emergency Diesel Fuel Fill Funnel
3 — Diesel Fuel Fill Location
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or
the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the “Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light” to turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle.
You could be burned. Always place fuel
containers on the ground while filling.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 302
STARTING AND OPERATING 303
DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID
Your vehicle is equipped with a Selective Catalytic
Reduction (SCR) system to meet the very stringent
diesel emissions standards required by the
Environmental Protection Agency.
The purpose of the SCR system is to reduce levels
of NOx (oxides of nitrogen emitted from engines)
that are harmful to our health and the environment
to a near-zero level. A small quantity of Diesel
Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is injected into the exhaust
upstream of a catalyst where, when vaporized, it
converts smog-forming nitrogen oxides (NOx) into
harmless nitrogen (N2) and water vapor (H2O), two
natural components of the air we breathe. You can
operate with the comfort that your vehicle is
contributing to a cleaner, healthier world
environment for this and generations to come.
System Overview
This vehicle is equipped with a Diesel Exhaust Fluid
(DEF) injection system and a Selective Catalytic
Reduction (SCR) catalyst to meet the emission
requirements.
The DEF injection system consists of the following
components:
DEF tank
DEF pump
DEF injector
Electronically-heated DEF lines
DEF control module
NOx sensors
Temperature sensors
SCR catalyst
UQS Sensor
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for system
messages and warnings.
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with a DEF injection
system. You may occasionally hear an audible
clicking noise. This is normal operation.
The DEF pump will run for a period of time after
engine shutdown to purge the DEF system. This
is normal operation.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Storage
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is considered a very
stable product with a long shelf life. If DEF is
kept in temperatures between 10°F and 90°F
(-12°C and 32°C), it will last a minimum of one
year.
DEF is subject to freezing at the lowest
temperatures. For example, DEF may freeze at
temperatures at or below 12°F (-11°C). The
system has been designed to operate in this
environment.
NOTE:
When working with DEF, it is important to
know that:
Any containers or parts that come into contact
with DEF must be DEF compatible (plastic or
stainless steel). Copper, brass, aluminum, iron
or non-stainless steel should be avoided as they
are subject to corrosion by DEF.
If DEF is spilled, it should be wiped up
completely.
Adding Diesel Exhaust Fluid
The DEF gauge (located on the instrument cluster)
will display the level of DEF remaining in the tank.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster” and “Instrument
Cluster Descriptions” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
Driving conditions (altitude, vehicle speed, load,
etc.) will affect the amount of DEF that is used in
your vehicle.
Another factor is that outside temperature can
affect DEF consumption. In cold conditions,
12°F (-11°C) and below, the DEF gauge needle
can stay on a fixed position and may not move
for extended periods of time. This is a normal
function of the system.
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 303
304 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
There is an electric heater inside the DEF tank
that automatically works when necessary. And if
the DEF supply does freeze, the truck will
operate normally until it thaws.
DEF FILL PROCEDURE
NOTE:
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for the correct fluid type.
1. Remove cap from DEF tank (located on
driver’s side of the vehicle or in fuel door).
Fill Locations
2. Insert DEF fill adapter/nozzle into DEF tank
filler neck.
NOTE:
The DEF gauge may take up to five seconds
to update after adding a gallon or more of
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) to the DEF tank.
If you have a fault related to the DEF
system, the gauge may not update to the
new level. See an authorized dealer for
service.
The DEF gauge may also not immediately
update after a refill if the temperature of the
DEF fluid is below 12°F (-11°C). The DEF
line heater will possibly warm up the DEF
fluid and allow the gauge to update after a
period of run time. Under very cold condi-
tions, it is possible that the gauge may not
reflect the new fill level for several drives.
Excessive overfilling of the DEF tank can
result in a MIL lamp/fault code and inaccu-
rate level readings.
1 — Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fill Location
2 — Diesel Fuel Fill Location
CAUTION!
To avoid DEF spillage, and possible damage to
the DEF tank from overfilling, do not “top off”
the DEF tank after filling.
DO NOT OVERFILL. DEF will freeze below
12ºF (-11ºC). The DEF system is designed to
work in temperatures below the DEF freezing
point, however, if the tank is overfilled and
freezes, the system could be damaged.
When DEF is spilled, clean the area immedi-
ately with water and use an absorbent mate-
rial to soak up the spills on the ground.
Do not attempt to start your engine if DEF is
accidentally added to the diesel fuel tank as it
can result in severe damage to your engine,
including but not limited to failure of the fuel
pump and injectors.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 304
STARTING AND OPERATING 305
3. Stop filling the DEF tank immediately when any
of the following happen: DEF stops flowing
from the fill bottle into the DEF tank, DEF
splashes out the filler neck, or a DEF pump
nozzle automatically shuts off.
4. Reinstall cap onto DEF tank.
Filling The Def Tank In Cold Climates
Since DEF will begin to freeze at 12°F (-11°C),
your vehicle is equipped with an automatic DEF
heating system. This allows the DEF injection
system to operate properly at temperatures below
12°F (-11°C). If your vehicle is not in operation for
an extended period of time with temperatures
below 12°F (-11°C), the DEF in the tank may
freeze. If the tank is overfilled and freezes, it could
be damaged. Therefore, do not overfill the DEF
tank.
Extra care should be taken when filling with
portable containers to avoid overfilling. Note the
level of the DEF gauge in your instrument cluster.
You may safely add a maximum of 2 Gallons
(7.5 Liters) of DEF from portable containers when
your DEF gauge is reading ½ full.
VEHICLE LOADING
GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT RATING
(GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your
vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle,
options and cargo. The label also specifies
maximum capacities of front and rear axle systems
(GAWR). Total load must be limited so GVWR and
front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
PAYLOAD
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable
load weight a truck can carry, including the weight
of the driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
GROSS AXLE WEIGHT RATING (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the
front and rear axles. The load must be distributed
in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is
not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components
in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity
(axle, springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or
suspension components sometimes specified by
purchasers for increased durability does not
necessarily increase the vehicle's GVWR.
TIRE SIZE
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label
represents the actual tire size on your vehicle.
Replacement tires must be equal to the load
capacity of this tire size.
RIM SIZE
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire
size listed.
Never add anything other than DEF to the tank
– especially any form of hydrocarbon such as
diesel fuel, fuel system additives, gasoline, or
any other petroleum-based product. Even a
very small amount of these, less than
100 parts per million or less than 1 oz. per
78 Gallons (295 Liters) will contaminate the
entire DEF system and will require replace-
ment. If owners use a container, funnel or
nozzle when refilling the tank, it should either
be new or one that has only been used for
adding DEF. Mopar® provides an attachable
nozzle with its DEF for this purpose.
CAUTION!
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 305
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
INFLATION PRESSURE
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your
vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
CURB WEIGHT
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total
weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including
vehicle fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no
occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The
front and rear curb weight values are determined
by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale
before any occupants or cargo are added.
LOADING
The actual total weight and the weight of the front
and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be
determined by weighing it when it is loaded and
ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a
commercial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not
been exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of
the vehicle should then be determined separately
to be sure that the load is properly distributed over
the front and rear axles. Weighing the vehicle may
show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axle
has been exceeded but the total load is within the
specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from
front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
specified weight limitations are met. Store the
heavier items down low and be sure that the
weight is distributed equally. Stow all loose items
securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse
effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles
and the way the brakes operate.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and
information on limits to the type of towing you can
reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a
trailer, carefully review this information to tow your
load as efficiently and safely as possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
coverage, follow the requirements and
recommendations in this manual concerning
vehicles used for trailer towing.
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing-related definitions will
assist you in understanding the following
information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo
and tongue weight. The total load must be limited
so that you do not exceed the GVWR. Refer to
“Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight
of all cargo, consumables and equipment
(permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the
trailer in its "loaded and ready for operation"
condition.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If
you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can
change the way your vehicle handles. This could
cause you to lose control. Also overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 306
STARTING AND OPERATING 307
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put
your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The
entire weight of the trailer must be supported by
the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front
and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not
exceed either front or rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle
Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted
on the hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider
this as part of the load on your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied
by the maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control can be a mechanical
telescoping link that can be installed between the
hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically
provides adjustable friction associated with the
telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted
trailer swaying motions while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control
(TSC) recognizes a swaying trailer and
automatically applies individual wheel brakes and/
or reduces engine power to attempt to eliminate
the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch
ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle.
These kinds of hitches are the most popular on the
market today and they are commonly used to tow
small and medium sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are
typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer
tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front axle and
the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance with
the manufacturer's directions, it provides for a
more level ride, offering more consistent steering
and brake control, thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway
control also dampens sway caused by traffic and
crosswinds and contributes positively to tow
vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer Sway Control
(TSC) and a weight distributing (load equalizing)
hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on
vehicle and trailer configuration/loading to comply
with GAWR requirements.
WARNING!
If the gross trailer weight is 5,000 lb (2,267 kg)
or more, it is recommended to use a
weight-distributing hitch to ensure stable
handling of your vehicle. If you use a standard
weight-carrying hitch, you could lose control of
your vehicle and cause a collision.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the
maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
driving condition can result if either rating is
exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle
and have a collision.
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 307
308 STARTING AND OPERATING
With Weight-Distributing Hitch (Correct)
Without Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect)
Improper Adjustment Of Weight-Distributing Hitch
(Incorrect)
RECOMMENDED DISTRIBUTION HITCH
ADJUSTMENT
Towing With 2500/3500 Air Suspension
1. Position the truck to be ready to connect to
the trailer (do not connect the trailer).
NOTE:
Normal Ride Height (NRH) or Alternate Trailer
Height (ATH) can be used. The vehicle must remain
in the engine running position while attaching a
trailer for proper leveling of the air suspension
system. It may not be possible to enter Alternate
Trailer Height (ATH) while lightly loaded.
2. Measure the height from the top of the front
wheel opening on the fender to ground, this is
height H1.
3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the
weight distribution bars connected.
4. Measure the height from the top of the front
wheel opening on the fender to ground, this is
height H2.
5. Install and adjust the tension in the weight
distributing bars per the manufacturers’
recommendations so that the height of the
front fender is approximately (H2-H1)/2+H1
(about 1/2 the difference between H2 and H1
above normal ride height [H1]).
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted weight distributing
hitch system may reduce handling, stability
and braking performance and could result in a
collision.
Weight distributing systems may not be
compatible with surge brake couplers. Consult
with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a
reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for
additional information.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 308
STARTING AND OPERATING 309
6. Perform a visual inspection of the trailer and
weight distributing hitch to confirm manufac-
turers’ recommendations have been met.
NOTE:
For all towing conditions, we recommend towing
with TOW/HAUL mode engaged.
Towing With All Other 2500/3500
(Non-Air Suspension)
1. Position the truck to be ready to connect to
the trailer (do not connect the trailer).
2. Measure the height of the top of the front
wheel opening on the fender to ground, this is
height H1.
3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the
weight distribution bars connected.
4. Measure the height of the top of the front
wheel opening on the fender to ground, this is
height H2.
5. Install and adjust the tension in the weight
distributing bars per the manufacturers’
recommendations so that the height of the
front fender is approximately (H2-H1)/2+H1
(about 1/2 the difference between H2 and H1
above normal ride height [H1]).
6. Perform a visual inspection of the trailer and
weight distributing hitch to confirm manufac-
turers’ recommendations have been met.
NOTE:
For all towing conditions, we recommend towing
with TOW/HAUL mode engaged.
Fifth-Wheel Hitch
The fifth-wheel hitch is a special high platform with
a coupling that mounts over the rear axle of the tow
vehicle in the truck bed. It connects a vehicle and
fifth-wheel trailer with a coupling king pin.
Your truck may be equipped with a fifth wheel hitch
option. Refer to the separately provided fifth wheel
hitch safety, care, assembly, and operating
instructions.
Gooseneck Hitch
The gooseneck hitch employs a pivoted coupling
arm which attaches to a ball mounted in the bed of
a pickup truck. The coupling arm connects to the
hitch mounted over the rear axle in the truck bed.
Measurement
Example
Example 2500/3500
Height (mm)
H1 1030
H2 1058
H2-H1 28
(H2-H1)/2 14
(H2-H1)/2 + H1 1044
Measurement
Example
Example 2500/3500
Height (mm)
H1 1030
H2 1058
H2-H1 28
(H2-H1)/2 14
(H2-H1)/2 + H1 1044
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 309
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER HITCH TYPE AND MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight a given factory equipped trailer hitch type can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed
on your vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS
(MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)
NOTE:
For trailer towing information (maximum trailer
weight ratings) refer to the following website
addresses:
ramtrucks.com/en/towing_guide/
ramtruck.ca (Canada)
rambodybuilder.com
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Weight Distribution
Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer Weight
Hitch Type Max. Trailer Weight / Max. Tongue Weight
Class V - 2500 Models 20,000 lb (9,071 kg) / 2,000 lb (907 kg)
Class V - 3500 Models 23,000 lb (10,432 kg) / 2,300 lb (1,043 kg)
Fifth Wheel - 2500 Models 25,000 lb (11,339 kg) / 3,750 lb (1,700 kg)
Fifth Wheel - 3500 Models 30,000 lb (13,607 kg) / 4,500 lb (2,041 kg)
Gooseneck - 2500 Models 20,000 lb (9,071 kg) / 3,000 lb (1,360 kg)
Gooseneck - 3500 Models 35,250 lb (15,989 kg) / 5,287 lb (2,398 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 310
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
(Continued)
(Continued)
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
The tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or
equipment put in or on your vehicle.
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the trailer
adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options
must be considered as part of the total load on
your vehicle. Refer to the “Tire And Loading Infor-
mation” placard for the maximum combined
weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle.
TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle
drivetrain components, the following guidelines
are recommended.
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Scheduled
Servicing”. Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in
“Servicing And Maintenance” for the proper
maintenance intervals. When towing a trailer,
never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
CAUTION!
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is driven.
The engine, axle or other parts could be
damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that
a trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full
throttle. This helps the engine and other parts
of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
WARNING!
Make certain that the load is secured in the
trailer and will not shift during travel. When
trailering cargo that is not fully secured,
dynamic load shifts can occur that may be
difficult for the driver to control. You could lose
control of your vehicle and have a collision.
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading
can cause a loss of control, poor performance
or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmis-
sion, steering, suspension, chassis structure
or tires.
CAUTION!
Safety chains must always be used between
your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the
chains to the hook retainers of the vehicle
hitch. Cross the chains under the trailer
tongue and allow enough slack for turning
corners.
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on
a grade. When parking, apply the parking
brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle
transmission in PARK. For four-wheel drive
vehicles, make sure the transfer case is not in
NEUTRAL. Always, block or "chock" the trailer
wheels.
GCWR must not be exceeded.
Total weight must be distributed between the
tow vehicle and the trailer such that the
following four ratings are not exceeded:
GVWR
GTW
GAWR
Tongue weight rating for the trailer
hitch utilized.
WARNING!
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 311
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Tires
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a
compact spare tire.
Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when
towing while using a full size spare tire.
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to
the safe and satisfactory operation of your
vehicle. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And Main-
tenance” for proper tire inflation procedures.
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire
damage before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires”
in “Servicing And Maintenance” for the proper
inspection procedure.
When replacing tires, refer to “Tires” in
“Servicing And Maintenance” for the proper tire
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a
higher load carrying capacity will not increase
the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system
or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of
the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking
and possible personal injury.
An electronically actuated trailer brake
controller is required when towing a trailer with
electronically actuated brakes. When towing a
trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated
brake system, an electronic brake controller is
not required.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers
over 1,000 lb (453 kg) and required for trailers
in excess of 2,000 lb (907 kg).
Integrated Trailer Brake Module —
If Equipped
Your vehicle may have an Integrated Trailer Brake
Module (ITBM) for Electric and Electric Over
Hydraulic (EOH) trailer brakes.
NOTE:
This module has been designed and verified with
electric trailer brakes and new electric over
hydraulic systems. Some previous EOH systems
may not be compatible with ITBM.
Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM)
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your
brake system and cause it to fail. You might
not have brakes when you need them and
could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for
additional space between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could
result in an accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do
this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear,
higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping
distances.
1 — GAIN Adjustment Button
2 — GAIN Adjustment Button
3 — Manual Brake Control Lever
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 312
STARTING AND OPERATING 313
The user interface consists of the following:
Manual Brake Control Lever
Slide the manual brake control lever to the left to
activate power to the trailer's electric brakes
independent of the tow vehicle's brakes. If the
manual brake control lever is activated while the
brake is also applied, the greater of the two inputs
determines the power sent to the trailer brakes.
The trailer and the vehicle’s stop lamps will come
on when braking normally with the vehicle brake
pedal. Only the trailer stop lamps will come on
when the manual brake control lever is applied.
Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light
This light indicates the trailer electrical connection
status.
If no electrical connection is detected after the
ignition is turned on, pushing the GAIN adjustment
button or sliding the manual brake control lever
will display the GAIN setting for 10 seconds and the
“Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light” will not be
displayed.
If a fault is detected in the trailer wiring or the
Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM), the
“Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light” will flash.
GAIN Adjustment Buttons (+/-)
Pushing these buttons will adjust the brake
control power output to the trailer brakes in
0.5 increments. The GAIN setting can be increased
to a maximum of 10 or decreased to a minimum of
0 (no trailer braking).
GAIN
The GAIN setting is used to set the trailer brake
control for the specific towing condition and should
be changed as towing conditions change. Changes
to towing conditions include trailer load, vehicle
load, road conditions and weather.
Adjusting GAIN
NOTE:
This should only be performed in a traffic free
environment at speeds of approximately
20–25 mph (30–40 km/h).
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good
working condition, functioning normally and
properly adjusted. See your trailer dealer if
necessary.
2. Hook up the trailer and make the electrical
connections according to the trailer
manufacturer's instructions.
3. When a trailer with electric/EOH brakes is
plugged in, the trailer connected message
should appear in the instrument cluster
display (if the connection is not recognized by
the ITBM, braking functions will not be
available), the GAIN setting will illuminate and
the correct type of trailer must be selected
from the instrument cluster display options.
4. Push the UP or DOWN button on the steering
wheel until “TRAILER TOW” appears on the
screen.
5. Push the RIGHT arrow on the steering wheel to
enter “TRAILER TOW”.
6. Push the UP or DOWN buttons until the Trailer
Brake Type appears on the screen.
7. Push the RIGHT arrow and then push the UP or
DOWN buttons until the proper Trailer Brake
Type appears on the screen.
8. In a traffic-free environment, tow the trailer on
a dry, level surface at a speed of 20–25 mph
(30–40 km/h) and squeeze the manual brake
control lever completely.
9. If the trailer wheels lockup (indicated by
squealing tires), reduce the GAIN setting; if the
trailer wheels turn freely, increase the GAIN
setting.
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 313
314 STARTING AND OPERATING
Repeat steps 8 and 9 until the GAIN setting is at a point just below trailer wheel lockup. If towing a heavier trailer, trailer wheel lockup may not be attainable
even with the maximum GAIN setting of 10.
* The suggested selection depends and may
change depending on the customer preferences
for braking performance. Condition of the trailer
brakes, driving and road state may also affect the
selection.
Display Messages
The trailer brake control interacts with the
instrument cluster display. Display messages,
along with a single chime, will be displayed when a
malfunction is determined in the trailer
connection, trailer brake control, or on the trailer.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
NOTE:
An aftermarket controller may be available for
use with trailers with air or elec-
tric-over-hydraulic trailer brake systems. To
determine the type of brakes on your trailer and
the availability of controllers, check with your
trailer manufacturer or dealer.
Removal of the ITBM will cause errors and it
may cause damage to the electrical system and
electronic modules of the vehicle. See an autho-
rized dealer if an aftermarket module is to be
installed.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer
size, stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are
required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved
trailer harness and connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the
vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer
connector. Refer to the following illustrations.
Light Electric Heavy Electric Light EOH Heavy EOH
Type of Trailer Brakes Electric Trailer Brakes Electric Trailer Brakes
Electric over Hydraulic
Trailer Brakes
Electric over Hydraulic
Trailer Brakes
Load *Under 10,000 lb *Above 10,000 lb *Under 10,000 lb *Above 10,000 lb
WARNING!
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with
the ITBM system may result in reduced or
complete loss of trailer braking. There may be a
increase in stopping distance or trailer instability
which could result in personal injury.
CAUTION!
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with
the ITBM system may result in reduced or
complete loss of trailer braking. There may be a
increase in stopping distance or trailer instability
which could result in damage to your vehicle,
trailer, or other property.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 314
STARTING AND OPERATING 315
NOTE:
Disconnect the trailer wiring connector from the
vehicle (or any other device plugged into
vehicle’s electrical connectors) before
launching a boat into water.
Be sure to reconnect once clear from water
area.
Four-Pin Connector
Seven-Pin Connector
TOWING TIPS
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning,
stopping, and backing up the trailer in an area
located away from heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to
avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if
frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, select
TOW/HAUL mode or select a lower gear range
(using the Electronic Range Select [ERS] shift
control).
NOTE:
Using TOW/HAUL mode or selecting a lower gear
range (using the ERS shift control) while operating
the vehicle under heavy loading conditions will
improve performance and extend transmission life
by reducing excessive shifting and heat build-up.
This action will also provide better engine braking.
Tow/Haul Mode
To reduce potential for automatic transmission
overheating, activate TOW/HAUL mode when
driving in hilly areas, or select a lower gear range
(using the Electronic Range Select [ERS] shift
control) on more severe grades.
1 — Ground
2 — Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
1 — Battery
2 — Backup Lamps
3 — Right Stop/Turn
4 — Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 315
316 STARTING AND OPERATING
Speed Control — If Equipped
Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
When using the Speed Control, if you experience
speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h),
disengage until you can get back to cruising
speed.
Use Speed Control in flat terrain and with light
loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission
overheating, take the following actions:
City Driving
In city traffic — while stopped, place the trans-
mission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine
idle speed.
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Temporarily turn off air conditioning.
Air Suspension System
To aid in attaching/detaching the trailer from the
vehicle, the air suspension system can be used.
Refer to “Air Suspension System” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
NOTE:
The vehicle must remain in the engine running
position while attaching a trailer for proper leveling
of the air suspension system.
SNOWPLOW
Snowplow Prep Packages are available as a factory
installed option. These packages include
components necessary to equip your vehicle with a
snowplow.
NOTE:
Before installation of a snowplow it is highly recom-
mended that the owner/installer obtain and follow
the recommendations contained within the current
Body Builders Guide. See an authorized dealer,
installer or snowplow manufacturer for this infor-
mation. There are unique electrical systems that
must be connected to properly ensure operator
safety and prevent overloading vehicle systems.
BEFORE PLOWING
Check the hydraulic system for leaks and proper
fluid level.
Check the mounting bolts and nuts for proper
tightness.
Check the runners and cutting edge for
excessive wear. The cutting edge should be ¼ to
½ inches (6 cm to 1.2 cm) above ground in
snow plowing position.
Check that snowplow lighting is connected and
functioning properly.
SNOWPLOW PREP PACKAGE MODEL
A
VAILABILITY
For Information about snowplow applications visit
www.ramtrucks.com or refer to the current Body
Builders Guide.
1. The maximum number of occupants in the
truck should not exceed two.
2. The total GVWR or the Front GAWR or the Rear
GAWR should never be exceeded.
3. Cargo capacity will be reduced by the addition
of options or passengers, etc.
WARNING!
Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could
adversely affect performance of the airbag
system in a collision. Do not expect that the
airbag will perform as described earlier in this
manual.
CAUTION!
The “Lamp Out” indicator could illuminate if
exterior lamps are not properly installed.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 316
STARTING AND OPERATING 317
The loaded vehicle weight, including the snowplow
system, all aftermarket accessories, driver,
passengers, options, and cargo, must not exceed
either the Gross Vehicle Weight (GVWR) or Gross
Axle Weight (GAWR) ratings. These weights are
specified on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label on the driver's side door opening.
NOTE:
Detach the snowplow when transporting
passengers.
Vehicle front end wheel alignment was set to
specifications at the factory without consideration
for the weight of the plow. Front end toe-in should
be checked and reset if necessary at the beginning
and end of the snowplow season. This will help
prevent uneven tire wear.
The blade should be lowered whenever the vehicle
is parked.
Maintain and operate your vehicle and snowplow
equipment following the recommendations
provided by the specific snowplow manufacturer.
OVER THE ROAD OPERATION WITH
S
NOWPLOW ATTACHED
The blade restricts air flow to the radiator and
causes the engine to operate at higher than
normal temperatures. Therefore, when
transporting the plow, angle the blade completely
and position it as low as road or surface conditions
permit. Do not exceed 40 mph (64 km/h). The
operator should always maintain a safe stopping
distance and allow adequate passing clearance.
OPERATING TIPS
Under ideal snow plowing conditions, 20 mph
(32 km/h) should be maximum operating speed.
The operator should be familiar with the area and
surface to be cleaned. Reduce speed and use
extreme caution when plowing unfamiliar areas or
under poor visibility.
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
Snowplows should be maintained in accordance
with the plow manufacturer's instructions.
Keep all snowplow electrical connections and
battery terminals clean and free of corrosion.
When plowing snow, to avoid transmission and
drivetrain damage, the following precautions
should be observed.
Operate with transfer case in 4LO when plowing
small or congested areas where speeds are not
likely to exceed 15 mph (24 km/h). At higher
speeds operate in 4HI.
Vehicles with automatic transmissions should
use 4LO range when plowing deep or heavy
snow for extended periods of time to avoid
transmission overheating.
Do not shift the transmission unless the engine
has returned to idle and wheels have stopped.
Make a practice of stepping on the brake pedal
while shifting the transmission.
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 317
318 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
Vehicles equipped with air suspension must be placed in Transport mode before tying them down (from the body) on a trailer or flatbed truck. Refer to
“Air Suspension – If Equipped” for more information. If the vehicle cannot be placed in Transport mode (for example, engine will not run), tie-downs must be
fastened to the axles (not to the body). Failure to follow these instructions may cause fault codes to be set and/or cause loss of proper tie-down tension.
Towing Condition
Wheels OFF The
Ground
Two-Wheel Drive
Models
Four-Wheel Drive Models
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
See Instructions
Automatic transmission in PARK
Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)
Tow in forward direction
Dolly Tow
Front
NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 318
STARTING AND OPERATING 319
(Continued)
RECREATIONAL TOWING — TWO-WHEEL
D
RIVE MODELS
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result.
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is
allowed
ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the
ground. This may be accomplished using a tow
dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow
this procedure:
NOTE:
If vehicle is equipped with air suspension, ensure
the vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height.
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle,
following the dolly manufacturer's
instructions.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place
automatic transmission in PARK.
4. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly,
following the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
5. Turn the ignition OFF and remove the key fob.
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for
towing, to secure the front wheels in the
straight position.
RECREATIONAL TOWING —
F
OUR-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
NOTE:
Both the manual shift and electronic shift transfer
cases must be shifted into NEUTRAL (N) for recre-
ational towing. Automatic transmissions must be
shifted into PARK for recreational towing. Refer to
the following for the proper transfer case NEUTRAL
(N) shifting procedure for your vehicle.
CAUTION!
Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will
cause severe transmission damage. Damage
from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Do not disconnect the driveshaft because
fluid may leak from the transmission, causing
damage to internal parts.
CAUTION!
DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Towing
with only one set of wheels on the ground
(front or rear) will cause severe transmission
and/or transfer case damage. Tow with all
four wheels either ON the ground, or OFF the
ground (using a vehicle trailer).
Tow only in the forward direction. Towing this
vehicle backwards can cause severe damage
to the transfer case.
Before recreational towing, the transfer case
must be in NEUTRAL. To be certain the
transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL, perform the
procedure outlined under “Shifting Into
NEUTRAL”. Internal transmission damage will
result, if the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL
during towing.
The transmission must be placed in PARK for
recreational towing.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
and/or transfer case damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because
fluid will leak from the transfer case, causing
damage to internal parts.
Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow
bar on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will
be damaged.
CAUTION!
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 319
320 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shifting Into (N) NEUTRAL
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for recreational towing.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on level
ground, with the engine running. Firmly apply
the parking brake.
2. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
If vehicle is equipped with air suspension, ensure
the vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal.
4. Shift the transfer case into N (Neutral):
With manual shift transfer case, shift the
transfer case lever into N (Neutral)
With electronic shift transfer case, push and
hold the transfer case N (Neutral) button.
Some models have a small, recessed “N”
button (at the center of the transfer case
switches) that must be pushed using a ball-
point pen or similar object. Other models
have a rectangular N (Neutral) switch,
below the rotary transfer case control knob.
The N (Neutral) indicator light will blink
while the shift is in progress. The light will
stop blinking (stay on solid) when the shift
to N (Neutral) is complete. After the shift is
completed and the N (Neutral) light stays
on, release the N (Neutral) button.
5. Release the parking brake.
6. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
7. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and
ensure that there is no vehicle movement.
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 with automatic
transmission in DRIVE.
9. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL. Firmly
apply the parking brake. Turn off the engine.
For vehicles with Keyless Enter-N-Go, push
and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button until
the engine shuts off.
10. Shift the transmission into PARK. On
eight-speed transmissions the shifter will
automatically select PARK when the engine is
turned off.
11. Turn the ignition to the OFF mode, then cycle
the ignition to the RUN mode and back to the
OFF mode. Remove the key fob from the
ignition.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
case in the NEUTRAL (N) position without first
fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer
case NEUTRAL (N) position disengages both the
front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain,
and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the
automatic transmission is in PARK. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver
is not in the vehicle.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain
that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N)
before recreational towing to prevent damage to
internal parts.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 320
STARTING AND OPERATING 321
12. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a
suitable tow bar.
13. Release the parking brake.
NOTE:
With electronic shift transfer case:
Steps 2 through 3 are requirements that must
be met before pushing the N (Neutral) button,
and must continue to be met until the shift has
been completed. If any of these requirements
are not met before pushing the N (Neutral)
button or are no longer met during the shift, the
N (Neutral) indicator light will flash continuously
until all requirements are met or until the
N (Neutral) button is released.
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a
shift to take place and for the position indicator
lights to be operable. If the ignition is not in the
ON/RUN mode, the shift will not take place and
no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
A flashing N (Neutral) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not been
met.
If the vehicle is equipped with air suspension,
the engine should be started and left running for
a minimum of 60 seconds (with all the doors
closed) at least once every 24 hours. This
process allows the air suspension to adjust the
vehicle’s ride height to compensate for
temperature effects.
Shifting Out Of (N) NEUTRAL
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for normal usage:
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving
it connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal.
4. Start the engine. Shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL.
With manual shift transfer case, shift the
transfer case lever to the desired position.
With electronic shift transfer case with
rotary selector switch, push and hold the
transfer case N (Neutral) button until the N
(Neutral) indicator light turns off. After the N
(Neutral) indicator light turns off, release
the N (Neutral) button. After the N (Neutral)
button has been released, the transfer case
will shift to the position indicated by the
selector switch.
With electronic shift transfer case with
push-button selector switch, push and hold
the switch for the desired transfer case
position, until the N (Neutral) indicator light
turns off and the desired position indicator
light turns on.
NOTE:
When shifting out of transfer case N (Neutral),
turning the engine OFF is not required, but may be
helpful to avoid gear clash. With the eight-speed
automatic transmission, the engine must remain
running, since turning the engine OFF will shift the
transmission to PARK (and the transmission must
be in NEUTRAL for the transfer case to shift out of
NEUTRAL).
5. Turn the engine off. Shift automatic
transmission into PARK. On eight-speed
transmissions the shifter will automatically
select PARK when the engine is turned off.
6. Release the brake pedal.
7. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
8. Start the engine.
9. Press and hold the brake pedal.
10. Release the parking brake.
11. Shift the transmission into gear, release the
brake pedal, and check that the vehicle
operates normally.
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 321
322 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
With electronic shift transfer case:
Steps 3 and 4 are requirements that must be
met before pushing the button to shift out of N
(Neutral), and must continue to be met until the
shift has been completed. If any of these
requirements are not met before pushing the
button or are no longer met during the shift, the
N (Neutral) indicator light will flash continuously
until all requirements are met or until the button
is released.
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a
shift to take place and for the position indicator
lights to be operable. If the ignition is not in the
ON/RUN mode, the shift will not take place and
no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
A flashing N (Neutral) position indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not
been met.
DRIVING TIPS
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other
slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to
pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon
occurs when there is a difference in the surface
traction under the rear (driving) wheels.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few
inches/centimeters deep will require extra caution
to ensure safety and prevent damage to your
vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is
dangerous. Unequal traction can cause sudden
pulling of the rear wheels. You could lose control
of the vehicle and possibly have a collision.
Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there
is likely to be poor traction (ice, snow, wet, mud,
loose sand, etc.).
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where
water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm
run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road
or path's surface and cause your vehicle to sink
into deeper water. Furthermore, flowing and/or
rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly.
Failure to follow this warning may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 322
STARTING AND OPERATING 323
(Continued)
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following
Cautions and Warnings before doing so.
WARNING!
Driving through standing water limits your
vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed
5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through
standing water.
Driving through standing water limits your
vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases
stopping distances. Therefore, after driving
through standing water, drive slowly and
lightly press on the brake pedal several times
to dry the brakes.
Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
CAUTION!
Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom
of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
Determine the condition of the road or the
path that is under water and if there are any
obstacles in the way before driving through
the standing water.
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize
wave effects.
Driving through standing water may cause
damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain compo-
nents. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids
(i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for
signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is milky
or foamy in appearance) after driving through
standing water. Do not continue to operate
the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated,
as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause
serious internal damage to the engine. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
5
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 323
324 STARTING AND OPERATING
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Care should be taken when attempting to climb
steep hills or driving diagonally across a hill or
slope. If natural obstacles force you to travel
diagonally up or down a hill, choose a mild angle
and keep as little side tilt as possible. Keep the
vehicle moving and make turns slowly and
cautiously.
If you must back down a hill, back straight down
using REVERSE gear. Never back down in
NEUTRAL or diagonally across the hill.
When driving over sand, mud, and other soft
terrain, shift to low gear and drive steadily.
Apply the accelerator slowly to avoid spinning the
wheels.
Do not reduce the tire pressures for this type of
driving.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your
vehicle than does most on-road driving. After going
off-road, it is always a good idea to check for
damage. That way you can get any problems taken
care of right away and have your vehicle ready
when you need it.
Completely inspect the underbody of your
vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering,
suspension, and exhaust system for damage.
Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and
clean as required.
Check threaded fasteners for looseness, partic-
ularly on the chassis, drivetrain components,
steering, and suspension. Retighten them, if
required, and torque to the values specified in
the Service Manual.
Check for accumulations of plants or brush.
These things could be a fire hazard. They might
hide damage to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle
pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan,
brake rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle
yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as
possible.
If you experience unusual vibration after driving
in mud, slush or similar conditions, check the
wheels for impacted material. Impacted mate-
rial can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing
the wheels of it will correct the situation.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may
cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking.
You might not have full braking power when you
need it to prevent a collision. If you have been
operating your vehicle in dirty conditions, get
your brakes checked and cleaned as necessary.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 324
325
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers switch is located on
the upper switch bank just below the radio.
Hazard Warning Flashers Switch
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a 12-inch Uconnect
display, the Hazard Warning Flashers switch is
located above the display.
Hazard Warning Flashers Switch With 12-inch Display
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
Flashers. When the switch is activated, all
directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn
oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the switch
a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning
Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should
not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it
when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a
safety hazard for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek
assistance, the Hazard Warning Flashers will
continue to operate even though the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use the Hazard Warning Flashers
may wear down your battery.
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s trim level, the
overhead console may vary.
Assist And SOS Buttons
1 — ASSIST Button
2 — SOS Button
6
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 325
326 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Assist And SOS Buttons
If equipped, the overhead console contains an
ASSIST and a SOS button.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber.
The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only function
if you are connected to an operable LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) network. Other
Uconnect services will only be operable if your
SiriusXM Guardian™ service is active and you
are connected to an operable LTE (voice/data)
or 4G (data) network.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically
connect you to any one of the following support
centers:
Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or
need a tow, just push the ASSIST button and
you’ll be connected to someone who can help.
Roadside Assistance will know what vehicle
you’re driving and its location. Additional fees
may apply for roadside assistance.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care – In-vehicle
support for SiriusXM Guardian™.
Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all
other vehicle issues.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the overhead
console.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the SOS Call
system initiates a call to a SOS operator. To cancel
the SOS Call connection, push the SOS call button
on the overhead console or press the cancellation
button on the Device Screen. Termination of the
SOS Call will turn off the green LED light on the
overhead console.
2. The LED light located within the ASSIST and
SOS buttons on the overhead console will turn
green once a connection to a SOS operator has
been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a
SOS operator is made, the SOS Call system
may transmit the following important vehicle
information to a SOS operator:
Indication that the occupant placed a
SOS Call.
The vehicle brand.
The last known GPS coordinates of
the vehicle.
1 — ASSIST Button
2 — SOS Button
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
features and applications in this vehicle. Only
use the features and applications when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 326
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 327
(Continued)
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS
operator through the vehicle audio system to
determine if additional help is needed.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
Once a connection is made between the
vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS oper-
ator, the SOS operator may be able to open
a voice connection with the vehicle to deter-
mine if additional help is needed. Once the
SOS operator opens a voice connection with
the vehicle’s SOS Call system, the operator
should be able to speak with you or other
vehicle occupants and hear sounds occur-
ring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call
system will attempt to remain connected
with the SOS operator until the SOS oper-
ator terminates the connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact
appropriate emergency responders and
provide them with important vehicle
information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
features and applications in this vehicle. Only
use the features and applications when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
WARNING!
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road
conditions or location), do not wait for voice
contact from an Emergency Services Agent. All
occupants should exit the vehicle immediately
and move to a safe location.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
operable network and GPS antennas. You
could prevent operable network and GPS
signal reception, which can prevent your
vehicle from placing an emergency call. An
operable network and GPS signal reception is
required for the SOS Call system to function
properly.
The SOS Call system is embedded into the
vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add after-
market electrical equipment to the vehicle’s
electrical system. This may prevent your
vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an
emergency call. To avoid interference that can
cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add
aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile
radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the
antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE
LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON
(INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCI-
DENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT
OPERATE.
Modifications to any part of the SOS Call
system could cause the air bag system to fail
when you need it. You could be injured if the
air bag system is not there to help protect you.
WARNING!
6
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 327
328 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico
DO NOT have SOS Call
system capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico
may not answer or respond to SOS system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any
of the following may occur at the time the
malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of
each ignition cycle:
The overhead console light located within the
ASSIST and SOS buttons will continuously illumi-
nate red.
The Device Screen will display the following
message: “Vehicle device requires service.
Please contact an authorized dealer.”
An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle
device requires service. Please contact an
authorized dealer.”
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,
factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent
or stop the SOS Call system operation. These
include, but are not limited to, the following
factors:
The ignition is in the OFF position.
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
The SOS Call system software and/or hardware
are damaged during a crash.
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
disconnected during a vehicle crash.
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or
Global Positioning Satellite signals are unavail-
able or obstructed.
Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator
facility.
Operator error by the SOS operator.
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network
congestion.
Weather.
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
tunnels.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS
antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/data) or
4G (data) and GPS signal reception, which can
prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency
call. An operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data)
network connection and a GPS signal is
required for the SOS Call system to function
properly.
WARNING!
Ignoring the overhead console light could
mean you will not have SOS Call services. If
the overhead console light is illuminated, have
an authorized dealer service the SOS Call
system immediately.
The Occupant Restraint Control module turns
on the air bag Warning Light on the instrument
panel if a malfunction in any part of the
system is detected. If the Air Bag Warning
Light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer
service the Occupant Restraint Control system
immediately.
WARNING!
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
features and applications in this vehicle. Only
use the features and applications when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 328
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 329
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with Innovation, Science and Economic
Development Canada license-exempt RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
6
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 329
330 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
BULB REPLACEMENT
REPLACEMENT BULBS
All of the inside bulbs are brass or glass-wedge base. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved.
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Overhead Console Lamps TS 212–9
Dome Lamp 7679
For lighted switches, see an authorized dealer for replacement instructions.
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Low Beam (Halogen Reflector Headlamp) H11LL
High Beam (Halogen Reflector Headlamp) 9005LL
Low & High Beam (LED Reflector Headlamp) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Low & High Beam (LED Projector Headlamp) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Turn Signal / Front Position (Halogen Reflector Headlamp) 7444NA
Turn Signal / Front Position (LED Headlamps) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Front Side Marker (Halogen Reflector Headlamp) W5W
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 330
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 331
Front Side Marker (LED Headlamps) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Front Fog Lamps (Halogen Reflector Headlamp) H11LL
Front Fog Lamps (LED Headlamps) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Side Indicators (Front And Side View Mirror) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Base Rear Tail/Turn and Stop Lamp 3157K
Premium Rear Tail/Turn and Stop Lamp LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Premium Backup Lamp 7440/W21W
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) 921
Cab Roof Marker Lamps 194NA
Rear Lamp Bar ID Marker Lamp 194
Side Marker Lamps (Dual Rear Wheels) 194
Backup Lamp 921
Rear License Plate Lamp 194
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
6
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 331
332 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
REPLACING EXTERIOR BULBS
Base Quad: Low Beam Headlamp, High
Beam Headlamp, Front Park And Turn —
If Equipped
Low Beam
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery
cable.
3. Reach into the front wheel house ahead of the
front wheel, remove the fastener, and lift the
cover over the access hole in the front of the
wheel house splash shield. Access to the rear
of the lamp can be gained through this access
hole.
Splash Shield Access Cover
4. Reach through the access hole of the wheel
house splash shield and disengage the bulb
access cover by rotating counterclockwise.
Bulb Access Cover
5. Disconnect the internal lamp wiring harness
connector from the low beam bulb.
6. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise a quarter
turn to unlock the bulb from the lamp.
7. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing.
8. Reverse the procedure for installation of new
bulb and covers.
High Beam
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery
cable.
Bulb Access Cover
3. Look under the hood and behind the
headlamp to find the high beam bulb access
cover.
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching
it with your fingers or by allowing it to contact
other oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will
result.
Always use the correct bulb size and type for
replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type
may overheat and cause damage to the lamp,
the bulb socket, or the lamp wiring.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 332
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 333
4. Reach behind the headlamp and disengage
the access cover by rotating counterclockwise.
5. Disconnect the internal lamp wiring harness
connector from the high beam bulb.
6. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise a quarter
turn to unlock the bulb from the lamp.
7. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing.
8. Reverse the procedure for installation of new
bulb and covers.
Front Park And Turn
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery
cable.
3. Look under the hood and behind the
headlamp to find the park and turn socket.
Park And Turn Socket
4. Reach behind the headlamp and unlock the
park and turn socket from the lamp by rotating
counterclockwise a quarter turn.
5. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing.
6. Separate the bulb from the socket without
twisting.
7. Reverse the procedure for installation of new
bulb and covers.
Side Marker Lamp
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery
cable.
3. Reach into the front wheel house ahead of the
front wheel, remove the fastener, and lift the
cover over the access hole in the front of the
wheel house splash shield. Access to the rear
of the lamp can be gained through this access
hole.
Splash Shield Access Cover
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching
it with your fingers or by allowing it to contact
other oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will
result.
Always use the correct bulb size and type for
replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type
may overheat and cause damage to the lamp,
the bulb socket, or the lamp wiring.
6
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 333
334 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. Reach through the access hole of the wheel
house splash shield and disengage the side
marker socket by rotating counterclockwise a
quarter turn.
Side Marker Socket
5. Pull the socket and bulb straight out from the
housing.
6. Separate the bulb from the socket without
twisting.
7. Reverse the procedure for installation of new
bulb and covers.
Fog Lamps — If Equipped
Please see an authorized dealer for service on LED
and Halogen front fog lamps.
Halogen
1. Reach under and behind the front bumper to
access the back of the front fog lamp
housing.
2. Disconnect the fog lamp wiring harness
connector from the fog lamp bulb.
3. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise a quarter
turn to unlock the bulb from the housing.
Fog Lamp Bulb
4. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing.
Rear Tail/Stop, Turn Signal And Backup
Lamps
1. Remove the two screws and push pins that
pass through the bed sheet metal.
Tail Lamp Locations
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it
with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other
oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
1 — Tail Lamp
2 — Screws
3 — Fasteners
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 334
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 335
2. Pull the outboard side of the lamp rearward far
enough to unsnap the two receptacles on the
outboard side of the lamp housing from the
two plastic snap post retainers in the outer box
side panel.
Tail Lamp Removed
3. Disconnect the wiring harness connectors
from the bulb socket.
4. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise a
quarter turn to unlock it from the housing.
5. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
6. Reverse the procedure to install the bulb and
housing.
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
With Cargo Lamp
1. Remove the two screws holding the
housing/lens to the body as shown.
CHMSL Mounting Screw Locations
2. Separate the connector holding the housing
and wiring harness to the body.
3. Turn the desired bulb socket a quarter turn
and remove the socket and bulb from housing.
4. Pull the desired bulb straight from the socket.
CHMSL Bulb And Socket
Outside Bulbs: Cargo Lamps
Inside Bulb: Center High Mounted Stop
Lamp
5. Reverse the procedure for installation of bulbs
and housing.
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it
with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other
oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it
with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other
oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
6
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 335
336 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cab Top Clearance Lamps — If Equipped
1. Remove the screws from the top of the lamp.
Removing Rear Screw From Clearance Lamp
2. Rotate the bulb socket a quarter turn and pull
it from the lamp assembly.
Removing Bulb Socket From Clearance Lamp
3. Pull the bulb straight from it's socket and
replace.
Rear Lamp Bar ID Marker (Dual Rear
Wheels) — If Equipped
1. Loosen the two screws and the housing to
gain access to the bulb sockets.
Screw Locations
2. Turn the socket a quarter turn counter-
clockwise to access the bulb.
3. Pull the bulb straight out from the socket.
4. Reverse the procedure for installation of the
bulbs and housing.
Side Marker Lamps (Dual Rear Wheels) —
If Equipped
Side Marker Lamp Locations
1. Push rearward on the side marker lamp
assembly.
2. Pull the entire assembly from the fender.
3. Turn the socket a quarter turn counter-
clockwise and remove from assembly to
access the bulb.
4. Pull the bulb straight out from socket.
5. Reverse the procedure for installation of the
bulbs and housing.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 336
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 337
(Continued)
FUSES
POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER
The Power Distribution Center is located in the
engine compartment near the battery. This center
contains cartridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and
circuit breakers.
A description of each fuse and component may be
stamped on the inside cover, otherwise the cavity
number of each fuse is stamped on the inside
cover that corresponds to the following chart.
Power Distribution Center Location
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use an
appropriate replacement fuse with the same
amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace
a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating.
Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or
any other material. Do not place a fuse inside
a circuit breaker cavity or vice versa. Failure to
use proper fuses may result in serious
personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services
are switched off and/or disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety systems
(air bag system, braking system), power unit
systems (engine system, transmission
system) or steering system blows, contact an
authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F01 – – Spare
F02 60 Amp Yellow – ABS Pump Motor (HD Only)
F03 60 Amp Yellow – Rad Fan – If Equipped
F04 50 Amp Red – 400W Inverter – If Equipped
F05 40 Amp Green – Compressor For Air Suspension – If Equipped
F06 40 Amp Green – Steering Torque Overlay Module (STOM)
F07 40 Amp Green – Starter Solenoid
6
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 337
338 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
F08 20 Amp Blue – NOX Sensor – If Equipped
F09 40 Amp Green – Diesel / Fuel Heater – If Equipped
F09 30 Amp Pink – Gas / Brake Vacuum Pump – If Equipped
F10 40 Amp Green – CBC #2 / Ext Lights
F11 40 Amp Green – Brake System Module (ECU and Valves)
F12 40 Amp Green – CBC #3 / Pwr Locks
F13 40 Amp Green – Blower Motor
F14 40 Amp Green – CBC #4 / Ext Lights
F15 30 Amp Pink – Power Side Steps — If Equipped
F16 30 Amp Pink – Smart-Bar Module – If Equipped
F17 30 Amp Pink – Winch Control Module – If Equipped
F19 30 Amp Pink – Diesel SCR Feed– If Equipped
F20 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Module
F21 30 Amp Pink – Drive Train Control Module
F22 20 Amp Blue – Gas / ECM– If Equipped
F22 25 Amp White – Diesel PCM – If Equipped
F23 30 Amp Pink – CBC #1 / Int Light
F24 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Module
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 338
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 339
F25 30 Amp Pink – Front Wiper
F26 — – Spare
F27 — – Spare
F28 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Backup Lights – If Equipped
F29 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Parking Lights – If Equipped
F30 30 Amp Pink –
Trailer Tow Receptacle / Trailer Tow (Separate E-Brake) /
Trailer Tow
F31 – – Spare
F32 – – Spare
F33 20 Amp Blue – Trans Control Module – If Equipped
F34 30 Amp Pink – Vehicle System Interface Module #2 – If Equipped
F35 30 Amp Pink – Sunroof – If Equipped
F36 30 Amp Pink – Electric Back Light – If Equipped
F37 30 Amp Pink – Diesel Frame / Fuel Heater #2– If Equipped
F38 30 Amp Pink – Integrated Trailer Brake Module – If Equipped
F39 – – Spare
F40 – 10 Amp Red Ventilated Seats – If Equipped
F41 – 10 Amp Red Active Grille Shutter / Active Air Dam – If Equipped
F42 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
F43 – 15 Amp Blue Heated Steering Wheel – If Equipped
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
6
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 339
340 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
F44 – 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Port
F46 – 10 Amp Red Upfitters Relay Coil – If Equipped
F47 – – Spare
F48 – – Spare
F49 – 10 Amp Red IP Cluster / CSG
F50 – 20 Amp Yellow Air Suspension Control Module – If Equipped
F51 – 10 Amp Red
Ignition Node Module / Keyless Ignition Node Module,
Radio Frequency Hub Module / Electric Steering Column
Lock - If Equipped
F52 – 5 Amp Tan Battery Sensor
F53 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow – Left Turn/Stop Lights - If Equipped
F54 – 20 Amp Yellow Non Memory Adjustable Pedals - If Equipped
F55 – – Spare
F56 – 10 Amp Red Fuel Vapor Blocker Valve - If Equipped
F57 – 20 Amp Yellow
TCM / PCM / Solenoid Trans Pressure SW (RFE Trans Only) –
If Equipped
F58 – 10 Amp Red Bed Lighting (LED) – If Equipped
F60 – — Spare
F61 – 10 Amp Red NH3 Sensor / PM Sensor – If Equipped
F62 – 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch
F63 – 20 Amp Yellow Ignition Coils / CAPS
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 340
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 341
F64 – 25 Amp Clear
Fuel Injectors / Powertrain Control Module / SRV –
If Equipped
F65 – 10 Amp Red
MOD Inverter (Wake Up) / Power Port / USB IP / WCPM –
If Equipped
F66 – 10 Amp Red Sunroof / USB Rear– If Equipped
F67 – 10 Amp Red CDM / UCI Port / USB Front
F68 – 10 Amp Red AEB RACAM HTR – If Equipped
F69 – 15 Amp Blue SCR Module 12 Volt– If Equipped
F70 – 30 Amp Green Fuel Pump Motor / K09 RLY Coil Feed – If Equipped
F71 – 25 Amp Clear Amplifier / Active Noise Cancellation – If Equipped
F72 – — Spare
F73 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Transfer Pump – If Equipped
F74 – 10 Amp Red Backup Alarm – If Equipped
F75 – 10 Amp Red ATMM / Coil-SCR Module RLY – If Equipped
F76 – 10 Amp Red Electronic Stability Control — If Equipped
F77 – 10 Amp Red
Drivetrain Control Module / Front Axle Disconnect Module /
TCM/ STOM
F78 – 15 Amp Blue
Engine Control Module / Powertrain Control Module / AEB
RACM MOD / Feed To AUX PDC Relay Coils/ HRLS
F79 – 15 Amp Blue ID / Clearance Lights
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
6
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 341
342 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
F80 – 10 Amp Red Overhead Console / Assist / 911 – If Equipped
F81 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Right Turn / Stop Lights - If Equipped
F82 – 10 Amp Red Steering Column Control Module / Cruise Control
F83 – – Spare
F84 – 15 Amp Blue ASBM / HVAC / ICS / Rear Heated Seat Switches
F85 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F86 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F87 – 10 Amp Red
Air Suspension / ITBM / Steering Column Control Module /
MOD Gateway CAN-C Trailer TPM
F88 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Panel Cluster
F90/F91 – 20 Amp Yellow
Power Outlet / Batt
Power Outlet / Acc
F92 – – Spare
F93 – – Spare
F94 – 10 Amp Red
Shift-By-Wire / Transfer Case Switch / Module TPM Trailer /
Module Gateway Can-C Trailer TPM
F95 – 10 Amp Red
Rearview Camera / Park Assist / CHMSL Camera / Blind Spot
Sensor / Surround View Camera
F96 – 10 Amp Red Trailer Camera – If Equipped
F97 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated Seat Passenger – If Equipped
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 342
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 343
F98 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated Seat Driver – If Equipped
F99 – 10 Amp Red HVAC / In-Car Temperature Sensor / CSG MOD
F100 – 10 Amp Red Upfitters Box Feed – If Equipped
F101 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Heated Seat Right — If Equipped
F102 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Heated Seat Left / Run RLY #3 Coil — If Equipped
F103 – 10 Amp Red HeadLamp AFLS — If Equipped
F104 – 20 Amp Yellow UCI Port / USB Rear
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution center cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow
water to get into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure.
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
6
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 343
344 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with an air suspension
system, there is a feature which allows the auto-
matic leveling to be disabled to assist with
changing a tire.
This feature can be activated through the
Uconnect system.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
JACK LOCATION
The jack and tools are stored under the front
passenger seat.
REMOVAL OF JACK AND TOOLS
To access the jack and jack tools, you must remove
the plastic access cover located on the side of the
front passenger’s seat. To remove the cover, pull
the front part of the cover (closest to the front of
the seat) toward you to release a locking tab. Once
the front of the cover is loose, slide the cover
toward the front of the seat until it is free from the
seat frame.
Jack Access Cover
Remove the jack and tools by turning the wing bolt
counterclockwise, remove the wing bolt and then
slide the assembly out from under the seat.
Wing Bolt/Jack And Tools
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid the danger of
being hit when operating the jack or changing
the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on
you. You could be crushed. Never put any part
of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack.
If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take
it to a service center where it can be raised on
a lift.
Never start or run the engine while the vehicle
is on a jack.
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be
used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 344
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 345
Remove the jack and tools from the bracket
assembly. Turn the jack turn-screw
counterclockwise to release jack from bracket
assembly.
Jack And Tools Bracket Assembly
Jacking Tools
There are two ways to assemble the tools:
Assembled For Spare Tire Lowering/Raising
Assembled For Spare Tire Lowering/Raising
1 — Lug Wrench
2 — Extension 2
3 — Extension 3
4 — Extension 4
CAUTION!
The lug wrench can only be attached to
extension two (2).
When attaching the tool to the winch mecha-
nism be sure the large flared end opening on
extension four (4) is positioned correctly over
the winch mechanism adjusting nut.
Damage to the lug wrench, extensions and
winch mechanism may occur from improper
tool assembly.
6
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 345
346 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Assembled For Jack Operation
Assembled For Jack Operation
REMOVING THE SPARE TIRE
1. Remove the spare tire before attempting to
jack up the truck. Attach the lug wrench to the
extension tubes with the curved angle facing
away from the vehicle. Insert the extension
tube through the access hole between the
lower tailgate and the top of the bumper and
into the winch mechanism tube.
Winch Mechanism Tube
Inserting The Extension Tubes Into The Access Hole
2. Rotate the lug wrench handle counter-
clockwise until the spare tire is on the ground
with enough cable slack to allow you to pull it
out from under the vehicle.
Rotating The Lug Wrench Handle
1 — Lug Wrench
2 — Extension 2
3 — Extension 3
4 — Extension 4
5 — Jack Driver
WARNING!
After using the jack and tools, always reinstall
them in the original carrier and location. While
driving you may experience abrupt stopping,
rapid acceleration or sharp turns. A loose jack,
tools, bracket or other objects in the vehicle may
move around with force, resulting in serious
injury.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 346
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 347
3. Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle to
gain access to the spare tire retainer.
4. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give
clearance to tilt the retainer at the end of the
cable.
Gaining Access To The Retainer
5. Pull the retainer through the center of the
wheel.
Pulling The Retainer Through The Center Of The Wheel
NOTE:
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
extension tubes only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and can damage
the winch.
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid
ice or slippery areas.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Shift the transmission into Park (P).
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite the jacking position. For
example, if the driver’s front wheel is being
changed, block the passenger’s rear wheel.
Wheel Blocked
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when
the vehicle is being raised or lifted.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
6
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 347
348 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
Jack Warning Label
Lug Wrench Adapter Shown In Jack And Tools Assembly
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before
raising the vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
Apply the parking brake firmly and set the
transmission in PARK.
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel
to be raised.
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle
on a jack.
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is
on a jack.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle,
take it to a service center where it can be
raised on a lift.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated
and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with
the valve stem facing the ground.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the
Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 348
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 349
1. Remove the spare wheel, jack, and tools from
storage.
2. Using the lug wrench, loosen, but do not
remove, the wheel nuts by turning them
counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is
still on the ground. Changing a dually tire
requires the lug wrench adapter.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with hub caps/wheel
covers they must be removed before raising the
vehicle off the ground. Refer to ”Hub Caps/Wheel
Covers — If Equipped” in this section.
Lug Wrench Adapter
Lug Wrench Adapter And Wrench
3. Placement of the jack is critical:
Jack / Extensions Placement
Front Jacking Location
When changing the front wheel, assemble the
jack driver to the jack and connect the jack
driver to the extension tubes. Place the jack
under the axle as close to the tire as possible
with the drive tubes extending to the front.
Connect the extension tubes and lug wrench.
Front Lifting Point
6
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 349
350 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Front Jacking Location
Rear Jacking Location
When changing a rear wheel, assemble the
jack driver to the jack and connect the jack
driver to the extension tubes. Place the jack
under the axle between the spring and the
shock absorber with the extension tubes ex-
tending to the rear.
Rear Lifting Point
Rear Jacking Location
Connect the extension tubes and lug wrench.
NOTE:
If the bottle jack will not lower by turning the dial
(thumbwheel) by hand, it may be necessary to use
the jack driver in order to lower the jack.
4. By rotating the lug wrench clockwise, raise the
vehicle until the wheel just clears the surface.
CAUTION!
Before raising the wheel off the ground, make
sure that the jack will not damage surrounding
truck parts and adjust the jack position as
required.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the
jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle
only enough to remove the tire.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 350
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 351
5. Remove the lug nuts and pull the wheel off. On
Single Rear Wheel (SRW) trucks, install the
spare wheel and lug nuts with the cone shaped
end of the wheel nuts toward the wheel. On
3500 Dual Rear Wheel models (DRW) trucks,
if the outer tire is being replaced then leave
the inner wheel on the vehicle. If the inner
wheel is being replaced remove the outer
wheel and replace the inner wheel. The wheel
nuts are a two-piece assembly with a flat face.
Lightly tighten the lug nuts. To avoid the risk of
forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not fully
tighten the lug nuts until the vehicle has been
lowered.
Rear Inner Wheel Proper Placement
(Dual Rear Wheel Equipped)
Dual Rear Wheel Jack Placement
6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on
the lug wrench while at the end of the handle
for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in
a star pattern until each nut has been
tightened twice. For the correct lug nut torque
refer to “Wheel And Tire Torque Specifi-
cations” in “Technical Specifications”. If in
doubt about the correct tightness, have them
checked with a torque wrench by an
authorized dealer or service station.
7. Install the wheel center cap and remove the
wheel blocks. Do not install chrome or
aluminum wheel center caps on the spare
wheel. This may result in cap damage.
8. Lower the jack to its fully closed position. Stow
the replaced tire, jack, and tools as previously
described.
NOTE:
The bottle jack will not lower by turning the dial
(thumbwheel) by hand, it may be necessary to use
the jack driver in order to lower the jack.
9. Adjust the tire pressure when possible.
NOTE:
Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do not
substitute with chrome plated lug nuts.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop, could endanger the occupants of
the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the
spare tire in the places provided.
6
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 351
352 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
TO STOW THE FLAT OR SPARE
NOTE:
Have the flat tire repaired or replaced immediately.
1. Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is
facing upward and toward the rear of the
vehicle for convenience in checking the spare
tire inflation. Slide the wheel retainer through
the center of the wheel.
Reinstalling The Retainer
2. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give
clearance to tilt the retainer at the end of the
cable and position it properly across the wheel
opening.
Pushing The Retainer Through The Center Of The
Wheel And Positioning It
3. Attach the lug wrench to the extension tubes
with the curved angle facing away from the
vehicle. Insert the extensions through the
access hole between the lower tailgate and
the top of the bumper and into the winch
mechanism tube.
Lug Wrench And Extension Tubes Assembled
And In Position
4. Rotate the lug wrench handle clockwise until
the wheel is drawn into place against the
underside of the vehicle. Continue to rotate
until you feel the winch mechanism slip, or
click three or four times. It cannot be
overtightened. Push against the tire several
times to ensure it is firmly in place.
NOTE:
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or
other power tools is not recommended and can
damage the winch.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of
the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the
spare tire in the places provided. Have the
deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced
immediately.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 352
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 353
REINSTALLING THE JACK AND TOOLS
1. Tighten the jack all the way down by turning
the jack turn-screw counterclockwise until the
jack is snug.
2. Position the jack and tools into bracket
assembly. Make sure the lug wrench is under
the jack near the jack turn-screw. Snap tools
into bracket assembly clips. Install the jack
into bracket assembly and turn the jack
turn-screw clockwise until jack is snug into
bracket assembly.
Jack And Tools Bracket Assembly
3. Place the jack and tool bracket assembly in the
storage position holding the jack by the jack
turn-screw, slip the jack and tools under the
seat so that the bottom slot engages into the
fastener on the floor.
Jack Hold Down Fastener
NOTE:
Ensure that the jack and tool bracket assembly
slides into the front hold down location.
4. Turn the wing bolt clockwise to secure to the
floor pan. Reinstall the plastic cover.
Wing Bolt/Jack And Tools
HUB CAPS/WHEEL COVERS —
I
F EQUIPPED
The hub caps must be removed before raising the
vehicle off the ground.
CAUTION!
Use extreme caution when removing the front
and rear wheel covers. Damage can occur to the
center cap and/or the wheel if screwdriver type
tools are used. A pulling motion, not a pry off
motion, is recommended to remove the caps.
6
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 353
354 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
For 2500/3500 Single Rear Wheel (SRW) models,
use the flat end of the lug wrench to hook and pull
off the hub cap. Find the opening in the hub cap,
insert the lug wrench, and pull off the cap. If you
need to pry against the wheel, protect the wheel
surface.
Lug Wrench Insertion Location — Hub Cap
On 3500 models with Dual Rear Wheels (DRW),
you must first remove the hub caps—use the
procedure noted for the single rear wheel. For the
wheel covers (wheel skins), insert the flat end of
the lug wrench between the outer edge of the
wheel cover and the wheel. Pry against the wheel
to remove the wheel cover. Repeat this procedure
around the wheel until the cover pops off.
Lug Wrench Insertion Location — Wheel Cover
Replace the wheel covers using a rubber mallet to
ease the installation. Align the wheel cover vent
holes to the wheel vent holes. Tap on the wheel
cover as needed to firmly seat it evenly around the
wheel.
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be
jump started using a set of jumper cables and a
battery in another vehicle, or by using a portable
battery booster pack. Jump starting can be
dangerous if done improperly, so please follow the
procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack, follow
the manufacturer's operating instructions and
precautions.
CAUTION!
Use a pulling motion to remove the hub cap.
Do not use a twisting motion when removing
the hub cap, damage to the hub cap; finish
may occur.
The rear hub caps on the dual rear wheel has
two pull off notches. Make sure that the hook
of the jack handle driver is located squarely in
the cap notch before attempting to pull off.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or
any other booster source with a system voltage
greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery,
starter motor, alternator or electrical system may
occur.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 354
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 355
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of
the engine compartment, behind the driver side
headlight assembly.
NOTE:
If you have a diesel engine, you may have two
batteries, however jump start off the driver side
battery.
Positive (+) Battery Post
The positive battery post may be covered with a
protective cap if equipped. Lift up on the cap to
gain access to the positive battery post. Do not
jump off fuses. Only jump directly off positive
post which has a positive
(+) symbol on or
around the post.
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic
transmission into PARK and turn the ignition
OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cables’ reach, apply the parking brake and
make sure the ignition is OFF.
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be
injured by moving fan blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could make
an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be
seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn
your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas
which is flammable and explosive. Keep open
flames or sparks away from the battery.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and
personal injury could result.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure
could result in personal injury or property
damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster
vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
6
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 355
356 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive
(+) end of the jumper
cable to the positive
(+)
post of the discharged
vehicle.
NOTE:
Do not jump off fuses. Only jump directly off
positive post.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive
(+)
jumper cable to the positive
(+) post of the
booster battery.
3. Connect the negative
(-) end of the jumper
cable to the negative
(-) post of the booster
battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative
(-)
jumper cable to a good engine ground. A
“ground” is an exposed metallic/unpainted
part of the engine, frame or chassis, such as
an accessory bracket or large bolt. The ground
must be away from the battery and the fuel
injection system.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
booster battery, let the engine idle a few
minutes, and then start the engine in the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, follow the
disconnecting procedure below.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative
(-)
end of the jumper
cable from the engine ground of the vehicle
with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable from the negative
(-) post of the
booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive
(+) end of the jumper
cable from the positive
(+) post of the booster
battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive
(+)
jumper cable from the positive
(+) post of the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your
vehicle you should have the battery and charging
system inspected at an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative
(-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting
electrical spark could cause the battery to
explode and could result in personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not connect jumper cable to any of the fuses
on the positive battery terminal. The resulting
electrical current will blow the fuse.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough without
engine operation, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 356
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 357
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE — 6–SPEED
TRANSMISSION
If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector
cannot be moved out of the PARK position, you can
use the following procedure to temporarily move
the gear selector:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Tilt the steering wheel to the full up position.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake
pedal.
5. Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the
access port (ringed circle) on the bottom of the
steering column, and push and hold the
override release lever up.
Gear Selector Override Access Port Location
Gear Selector Override Access Port
Engaging The Access Port
6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL
position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
6
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 357
358 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 – SPEED
TRANSMISSION
To push or tow the vehicle in cases where the
transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as a
depleted battery), a Manual Park Release is
available.
Follow these steps to activate the Manual Park
Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool,
remove the Manual Park Release access
cover, which is just above the parking brake
release handle, below and to the left of the
steering column.
Manual Park Release Panel Cover
3. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake
pedal.
4. Using the screwdriver or similar tool, push the
Manual Park Release lever locking tab
(just below the middle of the lever) to the right.
Manual Park Release Pull Tether
5. While holding the locking tab in the
disengaged position, pull the tether strap to
rotate the lever rearward, until it locks in place
pointing towards the driver's seat. Release the
locking tab and verify that the Manual Park
Release lever is locked in the released
position.
6. The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be
towed. Release the parking brake only when
the vehicle is securely connected to a tow
vehicle.
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
parking brake before activating the Manual Park
Release. In addition, you should be seated in the
driver’s seat with your foot firmly on the brake
pedal when activating the Manual Park Release.
Activating the Manual Park Release will allow
your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by the
parking brake, or by proper connection to a tow
vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on
an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious
injury or death for those in or around the vehicle.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 358
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 359
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Push the locking tab to the right, to unlock the
lever.
2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward
to its original position, until the locking tab
snaps into place to secure the lever.
3. Pull gently on the tether strap to confirm that
the lever is locked in its stowed position.
Manual Park Release Pull Strap
4. Re-install the access cover.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce
the potential for overheating by taking the
appropriate action.
On the highways — slow down.
In city traffic — while stopped, place the trans-
mission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the
engine idle speed while preventing vehicle
motion with the brakes.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition:
If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The
A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling
system and turning the A/C off can help remove
this heat.
You can also turn the temperature control to
maximum heat, the mode control to floor and
the blower control to high. This allows the heater
core to act as a supplement to the radiator and
aids in removing heat from the engine cooling
system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator.
If you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator
has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling
system pressure cap when the radiator or
coolant bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
HOT (H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. If
the pointer remains on HOT (H), and you hear
continuous chimes, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service.
6
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 359
360 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear the area around the front wheels. Then shift
back and forth between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE
(R), while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the
least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that
will maintain the rocking motion, without spinning
the wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE:
For trucks equipped with an 8–speed transmis-
sion, shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can
only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph
(8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission
remains in NEUTRAL (N) for more than two
seconds, you must press the brake pedal to
engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
Push the ESC Off switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in “Partial Off”
mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Elec-
tronic Brake Control System” in “Safety” for
further information. Once the vehicle has been
freed, push the ESC Off switch again to restore
“ESC On” mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and
tires. A tire could explode and injure someone.
Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30
seconds continuously without stopping when
you are stuck and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may
lead to transmission overheating and failure.
Allow the engine to idle with the transmission
in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every
five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize
overheating and reduce the risk of transmis-
sion failure during prolonged efforts to free a
stuck vehicle.
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or
drivetrain damage may result.
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too
fast may lead to transmission overheating and
failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not
spin the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h)
while in gear (no transmission shifting
occurring).
CAUTION!
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 360
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 361
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles may also be towed as described under “Recreational Towing” in the “Starting And Operating”
section.
NOTE:
Vehicles equipped with the Air Suspension System must be placed in Transport mode, before tying them down (from the body) on a trailer or flatbed truck. If the
vehicle cannot be placed in Transport mode (for example, engine will not run), tie-downs must be fastened to the axles (not to the body). Failure to follow these
instructions may cause fault codes to be set and/or cause loss of proper tie-down tension.
Refer to “Air Suspension System — If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for more information.
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose, following
equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle,
not to bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed.
Towing Condition
Wheels OFF The
Ground
2WD Models 4WD Models
Flat Tow NONE
If transmission is operable:
• Transmission in
NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h)
max speed
• 15 miles (24 km)
max distance (6–speed transmission)
• 30 miles (48 km)
max distance (8–speed transmission)
See instructions in “Recreational Towing” under
“Starting And Operating”
Automatic Transmission in
PARK
Transfer Case in NEUTRAL (N)
Tow in
forward direction
Wheel Lift Or Dolly
Tow
Front NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD
6
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 361
362 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
If you must use the accessories (wipers,
defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition
must be in the ON/RUN mode, not the ACC mode.
If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle's battery
is discharged, refer to ”Manual Park Release” in
this section for instructions on shifting the
transmission out of PARK for towing.
TWO-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
The manufacturer recommends towing your
vehicle with all four wheels
OFF the ground using a
flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the
transmission is operable, the vehicle may be towed
(with rear wheels
ON the ground) under the
following conditions:
The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
Refer to “Manual Park Release” in this section for
instructions on shifting the transmission to
NEUTRAL when the engine is OFF.
The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph
(48 km/h).
The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles
(48 km) for 8–speed transmission.
The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles
(24 km) for 6–speed transmission.
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle
must be towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or
farther than 30 miles (48 km) for 8–speed
transmission, tow with the rear wheels
OFF the
ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle
on a flatbed, or with the front wheels raised and
the rear wheels on a towing dolly, or (when using a
suitable steering wheel stabilizer to hold the front
wheels in the straight position) with the rear
wheels raised and the front wheels on the ground.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
The manufacturer recommends towing with all
wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to
tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of
vehicle raised and the opposite end on a towing
dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the
transfer case is operable, the vehicle may be
towed (in the forward direction, with
ALL wheels on
the ground),
IF the transfer case is in NEUTRAL (N)
and the transmission is in PARK.
Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information and detailed
instructions.
CAUTION!
Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck,
do not attach to front or rear suspension
components. Damage to your vehicle may
result from improper towing.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION!
Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used
(if the remaining wheels are on the ground).
Internal damage to the transmission or
transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel
lift is used when towing.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
and/or transfer case damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 362
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 363
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS —
I
F EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency tow
hooks.
NOTE:
For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of
damage to the vehicle.
Front Tow Hooks
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
Accident Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information on the Enhanced
Accident Response System (EARS) function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
record data that will assist in understanding how a
vehicle’s systems performed under certain crash
or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information on the event data
recorder (EDR).
WARNING!
Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle.
Chains may break, causing serious injury or
death.
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged,
causing serious injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue
a vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow
hooks for tow truck hookup or highway towing.
You could damage your vehicle.
6
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 363
364
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING — GAS ENGINE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil
change indicator system. The oil change indicator
system will remind you that it is time to take your
vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate. This
means that service is required for your vehicle.
Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips,
trailer tow, extremely hot or cold ambient
temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will influence
when the “Oil Change Required” message is
displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause
the change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,
500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your
vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the
next 500 miles (805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the scheduled
oil change.
If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone
other than an authorized dealer, the message can
be reset by referring to the steps described under
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel”.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 8,000 miles (13,000 km),
12 months or 350 hours of engine run time,
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet
customers.
Severe Duty All Models
NOTE:
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or
350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle is
operated in a dusty and off road environment or is
operated predominantly at idle, or only very low
engine RPM. This type of vehicle use is considered
Severe Duty.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level
Check windshield washer fluid level
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear
or damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irreg-
ular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indi-
cator system turns on.
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
brake master cylinder, power steering and auto-
matic transmission (six-speed only) and fill as
needed
Check function of all interior and exterior lights
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 364
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 365
MAINTENANCE PLAN — GASOLINE
E
NGINE
Required Maintenance
Refer to the Maintenance Plan on the following
pages for required maintenance. More frequent
maintenance may be needed in severe conditions,
such as dusty areas and very short trip driving. In
some extreme conditions, additional maintenance
not specified in the maintenance schedule may be
required.
NOTE:
Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door
hinge roller pivot joints twice a year to prevent
premature wear.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By
Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter.
Rotate the tires.
Rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil
indicator system turns on.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten termi-
nals as required.
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums,
hoses and parking brake.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and
hoses.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions. If required, replace air
cleaner filter.
Inspect and replace the Evaporative System
Fresh Air Filter as necessary, replacement
may be more frequent if vehicle is operated in
extreme dusty conditions.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By
Oil Change Indicator System:
7
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 365
366 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends,
and replace if necessary.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the front and rear axle surfaces.
If gear oil leakage is suspected, check
the fluid level. If using your vehicle for
police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent
trailer towing, change axle fluid.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, replace as
necessary.
X X X X X X X
Adjust parking brake as necessary. X X X X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace cabin air filter. X X X X X X X
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace spark plugs.
1
X
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 366
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 367
Flush and replace the engine coolant at
10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km)
whichever comes first.
X X
Inspect the transfer case fluid, change for
any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, or
frequent trailer towing.
X X
Change the transfer case fluid. X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary.
X
1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment.
If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance.
This could cause an accident.
7
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 367
368 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
HEAVY DUTY USE OF THE VEHICLE
Change engine oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or
350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle is
operated in a dusty and off road environment or is
operated predominately at idle or only very low
engine RPM. This type of vehicle use is considered
Severe Duty.
SCHEDULED SERVICING— DIESEL ENGINE
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the maintenance plan on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
More frequent maintenance may be needed in
severe conditions, such as dusty areas and very
short trip driving. In some extreme conditions,
additional maintenance not specified in the
maintenance schedule may be required.
At Each Stop For Fuel
Check the engine oil level at least 30 minutes after
a fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil
level while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level reading. Add
oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or
MIN mark.
Once A Month
Inspect the batteries, and clean and tighten the
terminals as required.
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
brake master cylinder, and automatic
transmission, and add as needed.
At Each Oil Change
Change the engine oil filter.
Inspect the exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. Replace the
engine air cleaner filter, if necessary.
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
Check the coolant level, hoses, and clamps.
Inspect front end, and lubricate — If equipped
with serviceable fittings.
Inspect and replace the Evaporative System
Fresh Air Filter as necessary, replacement may
be more frequent if vehicle is operated in
extreme dusty conditions.
Inspection and service should also be performed
anytime a malfunction is observed or suspected.
Retain all receipts.
NOTE:
Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door
hinge pivot joints twice a year to prevent
premature wear.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance
items may result in damage to the vehicle.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 368
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 369
OIL CHANGE INDICATOR SYSTEM —
C
UMMINS® DIESEL
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. This system will alert you when it
is time to change your engine oil by displaying the
words “Oil Change Due” in your instrument cluster
display. The engine oil change indicator system is
duty cycle based, which means the engine oil
change interval may fluctuate depending on your
personal driving style. Failure to change the engine
oil per the maintenance schedule can result in
internal engine damage.
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the scheduled
oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed
by someone other than an authorized dealer, the
message can be reset by referring to the steps
described under “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Replace the engine oil and oil filter every
15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months, or
sooner if prompted by the oil change indicator
system. Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or
12 months, whichever comes first.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or
12 months or 500 hours, whichever comes first.
It is recommended that every 3,000 miles
(4,800 km), check the engine oil level at least
30 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut
off. Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on
level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil
level reading. Add oil only when the level is at or
below the ADD or MIN mark.
Severe service (high ambient temperature,
short trips, heavy loading, trailer towing,
off-road, or law enforcement use) may reduce
oil change intervals.
If Chassis Cab models configured with optional
B20 capability are operated with greater than
5% levels of biodiesel, the oil change interval must
not exceed 12,500 miles (20,000 km) or 400
hours, whichever comes first under any
circumstances. See the Fuel Requirements section
for more information regarding operation with
biodiesel blend (B6-B20) fuel meeting ASTM
specification D-7467.
PERFORM SERVICE INDICATOR —
C
UMMINS® DIESEL
Your vehicle will require emissions maintenance at
a set interval. To help remind you when this
maintenance is due, the instrument cluster will
display “Perform Service”. When the “Perform
Service” message is displayed on the instrument
cluster it is necessary to have the emissions
maintenance performed. Emissions maintenance
may include replacing the Closed Crankcase
Ventilation (CCV) filter element. The procedure for
clearing and resetting the “Perform Service”
indicator message is located in the appropriate
Service Information.
7
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 369
370 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE PLAN — CUMMINS® DIESEL ENGINE
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first):
7,500
15,000
22,500
30,000
37,500
45,000
52,500
60,000
67,500
75,000
82,500
90,000
97,500
105,000
112,500
120,000
127,500
135,000
142,500
150,000
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120
Or Kilometers:
12,000
24,000
36,000
48,000
60,000
72,000
84,000
96,000
108,000
120,000
132,000
144,000
156,000
168,000
180,000
192,000
204,000
216,000
228,000
240,000
Change engine oil every
15,000 miles (24,000 km)
or 12 months or 500 Hours
or sooner if prompted by the
oil change indicator system,
whichever comes first.
1
X X X X X X X X X X
Additional Inspections
Check the Diesel Exhaust
Fluid (DEF) tank, refill if
necessary.
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Rotate the tires. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front end, and
lubricate — If equipped with
serviceable fittings.
X X X X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X X X
I
n
s
pect engine air cleaner
filter, replace if necessary.
2
X X X X X X X X X X
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 370
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 371
Inspect the CV/Universal
joints.
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect the front
suspension, tie rod ends and
boot seals for cracks or
leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper
looseness or end play;
replace if necessary.
X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings. X X X X X X
Inspect and adjust parking
brake.
X X X X X X
Inspect drive belt; replace as
necessary.
X X X X X X
Inspect wheel bearings. X X X X X
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first):
7,500
15,000
22,500
30,000
37,500
45,000
52,500
60,000
67,500
75,000
82,500
90,000
97,500
105,000
112,500
120,000
127,500
135,000
142,500
150,000
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120
Or Kilometers:
12,000
24,000
36,000
48,000
60,000
72,000
84,000
96,000
108,000
120,000
132,000
144,000
156,000
168,000
180,000
192,000
204,000
216,000
228,000
240,000
7
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 371
372 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Additional Maintenance
Replace cabin air filter. X X X X X X
Replace engine fuel filter
element.
X X X X X X X X X X
Replace chassis mounted
fuel filter element.
X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect the front and rear
axle surfaces. If gear oil
leakage is suspected, check
the fluid level. If using
your vehicle for police, taxi,
fleet, off-road or frequent
trailer towing change the
axle fluid.
3
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first):
7,500
15,000
22,500
30,000
37,500
45,000
52,500
60,000
67,500
75,000
82,500
90,000
97,500
105,000
112,500
120,000
127,500
135,000
142,500
150,000
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120
Or Kilometers:
12,000
24,000
36,000
48,000
60,000
72,000
84,000
96,000
108,000
120,000
132,000
144,000
156,000
168,000
180,000
192,000
204,000
216,000
228,000
240,000
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 372
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 373
Inspect the transfer case
fluid (4x4), change for any of
the following: police, taxi,
fleet, or frequent trailer
towing.
X X X X X
Change the transfer case
fluid (4x4).
X X
Change automatic
transmission fluid (AISIN
(AS69RC) transmission
only).
X X X X
Change automatic
transmission fluid and sump
filter (AISIN (AS69RC)
transmission only).
X X
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first):
7,500
15,000
22,500
30,000
37,500
45,000
52,500
60,000
67,500
75,000
82,500
90,000
97,500
105,000
112,500
120,000
127,500
135,000
142,500
150,000
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120
Or Kilometers:
12,000
24,000
36,000
48,000
60,000
72,000
84,000
96,000
108,000
120,000
132,000
144,000
156,000
168,000
180,000
192,000
204,000
216,000
228,000
240,000
7
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 373
374 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Change automatic
transmission fluid and
filter(s) if using your vehicle
for any of the following:
police, fleet, or frequent
trailer towing (68RFE
transmission only).
X X
Change automatic
transmission fluid and
filter(s).
X
Replace Crankcase
Ventilation Filter (CCV).
X X
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first):
7,500
15,000
22,500
30,000
37,500
45,000
52,500
60,000
67,500
75,000
82,500
90,000
97,500
105,000
112,500
120,000
127,500
135,000
142,500
150,000
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120
Or Kilometers:
12,000
24,000
36,000
48,000
60,000
72,000
84,000
96,000
108,000
120,000
132,000
144,000
156,000
168,000
180,000
192,000
204,000
216,000
228,000
240,000
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 374
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 375
(Continued)
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all receipts.
Flush and replace power
steering fluid.
X
Flush and replace engine
coolant. ***
X
1. Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months or 500 Hours, whichever comes first.
2. Under no circumstances should the air cleaner filter element exceed 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months, whichever comes first.
3. Inspect the front and rear axle surfaces every 20,000 miles (32,000 km). If gear oil leakage is suspected, check the fluid level. If using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or
frequent trailer towing change the axle fluid every 20,000 miles (32,000 km).
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first):
7,500
15,000
22,500
30,000
37,500
45,000
52,500
60,000
67,500
75,000
82,500
90,000
97,500
105,000
112,500
120,000
127,500
135,000
142,500
150,000
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120
Or Kilometers:
12,000
24,000
36,000
48,000
60,000
72,000
84,000
96,000
108,000
120,000
132,000
144,000
156,000
168,000
180,000
192,000
204,000
216,000
228,000
240,000
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around
a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which
you have the knowledge and the right equip-
ment. If you have any doubt about your ability
to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a
competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunc-
tion and effect vehicle handling and perfor-
mance. This could cause an accident.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
***The manufacturer highly recommends that
all cooling system service, maintenance, and
repairs be performed by your local authorized
dealer.
7
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 375
376 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
6.4L ENGINE
1 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 6 — Battery
2 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 7 — Air Cleaner Filter
3 — Engine Oil Fill 8 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Cap
4 — Engine Oil Dipstick 9 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 376
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 377
6.7L DIESEL ENGINE — SIX-SPEED 68RFE
1 — Battery 7 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap
2 — Engine Coolant Pressure Reservoir 8 — Battery
3 — Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap 9 — Air Cleaner Filter
4 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick 10 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Cap
5 — Engine Oil Fill 11 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
6 — Engine Oil Dipstick 12 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
7
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 377
378 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
6.7L DIESEL ENGINE — SIX-SPEED AISIN (AS69RC HD)
1 — Battery 7 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap
2 — Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap 8 — Battery
3 — Engine Coolant Pressure Reservoir 9 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
4 — Engine Oil Fill 10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
5 — Engine Oil Dipstick 11 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Cap
6 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick 12 — Air Cleaner Filter
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 378
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 379
CHECKING OIL LEVEL — GAS ENGINE
To ensure proper lubrication of your vehicle's
engine, the engine oil must be maintained at the
correct level. Check the oil level at regular
intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes
after a fully warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground
will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
Always maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone
on the dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the
reading is at the bottom of the SAFE zone will result
in a reading at the top of the safe zone on these
engines.
CHECKING OIL LEVEL — DIESEL ENGINE
To ensure proper lubrication of your vehicle's
engine, the engine oil must be maintained at the
correct level. Check the oil level at regular
intervals. The best time to check the oil level is
before starting the engine after it has been parked
overnight.
When checking oil after operating the engine, first
ensure the engine is at full operating temperature,
then wait for 30 minutes after engine shutdown to
check the oil.
Engine Oil Dipstick
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground
will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
Add oil only when the level on the dipstick is below
the “ADD” mark. The total capacity from the ADD
mark to the Full mark is 2 quarts (1.9L).
Never operate the engine with oil level below the
“ADD” mark or above the upper “SAFE” mark.
ADDING WASHER FLUID
The fluid reservoir is located under the hood and
should be checked for fluid level at regular
intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer
solvent only (not radiator antifreeze). When
refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and
wipe the wiper blades clean. This will help blade
performance.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration
or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your
engine.
1 — ADD Range
2 — Full Mark
3 — SAFE Range
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will
cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure. This
could damage your engine.
7
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 379
380 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer
system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture
that meets or exceeds the temperature range of
your climate. This rating information can be found
on most washer fluid containers.
After the engine has warmed up, operate the
defroster for a few minutes to reduce the
possibility of smearing or freezing the fluid on the
cold windshield. Windshield washer solution used
with water as directed on the container, aids
cleaning action, reduces the freezing point to avoid
line clogging, and is not harmful to paint or trim.
MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free
battery. You will never have to add water, nor is
periodic maintenance required.
PRESSURE WASHING
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer
solvents are flammable. They could ignite and
burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or
working around the washer solution.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and
can burn or even blind you. Do not allow
battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or
clothing. Do not lean over a battery when
attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or
on skin, flush the area immediately with large
amounts of water. Refer to “Jump Starting
Procedure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not
use a booster battery or any other booster
source with an output greater than 12 Volts.
Do not allow cable clamps to touch each
other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related accesso-
ries contain lead and lead compounds. Wash
hands after handling.
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on
the battery that the positive cable is attached
to the positive post and the negative cable is
attached to the negative post. Battery posts
are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and
are identified on the battery case. Cable
clamps should be tight on the terminal posts
and free of corrosion.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is
in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery
cables before connecting the charger to the
battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide
starting voltage.
CAUTION!
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high
pressure washer is not recommended.
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all
parts and connections however, the pressures
generated by these machines is such that
complete protection against water ingress
cannot be guaranteed.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 380
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 381
DEALER SERVICE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service
personnel, special tools, and equipment to
perform all service operations in an expert
manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your
vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in
civil penalties being assessed against you.
ENGINE OIL
Change Engine Oil — Gas Engine
The oil change indicator system will remind you
that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled
maintenance. Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in
this chapter for further information.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 8,000 miles (13,000 km),
12 months or 350 hours of engine run time,
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet
customers.
Change Engine Oil — Diesel Engine
Refer to the “Scheduled Servicing” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Engine Oil Selection — Gas Engine
For best performance and maximum protection
under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer only recommends engine oils that
are API Certified and meet the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS-12633.
NOTE:
Hemi engine (6.4L) at times can tick right after
startup and then quiet down after approximately
30 seconds. This is normal and will not harm the
engine. This characteristic can be caused by short
drive cycles. For example, if the vehicle is started
then shut off after driving a short distance. Upon
restarting, you may experience a ticking sound.
Other causes could be if the vehicle is unused for
an extended period of time, incorrect oil, extended
oil changes or extended idling.
If the engine continues to tick or if the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) comes on, see the nearest
authorized dealer.
Engine Oil Selection — Diesel Engine
For best performance and maximum protection
under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer only recommends engine oils that
are API CK-4 certified and meet the requirements
of FCA US LLC. Use Mopar® or an equivalent oil
meeting FCA Material Standard MS-10902.
Products meeting Cummins® CES 20081 may
also be used. The identification of these engine oils
are typically located on the back of the oil
container.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine
Oil Identification Symbol — Gas Engine
This symbol means that the oil has been
certified by the American Petroleum
Institute (API). The manufacturer only
recommends API Certified engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30,
5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which
you have the knowledge and the proper
equipment. If you have any doubt about your
ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle
to a competent mechanic.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as
the chemicals can damage your engine. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
7
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 381
382 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine
Oil Identification Symbol — Diesel Engine
This symbol means that the oil has been
certified by the American Petroleum
Institute (API). The manufacturer only
recommends API Certified engine oils.
Oils with a high ash content may produce
damaging deposits on cylinder head valves and/or
aftertreatment system damage. A maximum
sulfated ash content of 1.00 mass % is
recommended for all oil used in the engine.
The same oil change interval is to be followed for
synthetic oil as for petroleum based oil. Also,
synthetic oil must meet the same performance
specifications as petroleum oil.
Engine Oil Viscosity — Gas Engine
Use Mopar® SAE 0W-40 engine oil approved to
FCA Material Standard MS-12633 such as
Pennzoil Ultra equivalent is recommended for all
operating temperatures.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the
recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine.
For information on engine oil filler cap location,
refer to the “Engine Compartment” illustration in
this section.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil
certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity
grade number should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity — Diesel Engine
In ambient temperatures above 0°F (-18°C), we
recommend you use SAE 10W-30 engine oil such
as Mopar®, Shell Rotella and Shell Rimula that
meets FCA Material Standard MS-10902 and the
API CK-4 engine oil category is required. Products
meeting Cummins® CES 20081 may also be used.
The identification of these engine oils is typically
located on the back of the oil container.
In ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C), we
recommend you use SAE 5W-40
synthetic engine
oil such as Mopar®, Shell Rotella and Shell Rimula
that meets FCA Material Standard MS-10902 and
the API CK-4 engine oil category is required.
Engine oil not designated by the FCA or Cummins®
Material Standards and API CK-4 should not be
used, as engine and exhaust system durability may
be compromised. The engine oil filler cap also
shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for
your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap
location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in
“Servicing And Maintenance” for further
information.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the
recommended oil quality requirements are met,
and the recommended maintenance intervals for
oil and filter changes are followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the
engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE
viscosity grade number should not be used.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as
the chemicals can damage your engine. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Failure to use SAE 5W-40 synthetic engine oil in
ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C) could
result in severe engine damage.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 382
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 383
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against
the addition of any additives (other than leak
detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an
engineered product and its performance may be
impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine
oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil
filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a
problem to the environment. Contact an
authorized dealer, service station or governmental
agency for advice on how and where used oil and
oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new
filter at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer's engines have a full-flow type
disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for
replacement. The quality of replacement filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should
be used to ensure most efficient service. Mopar®
engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are
recommended.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for
the proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE:
Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions”
maintenance interval if applicable.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner
filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters
should be used to ensure most efficient service.
Mopar® engine air cleaner filters are a high quality
filter and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection And
Replacement — Gas Engine
Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and or
debris, if you find evidence of either dirt or debris
you should change your air cleaner filter.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. With suitable tool fully loosen (six) fasteners
on air cleaner filter.
Air Cleaner Filter
2. Lift the air cleaner cover to access the air
cleaner filter.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the
case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless
such removal is necessary for repair or
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the
engine compartment before starting the vehicle
with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
1 — Fasteners
2 — Air Hose Clamp
3 — Air Cleaner Cover
7
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 383
384 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
3. Remove the air cleaner filter element from the
housing assembly.
Open Air Cleaner Filter Assembly
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is
present before replacing the air filter element.
1. Install the air cleaner filter element into the
housing assembly with the air cleaner filter
inspection surface facing downward.
2. Install the air cleaner cover onto the housing
assembly.
3. Tighten the fasteners (six) on the air cleaner
filter assembly
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement — Diesel Engine
Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and or
debris, if you find evidence of either dirt or debris
you should change your air cleaner filter.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Remove the screws from the air cleaner
cover.
Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2. Lift the air cleaner cover to access the air
cleaner filter.
3. Remove the air cleaner filter element from the
housing assembly.
Air Cleaner Filter
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is
present before replacing the air filter element.
1. Install the air cleaner filter element into the
housing assembly with the air cleaner filter
inspection surface facing downward.
2. Install the air cleaner cover onto the housing
assembly locating tabs.
3. Install screws to secure the air cleaner cover to
the housing assembly.
1 — Air Cleaner Cover
2 — Air Cleaner Filter
1 — Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2 — Screws
1 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Air Cleaner Filter Inspection Surface
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 384
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 385
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized
dealer at the start of each warm season. This
service should include cleaning of the condenser
fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension
should also be checked at this time.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling —
R-134a — (If Equipped)
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluo-
rocarbon (HFC) that is an ozone-friendly
substance. The manufacturer recommends that
air conditioning service be performed by an
authorized dealer or other service facilities using
recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling —
R-1234yf — (If Equipped)
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the
Environmental Protection Agency and is an
ozone-friendly substance with a low
global-warming potential.
The manufacturer recommends that air
conditioning service be performed by an
authorized dealer using recovery and recycling
equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Cabin Filter Replacement (A/C Air Filter)
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor
lubricants approved by the manufacturer for
your air conditioning system. Some unap-
proved refrigerants are flammable and can
explode, injuring you. Other unapproved refrig-
erants or lubricants can cause the system to
fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty
Information Book, for further warranty infor-
mation.
The air conditioning system contains refrig-
erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of
personal injury or damage to the system,
adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines
to be disconnected should be done by an
experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air
conditioning system as the chemicals can
damage your air conditioning components.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the
vehicle is running, or while the ignition is in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. With the cabin air filter
removed and the blower operating, the blower
can contact hands and may propel dirt and
debris into your eyes, resulting in personal injury.
7
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 385
386 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet
behind the glove compartment. Perform the
following procedure to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all
contents.
2. With the glove compartment door open,
remove the glove compartment tension tether
and tether clip by sliding the clip toward the
face of the glove compartment door. Lift the
clip out of glove compartment door and
release into dash panel.
Right Side Of Glove Compartment
3. There are travel stops on both sides of the
glove compartment. Push inward on right side
of the glove compartment travel stop to
disengage the stop. Then pull the right of the
glove compartment outward (away from the
hinge) to disengaging the right side of the
compartment from the hinge. Continue by
removing the left side from the hinge by slightly
lowering the compartment while pulling
outward until it is completely disengaged from
the hinge.
Glove Compartment
4. Remove the filter cover by pushing in on the
finger tabs on each end of the filter cover.
Filter Cover
Filter Cover Removal
1 — Glove Compartment Door
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stop
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
3 — Glove Compartment Door
1 — Finger Tabs
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 386
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 387
5. Remove the cabin air filter by pulling it straight
out of the housing.
Cabin Air Filter
6. Install the cabin air filter with the arrow on the
filter pointing toward the floor. When installing
the filter cover, press on each end until you
hear an audible click.
7. Reinstall the glove compartment on the
hinges.
8. Pull the tension tether outward and reinstall
the glove compartment past the travel stops by
pushing in on the glove compartment sides.
Glove Compartment
NOTE:
Ensure the glove compartment door hinges and
glove compartment travel stops are fully engaged.
9. Reattach the glove compartment tension
tether by inserting the tether clip in the glove
compartment and sliding the clip away from
the face of the glove compartment door.
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT INSPECTION
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter.
Failure to properly install the filter will result in
the need to replace it more often.
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stop
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
3 — Glove Compartment Door
WARNING!
Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive
belt with vehicle running.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time regardless of ignition mode. You could be
injured by the moving fan blades.
You can be badly injured working on or around
a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which
you have the knowledge and the proper equip-
ment. If you have any doubt about your ability
to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a
competent mechanic.
7
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 387
388 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small
cracks that run across ribbed surface of belt from
rib to rib, are considered normal. These are not a
reason to replace belt. However, cracks running
along a rib (not across) are not normal. Any belt
with cracks running along a rib must be replaced.
Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive wear,
frayed cords or severe glazing.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Conditions that would require replacement:
Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated
from belt body)
Rib or belt wear
Longitudinal belt cracking
(cracks between two ribs)
Belt slips
“Groove jumping" (belt does not maintain
correct position on pulley)
Belt broken (note: identify and correct problem
before new belt is installed)
Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble
is heard or felt while drive belt is in operation)
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty
component such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys
should be carefully inspected for damage and
proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the
use of special tools, we recommend having your
vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer.
DRAINING FUEL/WATER SEPARATOR
F
ILTER — DIESEL ENGINE
There are two fuel filter assemblies. One is located
on the driver's side of the engine. The best access
to this water drain valve is from under the hood.
The second one is on the under body, located in
front of the rear axle above the drive shaft on
pick-up models. The Chassis Cab models second
filter location is on the frame behind the front axle.
The best access to this water drain valve is from
under the vehicle.
If water is detected in the water separator while the
engine is running, or while the ignition switch is in
the ON position, the “Water In Fuel Indicator Light”
will illuminate and an audible chime will be heard
five times. At this point you should stop the engine
and drain the water from both of the filters.
CAUTION!
Do not drain the fuel/water separator filter
when the engine is running.
Diesel fuel will damage blacktop paving
surfaces. Drain the filter into an appropriate
container.
CAUTION!
If the “Water In Fuel Indicator Light” remains on,
DO NOT START the engine before you drain water
from the fuel filters to avoid engine damage.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 388
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 389
If the “Water In Fuel Indicator Light” comes on and
a single chime is heard while you are driving, or
with the ignition switch in the ON position, there
may be a problem with your water separator wiring
or sensor. See an authorized dealer for service.
Upon proper draining of the water from both fuel
filters, the “Water In Fuel Indicator Light” will
remain illuminated for approximately 10 seconds.
If the water was drained while the engine was
running, the “Water In Fuel Indicator Light” may
remain on for approximately three minutes.
NOTE:
Care should be taken in disposing of used fluids
from your vehicle. Used fluids, indiscriminately
discarded, can present a problem to the envi-
ronment. Contact an authorized dealer, service
station, or government agency for advice on recy-
cling programs and for where used fluids and
filters can be properly disposed of in your area.
Drain the fuel/water separator filters when the
“Water In Fuel Indicator Light” is ON. Within
10 minutes of vehicle shutdown, turn the engine
mounted filter drain valve (located on the side of
the filter assembly) counterclockwise 1/4 turn,
and turn the under body mounted filter drain valve
(located on the bottom of the filter assembly)
counterclockwise wise 1 full turn.
Then turn the ignition switch to the ON position,
and allow any accumulated water to drain. Leave
the drain valve open until all water and
contaminants have been removed. When clean
fuel is visible, close the drain valve following these
guidelines:
1. Rotate the drain clockwise to close until you
feel resistance from the internal seal.
2. Continue turning the drain 1/2 of a turn to
properly compress the seal.
NOTE:
Over-compression of the seal due to over-tight-
ening of the drain will damage the seal, cause a
leak, and require the entire sensor to be replaced.
3. Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
The sensor drain should not be over-tightened
during normal service operations to avoid internal
damage and future fuel leaks. The drain should be
closed and secured without the use of tools.
If more than a couple ounces/milliliters of fuel
have been drained, follow the directions for
“Priming If The Engine Has Run Out Of Fuel.”
ENGINE MOUNTED FUEL FILTER
R
EPLACEMENT — DIESEL ENGINE
NOTE:
Using a fuel filter that does not meet the manu-
facturer's filtration and water separating
requirements can severely impact fuel system
life and reliability.
The engine mounted filter housing is equipped
with a No-Filter-No-Run (NFNR) feature. Engine
will not run if:
No filter is installed.
Inferior/Non-approved filter is used. Use of
OEM filter is required to ensure vehicle
will run.
Engine Mounted Fuel Filter Assembly
1 — Drain Valve
7
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 389
390 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
1. Ensure engine is turned off.
2. Place drain pan under the fuel filter drain hose.
3. Open the water drain valve a quarter turn
counterclockwise and completely drain fuel
and water into the approved container.
4. Close the water drain valve.
5. Remove lid using a socket or strap wrench.
Rotate counterclockwise for removal. Remove
used o-ring and discard it.
6. Remove the used filter cartridge from the
housing and dispose of according to your local
regulations.
7. Wipe clean the sealing surfaces of the lid and
housing.
8. Install new o-ring back into ring groove on the
filter housing and lubricate with clean engine
oil.
9. Remove new filter cartridge from plastic bag
and install into housing.
NOTE:
Do not remove cartridge from bag until you reach
this step in order to keep cartridge clean.
10. Push down on the cartridge to ensure it is
properly seated.
Do not pre-fill the filter
housing with fuel.
11. Install lid onto housing and tighten to 22.5 ft lb
(30.5 N.m). Do not overtighten the lid.
12. Prime the engine using the procedure in
“Priming If The Engine Has Run Out Of Fuel.”
Then start the engine and confirm there are no
leaks.
UNDERBODY MOUNTED FUEL FILTER
R
EPLACEMENT — DIESEL ENGINE
NOTE:
Using a fuel filter that does not meet the manu-
facturer's filtration and water separating
requirements can severely impact fuel system
life and reliability.
The underbody mounted filter housing will
cause the engine not to run if:
No filter is installed.
Underbody Mounted Fuel Filter Assembly
CAUTION!
Diesel fuel will damage blacktop paving
surfaces. Drain the filter into an appropriate
container.
Do not prefill the fuel filter when installing a
new fuel filter. There is a possibility debris
could be introduced into the fuel filter during
this action. It is best to install the filter dry and
allow the in-tank lift pump to prime the fuel
system.
1 — Drain Valve
CAUTION!
Diesel fuel will damage blacktop paving
surfaces. Drain the filter into an appropriate
container.
Do not prefill the fuel filter when installing a
new fuel filter. There is a possibility debris
could be introduced into the fuel filter during
this action. It is best to install the filter dry and
allow the in-tank lift pump to prime the fuel
system.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 390
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 391
1. Ensure engine is turned off.
2. Place drain pan under the fuel filter drain hose.
3. Open the water drain valve one full turn
counterclockwise and completely drain fuel
and water into the approved container.
4. Close the water drain valve.
5. Remove lid using a socket or strap wrench.
Rotate counterclockwise for removal. Remove
used o-ring and discard it.
6. Remove the used filter cartridge from the
housing and dispose of according to your local
regulations.
7. Wipe clean the sealing surfaces of the lid
and housing.
8. Install new o-ring back into ring groove on
the filter housing and lubricate with clean
engine oil.
NOTE:
Water In Fuel (WIF) sensor is re-usable. Service kit
comes with new o-ring for filter canister and WIF
sensor.
PRIMING IF THE ENGINE HAS RUN OUT
O
F FUEL — DIESEL ENGINE
1. Add a substantial amount of fuel to the tank,
approximately 2 to 5 gal (8L to 19L).
2. Three priming cycles must be completed. Turn
ignition to the RUN position and wait approxi-
mately 30 seconds. This will activate the in
tank fuel pump. Turn the ignition switch to
the off position, and leave off for at least
30 seconds. Repeat this procedure three
times before cranking the engine.
3. Start the engine using the “Normal Starting”
procedure. Refer to “Starting Procedures” in
“Starting and Operating” for further
information.
4. Once the engine starts, allow the engine to idle
for a minimum of 30 seconds.
NOTE:
The engine may run rough until the air is forced
from all the fuel lines.
WARNING!
Do not open the high pressure fuel system with
the engine running. Engine operation causes
high fuel pressure. High pressure fuel spray can
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not engage the starter motor for more than
15 seconds at a time. Allow two minutes
between the cranking intervals.
WARNING!
Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel blending
agent. They can be unstable under certain
conditions and be hazardous or explosive when
mixed with diesel fuel.
CAUTION!
Due to lack of lubricants in alcohol or gasoline,
the use of these fuels can cause damage to the
fuel system.
7
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 391
392 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE:
A maximum blend of 5% biodiesel, meeting
ASTM specification D-975 may be used with
your Cummins® diesel engine. (Chassis Cab
models not configured with B20 capability.)
A maximum blend of 20% biodiesel, meeting
ASTM specification D-7467 may be used with
your Cummins® diesel engine. (Pickup models
and Chassis Cab models configured with B20
capability.)
Use of biodiesel mixture in excess of 20% can
negatively impact the fuel filter's ability to sepa-
rate water from the fuel, resulting in high pres-
sure fuel system corrosion or damage.
Ethanol blends are not recommended or
approved for use with your Cummins® diesel
engine.
In addition, commercially available fuel addi-
tives are not necessary for the proper operation
of your Cummins® diesel engine.
INTERVENTION REGENERATION
S
TRATEGY — MESSAGE PROCESS FLOW
The Cummins® diesel engine meets all
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Heavy Duty
Diesel Engine Emissions Standards, resulting in
one of the lowest emitting diesel engines ever
produced.
To achieve these emissions standards, your
vehicle is equipped with a state-of-the-art engine
and exhaust system. The engine and exhaust
after-treatment system work together to achieve
the EPA Heavy Duty Diesel Engine Emissions
Standards. These systems are seamlessly
integrated into your vehicle and managed by the
Cummins® Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The
PCM manages engine combustion to allow the
exhaust system’s catalyst to trap and burn
Particulate Matter (PM) pollutants, with no input or
interaction on your part.
If the engine is allowed to idle or the truck is driven
on low engine speed drive cycles for more than two
hours, the system will automatically enter an
emissions operating mode that will increase the
engine idle speed to 900 RPM (1050 RPM for
Chassis Cab). While in this mode, which is
designed to help maintain the Diesel Particulate
Filter, the engine idle speed will return to normal
when the brake pedal is applied. A small change in
engine tone or a slight change in engine
performance while accelerating may also be
noticeable at speeds below 20 mph (32 km/h).
This operating mode may last for up to an hour of
idle time, or around 20 minutes of driving time.
Additionally, your vehicle has the ability to alert you
to additional maintenance required on your truck
or engine.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) sometimes known
simply by the name of its active component,
UREA—is a key component of selective catalytic
reduction (SCR) systems, which help diesel
vehicles meet stringent emission regulations.
DEF is a liquid reducing agent that reacts with
engine exhaust in the presence of a catalyst to
convert smog-forming nitrogen oxides (NOx) into
harmless nitrogen and water vapor.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specification” for further information.
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials
might be grass or leaves coming into contact
with your exhaust system. Do not park or
operate your vehicle in areas where your
exhaust system can contact anything that can
burn.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 392
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 393
You can receive assistance in locating DEF in the
United States by calling 866-RAM-INFO
(866-726-4636). In Canada call
1–800–465–2001 (English) or
1–800–387–9983 (French)
You can receive assistance in locating DEF by
contacting an authorized dealer.
BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such
items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and
rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and
hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with
a lithium based grease, such as Mopar® Spray
White Lube to ensure quiet, easy operation and to
protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit;
after lubricating, excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given
to hood latching components to ensure proper
function. When performing other underhood
services, the hood latch, release mechanism and
safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated
twice a year, preferably in the Autumn and Spring.
Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant,
such as Mopar® Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly
into the lock cylinder.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth
and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove
accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
blades. Always use washer fluid when using the
wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice
from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of
contact with petroleum products such as engine
oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chat-
tering, marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of
these conditions are present, clean the wiper
blades or replace as necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be
inspected periodically, not just when wiper
performance problems are experienced. This
inspection should include the following points:
Wear or uneven edges
Foreign material
Hardening or cracking
Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace
the affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do
not attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is
damaged.
Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off
of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the full
up position.
Windshield Wiper Arm And Blade
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back
against the glass without the wiper blade in
place or the glass may be damaged.
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
7
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 393
394 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper
arm, flip up the locking tab.
Wiper Locking Assembly
3. Tilt the lower end of the wiper blade away from
the arm and use one finger to push the release
tab toward the wiper arm.
Wiper Disengaging
4. Slide the wiper blade down towards the base
of the wiper arm.
5. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the
wiper blade from the wiper arm by holding the
wiper arm with one hand and separating the
wiper blade from the wiper arm with the other
hand (move the wiper blade down toward
the base of the wiper arm and away from
the J hook in the end of the wiper arm).
Removing Wiper From Wiper Arm
6. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
1 — Locking Tab
2 — Wiper
3 — Release Tab
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3 — Wiper Arm J Hook
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 394
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 395
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the
wiper arm is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade under the hook on the
tip of the wiper arm with the wiper locking tab
open.
3. Insert the receiver bracket on the wiper
assembly into the hook on the tip of the arm
through the opening in the wiper blade under
the locking tab.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the
wiper arm until it is latched (engagement will
be accompanied by an audible click). Fold
down the latch release tab and snap it into its
locked position.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained
engine exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust
system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected
inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of
the vehicle is damaged; have an authorized
technician inspect the complete exhaust system
and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged,
deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, have the exhaust system inspected each
time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace as required.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic
converter will not require maintenance. However, it
is important to keep the engine properly tuned to
ensure proper catalyst operation and prevent
possible catalyst damage.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you uncon-
scious and can eventually poison you. To
avoid breathing CO, refer to “Safety Tips” in
“Safety” for further information.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
park over materials that can burn. Such mate-
rials might be grass or leaves coming into
contact with your exhaust system. Do not park
or operate your vehicle in areas where your
exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an
emissions control device and may seriously
reduce engine performance and cause
serious damage to the engine.
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if
your vehicle is not kept in proper operating
condition. In the event of engine malfunction,
particularly involving engine misfire or other
apparent loss of performance, have your
vehicle serviced promptly. Continued opera-
tion of your vehicle with a severe malfunction
could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter
and vehicle.
7
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 395
396 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly
malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor
may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst
overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off
the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a
tune-up to manufacturer's specifications, should
be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage:
Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmis-
sion is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or
towing the vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any ignition compo-
nents disconnected or removed, such as when
diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods
during very rough idle or malfunctioning oper-
ating conditions.
COOLING SYSTEM
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection
every 12 months (before the onset of freezing
weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant
(antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in appearance, the
system should be drained, flushed and refilled with
fresh coolant.
Check the front of the A/C condenser (if equipped)
or radiator for any accumulation of bugs, leaves,
etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a
garden hose vertically down the face of the A/C
condenser (if equipped) or the back of the radiator
core.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle
rubber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the
connection at the coolant recovery bottle and
radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks.
DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP
WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly
could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any
coolant is needed to be added to the system
please contact an authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
contains visible sediment, have an authorized
dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant
(antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for
the proper maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your
radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from
under the hood, do not open the hood until the
radiator has had time to cool. Never open a
cooling system pressure cap when the radi-
ator or coolant bottle is hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away
from the radiator cooling fan when the hood is
raised. The fan starts automatically and may
start at any time, whether the engine is
running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the igni-
tion to the OFF mode. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the igni-
tion is in the ON mode.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 396
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 397
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information.
NOTE:
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT)
engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protec-
tion. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine
coolant is different and should not be mixed
with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT)
engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally
compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT
engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into
the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling
system will need to be drained, flushed, and
refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use addi-
tional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as
they may not be compatible with the radiator
engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
the system please contact an authorized dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved
engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be
used up to ten years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent
reducing this extended maintenance period, it is
important that you use the same engine coolant
(OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout
the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze) that meets the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS.90032. When adding
engine coolant (antifreeze):
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) that
meets the requirements of FCA Material Stan-
dard MS.90032.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine
coolant that meets the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled
water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed
70%) if temperatures below −34°F (−37°C) are
anticipated. Please contact an authorized
dealer for assistance.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or
deionized water when mixing the water/engine
coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower
quality water will reduce the amount of corro-
sion protection in the engine cooling system.
NOTE:
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the
proper level of protection against freezing
according to the temperatures occurring in the
area where the vehicle is operated.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
the system, please contact a local authorized
dealer.
Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not
recommended and can result in cooling system
damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in
an emergency, have an authorized dealer drain,
flush, and refill with OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) as soon as possible.
7
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 397
398 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that
engine coolant (antifreeze) will return to the
radiator from the coolant expansion bottle/
recovery tank if so equipped.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there
is any accumulation of foreign material on the
sealing surfaces.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal.
Check with your local authorities to determine the
disposal rules for your community. To prevent
ingestion by animals or children, do not store
ethylene glycol-based coolant in open containers
or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If
ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency
assistance immediately. Clean up any ground spills
immediately.
Checking Coolant Level — 6.4L Engine
The level of the coolant in the pressurized coolant
bottle should be between the “MIN” and “MAX”
range on the bottle when the engine is cold.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so
there is no need to remove the cap unless
checking for coolant freeze point or replacing
engine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service
attendant of this. As long as the engine operating
temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle
need only be checked once a month. When
additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/kilo-
meters of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compartment.
This is normally a result of moisture from rain,
snow, or high humidity accumulating on the
radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat
opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to
enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment
shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the
vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon
dissipate.
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator
and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine
coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, the
contents of the coolant expansion bottle must
also be protected against freezing.
If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions
are required, the cooling system should be pres-
sure tested for leaks.
Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentra-
tion at a minimum of 50% OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) and distilled water
for proper corrosion protection of your engine
which contains aluminum components.
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle
overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your
vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep
the front of the condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or
Winter operation. If replacement is ever neces-
sary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat.
Other designs may result in unsatisfactory
engine coolant (antifreeze) performance, poor
gas mileage, and increased emissions.
WARNING!
Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never
add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine.
Heat causes pressure to build up in the
cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or
engine damage may result.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 398
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 399
(Continued)
CHARGE AIR COOLER — INTER-COOLER
The charge air cooler is positioned below the
radiator and the air conditioner condenser. Air
enters the engine through the air cleaner and
passes through the turbocharger, where it is
pressurized. This pressurized air rapidly reaches
high temperature. The air is then directed through
a hose to the charge air cooler and through
another hose to the intake manifold of the engine.
The air entering the engine has been cooled by
about 50° to 100°F (10° to 38°C). This cooling
process enables more efficient burning of fuel
resulting in fewer emissions.
To guarantee optimum performance of the system,
keep the surfaces of the charge air cooler,
condenser and radiator clean and free of debris.
Periodically check the hoses leading to and from
the charge air cooler for cracks or loose clamps
resulting in loss of pressure and reduced engine
performance.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to ensure brake system performance, all
brake system components should be inspected
periodically. Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in
this section for the proper maintenance intervals.
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be
checked when performing under the hood service
or immediately if the brake system warning lamp
indicates system failure.
If necessary, add fluid to bring level within the
designated marks on the side of the reservoir of
the brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean the top
of the master cylinder area before removing cap.
With disc brakes the fluid level can be expected to
fall as the brake linings wear. However, an
unexpected drop in fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a system check should be conducted.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in
abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive
lining wear, and possible brake damage. You
would not have your full braking capacity in an
emergency.
WARNING!
Use only manufacturer's recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in
“Technical Specifications” for further informa-
tion. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can
severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of
brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on
the original factory installed hydraulic master
cylinder reservoir.
To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep
the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at
all times. Brake fluid in a open container
absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a
lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil
unexpectedly during hard or prolonged
braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This
could result in a collision.
7
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 399
400 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid
to ensure optimum transmission performance and
life. Use only the manufacturer’s specified
transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids And
Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”. It is
important to maintain the transmission fluid at the
correct level using the recommended fluid. No
chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant should
be used.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against
using any special additives in the transmission.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an
engineered product and its performance may be
impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do
not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The
only exception to this policy is the use of special
dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks in six-speed
transmissions. Avoid using transmission sealers as
they may adversely affect seals.
Fluid Level Check — Eight-Speed
Transmission
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not
required, therefore the transmission has no
dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your
transmission fluid level using special service tools.
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer
immediately to have the transmission fluid level
checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper
fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result
in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts,
causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake
fluid can also damage painted and vinyl
surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its
contact with these surfaces.
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contam-
inate the brake fluid. Brake seal components
could be damaged, causing partial or
complete brake failure. This could result in a
collision.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause
deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or
torque converter shudder, and (for six-speed
transmissions) will require more frequent fluid
and filter changes. Refer to “Fluids And
Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for fluid
specifications.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your
transmission as the chemicals can damage your
transmission components. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an
authorized dealer immediately. Severe
transmission damage may occur. An authorized
dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid
level accurately.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 400
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 401
Fluid Level Check — Six-Speed
Transmission
It is best to check the fluid level when the
transmission is at normal operating temperature
(158-176°F / 70-80°C). This normally occurs
after at least 15 miles (25 km) of driving. At normal
operating temperature the fluid cannot be held
comfortably between the fingertips. You can read
the transmission sump temperature in the
instrument cluster screen refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
Use the following procedure to check the
transmission fluid level properly:
1. Monitor the transmission temperature using
the instrument cluster display, and operate
the vehicle as required to reach the normal
operating temperature. If the transmission is
not functioning properly, or the vehicle cannot
be driven, see the NOTE and CAUTION below
about checking the fluid level at colder
temperatures.
2. Park the vehicle on level ground.
3. Run the engine at normal idle speed for at
least 60 seconds, and leave the engine
running for the rest of this procedure.
4. Fully apply the parking brake, and press the
brake pedal.
5. Place the gear selector momentarily into each
gear position (allowing time for the
transmission to fully engage in each position),
ending with the transmission in PARK.
6. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and reinsert
it until seated.
7. Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid
level on both sides. The fluid level reading is
only valid if there is a solid coating of oil on
both sides of the dipstick. Note that the holes
in the dipstick will be full of fluid if the actual
level is at or above the hole. The fluid level
should be between the “HOT” (upper)
reference holes on the dipstick at normal
operating temperature. If the fluid level is low,
add fluid through the dipstick tube to bring it to
the proper level.
Do not overfill. Use ONLY the
specified fluid refer to "Fluids And Lubricants"
in “Technical Specifications” for fluid specifi-
cations. After adding any quantity of oil
through the dipstick tube, wait a minimum of
two minutes for the oil to fully drain into the
transmission before rechecking the fluid level.
NOTE:
If it is necessary to check the transmission below
the operating temperature, the fluid level should
be between the two “COLD” (lower) holes on the
dipstick with the fluid at 60-70°F / 16-21°C. Only
use the COLD region of the dipstick as a rough
reference when setting the fluid level after a trans-
mission service or fluid change. Re-check the fluid
level, and adjust as required, once the trans-
mission reaches normal operating temperature.
8. Reinsert the dipstick. Check for leaks. Release
the parking brake.
CAUTION!
If the fluid temperature is below 50°F (10°C) it
may not register on the dipstick. Do not add fluid
until the temperature is elevated enough to
produce an accurate reading. Run the engine at
idle, in PARK, to warm the fluid.
7
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 401
402 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE:
If it is necessary to check the transmission below
the operating temperature, the fluid level should
be between the two COLD (lower) holes on the
dipstick with the fluid at 68-86°F / 20-30°C.
Only use the COLD region of the dipstick as a rough
reference when setting the fluid level after a trans-
mission service or fluid change. Re-check the fluid
level, and adjust as required, once the trans-
mission reaches normal operating temperature.
Fluid And Filter Changes — Eight-Speed
Transmission
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
installed at the factory will provide satisfactory
lubrication for the life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required.
However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the
transmission is disassembled for any reason.
Fluid And Filter Changes — Six Speed
Transmission
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
In addition, change the fluid and filters if the fluid
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the
transmission is disassembled for any reason.
REAR AXLE AND 4X4 FRONT DRIVING
A
XLE FLUID LEVEL
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are
not required. When the vehicle is serviced for other
reasons the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly
should be inspected. If gear oil leakage is
suspected inspect the fluid level. This inspection
should be made with the vehicle in a level position.
To check the axle fluid, park the vehicle on a level
surface. Take a piece of wire (or zip tie) and make
a 90 degree bend two inches from the end of the
wire. Insert the wire into the fill plug hole and use it
like a dipstick. Remove the wire and measure from
the 90 degree bend to the oil level.
For the 2500 (Non-Power Wagon) axles, the fluid
level should be 4/5 in ± 1/4 in (20.3 mm ±
6.4 mm) below the fill hole for the rear axle and it
should be 1/4 in ± 1/4 in (6.4 mm ± 6.4 mm)
below the fill hole on the front axle.
For the 2500 Power Wagon and all 3500 model
axles, the fluid level should be 1/4 in ± 1/4 in
(6.4 mm ± 6.4 mm) below the fill hole on the
9.25 in front, 11.5 in rear axle, and 12.0 in rear
axle.
Drain And Refill
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Lubricant Selection
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information.
NOTE:
The presence of water in the gear lubricant will
result in corrosion and possible failure of differ-
ential components. Operation of the vehicle in
water, as may be encountered in some off-highway
types of service, will require draining and refilling
the axle to avoid damage.
Limited-Slip Differentials
DO REQUIRE limited slip
oil additive (friction modifiers).
NOTE:
Slight noise and mild shuddering may be evident
while turning a vehicle with limited slip differential
on concrete or dry pavement. These conditions
should be considered normal operation of the
limited slip differential.
CAUTION!
If the fluid temperature is below 50°F (10°C) it
may not register on the dipstick. Do not add fluid
until the temperature is elevated enough to
produce an accurate reading. Run the engine at
idle, in PARK, to warm the fluid.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 402
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 403
TRANSFER CASE
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information.
Fluid Level Check
This fluid level can be checked by removing the
filler plug. The fluid level should be to the bottom
edge of the filler plug hole with the vehicle in a level
position.
Drain And Refill
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for
the proper maintenance intervals.
NOISE CONTROL SYSTEM REQUIRED
M
AINTENANCE & WARRANTY
All vehicles built over 10,000 lb (4,535 kg) Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating and manufactured for sale
and use in the United States are required to
comply with the Federal Government's Exterior
Noise Regulations. These vehicles can be
identified by the Noise Emission Control Label
located in the operator's compartment.
Required Maintenance For Noise Control
Systems
The following maintenance services must be
performed every six months or 7,500 miles
(12,000 km) whichever comes first, to ensure
proper operation of the noise control systems.
In addition, inspection and service should be
performed anytime a malfunction is observed or
suspected. Proper maintenance of the entire
vehicle will help the effectiveness of the noise
control systems.
Exhaust System
Inspect the entire exhaust system for leaks and
damaged parts. Devices such as hangers, clamps,
and U-bolts should be tight and in good condition.
Damaged components, burned or blown out
mufflers, burned or rusted out exhaust pipes
should be replaced according to the procedures
and specifications outlined in the appropriate
service manual.
Air Cleaner Assembly
Inspect air cleaner housing for proper assembly
and fit. Make certain that the air cleaner is properly
positioned and that the cover is tight. Check all
hoses leading to the air cleaner for tightness. The
air filter element must also be clean and serviced
according to the instructions outlined in the
Scheduled Maintenance section of this manual.
7
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 403
404 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tampering With Noise Control System
Prohibited
Federal law prohibits the following acts or the
causing thereof: (1) the removal or rendering
inoperative by any person, other than for purposes
of maintenance, repair, or replacement, of any
device or element of design incorporated into any
new vehicle for the purpose of noise control prior to
its sale or delivery to the ultimate purchaser or
while it is in use, or (2) the use of the vehicle after
such device or element of design has been
removed or rendered inoperative by any person.
Among those acts presumed to constitute
tampering are the acts listed below.
AIR CLEANER
Removal of the air cleaner.
Removal of the air cleaner filter element from
the air cleaner housing.
Removal of the air ducting.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
Removal or rendering inoperative exhaust
system components including the muffler or
tailpipe.
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
Removal or rendering inoperative the fan clutch.
Removal of the fan shroud.
Noise Emission Warranty
The manufacturer warrants that this vehicle as
manufactured by the manufacturer, was designed,
built and equipped to conform at the time it left the
manufacturer's control with all applicable U.S.
EPA Noise Control Regulations.
This warranty covers this vehicle as designed, built
and equipped by the manufacturer, and is not
limited to any particular part, component or system
of the vehicle manufactured by the manufacturer.
Defects in design, assembly or in any part,
component or system of the vehicle as
manufactured by the manufacturer, which, at the
time it left the manufacturer's control, caused
noise emissions to exceed Federal standards, are
covered by this warranty for the life of the vehicle.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 404
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 405
Maintenance Log and Service Chart (Diesel Engines)
Noise Systems Maintenance Chart and Service Log — Insert Month, Day, Year under column mileage closest to the mileage at which service was performed.
MILES 7,500 15,000 22,500 30,000 37,500 45,000 52,500 60,000
KILOMETERS 12,000 24,000 36,000 48,000 60,000 72,000 84,000 96,000
Exhaust system-inspect
Air cleaner
assembly-inspect
ODOMETER READING
PERFORMED BY
PERFORMED AT
MILES 67,500 75,000 82,500 90,000 97,500 105,000 112,500 120,000
KILOMETERS 108,000 120,000 132,000 144,000 156,000 168,000 180,000 192,000
Exhaust system-inspect
Air cleaner
assembly-inspect
ODOMETER READING
PERFORMED BY
PERFORMED AT
7
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 405
406 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
HOISTING
A conventional floor jack may be used at the
jacking locations. However, a floor jack or frame
hoist must never be used on any other parts of the
underbody.
TIRES
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the
following information: Tire Markings, Tire
Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
NOTE:
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter
“P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
European — Metric tire sizing is based on Euro-
pean design standards. Tires designed to this
standard have the tire size molded into the side-
wall beginning with the section width. The letter
"P" is absent from this tire size designation.
Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on
US design standards. The size designation for
LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires
except for the letters “LT” that are molded into
the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are designed for tempo-
rary emergency use only. Temporary high pres-
sure compact spare tires have the letter “T” or
“S” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on US design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter
molded into the sidewall.
Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
CAUTION!
Never use a floor jack directly under the
differential housing of a loaded truck or damage
to your vehicle may result.
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code
(TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 406
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 407
TIRE SIZING CHART
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
"R" means radial construction, or
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
7
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 407
408 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading,
road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
EXAMPLE:
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 408
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 409
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including
the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is
not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured.
Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
7
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 409
410 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the
driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including
the spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and
inflate to the recommended pressure for your
vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door) Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)
Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a
minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the
tire placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the
original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 410
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 411
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the
vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear,
and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your
vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying
capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions,
tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified
on the Tire and Loading Information placard in
“Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating”
section of this manual.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross
axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading,
and trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle Loading” in the
“Starting And Operating” section of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of
your vehicle, locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading
Information placard. The combined weight of
occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue
weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
7
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 411
412 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and
there will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle,
the amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as
shown in step 4.
NOTE:
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing
capacities of your vehicle with varying seating
configurations and number and size of occu-
pants. This table is for illustration purposes only
and may not be accurate for the seating and
load carry capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
865 lbs (392 kg).
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire
pressure:
Safety
Fuel Economy
Tread Wear
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety
Both underinflation and overinflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the
steering.
NOTE:
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may
cause erratic and unpredictable steering
response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous.
Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle
handling, and increase your stopping distance.
Use tires of the recommended load capacity for
your vehicle. Never overload them.
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and
can cause collisions.
Underinflation increases tire flexing and can
result in overheating and tire failure.
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes
can cause damage that result in tire failure.
Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly,
resulting in loss of vehicle control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your
vehicle.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to
drift to the right or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
WARNING!
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 412
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 413
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable
ride. Overinflation produces a jarring and
uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's
side door.
At least once a month:
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
make a visual judgement when determining
proper inflation. Tires may look properly inflated
even when they are under-inflated.
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are
always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The cold
tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire
sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change.
Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure
inside a garage, especially in the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C)
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then
the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased
by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for
every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature
condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi
(13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce
this normal pressure build-up or your tire pressure
will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where
speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle
can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct
tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased
tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be
required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to
an authorized tire dealer or original equipment
vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating
speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
Radial Ply Tires
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added strain
on your tires could cause them to fail. You could
have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle
loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous
speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of
tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to
handle poorly. The instability could cause a
collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of
four. Never combine them with other types of
tires.
7
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 413
414 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if
it meets the following criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
The damage is only on the tread section of your
tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an
inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs
and additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical
size and service description (Load Index and
Speed Symbol). Replace the tire pressure sensor
as well as it is not designed to be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a
rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of
inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run
Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is
of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire
reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving
capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a run flat tire
is changed after driving with underinflated tire
condition, please replace the TPMS sensor as it is
not designed to be reused when driven under run
flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition.
NOTE:
TPMS sensor must be replaced after driving the
vehicle on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at
full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the
run flat mode.
Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”
in “Safety” for further information.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions,
do not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph
(48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds
continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment
tires to help you in determining when your tires
should be replaced.
Tire Tread
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the
tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the
tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm).
When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your
vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 414
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 415
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
Driving style.
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pres-
sures can cause uneven wear patterns to
develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in
the need for earlier tire replacement.
Distance driven.
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V
or higher, and Summer tires typically have a
reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per
the vehicle scheduled maintenance is highly
recommended.
NOTE:
Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well when
installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing
tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as
little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires
from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of
many characteristics. They should be inspected
regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation
pressures. The manufacturer strongly
recommends that you use tires equivalent to the
originals in size, quality and performance when
replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators” in this section. Refer to
the Tire and Loading Information placard or the
Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation
of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for
your tire will be found on the original equipment
tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire
Safety Information” section of this manual for
more information relating to the Load Index and
Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or
two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can
seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever
replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel’s
specifications match those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any
questions you may have on tire specifications or
capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement
tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and
ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after
six years, regardless of the remaining tread.
Failure to follow this warning can result in
sudden tire failure. You could lose control and
have a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or
speed rating other than that specified for your
vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved
tires and wheels may change suspension
dimensions and performance characteristics,
resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpre-
dictable handling and stress to steering and
suspension components. You could lose
control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death. Use only the tire and
wheel sizes with load ratings approved for
your vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a
smaller load index could result in tire over-
loading and failure. You could lose control and
have a collision.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in
sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
7
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 415
416 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRE TYPES
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons
(Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction
levels may vary between different all season tires.
All season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S,
M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use all
season tires only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires —
If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in
snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with
Summer tires, be aware these tires are not
designed for Winter or cold driving conditions.
Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient
temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads
are covered with ice or snow. For more
information, contact an authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the
tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow
tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified
by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire
sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the original
equipment tires. Use snow tires only in
sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your
vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than
what was originally equipped with your vehicle and
should not be operated at sustained speeds over
75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an
authorized tire dealer for recommended safe
operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice,
skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces
may be poorer than that of non-studded tires.
Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local
laws should be checked before using these tire
types.
SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
Refer to the “Towing Requirements - Tires” in
“Starting And Operating” for restrictions when
towing with a spare tire designated for temporary
emergency use.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different
size may result in false speedometer and
odometer readings.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions.
You could lose vehicle control, resulting in
severe injury or death. Driving too fast for
conditions also creates the possibility of loss of
vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic car
wash with a compact or limited use temporary
spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 416
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 417
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the
original equipment tire and wheel found on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire
may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle.
If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire
rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a compact spare by looking at the
spare tire description on the Tire and Loading
Information Placard located on the driver’s side
door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the
letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
compact spare tire. Do not install more than one
compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any
given time.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a collapsible spare by looking at the
spare tire description on the Tire and Loading
Information Placard located on the driver’s side
door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description
example: 165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the
collapsible tire using the electric air pump before
lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
collapsible spare tire.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread
wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the
warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to
do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of
vehicle control.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread
wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the
warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to
do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of
vehicle control.
7
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 417
418 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire may look like the originally equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is
not. This spare tire may have limited tread life.
When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire
needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
at the first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary
emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label
located on the limited use spare wheel. This label
contains the driving limitations for this spare. This
tire may look like the original equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
at the first opportunity.
WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum
and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned
regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to
maintain their luster and to prevent corrosion.
Wash wheels with the same soap solution
recommended for the body of the vehicle and
remember to always wash when the surfaces are
not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on dirt
roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap to
wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or
a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
protective coating that helps keep them from
corroding and tarnishing.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive
more than the speed listed on the limited use
spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire
inflation pressures listed on your Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and
reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or
harsh brushes. Many aftermarket wheel
cleaners and automatic car washes may
damage the wheel's protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar®
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 418
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 419
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and
equipment to prevent damage to the wheels.
Mopar® Wheel Treatment or Mopar® Chrome
Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for
aluminum or chrome wheels.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with
wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the
brakes to remove the water droplets from the
brake components. This activity will remove the
red rust on the brake rotors and prevent vehicle
vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low
Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
TIRE CHAINS AND TRACTION DEVICES
Use of traction devices require sufficient
tire-to-body clearance. Due to limited clearance,
the following traction devices are recommended.
Follow these recommendations to guard against
damage.
Traction device must be of proper size for the
tire, as recommended by the traction device
manufacturer.
No other tire sizes are recommended for use
with a tire chain or traction device.
2500 Models
Install on rear tires only.
For LT245/70R17E, LT275/70R18E and
LT285/60R20E tires, use of a U-class snow
chain is recommended.
2500 Power Wagon Models
Install on rear tires only.
For a LT285/70R17D tire, use of a U-class snow
chain is recommended.
3500 (Single Rear Wheel) Models
Install on rear tires only.
For LT275/70R18E and LT285/60R20E tires,
use of a U-class snow chain is recommended.
3500 (Dual Rear Wheel) Models
Install on front/rear tires.
For a LT235/80R17E tire, use of a U-class snow
chain is recommended.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel's protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap,
Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives,
or polishing compounds. They will permanently
damage this finish and such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP AND
WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular
basis; this is all that is required to maintain this
finish.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type
(M+S, Snow) between front and rear axles can
cause unpredictable handling. You could lose
control and have a collision.
7
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 419
420 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles
operate at different loads and perform different
steering, driving, and braking functions. For these
reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of
tires. The benefits of rotation are especially
worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as
those on all season type tires. Rotation will
increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow
and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth,
quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper
maintenance intervals. More frequent rotation is
permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation
being performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward
cross” shown in the following diagram. This
rotation pattern does not apply to some directional
tires that must not be reversed.
Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross)
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe
the following precautions:
Because of restricted traction device clear-
ance between tires and other suspension
components, it is important that only traction
devices in good condition are used. Broken
devices can cause serious damage. Stop the
vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could
indicate device breakage. Remove the
damaged parts of the device before further
use.
Install device as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
Autosock traction devices do not require
retightening.
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and
large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
instructions on the method of installation,
operating speed, and conditions for use.
Always use the suggested operating speed of
the device manufacturer if it is less than
30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use traction devices on a compact
spare tire.
CAUTION!
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 420
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 421
(Continued)
Dual Rear Wheels — If Equipped
The tires used on dual wheel assemblies should be
matched for wear to prevent overloading one tire in
a set. To check if tires are even, lay a straight edge
across all four tires. The straight edge should touch
all the tires.
Tire Rotation
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure
Information System (TPIS):
The Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS)
uses unique sensors in the inner rear wheels to
help identify them from the outer rear wheels,
because of this, the inner and outer wheel loca-
tions can’t be switched.
After a tire rotation is completed, as shown
below, the system can auto learn the locations
of each sensor ID. Auto learning/localization
occurs when the vehicle ignition status is
changed from Off to On and speeds of greater
than 5 mph (8km/h) are obtained and remain
over 5 mph (8km/h) for at about a 15 minute
period. You may need to drive for 20 minutes to
account slower speeds and stops.
If the tires are rotated incorrectly, The auto
localization of the TPIS sensors will fail to locate
correctly resulting in incorrect locations for the
pressure values displayed in the instrument
cluster.
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
CAUTION!
3500 Dual Rear Tires may only have one
approved direction of rotation. This is to
accommodate the asymmetrical design
(tread pattern) of the On/Off-Road tire and the
use of Outline White Letter (OWL) tires.
When replacing a flat, the spare tire may have
to be remounted on the rim, or installed at a
different location, to maintain the correct
placement of the tire on the wheel relative to
the tire/wheel position on the truck. For
example, if the spare is used to replace an
outer rear tire it will have to be remounted on
the rim so that the wheel is dished inward.
That way the tread design of asymmetrical
tires and the white writing of the OWL tires will
maintain proper position.
CAUTION!
7
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 421
422 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TREADWEAR
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well on
the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices, and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
TRACTION GRADES
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement, as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
TEMPERATURE GRADES
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than
21 days, we recommend that you take the
following steps to minimize the drain on your
vehicle's battery:
Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,
run the air conditioning system at idle for about
five minutes in the fresh air and high blower
setting. This will ensure adequate system lubri-
cation to minimize the possibility of compressor
damage when the system is started again.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and
does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed,
under-inflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 422
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 423
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
A
GENTS
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to
geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that
make roads passable in snow and ice and those
that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during
other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in
your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your
vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on
which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold
weather and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody
protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will
enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the
corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal
of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
Stone and gravel impact.
Insects, tree sap and tar.
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
BODY AND UNDERBODY MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights
and fog lights that are lighter and less susceptible
to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
therefore different lens cleaning procedures must
be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses
and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry
cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap
solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to
clean the lenses.
Tri-Fold Soft Tonneau Cover Care —
If Equipped
For cleaning and protecting the vinyl Tri-Fold
Tonneau cover, use Mopar® Whitewall & Vinyl Top
Cleaner and Mopar® Leather and Vinyl
Conditioner/Protectant.
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your
vehicle in the shade using Mopar® Car Wash, or
a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels
completely with clear water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar®
Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove.
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to
protect your paint finish. Take care never to
scratch the paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out
the paint finish.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning mate-
rials such as steel wool or scouring powder
that will scratch metal and painted surfaces.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal
of paint and decals.
7
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 423
424 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Bumper Care
The customer is responsible to clean and maintain
the chrome components of the vehicle. Washing
away road debris and salt using an automotive
soap. Bumpers should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their
luster and to prevent corrosion.
Your bumpers are susceptible to deterioration
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on dirt
roads. Do not use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush.
They can stain or damage the protective coating
that helps keep them from corroding and
tarnishing.
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you
drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage
at least once a month.
It is important that the drain holes in the lower
edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be
kept clear and open.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the
paint, touch them up immediately. The cost of
such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or
similar cause that destroys the paint and protec-
tive coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon
as possible. The cost of such repairs is consid-
ered the responsibility of the owner.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
materials are well packaged and sealed.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
consider mud or stone shields behind each
wheel.
Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as
soon as possible. An authorized dealer has
touch up paint to match the color of your
vehicle.
Spray-On Bedliner – If Equipped
During ownership, the shine and luster of the
Spray-On Bedliner can fade from oxidation, road
dirt, heavy-duty hauling and hard water stains.
Weathering and UV exposure will lead to fading,
dulling, and loss of gloss over time.
To help maintain the appearance of your Spray-On
Bedliner, the manufacturer recommends you
periodically rinse all loose dirt from your truck bed
and clean your truck at least twice per year using
the Mopar® Spray-On Bedliner Conditioner
available at a local authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush, metal polishes, or oven cleaner. These
products may damage the bumper’s protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap,
Mopar® Chrome Cleaner, or equivalent is
recommended.
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions, strong alkaline additives, or
harsh brushes. Many aftermarket cleaners and
automatic car washes may damage the
bumper’s protective finish. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, Mopar® Chrome Cleaner, or
equivalent is recommended.
CAUTION!
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 424
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 425
To Help Maintain The Appearance Of Your
Spray-On Bedliner, Follow The Steps Below:
1. Rinse your truck bed out with water to remove
any loose dirt and debris.
2. Mix a mild soap or detergent with water with a
soft cloth or brush.
3. Rinse bedliner with water.
4. Once dry, apply a small amount of Mopar®
Spray-On Bedliner Conditioner to a moist towel
or sponge and wipe over the entire surface of
the truck bedliner.
Spray-On Bedliners are chemically-resistant to
many different types of chemicals (including
gasoline, oil, hydraulic fluids) for short periods of
time. If a spill occurs on your Spray-On Bedliner,
rinse the truck out as soon as possible to avoid
permanent damage.
Repairing The Spray-On Bedliner
While extremely tough, it is possible to damage a
Spray-On Bedliner. One common condition is when
loading a heavy pallet and dragging that pallet
across the floor of the bed. If a nail or sharp point
is exposed under the weight of the pallet a scratch
or tear is possible. While not covered by your new
vehicle warranty, a cosmetic fix to cover the metal
exposed by the scratch is required. To repair a tear
or gouge, follow the directions provided in the
Mopar® Quick Repair Kit.
INTERIORS
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery
and carpeting.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure —
If Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following
manner:
Remove as much of the stain as possible by
blotting with a clean, dry towel.
Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp
towel.
For tough stains, apply Mopar® Total Clean, or
a mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and
remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to
remove soap residue.
For grease stains, apply Mopar® Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap
residue.
Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form
of protectants on Stain Repel products.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the
fabric. Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution
or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from
the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or
if the buckles do not work properly.
WARNING!
Do not use silicon-based protection products to
clean your bedliner. Silicon-based products can
become slippery and may result in personal
injury.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning
purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and
if used in closed areas they may cause
respiratory harm.
7
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 425
426 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
NOTE:
If the belts retract slowly, inspect the upper turning
loop for soiling. If soiling is present, clean with a
wet soft cloth until all residue is removed.
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning
the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching
the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap
solution may be used, but do not use high
alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap
is used, wipe clean with a clean damp cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
LEATHER PARTS
Mopar® Total Clean is specifically recommended
for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by
regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small
particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage
the leather upholstery and should be removed
promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be
removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar® Total
Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not
use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents,
detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery. Application of a leather
conditioner is not required to maintain the original
condition.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye
transfer more so than darker colors. The leather is
designed for easy cleaning, and FCA recommends
Mopar® total care leather cleaner applied on a
cloth to clean the leather seats as needed.
GLASS SURFACES
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular
basis with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or any
commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never
use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when
cleaning the inside rear window equipped with
electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp
instruments that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner
on the towel or cloth that you are using. Do not
spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays,
or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced
after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e.,
bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repel-
lents, suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the
plastic, painted, or decorated surfaces of the
interior may cause permanent damage. Wipe
away immediately.
Damage caused by these type of products
may not be covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or
Ketone based cleaning products to clean leather
upholstery, as damage to the upholstery may
result.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 426
427
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
IDENTIFICATION DATA
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on
the left front corner of the instrument panel, visible
through the windshield.
Vehicle Identification Number
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
If power assist is lost for any reason (for example,
repeated brake applications with the engine off),
the brakes will still function. However, you will
experience a substantial increase in braking effort
to stop the vehicle.
If either the front or rear hydraulic system loses
normal braking capability, the remaining system
will still function with some loss of overall braking
effectiveness. This will be evident by increased
pedal travel during application, greater pedal force
required to slow or stop, and activation of the
“Brake Warning Light” and/or the “ABS Warning
Light” during brake use.
HYDRAULIC BRAKE ASSIST —
I
F EQUIPPED
The brake system power assist is provided by a
hydro-boost unit which shares fluid with the power
steering system. You may experience some
clicking or hissing noises from the hydro-boost
system during hard braking conditions.
NOTE:
Under cold temperatures, pedal effort will be
higher than normal until the power steering fluid
reaches operating temperature.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the
vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and
reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts
should be torqued using a properly calibrated
torque wrench using a high quality six sided (hex)
deep wall socket.
8
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 427
428 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil
before tightening.
NOTE:
Dual wheels are flat mounted, center piloted. The
lug nuts are a two-piece assembly. When the tires
are being rotated or replaced, clean these lug nuts
at the interface between the lug nut/bolt and the
washer.
Do not oil wheel studs.
Two-Piece Lug Nut
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or
loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until
each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure
that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt
(do not insert it halfway).
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt
torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
Four And Five Lug Nuts/Bolts Torque Pattern
Lug Nut/
Bolt
Torque
Lug Nut/
Bolt Type
**Lug
Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/
Bolt
Socket
Size
130 Ft-Lb
(176 N·m)
Cone
M14 x
1.50
22 mm
129 Ft-Lb
(175 N·m)
Flanged
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow
this warning may result in personal injury.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 428
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 429
FUEL REQUIREMENTS — GAS ENGINE
6.4L ENGINE
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater
than 15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide
satisfactory fuel economy and
performance when using high quality
unleaded gasoline having a posted octane number
range of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method.
While operating on gasoline with an octane
number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound from
the engine is not a cause for concern. However, if
the engine is heard making a heavy knocking
sound, see dealer immediately. Use of gasoline
with an octane number lower than 87 can cause
engine failure and may void or not be covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as
hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand of
gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use of
cleaner burning gasoline referred to as
“Reformulated Gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline
contains oxygenates and are specifically blended
to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air
quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended.
Properly blended reformulated gasoline will
provide improved performance and durability of
engine and fuel system components.
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper
octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents,
corrosion and stability additives are
recommended. Using gasolines that have these
additives will help improve fuel economy, reduce
emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
contains a higher level of detergents to
further aide in minimizing engine and
fuel system deposits. When available,
the usage of TOP TIER Detergent gasoline is
recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list
of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents
should be avoided. Many of these materials
intended for gum and varnish removal may contain
active solvents or similar ingredients. These can
harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials.
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with
oxygenates such as ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or
gasoline containing methanol are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol,
or gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol
(E-15). Use of these blends may result in starting
and drivability problems, damage critical fuel
system components, cause emissions to exceed
the applicable standard, and/or cause the
Malfunction Indicator Light to illuminate. Please
observe pump labels as they should clearly
communicate if a fuel contains greater than
15% ethanol (E-15).
8
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 429
430 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
(Continued)
DO NOT USE E-85 IN NON-FLEX FUEL
V
EHICLES
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with
gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use
of gasoline with higher ethanol content may void
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these
symptoms:
Operate in a lean mode.
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
Poor engine performance.
Poor cold start and cold drivability.
Increased risk for fuel system component
corrosion.
CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM
M
ODIFICATIONS
Modifications that allow the engine to run on
Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane
(LP) may result in damage to the engine,
emissions, and fuel system components. Problems
that result from running CNG or LP are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
MMT IN GASOLINE
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl
(MMT) is a manganese-containing metallic additive
that is blended into some gasoline to increase
octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no
performance advantage beyond gasoline of the
same octane number without MMT. Gasoline
blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and
reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that
gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. The
MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on
the gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask your
gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains
MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California
reformulated gasoline.
FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your
vehicle’s performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by
Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair
engine performance and damage the emis-
sions control system.
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic
converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent
burning odor or some light smoke, your engine
may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may
require immediate service. Contact an
authorized dealer for service assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recom-
mended. Most of these products contain high
concentrations of methanol. Fuel system
damage or vehicle performance problems
resulting from the use of such fuels or addi-
tives is not the responsibility of the manufac-
turer and may void or not be covered under
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 430
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 431
CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS
FUEL REQUIREMENTS – DIESEL ENGINE
Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable
supplier in your vehicle. Federal law requires that
you must fuel this vehicle with Ultra Low Sulfur
Highway Diesel fuel (15 ppm Sulfur maximum) and
prohibits the use of Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel
(500 ppm Sulfur maximum) to avoid damage to the
emissions control system.
For most year-round service, No. 2 diesel fuel
meeting ASTM (formerly known as the American
Society for Testing and Materials) specification
D-975 Grade S15 will provide good performance.
If the vehicle is exposed to extreme cold
(below 20°F or -7°C), or is required to operate at
colder-than-normal conditions for prolonged
periods, use climatized No. 2 diesel fuel or dilute
the No. 2 diesel fuel with 50% No. 1 diesel fuel.
This will provide better protection from fuel gelling
or wax-plugging of the fuel filters.
Diesel fuel is seldom completely free of water. To
prevent fuel system trouble, drain the
accumulated water from the fuel/water separator
using the fuel/water separator drain provided on
both fuel filters. If you buy good quality fuel and
follow the cold weather advice above, fuel
conditioners should not be required in your vehicle.
If available in your area, a high cetane “premium”
diesel fuel may offer improved cold-starting and
warm-up performance.
FUEL SPECIFICATIONS
The Cummins® Turbo Diesel engine has been
developed to take advantage of the high energy
content and generally lower cost No. 2 Ultra Low
Sulfur diesel fuel or No. 2 Ultra Low Sulfur
climatized diesel fuels. Experience has shown that
it also operates on No. 1 Ultra Low Sulfur diesel
fuels or other fuels within specification.
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is
deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent
carbon monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless
gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a
closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in
a parked vehicle with the engine running for
an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in
an open area with the engine running for more
than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the
vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system
inspected every time the vehicle is raised.
Have any abnormal conditions repaired
promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
WARNING!
Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel blending
agent. They can be unstable under certain
conditions and hazardous or explosive when
mixed with diesel fuel.
CAUTION!
If the “Water in Fuel Indicator Light” remains on,
DO NOT START engine before you drain the water
from the fuel filter(s) to avoid engine damage.
Refer to “Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter”
in “Servicing And Maintenance” for further
information.
8
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 431
432 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
NOTE:
If you accidentally fill the fuel tank with gasoline
on your diesel vehicle, do not start the vehicle. If
you restart your vehicle you risk damaging the
engine and fuel system. Please call an autho-
rized dealer for service.
A maximum blend of 5% biodiesel meeting
ASTM specification D-975 may be used with
your Cummins® diesel engine. (Chassis Cab
models not configured with B20 capability.)
A maximum blend of 20% biodiesel meeting
ASTM specification D-7467 may be used with
your Cummins® diesel engine. (Pickup models
and Chassis Cab models configured with B20
Capability.)
In addition, commercially available fuel addi-
tives are not necessary for the proper operation
of your Cummins® diesel engine. However, if
seasonably adjusted fuel is not available and
you are operating below 20°F (-6°C), Mopar®
Premium Diesel Fuel Treatment (or equivalent)
may be beneficial to avoid fuel gelling.
No. 1 Ultra Low Sulfur diesel fuel should only
be used where extended arctic conditions
(0°F or -18°C) exist.
BIODIESEL FUEL REQUIREMENTS
Pickup Models And Chassis Cab Models
Ordered With B20 Option
Your vehicle has been validated and approved for
the use of biodiesel in blends up to 20% (B20)
provided that you comply with the requirements
outlined below. It is important that you understand
and comply with these requirements. Failure to
comply with Oil Change requirements for vehicles
operating on biodiesel blends up to B20 will result
in premature engine wear. Such wear is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Biodiesel is a fuel produced from renewable
resources typically derived from animal fat,
rapeseed oil (Rapeseed Methyl Ester (RME) base),
or soybean oil (Soy Methyl Ester (SME or SOME)
base). Biodiesel fuel has inherent limitations which
require that you understand and adhere to the
following requirements if you use blends of
biodiesel greater then 5% but not greater than
20% (B6-B20). There are no unique restrictions for
the use of B5. Use of blends greater than 20% is
not approved. Use of blends greater than 20% can
result in engine damage. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fuel Quality — Must Comply With ASTM Standards
The quality of biodiesel fuel may vary widely.
Only fuel produced by a BQ9000 supplier to the
following specifications may be blended to meet
biodiesel blend (B6–B20) fuel meeting ASTM
specification D-7467:
Petrodiesel fuel meeting ASTM specification
D-975 and biodiesel fuel (B100) meeting ASTM
specification D-6751.
Fuel Oxidation Stability — Must Use Fuel
Within Six Months Of Manufacture
Biodiesel fuel has poor oxidation stability which
can result in long term storage problems. Fuel
produced to approved ASTM standards, if stored
properly, provides for protection against fuel
oxidation for up to six months.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 432
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 433
Fuel Water Separation — Must Use
Mopar®/Cummins® Approved Fuel Filter
Elements
You must use Mopar®/Cummins® approved fuel
filter elements in both your engine mounted filter
and frame mounted filter.
Biodiesel fuel has a natural affinity to water and
water accelerates microbial growth. Your Mopar®/
Cummins® filtration system is designed to provide
adequate fuel water separation capabilities.
Biodiesel Fuel Properties — Low Ambient
Temperatures
Biodiesel fuel may gel or solidify at low ambient
temperatures, which may pose problems for both
storage and operation. Precautions can be
necessary at low ambient temperatures, such as
storing the fuel in a heated building or a heated
storage tank, or using cold temperature additives.
Fuel In Oil Dilution — Must Adhere To
Required Oil Change Interval
Fuel dilution of lubricating oil has been observed
with the use of biodiesel fuel. Fuel in oil must not
exceed 5%. To ensure this limit is met your oil
change interval must be maintained to the
following schedule:
Ram PickUp 2500/3500 Only — 15,000 Miles*
(*unless otherwise notified with a oil service
message)
CAUTION!
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 15,000 miles (24 000 km)
pickup or 12,500 miles (20 000 km) chassis
cab if operation occurs with greater than
5% biodiesel blends. Oil change intervals
should not exceed 6 months in either case.
Failure to comply with these Oil Change
requirements for vehicles operating on
biodiesel blends up to B20 may result in
premature engine wear. Such wear is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
B20 Biodiesel capable: The engine may suffer
severe damage if operated with concentra-
tions of Biodiesel higher than 20%.
8
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 433
434 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUID CAPACITIES — GAS ENGINE
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
2500/3500 Shortbed Models 31 Gallons 117 Liters
2500/3500 Longbed Models 32 Gallons 121 Liters
2500/3500 Crew Cab Longbed Models — If Equipped 50 Gallons 189 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
6.4L Engine (We recommend you use SAE 0W-40 engine oil meeting the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS-12633 for use in all operating temperatures.)
7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System
6.4L Engine – (We recommend you use Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
(240,000 km) Formula that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.)
16.6 Quarts 15.7 Liters
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 434
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 435
FLUID CAPACITIES — DIESEL ENGINE
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
2500/3500 Standard Cab Longbed Models 28 Gallons 106 Liters
2500/3500 Crew/Mega Cab Shortbed Models 31 Gallons 117 Liters
2500/3500 Crew Cab Longbed Models 32 Gallons 121 Liters
2500/3500 Crew Cab Longbed Models — If
Equipped
50 Gallons 189 Liters
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank 5.7 Gallons 21 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
6.7L Turbo Diesel Engine 12 Quarts 11.4 Liters
Cooling System
6.7L Turbo Diesel Engine (Mopar® Engine Coolant/
Antifreeze 10 Year/150,000 Mile [240,000 km]
Formula)
22.0 Quarts 20.8 Liters
8
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 435
436 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — GAS ENGINE
ENGINE
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend you use Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT
(Organic Additive Technology).
Engine Oil – 6.4L
For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute
(API) categories of SN. The manufacturer recommends the use of Pennzoil Ultra 0W-40 or equivalent
Mopar® engine oil meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-12633 for use in all
operating temperatures.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use Mopar® brand Engine Oil Filters.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use Mopar® Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection – 6.4L Engines 87 Octane Recommended (R+M)/2, 0-15% Ethanol (Do not use E-85).
CAUTION!
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and
may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive
Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into
the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant
(antifreeze) is not recommended.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 436
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 437
CHASSIS
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — DIESEL ENGINE
ENGINE
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission – Eight-Speed Automatic
Use only Mopar® ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the
correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission.
Transfer Case We recommend you use Mopar® Transfer Case Lubricant for Borg Warner 44-44 and 44-45.
Front and Rear Axle
We recommend you use SAE 75W-85 HD Ram GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant in 9.25 Front, 11.5 and
12.0 (Single Rear Wheel) Rear Axles. Use Mopar® GL-5 Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W-140 in
12.0 (Dual Rear Wheel) Rear axles. Limited slip additive is required for limited slip axles.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar® DOT 3.
Power Steering Reservoir
We recommend you use Mopar® Power Steering Fluid +4 or Mopar® ATF+4 Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend you use Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT
(Organic Additive Technology).
Engine Oil
In ambient temperatures above 0°F (-18°C), we recommend you use 10W-30 engine oil such as
Mopar®, Shell Rotella and Shell Rimula that meets FCA Material Standard MS-10902 and the API CK-4
engine oil category is required. Products meeting Cummins® CES 20081 may also be used. The
identification of these engine oils is typically located on the back of the oil container.
In ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C), we recommend you use 5W-40
synthetic engine oil such as
Mopar®, Shell Rotella and Shell Rimula that meets FCA Material Standard MS-10902 and the API CK-4
engine oil category is required.
8
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 437
438 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use Mopar® Engine Oil Filters.
Fuel Filters
We recommend you use Mopar® Fuel Filter. Must meet 3 micron rating (engine mounted filter). Must
meet 5 micron rating (chassis mounted filter).
Using a fuel filter that does not meet the manufacturers
filtration and water separating requirements can severely impact fuel system life and reliability.
Crankcase Ventilation Filter We recommend you use Mopar® CCV Filter.
Fuel Selection
Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable supplier in your vehicle. Federal law requires that you must
fuel this vehicle with Ultra Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (15 ppm Sulfur maximum) and prohibits the
use of Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (500 ppm Sulfur maximum) to avoid damage to the emissions
control system.
For most year-round service, No. 2 diesel fuel meeting ASTM specification D-975 Grade S15 will provide
good performance.
If climatized or diesel Number 1 ULSD fuel is not available, and you are operating below (20°F/-6°C), in
sustained arctic conditions, Mopar® Premium Diesel Fuel Treatment (or equivalent) is recommended to
avoid gelling.
This vehicle is fully compatible with biodiesel blends up to 5% biodiesel meeting ASTM specification
D-975. Pickup models, and Chassis Cab models configured with optional B20 capability, are additionally
compatible with 20% biodiesel meeting ASTM specification D-7467.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid
Mopar® Diesel Exhaust Fluid (API Certified) (DEF) or equivalent that has been API Certified to the
ISO 22241 standard. Use of fluids not API Certified to ISO 22241 may result in system damage. You can
receive assistance in locating DEF in the United States by calling 866-RAM-INFO (866-726-4636). In
Canada call 1–800–465–2001 (English) or 1–800–387–9983 (French).
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 438
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 439
CHASSIS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission – 6.7L Diesel with 68RFE
Only use ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid. Failure to use ATF+4 fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission. We recommend Mopar® ATF+4 fluid.
Automatic Transmission – 6.7L Diesel with AISIN
(AS69RC)
Only use Mopar® ASRC Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent.Failure to use the proper fluid may
affect the function or performance of your transmission
Transfer Case We recommend you use Mopar® BW44–44 Transfer Case Fluid.
Front and Rear Axle Fluid (2500/3500)
We recommend you use SAE 75W-85 HD Ram GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant in 9.25 Front, 11.5 and
12.0 (Single Rear Wheel) Rear Axles. Use Mopar® GL-5 Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W-140 in
12.0 (Dual Rear Wheel) Rear axles. Limited slip additive is required for limited slip axles.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar® DOT 3.
8
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 439
440
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect
4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch or 12-inch display,
refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact software
for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may
be equipped with both wired and wireless
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to
send and receive information. This information
allows systems and features in your vehicle to
function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and
unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless
communications. Vehicle software technology
continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC,
working with its suppliers, evaluates and takes
appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a
computer or other devices, your vehicle may
require software updates to improve the usability
and performance of your systems or to reduce the
potential risk of unauthorized and unlawful access
to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the
most recent version of vehicle software (such as
Uconnect software) is installed.
NOTE:
FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you
directly regarding software updates.
To help further improve vehicle security and
minimize the potential risk of a security breach,
vehicle owners should:
Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com
(US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca
(Canadian Residents) to learn about avail-
able Uconnect software updates.
Only connect and use trusted media
devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications
cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully
intercept information and private communications
without your consent. For further information, refer
to “Data Collection & Privacy” in your Uconnect
Owner’s Manual Supplement or “Onboard
Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems
are breached. It may be possible that vehicle
systems, including safety related systems,
could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control
could occur that may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD)
into your vehicle if it came from a trusted
source. Media of unknown origin could
possibly contain malicious software, and if
installed in your vehicle, it may increase the
possibility for vehicle systems to be breached.
As always, if you experience unusual vehicle
behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest
authorized dealer immediately.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 440
MULTIMEDIA 441
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of
buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the
faceplate located on the center of the instrument
panel. These buttons allow you to access and
change the customer programmable features.
Many features can vary by vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or
beside the Uconnect system in the center of
the instrument panel. In addition, there is a
Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right side.
Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and
change settings. Push the center of the control
knob one or more times to select or change a
setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have Screen Off
and Mute buttons on the faceplate.
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn
off the Uconnect screen. Push the button again or
tap the screen to turn the screen on.
Push the Back Arrow button to exit out of a Menu
or certain option on the Uconnect system.
UCONNECT 3 SETTINGS
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Buttons On The
Touchscreen And Buttons On The Faceplate
Push the SETTINGS button, then press the Settings
button on the touchscreen (if equipped) to display
the settings menu screen. In this mode the
Uconnect system allows you to access
programmable features that may be equipped
such as Language, Display, Units, Voice, Clock,
Safety/Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Power
Side Steps (if equipped), Auto-On Comfort Systems
(if equipped), Engine Off Options, Suspension
(if equipped), Trailer Brake (if equipped), Audio,
Phone/Bluetooth®, SiriusXM® Setup (if
equipped), Restore Default Settings, and Clear
Personal Data.
NOTE:
Only one category may be selected at a time.
When making a selection, press the button on the
touchscreen to enter the desired menu. Once in
the desired menu, press and release the preferred
setting until the button is highlighted. Once the
setting is complete, either press the Back Arrow or
the Done button on the touchscreen or push the
Back button on the faceplate to return to the
previous menu. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow
button on the touchscreen on the right side of the
screen will allow you to toggle up or down through
the list of available settings.
NOTE:
All settings should be changed with the ignition in
the ON/RUN position.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
9
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 441
442 MULTIMEDIA
Language
Display
After pressing the Language button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Set Language English Français Español
NOTE:
When the “Set Language” feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages (English / Français / Español) for all display nomenclature, including
the trip functions and the Navigation system (if equipped). Press the Set Language button on the touchscreen, then press the desired language button on the
touchscreen until a check mark appears next to the language, showing that setting has been selected.
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Auto Manual
Touchscreen Beep On Off
Phone Pop-Up On Off
Fuel Saver Display On Off
NOTE:
The “Fuel Saver Display” feature will allow you to enable fuel saver mode and will be displayed in the Instrument Cluster Display.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 442
MULTIMEDIA 443
Units
Voice
After pressing Units on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Units US Metric Custom
Speed MPH km/h
Distance mi km
Fuel Consumption MPG (UG) MPG (UK) L/100 km km/L
Pressure psi kPa bar
Power — If Equipped HP (US) HP (UK) Kw
Temperature °C °F
Torque — If Equipped lb-ft Nm
After pressing the Voice button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Voice Response Length Brief Long
Show Command List Always With Help Never
9
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 443
444 MULTIMEDIA
Clock
Safety/Assistance
After pressing the Clock button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Set Time & Format
12 hour 24 hour
AM PM
Sync Time On Off
After pressing the Safety/Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Forward Collision Warning —
If Equipped
Off Warning Only Warning & Braking
Forward Collision Warning
Sensitivity — If Equipped
Near
Med Far
Lane Sense Warning — If Equipped Early Med Late
Lane Sense Strength — If Equipped Low Med High
Front ParkSense Chime
Volume - If Equipped
Low Med High
Rear ParkSense Chime
Volume — If Equipped
Low Med High
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 444
MULTIMEDIA 445
Tilt Side Mirrors In
Reverse — If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse” feature is selected, the exterior side-view mirrors tilt downward when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position and the
transmission gear selector is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE.
Surround View Camera — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Surround View Camera” feature displays a complete 360 degree view of the vehicle's exterior environment while backing up.
Surround View Camera
Delay — If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Surround View Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the 360 degree view image with guidelines for up to 10 seconds
after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK,
or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
Surround View Camera
Guidelines — If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Surround View Camera Guidelines” feature allows you to see active guidelines over the Surround View Camera display whenever the gear selector is put
into REVERSE or the Surround View button on the touchscreen is pressed. The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display.
ParkView Backup Camera
Active Guidelines
On Off
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see active guidelines over the ParkView Backup Camera
display whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to “check entire
surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note disappears.
Setting Name Selectable Options
9
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 445
446 MULTIMEDIA
Fixed Guidelines On Off
ParkView Backup Camera Delay On Off
NOTE:
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines will be displayed for up to 10 seconds
after shifting out of REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK or the ignition is switched to
the OFF position.
Forward Facing Camera
Guidelines — If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Forward Facing Camera Guidelines” feature is an off-road type of feature that shows the path of the tires based on the steering wheel input.
CHMSL (Center High Mounted Stop
Lamp) Camera Dynamic Centerline —
If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “CHMSL Camera Dynamic Centerline” feature is selected, it will assist in backing up for trailer alignment and hook up. This feature is only available
if your vehicle is equipped with Surround View Camera.
Rain Sensing Auto
Wipers — If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Rain Sensing Auto Wipers” feature is selected, the system automatically activates the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield.
Hill Start Assist — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Hill Start Assist” feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA) system becomes active.
Tire Fill Assist On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 446
MULTIMEDIA 447
Lights
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay
0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
Headlight Illumination On Approach
0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Illumination On Approach” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on when the doors
are unlocked with the key fob.
Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped On Off
Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped On Off
Daytime Running Lights On Off
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
NOTE:
When the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature is selected, the exterior lights flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob. This feature may be
selected with or without the Sound Horn With Lock feature selected.
9
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 447
448 MULTIMEDIA
Doors & Locks
Steering Directed Lights - If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Steering Directed Lights” feature is selected, the headlights turn with the direction of the steering wheel.
Rear Cargo Guidance Lights — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Rear Cargo Guidance Lights” feature is selected, the lights in the cargo and bed of the truck will come on either when the headlight switch is pressed,
or the button on the back bed of the truck is pressed.
Setting Name Selectable Options
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Door Locks — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Door Locks” feature is selected, all doors lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Unlock On Exit” feature is selected, all doors unlock when the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the
driver's door is opened.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 448
MULTIMEDIA 449
Sound Horn With Lock Off 1st Press 2nd Press
Remote Door Unlock All Driver
NOTE:
The “Remote Door Unlock” feature allows you to program your remote door locks to open “All doors” or only the “Driver door” with the first push of the key fob
or grabbing the Passive Entry door handle.
Sound Horn With Remote Start On Off
NOTE:
When the “Sound Horn With Remote Start” feature is selected, the horn sounds when the remote start is activated.
Memory Linked To Fob — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Memory Linked To Fob” feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle.
The seat returns to the memorized seat location if “Memory Linked To Fob” is set to On when the key fob is used to unlock the door.
Passive Entry — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Passive Entry” feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons. It automatically
unlocks the doors when the outside door handle is grabbed.
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
NOTE:
When the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature is selected, the exterior lights flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob. This feature may be
selected with or without the “Sound Horn With Lock” feature selected.
Setting Name Selectable Options
9
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 449
450 MULTIMEDIA
Power Side Steps — If Equipped
Auto-On Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the Power Side Steps button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Power Side Steps Automatic Stow
After pressing the Auto-On Comfort Systems button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated
Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle
Start — If Equipped
Off Remote Start Only All Starts
NOTE:
When the “Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start” feature is selected, the driver's heated seat and heated steering wheel
will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40°F (4.4°C). When temperatures are above 80°F (26.7°C), the driver vented seat will turn on.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 450
MULTIMEDIA 451
Engine Off Options
Suspension — If Equipped
After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Easy Exit Seats — If Equipped On Off
Headlight Off Delay
0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
Engine Off Power Delay
0 sec 45 sec
5 min 10 min
After pressing the Suspension button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Suspension Messages All Warning Only
Tire Jack Mode On Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the air suspension system is disabled to prevent auto leveling of the suspension, while the vehicle is on a jack changing a tire.
9
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 451
452 MULTIMEDIA
Trailer Brake — If Equipped
Transport Mode On Off
NOTE:
When the “Transport Mode” feature is selected, the air suspension system is disabled to assist with flat bed towing.
Wheel Alignment Mode On Off
NOTE:
The “Wheel Alignment Mode” feature prevents auto leveling of the air suspension while performing a wheel alignment service. Before performing a wheel
alignment, this mode must be enabled. Refer to an authorized dealer for further information.
Setting Name Selectable Options
After pressing the Trailer Brake button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Trailer Select Trailer 1 Trailer 2 Trailer 3 Trailer 4
Trailer Brake Type Light Electric Heavy Electric
Light EOH
Heavy EOH
Trailer Name List of Trailer Names Available
NOTE:
You can select and personalize your trailer name depending on the type of trailer you are hauling. Select the trailer name from the following list: trailer, boat,
car, cargo, dump, equipment, flatbed, gooseneck, horse, livestock, motorcycle, snowmobile, travel, utility, and 5th wheel.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 452
MULTIMEDIA 453
Audio
After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Balance/Fade Front Back Left Right
NOTE:
The “Balance/Fade” feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade settings. Press and drag the Speaker icon or use the arrows to adjust, tap the C icon
to readjust to the center.
Equalizer + –
NOTE:
When in the “Equalizer” display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble settings.
Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3
NOTE:
The “Speed Adjusted Volume” feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed.
Surround Sound —
If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Surround Sound” feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
9
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 453
454 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth®
AUX Volume Offset —
If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “AUX Volume Offset” feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
Auto Play — If Equipped On Off
Loudness — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Loudness” feature improves sound quality at lower volumes.
Setting Name Selectable Options
After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth® button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Paired Phones List of Paired Phones
NOTE:
The “Paired Phones” feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer to “Phone Operation” in “Uconnect
3 With 5-inch Display” section for further details.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 454
MULTIMEDIA 455
SiriusXM® Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the SiriusXM® Setup button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Tune Start On Off
Channel Skip List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM® can be programmed to exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make your selection, press the Channel Skip button on the touchscreen,
select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Info Sirius ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the Subscription Info button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online.
9
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 455
456 MULTIMEDIA
Restore Default Settings
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the Restore Default Settings button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Restore Default Settings Yes No
NOTE:
When the “Restore Default Settings” feature is selected it will reset the Display, Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings. If “Yes” is selected
a pop-up will appear asking "Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?” select “Yes” to restore, or “No” to exit.
After pressing the Clear Personal Data button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Clear Personal Data Yes No
NOTE:
When this feature is selected it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth® devices and presets. If “Yes” is selected a pop-up will appear
asking "Are you sure you want to clear all personal data?” select “Yes” to Clear, or “No” to exit.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 456
MULTIMEDIA 457
UCONNECT 4/4C/4C NAV SETTINGS
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Buttons On
The Touchscreen And Buttons On The Faceplate
Press the Apps button on the touchscreen then
press the Settings button on the touchscreen to
display the settings menu screen. In this mode the
Uconnect system allows you to access
programmable features that may be equipped
such as Language, Display, Units, Voice, Clock,
Camera, Safety & Driving Assistance, Mirrors &
Wipers, Lights, Doors & Locks, Power Side Steps
(if equipped), Auto-On Comfort Systems
(if equipped), Engine Off Options, Air Suspension
(if equipped), Trailer (if equipped), Audio,
Phone/Bluetooth® Settings, SiriusXM® Setup
(if equipped), Restore Default Settings, Clear
Personal Data, and System Information (if
equipped).
When making a selection, press the button on the
touchscreen to enter the desired menu. Once in
the desired menu, press and release the preferred
setting until a check mark appears next to the
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
Once the setting is complete, press the Back Arrow
button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu or press the X button on the touchscreen to
close out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or
Down Arrow button on the touchscreen on the right
side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or
down through the list of available settings.
NOTE:
All settings should be changed with the ignition in
the ON/RUN position.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
9
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 457
458 MULTIMEDIA
Language
Display
After pressing the Language button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Set Language English Français Español
NOTE:
When the “Set Language” feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages (English / Français / Español) for all display nomenclature, including
the trip functions and the Navigation system (if equipped). Press the Set Language button on the touchscreen, then press the desired language button on the
touchscreen until a check mark appears next to the language, showing that setting has been selected.
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Auto Manual
NOTE:
When Auto or Manual is selected for the Display Mode, the usage of the Parade Mode feature will cause the radio to activate the Display Brightness Day control
even though the headlights are on.
Display Brightness With Headlights ON – +
NOTE:
To make changes to the "Display Brightness With Headlights ON" setting, the headlights must be on and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the "party"
or "parade" position.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 458
MULTIMEDIA 459
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF – +
NOTE:
To make changes to the "Display Brightness With Headlights OFF" setting, the headlights must be off and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the "party"
or "parade" position.
Touchscreen Beep On Off
Controls Screen Time-Out — If Equipped On Off
Fuel Saver Display in Cluster — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When selected, the system displays fuel saver mode in the instrument cluster.
Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Displayed In
Cluster — If Equipped
On Off
Phone Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster — If Equipped On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
9
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 459
460 MULTIMEDIA
Units
After pressing the Units button on the touchscreen, you may select each unit of measurement independently displayed in the Instrument Cluster Display, and
Navigation system (if equipped). The following selectable units of measurement are listed:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Units US Metric Custom
NOTE:
When the “Custom” setting is selected, units will appear according to your personally configured settings. To configure these settings, press the Custom bar.
The following settings will appear:
Speed MPH km/h
Distance mi km
Fuel Consumption MPG (US) MPG (UK) L/100 km km/L
Pressure psi kPa bar
Power — If Equipped HP (US) HP (UK) Kw
Temperature °F °C
Torque — If Equipped lb-ft Nm
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 460
MULTIMEDIA 461
Voice
Clock
After pressing the Voice button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Voice Response Length Brief Detailed
Show Command List Never w/Help Always
After pressing the Clock button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Sync Time With GPS — If Equipped On Off
Set Time Hours – +
Set Time Minutes – +
Time Format
12 hrs 24 hrs
AM PM
Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Show Time In Status Bar” feature allows you to turn on or shut off the digital clock in the status bar.
9
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 461
462 MULTIMEDIA
Camera
After pressing the Camera button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Surround View Camera — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Surround View Camera” feature displays a complete 360 degree view of the vehicle's exterior environment while backing up.
Surround View Camera Delay — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Surround View Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the 360 degree view image with guidelines for up to 10 seconds
after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK,
or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
Surround View Camera Guidelines — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Surround View Camera Guidelines” feature allows you to see active guidelines over the Surround View Camera display whenever the gear selector is put
into REVERSE, or the Surround View button on the touchscreen is pressed. The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 462
MULTIMEDIA 463
ParkView Backup Camera Delay On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image with dynamic grid lines for up to 10 seconds
after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK,
or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines On Off
NOTE:
The “Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the width
of the vehicle and its projected backup path, based on the steering wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center
of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
Fixed ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines On Off
Forward Facing Camera Guidelines — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Forward Facing Camera Guidelines” feature is an off-road type of feature that shows the path of the tires based on the steering wheel input.
CHMSL (Center High Mounted Stop Lamp) Camera
Dynamic Centerline — If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “CHMSL Camera Dynamic Centerline” feature is selected, it will assist in backing up for trailer alignment and hook up. This feature is only available
if your vehicle is equipped with Surround View Camera.
Setting Name Selectable Options
9
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 463
464 MULTIMEDIA
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the Safety & Driving Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Surround View Camera — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Surround View Camera” feature displays a complete 360 degree view of the vehicle's exterior environment while backing up.
Surround View Camera Delay —
If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Surround View Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the 360 degree view image with guidelines for up to 10 seconds
after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK,
or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
Surround View Camera
Guidelines — If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Surround View Camera Guidelines” feature allows you to see active guidelines over the Surround View Camera display whenever the gear selector is put
into REVERSE, or the Surround View button on the touchscreen is pressed. The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image with dynamic grid lines for up to 10 seconds
after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK,
or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 464
MULTIMEDIA 465
Active ParkView Backup Camera
Guidelines
On Off
NOTE:
The “Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active or dynamic grid lines to help illustrate the width
of the vehicle and its projected backup path, based on the steering wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center
of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
Fixed ParkView Backup Camera
Guidelines
On Off
Forward Facing Camera
Guidelines — If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Forward Facing Camera Guidelines” feature is an off-road type of feature that shows the path of the tires based on the steering wheel input.
CHMSL (Center High Mounted
Stop Lamp) Camera Dynamic
Centerline — If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “CHMSL Camera Dynamic Centerline” feature is selected, it will assist in backing up for trailer alignment and hook up. This feature is only available
if your vehicle is equipped with Surround View Camera.
Setting Name Selectable Options
9
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 465
466 MULTIMEDIA
Forward Collision Warning —
If Equipped
Off Warning Only Warning & Braking
NOTE:
Sounds an audible warning for the driver to slow the vehicle in case of collision or sounds an audible warning and applies brakes.
Forward Collision Warning
Sensitivity — If Equipped
Near Med Far
NOTE:
Sets the distance in which a Forward Collision Warning occurs.
Front ParkSense
Volume — If Equipped
Low Med High
Rear ParkSense
Volume — If Equipped
Low Med High
Power Side Steps — If Equipped Auto Store
Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped Off Lights Lights & Chime
Hill Start Assist — If Equipped On Off
Tire Fill Assist — If Equipped On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 466
MULTIMEDIA 467
Mirrors & Wipers
Lights
After pressing the Mirrors & Wipers button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse” feature is selected, the outside side-view mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position and the
transmission gear selector is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
Automatically adjusts the wiper speed based on the amount of precipitation.
Headlights with Wipers On Off
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay – +
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when
exiting the vehicle.
9
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 467
468 MULTIMEDIA
Headlight Illumination On Approach – +
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Illumination On Approach” feature is selected, the headlights will activate and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked with the key fob.
Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Headlights With Wipers” feature is selected, and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position, the headlights turn on approximately 10 seconds after
the wipers are turned on. The headlights also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Dim High Beams” feature is selected, the high beam headlights deactivate automatically under certain conditions.
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned On or Off. This feature is only available if allowed by law in
the country of the vehicle purchase.
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
NOTE:
When the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature is selected, the exterior lamps flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob. This feature may be
selected with or without the Sound Horn With Lock feature selected.
Rear Cargo Guidance Lights — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Rear Cargo Guidance Lights” feature is selected, the lights in the cargo and bed of the truck will come on either when the headlight switch is pressed,
or the button on the back bed of the truck is pressed.
Setting Name Selectable Options
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 468
MULTIMEDIA 469
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Door Locks — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Door Locks” feature is selected, all doors lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Unlock On Exit” feature is selected, all doors unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position, and
the driver's door is opened.
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
NOTE:
When the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature is selected, the front and rear turn signals flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob. This feature
may be selected with or without the “Sound Horn With Lock” feature selected.
Sound Horn With Lock Off 1st Press 2nd Press
Sound Horn With Remote Start On Off
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks Driver Door All Doors
9
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 469
470 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
When “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: Driver Door” is programmed, only the driver's door unlocks on the first press of the key fob Unlock button.
You must push the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passengers’ doors.
When “All Doors” is programmed, all of the doors unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock button.
If the vehicle is programmed “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: All Doors”, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped.
If “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: Driver Door” is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped.
With Passive Entry, if “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: Driver Door” is programmed pushing the handle more than once only results in the driver’s door
opening. If “Driver Door” is programmed, once the driver’s door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors
(or use key fob).
Passive Entry — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Passive Entry” feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob Lock or Unlock buttons.
Personal Settings Linked To
Key Fob — If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob” feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and
exiting the vehicle.
The seats return to the memorized seat location (if “Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob” is set to On) when the key fob is used to unlock the door.
Setting Name Selectable Options
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 470
MULTIMEDIA 471
Power Side Steps — If Equipped
Auto-On Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the Power Side Steps button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Power Side Steps Automatic Stow
After pressing the Auto-On Comfort Systems button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated
Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle
Start — If Equipped
Off Remote Start All Starts
NOTE:
When the “Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start” feature is selected, the driver's heated seat and heated steering wheel
will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40°F (4.4°C). When temperatures are above 80°F (26.7°C), the driver vented seat will turn on.
9
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 471
472 MULTIMEDIA
Engine Off Options
After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Engine Off Power Delay – +
NOTE:
When the “Engine Off Power Delay” feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect phone system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),
and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
Headlight Off Delay – +
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Easy Exit Seat — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Easy Exit Seat” feature is selected, the Driver’s seat will automatically move rearward once the engine is shut off.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 472
MULTIMEDIA 473
Air Suspension — If Equipped
Trailer — If Equipped
After pressing the Air Suspension button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Suspension Messages All Warnings Only
Tire Jack Mode On Off
NOTE:
When the “Tire Jack Mode” feature is selected, the air suspension system is disabled to assist with changing a spare tire.
Transport Mode On Off
NOTE:
When the “Transport Mode” feature is selected, the air suspension system lowers and then disables to assist with flat bed towing.
Wheel Alignment Mode On Off
NOTE:
Before performing a wheel alignment, the “Wheel Alignment Mode” must be enabled. Refer to an authorized dealer for further information.
After pressing the Trailer button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Trailer Trailer 1 Trailer 2 Trailer 3 Trailer 4
9
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 473
474 MULTIMEDIA
After selecting the specific trailer, the following programmable options become available:
NOTE:
For further information about Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring, refer to “Auxiliary Driving Systems” in “Safety.”
Setting Name Selectable Options
Use This Trailer On Off
Braking Light Electric
Light Electric Over
Hydraulic
Heavy Electric
Heavy Electric
Over Hydraulic
Tire Pressure — If Equipped
Are you sure you want to delete the Tire Pressure Settings for Trailer 1?
Yes No
Number Of Axles
+ -
Number Of Tires
+ -
NOTE:
After pressing Next, the Tire Pressure screen appears. The default for this option is 50 PSI (344 kPa), however the range is selectable anywhere between
25–125 PSI (172–862 kPa). Once PSI (kPa) is programmed, the pairing screen appears. Tire sensors must be paired in order shown. Starting with Tire 1,
deflate tire by 5 PSI (34 kPa) and wait for a horn chirp. Repeat process until complete. Do not exit the pairing screen until process is complete. If pairing has
been unsuccessful, a double horn chirp will sound, and a prompt on the touchscreen will allow you to retry the procedure; “Retry” will only appear when setup
fails. Each tire must be successfully paired during a single pairing process to receive the success screen.
Trailer Name List of Trailer Names
NOTE:
You can select and personalize your trailer name depending on the type of trailer you are hauling. Select the trailer name from the following list: trailer, boat,
car, cargo, dump, equipment, flatbed, gooseneck, horse, livestock, motorcycle, snowmobile, travel, utility, and 5th wheel.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 474
MULTIMEDIA 475
Audio
After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Balance/Fade Front Rear Left Right
NOTE:
The “Balance/Fade” feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade settings. Press and drag the Speaker icon or use the arrows to adjust,
tap the C icon to readjust to the center.
Equalizer + –
NOTE:
When in the “Equalizer” display, you may adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble settings.
Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3
NOTE:
The “Speed Adjusted Volume” feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed.
Surround Sound —
If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Surround Sound” feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
AUX Volume Offset —
If Equipped
On
Off
NOTE:
The “AUX Volume Offset” feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
Auto Play On Off
9
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 475
476 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth® Settings
After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth® Settings button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Phone Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster — If Equipped On Off
Do Not Disturb List of Settings
NOTE:
Press “Do Not Disturb” to access the available settings. The following settings are: “Auto Reply” (Both, Text, Call), “Auto Reply Message” (Custom, Default), and
“Custom Auto Reply Message” (Create Message).
Paired Phones and Audio Devices List Of Paired Phones and Audio Sources
NOTE:
The “Paired Phones and Audio Devices” feature shows which phones and audio sources are paired to the Phone and Audio Sources Settings system. For further
information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
Smartphone Projection Manager On Off
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 476
MULTIMEDIA 477
SiriusXM® Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the SiriusXM® Setup button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Tune Start On Off
NOTE:
The “Tune Start” feature begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using one of the 12 presets, so you can enjoy
the complete song. This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected during that current song. Tune Start works in the background, so you will not even
realize it's on, except that you will miss the experience of joining your favorite song with only a few seconds left to play.
Channel Skip List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM® can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning.
This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Info Sirius ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the Subscription Info button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online.
SiriusXM® Travel Link is a separate subscription.
9
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 477
478 MULTIMEDIA
Restore Default Settings
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the Restore Default Settings button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Restore Default Settings Yes Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Restore Settings” feature is selected, it resets clock, audio and other features to their default settings.
After pressing the Clear Personal Data button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Clear Personal Data Yes No
NOTE:
When this feature is selected it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth® devices and presets. If “Yes” is selected a pop-up will appear
asking "Are you sure you want to clear all personal data?” select “Yes” to Clear, or “No” to exit.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 478
MULTIMEDIA 479
System Information — If Equipped
After pressing the System Information button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Software License System Software Information Screen
NOTE:
When the “Software License” feature is selected, a “System Software Information” screen will appear, displaying the system software version.
9
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 479
480 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT 4C NAV WITH 12-INCH
D
ISPLAY SETTINGS
Uconnect 4C NAV With 12-inch Display Buttons On The
Touchscreen And Buttons On The Faceplate
Press the Settings button on the touchscreen to
display the settings menu screen. In this mode, the
Uconnect system allows you to access
programmable features that may be equipped
such as Language, Display, Units (if equipped),
Voice Settings, Clock, Camera, Safety & Driving
Assistance, Mirrors & Wipers, Lights, Doors &
Locks, Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start
(if equipped), Engine Off Options, Suspension
(if equipped), Trailer Brake, Audio Settings,
Bluetooth®, SiriusXM® Setup (if equipped), and
Reset.
When making a selection, press the button on the
touchscreen to enter the desired menu. Once in
the desired menu, press and release the preferred
setting until a check mark appears next to the
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
Once the setting is complete, press the Back Arrow
button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu or press the X button on the touchscreen to
close out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or
Down Arrow button on the touchscreen on the right
side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or
down through the list of available settings.
NOTE:
All settings should be changed with the ignition in
the ON/RUN position.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 480
MULTIMEDIA 481
Language
Display
After pressing the Language button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Language English Español Français
NOTE:
When the Language feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages (English / Français / Español) for all display nomenclature, including the trip
functions and the Navigation system (if equipped). Press the Language button on the touchscreen, then press the desired language button on the touchscreen
until a check mark appears next to the language, showing that setting has been selected.
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Brightness Mode Auto Manual
NOTE:
Select Auto or Manual display mode and this allows adjustment of overall screen brightness.
Display Brightness Headlight ON - +
NOTE:
To make changes to the "Display Brightness With Headlights ON" setting, the headlights must be on and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the "party"
or "parade" position.
9
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 481
482 MULTIMEDIA
Display Brightness Headlight OFF - +
NOTE:
To make changes to the "Display Brightness With Headlights OFF" setting, the headlights must be off and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the "party"
or "parade" position.
Set Theme Pre-configured Themes
Touchscreen Beep On Off
Controls Screen Timeout — If Equipped On Off
Fuel Saver Display — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When selected, the system displays fuel saver mode in the instrument cluster.
Navigation Turn-by-Turn Displayed in
Cluster — If Equipped
On Off
Phone Pop-ups Displays In Cluster On Off
Ready To Drive Pop-Ups — If Equipped On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 482
MULTIMEDIA 483
Units — If Equipped
After pressing Units on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Units US Metric Custom
NOTE:
When the “Custom” setting is selected, units will appear according to your personally configured settings. To configure these settings, press the Custom bar.
The following settings will appear:
Speed MPH km/h
Distance mi km
Fuel Consumption MPG (US) MPG (UK) L/100 km km/L
Pressure psi kPa bar
Power — If Equipped HP (US) HP (UK) Kw
Temperature °F °C
Torque — If Equipped lb-ft Nm
9
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 483
484 MULTIMEDIA
Voice Settings
Clock
After pressing the Voice Settings button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Voice Response Length Brief Detailed
Show Command List Never w/Help Always
After pressing the Clock button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Sync Time With GPS — If Equipped On Off
Set Time Hours + –
Set Time Minutes + –
Set Time Format
AM PM
12 hrs 24 hrs
Show Time in Status Bar — If Equipped On Off
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 484
MULTIMEDIA 485
Camera
After pressing the Camera button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Surround View Camera — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Surround View Camera” feature displays a complete 360 degree view of the vehicle's exterior environment while backing up.
Surround View Camera Delay — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Surround View Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the 360 degree view image with guidelines for up to 10 seconds
after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK,
or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
Surround View Camera Guidelines — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Surround View Camera Guidelines” feature allows you to see active guidelines over the Surround View Camera display whenever the gear selector is put
into REVERSE, or the Surround View button on the touchscreen is pressed. The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image with dynamic grid lines for up to 10 seconds
after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK,
or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
ParkView Camera Delay — If Equipped On Off
9
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 485
486 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
The “ParkView Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image with dynamic grid lines for up to 10 seconds after
the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the
ignition is switched to the OFF position.
Active Backup Camera Guidelines — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Active Backup Camera Guidelines” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active or dynamic grid lines to help illustrate the width of the
vehicle, and its projected backup path, based on the steering wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of
the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
Fixed Backup Camera Guidelines — If Equipped On Off
Forward Facing Camera Guidelines — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Forward Facing Camera Guidelines” feature is an off-road type of feature that shows the path of the tires based on the steering wheel input.
CHMSL (Center High Mounted Stop Lamp) Camera
Dynamic Centerline — If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “CHMSL Camera Dynamic Centerline” feature is selected, it will assist in backing up for trailer alignment and hook up. This feature is only available
if your vehicle is equipped with Surround View Camera.
Cargo Camera Dynamic Centerline — If Equipped On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 486
MULTIMEDIA 487
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the Safety & Driving Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Forward Collision
Warning — If Equipped
Off Warning Only Warning & Active Braking
NOTE:
Sounds an audible warning for the driver to slow the vehicle in case of collision or sounds an audible warning and applies brakes.
Forward Collision Warning
Sensitivity — If Equipped
Near Med Far
NOTE:
Sets the distance in which a Forward Collision Warning occurs.
Front ParkSense Volume Low Med High
Rear ParkSense Volume Low Med High
Blind Spot Alert Off Lights Lights + Chime
Power Side Step — If Equipped Auto Store
Hill Start Assist — If Equipped On Off
Tire Fill Assist — If Equipped On Off
9
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 487
488 MULTIMEDIA
Mirrors & Wipers
After pressing the Mirror & Wipers button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse” feature is selected, the outside side-view mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position and the
transmission gear selector is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers On Off
NOTE:
Automatically adjusts the wiper speed based on the amount of precipitation.
Headlights with Wipers On Off
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 488
MULTIMEDIA 489
Lights
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay - +
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when
exiting the vehicle.
Headlight Illumination On Approach – +
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Illumination On Approach” feature is selected, the headlights will activate and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked with the key fob.
Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Headlights With Wipers” feature is selected, and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position, the headlights turn on approximately 10 seconds after
the wipers are turned on. The headlights also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Dim High Beams” feature is selected, the high beam headlights deactivate automatically under certain conditions.
9
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 489
490 MULTIMEDIA
Daytime Running Lights On Off
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned On or Off. This feature is only available if allowed by law in
the country of the vehicle purchase.
Steering Directed Lights On Off
NOTE:
When the “Steering Directed Lights” feature is selected, the headlights turn with the direction of the steering wheel.
Flash Lights with Lock On Off
NOTE:
When the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature is selected, the exterior lamps flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob. This feature may be
selected with or without the “Sound Horn With Lock” feature selected.
Rear Guidance Lights w/ Cargo Lights— If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Rear Guidance Lights w/ Cargo Lights” feature is selected, the lights in the cargo and bed of the truck will come on either when the headlight switch
is pressed, or the button on the back bed of the truck is pressed.
Setting Name Selectable Options
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 490
MULTIMEDIA 491
Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start — If Equipped
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto-On Driver Heated/Vented Seat &
Steering Wheel — If Equipped
Off Remote Start All Starts
NOTE:
When the “Auto-On Driver Heated/Vented Seat & Steering Wheel” feature is selected, the driver's heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically
turn on when temperatures are below 40°F (4.4°C). When temperatures are above 80°F (26.7°C), the driver vented seat will turn on.
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Door Locks On Off
Auto Unlock On Exit On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Unlock On Exit” feature is selected, all doors unlock when the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position, and
the driver's door is opened.
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
NOTE:
When the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature is selected, the front and rear turn signals flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob. This feature
may be selected with or without the “Sound Horn With Lock” feature selected.
Sound Horn with Lock — If Equipped Off 1st Press 2nd Press
9
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 491
492 MULTIMEDIA
Sound Horn With Remote Start On Off
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks Driver Door All Doors
NOTE:
When “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: Driver Door” is programmed, only the driver's door unlocks on the first press of the key fob unlock button. You must
push the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passengers’ doors.
When “All Doors” is programmed, all of the doors unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock button.
If the vehicle is programmed “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: All Doors”, all doors unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped.
If “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: Driver Door” is programmed, only the driver’s door unlocks when the driver’s door is grasped.
With Passive Entry, if “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: Driver Door” is programmed pushing the handle more than once only results in the driver’s door
opening. If “Driver Door” is programmed, once the driver’s door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors
(or use key fob).
Passive Entry — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Passive Entry” feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob” feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and
exiting the vehicle.
The seats return to the memorized seat location (if “Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob” is set to On) when the key fob is used to unlock the door.
Setting Name Selectable Options
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 492
MULTIMEDIA 493
Engine Off Options
After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Engine Off Power Delay + –
NOTE:
When the “Engine Off Power Delay” feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect phone system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),
and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
Headlight Off Delay + –
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when
exiting the vehicle.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Easy Exit Seat — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Easy Exit Seat” feature is selected, the Driver’s seat will automatically move rearward once the engine is shut off.
9
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 493
494 MULTIMEDIA
Suspension — If Equipped
After pressing the Suspension button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Suspension Messages All Warning Only
Tire Jack Mode
On
Off
NOTE:
When the “Tire Jack Mode” feature is selected, the air suspension system is disabled to assist with changing a spare tire.
Transport Mode On Off
NOTE:
When the “Transport Mode” feature is selected, the air suspension system lowers and then disables to assist with flat bed towing.
Wheel Alignment Mode On Off
NOTE:
Before performing a wheel alignment, the “Wheel Alignment Mode” must be enabled. Refer to an authorized dealer for further information.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 494
MULTIMEDIA 495
Trailer Brake
After selecting the specific trailer, the following programmable options become available:
After pressing the Trailer Brake button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Trailer Trailer 1 Trailer 2 Trailer 3 Trailer 4
Setting Name Selectable Options
Use This Trailer On Off
Braking Light Electric
Light Electric Over
Hydraulic
Heavy Electric
Heavy Electric
Over Hydraulic
Tire Pressure
Are you sure you want to delete the Tire Pressure Settings for Trailer 1?
Yes No
Number Of Axles
+ -
Number Of Tires
+ -
NOTE:
After pressing Next, the Tire Pressure screen appears. The default for this option is 50 PSI (344 kPa), however the range is selectable anywhere between
25–125 PSI (172–862 kPa). Once PSI (kPa) is programmed the pairing screen appears. Tire sensors must be paired in order shown. Starting with Tire 1, deflate
tire by 5 PSI (34 kPa) and wait for a horn chirp. Repeat process until complete. Do not exit the pairing screen until process is complete. If pairing has been
unsuccessful, a double horn chirp will sound, and a prompt on the touchscreen will allow you to retry the procedure; “Retry” will only appear when setup fails.
Each tire must be successfully paired during a single pairing process to receive the success screen.
9
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 495
496 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
For further information about Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring, refer to ”Auxiliary Driving Systems” in “Safety.”
Audio Settings
Trailer Name List of Trailer Names
NOTE:
You can select and personalize your trailer name depending on the type of trailer you are hauling. Select the trailer name from the following list: trailer, boat,
car, cargo, dump, equipment, flatbed, gooseneck, horse, livestock, motorcycle, snowmobile, travel, utility, and 5th wheel.
Setting Name Selectable Options
After pressing the Audio Settings button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Balance/Fade Front Right Back Left
NOTE:
The “Balance/Fade” feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade settings. Press and drag the Speaker icon or use the arrows to adjust, tap the C icon
to readjust to the center.
Equalizer + –
NOTE:
When in the “Equalizer” display, you may adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble settings.
Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3
NOTE:
The “Speed Adjusted Volume” feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 496
MULTIMEDIA 497
Bluetooth®
Surround Sound —
If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Surround Sound” feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
AUX Volume Offset —
If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “AUX Volume Offset” feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
Auto Play On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
After pressing the Bluetooth® button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Phone Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster On Off
Do Not Disturb List of Settings
NOTE:
Press “Do Not Disturb” to access the available settings. The following settings are: “Auto Reply” (Both, Text, Call), “Auto Reply Message” (Custom, Default), and
“Custom Auto Reply Message” (Create Message).
Paired Phones and Audio Devices List Of Paired Phones and Audio Sources
NOTE:
The “Paired Phones and Audio Devices” feature shows which phones and audio sources are paired to the Phone and Audio Sources Settings system. For further
information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
9
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 497
498 MULTIMEDIA
SiriusXM® Setup — If Equipped
Smartphone Device Mirroring — If Equipped On Off
Enable CarPlay Projections — If Equipped On Off
Automatically Display Pop-Ups in
Cluster — If Equipped
On Off
Set as Default Device — If Equipped On Off
Projection Manager Smartphone Device Mirroring On Smartphone Device Mirroring Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
After pressing the SiriusXM® Setup button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Sirius All Access Choose a Subscription Package
Add Listener Add up to five profiles
NOTE:
The “Add Listener” feature allows you to add up to five different profiles for customizing personal music or satellite radio choices.
Listener Items Listening History List Of Options
Tune Start On Off
NOTE:
The “Tune Start” feature begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using one of the 12 presets, so you can enjoy
the complete song. This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected during that current song. Tune Start works in the background, so you will not even
realize it's on, except that you will miss the experience of joining your favorite song with only a few seconds left to play.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 498
MULTIMEDIA 499
Channel Skip List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM® can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning.
This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Info Sirius ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the Subscription Info button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online.
SiriusXM® Travel Link is a separate subscription.
Setting Name Selectable Options
9
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 499
500 MULTIMEDIA
Reset
After pressing the Reset button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Reset App Drawer to Default Order Yes Cancel
Restore Settings Yes Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Restore Settings” feature is selected, it resets all settings to their default settings.
Clear Personal Data Yes Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Clear Personal Data” feature is selected it removes all personal data including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Clear SiriusXM® Data Done
NOTE:
You must contact SiriusXM® Customer Care at 1-855-290-6593 in order to remove your account and profile information associated with
SiriusXM® in this vehicle.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 500
MULTIMEDIA 501
SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION
SAFETY GUIDELINES
Ensure that all persons read this manual carefully
before using the system. It contains instructions on
how to use the system in a safe and effective
manner.
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen.
Doing so can result in damage to the touchscreen.
Please read and follow these safety precautions.
Failure to do so may result in injury or property
damage.
Glance at the screen only when safe to do so.
If prolonged viewing of the screen is required,
park in a safe location and set the parking
brake.
Stop use immediately if a problem occurs.
Failure to do so may cause injury or damage to
the product. Return it to an authorized dealer for
repair.
Ensure the volume level of the system is set to a
level that still allows you to hear outside traffic
and emergency vehicles.
Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System
Read all instructions in this manual carefully
before using your system to ensure proper
usage.
The Uconnect system is a sophisticated elec-
tronic device. Do not let young children use the
system.
Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play
your music or the system at loud volumes.
Exercise caution when setting the volume on the
system.
Keep drinks, rain and other sources of moisture
away from the system. Besides damage to the
system, moisture can cause electric shocks as
with any electronic device.
NOTE:
Many features of this system are speed
dependent. For your own safety, it is not possible to
use some of the touchscreen features while the
vehicle is in motion.
Exposure To Radio Frequency Radiation
The internal wireless radio operates within
guidelines found in radio frequency safety
standards and recommendations, which reflect
the consensus of the scientific community. The
radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless
radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of
energy emitted is far less than the electromagnetic
energy emitted by wireless devices such as mobile
phones. However, the use of wireless radios may
be restricted in some situations or environments,
such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure of
restrictions, you are encouraged to ask for
authorization before turning on the wireless radio.
Care And Maintenance
Touchscreen
Do not press the touchscreen with any hard or
sharp objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry, etc.),
which could scratch the touchscreen surface!
Do not spray any liquid or caustic chemicals
directly on the screen! Use a clean and dry
microfiber lens cleaning cloth in order to clean
the touchscreen.
If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened
with a cleaning solution, such as isopropyl
alcohol or an isopropyl alcohol and water solu-
tion ratio of 50:50. Be sure to follow the solvent
manufacturer's precautions and directions.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do
so. Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
9
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 501
502 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT 3 WITH 5-INCH DISPLAY
INTRODUCTION
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
1 — RADIO
Push the RADIO button on the faceplate to enter
Radio Mode. The different tuner modes, FM/AM/
SXM (if equipped), can be selected by pressing the
corresponding buttons on the touchscreen in
Radio Mode.
2 — COMPASS
Push the COMPASS button on the faceplate to
display the current direction of the vehicle.
3 — SETTINGS
Push the SETTINGS button on the faceplate to
display the customer programmable features.
4 — MORE
Push the MORE button on the faceplate to access
additional options.
5 — ENTER/BROWSE & TUNE/SCROLL
Push the ENTER/BROWSE button to accept a
highlighted selection on the screen. Rotate the
TUNE/SCROLL rotary knob to scroll through a list or
tune to a radio station.
6 — SCREEN OFF
Push the SCREEN OFF button to turn the
touchscreen off. To turn the touchscreen back on,
press the screen.
7 — MUTE
Push the MUTE button to turn off the audio of
the radio system. Press it again to turn the audio
back on.
8 — VOLUME/POWER
Rotate the rotary knob to adjust the Volume. Push
the VOLUME/POWER button to turn the system ON
or OFF.
9 — PHONE
Push the PHONE button on the faceplate to access
the Uconnect Phone feature.
10 — MEDIA
Pushing the MEDIA button on the faceplate will
allow you to switch to Media mode: CD
(if equipped), USB, AUX, and Bluetooth®.
RADIO MODE
Operating Radio Mode
Radio Mode
1 — Station Presets
2 — All Presets
3 — Seek Up
4 — Audio
5 — Info
6 — Tune
7 — AM/FM/SXM
8 — Seek Down
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 502
MULTIMEDIA 503
The radio is equipped with the following modes:
FM
AM
SiriusXM® Radio – If Equipped
Push the RADIO button on the faceplate, to enter
the Radio Mode. The different tuner modes – FM/
AM/SXM (if equipped) – can then be selected by
pressing the corresponding buttons on the
touchscreen in the Radio mode.
VOLUME/POWER Knob
Rotate the VOLUME/POWER rotary knob to adjust
the Volume. When the audio system is turned on,
the sound will be set at the same volume level as
last played.
Push the VOLUME/POWER button to turn the
system on or off.
MUTE Button
Push the MUTE button to mute the system. Push
the MUTE button again to unmute the system.
TUNE/SCROLL Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob
clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to
decrease the radio station frequency. Push the
ENTER/BROWSE button to choose a selection.
Seek Functions
Seek Up
Press and release the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen to tune the radio to the next listenable
station or channel.
During a Seek Up function, if the radio reaches the
starting station after passing through the entire
band two times, the radio will stop at the station
where it began.
Fast Seek Up
Press and hold the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen to advance the radio through the
available stations or channels at a faster rate. The
radio stops at the next available station or channel
when the button on the touchscreen is released.
Seek Down
Press and release the Seek Down button on the
touchscreen to tune the radio to the next listenable
station or channel.
During a Seek Down function, if the radio reaches
the starting station after passing through the entire
band two times, the radio will stop at the station
where it began.
Fast Seek Down
Press and hold the Seek Down button on the
touchscreen to advance the radio through the
available stations or channels at a faster rate. The
radio stops at the next available station or channel
when the button on the touchscreen is released.
Direct Tune Functions
Press the Tune button on the touchscreen to
directly tune to a specific radio station. A keypad
will appear. On the keypad, enter in your desired
radio station, and the system will automatically
tune to it.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode —
If Equipped
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct
satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to
provide clear, coast-to-coast radio content.
SiriusXM® is a subscription based service.
Get over 160 channels on your satellite radio, and
enjoy all you want, all in one place. Hear
commercial-free music, sports, news, talk, and
entertainment. Get all the premium programming,
including Howard Stern, every NFL® game, every
MLB®, every NHL® game, every NASCAR® race,
Martha Stewart, Oprah Radio, and more. Get 20+
extra channels, including SiriusXM® Latino,
offering 20 channels of commercial-free music,
news, talk, comedy, sports, and more dedicated to
Spanish language programming.
9
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 503
504 MULTIMEDIA
SiriusXM® services require subscriptions, sold
separately after the trial included with the new
vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your
service at the end of your trial subscription, the
plan you choose will automatically renew and bill at
then-current rates until you call SiriusXM® at
1-866-635-2349 to cancel. See SiriusXM®
Customer Agreement for complete terms at
www.siriusxm.com (US Residents) or
www.siriusxm.ca (Canadian Residents). All fees
and programming subject to change. Our satellite
service is available only to those at least 18 and
older in the 48 contiguous US and D.C. Our Sirius
satellite service is also available in Puerto Rico
(with coverage limitations). Our Internet radio
service is available throughout our satellite service
area and in Alaska and Hawaii. © 2022 SiriusXM®
Radio Inc. SiriusXM® and all related marks and
logos are trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
This functionality is only available for radios
equipped with a Satellite receiver. To receive
satellite radio, the vehicle needs to be outside with
a clear view to the sky.
If the screen displays Acquiring Signal, you may
need to change the vehicle’s position to receive a
signal. In most cases, the satellite radio does not
receive a signal in underground parking garages or
tunnels.
Setting Presets
The Presets are available for all Radio Modes and are
activated by pressing any of the four Preset buttons
on the touchscreen, located at the top of the screen.
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit into memory, press and hold the desired
numbered button on the touchscreen for more than
two seconds or until you hear a confirmation beep.
The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the
Radio modes. Four presets are visible at the top of
the radio screen.
Audio Settings
1. Push the SETTINGS button on the right side of
the radio faceplate. If the settings button is not
present, push the MORE button on the faceplate,
then the Settings button on the touchscreen.
2. Scroll down and press the Audio button on the
touchscreen to open the Audio menu.
3. The Audio Menu shows the following options for
you to customize your audio settings:
Auto Play
— Press the Auto Play button on the
touchscreen to select between ON or OFF.
This feature determines if music automati-
cally starts playing from a device when it is
first connected to the Media hub’s USB port.
Equalizer
— Press the Equalizer button on the
touchscreen to adjust the Bass, Mid and
Treble. Use the + or – buttons on the touch-
screen to adjust the equalizer to your desired
settings. Press the Back Arrow button on the
touchscreen when done.
Balance/Fade
— Press the Balance/Fade
button on the touchscreen to adjust the
sound from the speakers. Use the Arrow
button on the touchscreen to adjust the
sound level from the front and rear or right
and left side speakers. Press the Center C
button on the touchscreen to reset the
balance and fade to the factory setting. Press
the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen
when done.
Speed Adjust Volume
— Press the Speed
Adjusted Volume button on the touchscreen
to select between “OFF”, “1”, “2” or “3”. This
will decrease the radio volume relative to a
decrease in vehicle speed. Press the Back
Arrow button on the touchscreen when done.
Loudness
— Press the Loudness button on
the touchscreen to select the Loudness
feature. When this feature is activated, it
improves sound quality at lower volumes.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 504
MULTIMEDIA 505
Clock Settings
1. Push the SETTINGS button on the faceplate,
or push the MORE button on the faceplate,
and then the SETTINGS button on the
touchscreen.
2. Select the Clock and Date button on the
touchscreen.
3. Next, select Set Time to change the time.
4. Select Set Date to change the date.
5. To set the time, select the Seek Up or Seek
Down arrows as appropriate. Select “12 hrs vs
24 hrs”, “AM” or “PM” or select the “Time
Zones” (if equipped).
6. Select the Done button when complete.
MEDIA MODE
Operating Media Mode
Media Mode
Media Mode is entered by pushing the MEDIA
button located on the faceplate.
Audio Source Selection
Once in Media Mode, press the Source button on
the touchscreen and the desired mode button on
the touchscreen. Disc (if equipped), USB, SD Card
(if equipped), AUX and Bluetooth® (if equipped),
are the Media sources available. When available,
you can select the Browse button on the
touchscreen to be given these options:
Now Playing
Artists
Albums
Genres
Songs
Playlists
Folders
You can press the Source, Pause/Play, or the Info
button on the touchscreen for artist information on
the current song playing.
1 — Seek Down
2 — Seek Up
3 — Additional Functions
4 — Info
5 — Pause/Play
6 — Source
7 — Browse
9
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 505
506 MULTIMEDIA
Seek Up/Seek Down Functions
Seek Up /Seek Down
Press and release the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen for the next selection. Press and
release the Seek Down button on the touchscreen
to return to the beginning of the current selection,
or return to the beginning of the previous selection
if the track is within the first few seconds of the
current selection.
Fast Seek Up
Press and hold the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen and the desired mode will begin to
fast forward through the current track until the
button on the touchscreen is released.
Fast Seek Down
Press and hold the Seek Down button on the
touchscreen and the desired mode will begin to
rewind through the current track until the button
on the touchscreen is released.
Track Selection (Browse)
Rotate the Browse button on the touchscreen to
scroll through and select a desired track on the
iPod®, MP3 player, phone, or USB. Press the Exit
button on the touchscreen if you wish to cancel the
Browse function.
Repeat
Press the Repeat button on the touchscreen to
repeat the song selection. To cancel Repeat, press
the Repeat button on the touchscreen a second
time.
Shuffle
Press the Shuffle button on the touchscreen to
play the selections on the USB/iPod® or
Bluetooth® device in random order to provide an
interesting change of pace. Press the Shuffle
button on the touchscreen a second time to turn
this feature off.
Track Info
Press the Info button on the touchscreen to display
the current track information. Press the X button
on the touchscreen to cancel this feature.
Audio
Refer to “Audio Settings” for the adjustable audio
settings.
USB/iPod® Mode
USB/iPod® Mode is entered by either inserting a
USB Jump Drive or iPod® cable into the USB port,
or by pushing the MEDIA button located on the
faceplate. Once in Media Mode, press the Source
button on the touchscreen, and select the USB/
iPod® button.
Inserting USB/iPod® Device
Gently insert the USB/iPod® device into the USB
Port. If you insert a USB/iPod® device with the
ignition ON, the unit will switch to USB/iPod®
mode and begin to play when you insert the device.
The display will show the track number and index
time in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the
start of track 1.
Browse
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to
select Artist, Albums, Genres, Songs, Playlists or
Folders from the USB/iPod® device. Once the
desired selection is made you can chose from the
available media by pressing the button on the
touchscreen. Press the Exit button on the
touchscreen if you wish to cancel the Browse
function.
Bluetooth® Mode
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio (BTSA) or Bluetooth®
Mode is entered by pairing a Bluetooth® device
containing music to the Uconnect system.
Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must be
paired with the Uconnect Phone to communicate
with the Uconnect system.
Refer to Phone Mode section for pairing
procedure.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 506
MULTIMEDIA 507
Once the Bluetooth® device is paired to the
Uconnect system, push the MEDIA button located
on the faceplate. Once in Media Mode, press the
Source button on the touchscreen and select the
Bluetooth® button.
NOTE:
For mobile phone compatibility and pairing instruc-
tions, please visit
UconnectPhone.com.
AUX Mode
AUX Mode is entered by inserting a AUX device
using a stereo cable with a 3.5 mm audio jack into
the AUX port or by pushing the MEDIA button
located on the faceplate. Once in Media Mode,
press the Source button on the touchscreen, and
select the AUX button.
Inserting Auxiliary Device
Gently insert the Auxiliary device cable into the
AUX Port. If you insert an Auxiliary device with the
ignition on, the unit will switch to AUX mode and
begin to play when you insert the device cable.
Controlling The Auxiliary Device
The control of the Auxiliary device (e.g., selecting
playlists, play, fast forward, etc.) cannot be
provided by the radio; use the device controls
instead. Adjust the volume with the VOLUME rotary
knob or with the volume of the attached device.
The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio
output from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if the
volume control on the Auxiliary device is set too
low, there will be insufficient audio signal for the
radio unit to play the music on the device.
PHONE MODE
Operating Phone Mode
Phone Mode
The Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated,
hands-free, in-vehicle communications system
with voice command capability. Refer to Voice
Recognition (VR) within this publication for further
information.
The Uconnect Phone allows you to dial a phone
number with your mobile phone using simple voice
commands.
NOTE:
The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile phone
equipped with the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Profile.
To check mobile phone compatibility, please visit
UconnectPhone.com.
For Uconnect customer support:
US residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or call
1-877-855-8400
Canadian residents - visit UconnectPhone.com
or call 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French)
1 — Call/Redial/Hold
2 — Phone Signal Strength
3 — Paired Phone
4 — Phone Battery Life
5 — Mute Microphone
6 — Transfer To/From Uconnect System
7 — Uconnect Phone Settings
8 — Text Messaging
9 — Direct Dial Pad
10 — Recent Call Log
11 — Browse Phone Book
12 — End Call
9
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 507
508 MULTIMEDIA
Phone Mode Activation
Press the PHONE button on the front panel to
activate the Phone mode.
Main Functions
The buttons on the display can be used to:
Compose phone numbers using the graphic
keypad on the display.
Display and call the contacts in the mobile
phone phonebook.
Display and call contacts from the Recent Calls
menu.
Pair up to 10 phones/audio devices to make
access and connection easier and quicker.
Transfer calls from the system to the mobile
phone and vice versa.
Deactivate the microphone audio for privacy.
The mobile phone audio is transmitted through the
vehicle’s audio system. The system automatically
mutes the radio when the Phone function is used.
Connecting/Disconnecting A Mobile
Phone Or Bluetooth® Device
PAIRING A PHONE
To begin using your Uconnect Phone, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth®-enabled mobile
phone. Mobile phone pairing is the process of
establishing a wireless connection between a
cellular phone and the Uconnect system.
To complete the pairing process, you need to
reference your mobile phone Owner's Manual.
Please visit
UconnectPhone.com for complete
mobile phone compatibility information.
NOTE:
You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your
phone to complete this procedure.
The vehicle must be in PARK.
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
position.
2. Push the PHONE button on the faceplate.
If there are no phones currently connected
with the system, a pop-up appears asking if
you would like to pair a mobile phone.
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process.
4. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone.
Press the Settings button on your mobile
phone.
Select “Bluetooth®” and ensure it is
enabled. Once enabled, the mobile phone
will begin to search for Bluetooth® connec-
tions.
Pairing A Phone
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 508
MULTIMEDIA 509
If “No” is selected and you still would like to
pair a mobile phone, press the Settings button
from the Uconnect Phone main screen.
Select the Paired Phones button, and then
press the Add Device button on the touch-
screen.
Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone. When
prompted on the phone, select “Uconnect”
and accept the connection request.
5. Uconnect Phone will display an in progress
screen while the system is connecting.
6. When your mobile phone finds the Uconnect
system, select “Uconnect.”
7. When prompted on the mobile phone, accept
the connection request from Uconnect Phone.
Some mobile phones will require you to
enter the PIN.
8. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
phone. Selecting the “Yes” button will make
this phone the highest priority. This phone will
take precedence over other paired phones
within range and will connect to the Uconnect
system automatically when entering the
vehicle. Only one mobile phone and/or one
Bluetooth® audio device can be connected to
the Uconnect system at a time.
If the “No” button is selected, simply select
“Uconnect” from the mobile phone/audio
device Bluetooth® screen, and the Uconnect
system will reconnect to the Bluetooth®
device.
NOTE:
Software updates on your phone or the Uconnect
system may interfere with the Bluetooth®
connection. If this happens, simply repeat the
pairing process. However, first, make sure to
delete the device from the list of phones on your
Uconnect system. Next, be sure to remove
Uconnect from the list of devices in your phone’s
Bluetooth® settings.
STORING NAMES/NUMBERS IN THE MOBILE
PHONE
Before pairing your mobile phone, you must make
sure you have stored the names you want to
contact in the phonebook on your mobile phone,
so you can call them using the vehicle's hands-free
system.
If your phonebook does not contain any names,
enter new names for the most frequently used
numbers.
For further details, consult your mobile phone
owner's handbook.
NOTE:
The names in the phonebook which do not contain
phone numbers or where both fields (name and
surname) are empty will not be displayed.
CONNECTION
The system connects automatically to the paired
mobile phone with the highest priority.
To choose a specific mobile phone or Bluetooth®
audio device, proceed as follows:
1. Access the Settings menu.
2. Select the Phone/Bluetooth® button.
3. Select the Paired Phones or Paired Audio list
using the corresponding button on the display.
4. Select the specific device (mobile phone or
Bluetooth® device).
5. Press the Connect button.
6. During the connection stage, a screen is
displayed showing the progress of the
operation.
7. The device connected is highlighted in the list.
9
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 509
510 MULTIMEDIA
DISCONNECTION
To disconnect a specific mobile phone or
Bluetooth® audio device, proceed as follows:
1. Access the Settings menu.
2. Select the Phone/Bluetooth® button.
3. Select the Paired Phones or Paired Audio list
using the corresponding button on the display.
4. Select the specific device (mobile phone or
Bluetooth® device).
5. Press the Disconnect button.
Deletion Of A Mobile Phone Or A
Bluetooth® Audio Device
To delete a mobile phone or Bluetooth® audio
device from a list, proceed as follows:
1. Access the Settings menu.
2. Select the Phone/Bluetooth® button.
3. Select the Paired Phones or Paired Audio list
using the corresponding button on the display.
4. Select the device (mobile phone or Bluetooth®
device).
5. Press the Delete Device button.
6. A confirmation screen will appear on the
display:
Press the Yes button to delete the device.
Press the No button to cancel the operation.
Setting A Mobile Phone Or A Bluetooth®
Audio Device As A Favorite
To set a mobile phone or Bluetooth® audio device
as a favorite, proceed as follows:
1. Access the Settings menu.
2. Select the Phone/Bluetooth® button.
3. Select the Paired Phones or Paired Audio list
using the corresponding button on the display.
4. Select the specific device
(mobile phone or Bluetooth® device).
5. Press the Make Favorite button.
6. The device selected is moved to the top
of the list.
Downloading A Phonebook From Your
Mobile Phone
If equipped and specifically supported by your
phone, Uconnect Phone asks you if you want to
download names (text names) and number entries
from your mobile phone’s phonebook. Specific
Bluetooth® enabled phones with Phonebook
Access Profile may support this feature. See
UconnectPhone.com for supported phones.
If equipped and specifically supported by your
phone, Uconnect Phone asks you if you want to
download names (text names) and number entries
from your mobile phone’s phonebook.
Specific Bluetooth®-enabled phones with
Phonebook Access Profile may support this
feature.
NOTE:
If supported, the download and update begins
as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless phone
connection is made to the Uconnect Phone. For
example, after you start the vehicle. You may be
asked for permission to initiate the phonebook
download.
A maximum of 2,000 contact names with six
numbers per contact will be downloaded and
updated every time a phone is connected to the
Uconnect Phone.
Depending on the maximum number of entries
downloaded, there may be a short delay before
the latest downloaded names can be used. Until
then, if available, the previously downloaded
phonebook is available for use.
Only the phonebook of the currently connected
mobile phone is accessible.
Only the mobile phone’s phonebook is down-
loaded. SIM card phonebook is not part of the
mobile phonebook.
This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited
or deleted on the Uconnect Phone. These can
only be edited on the mobile phone. The
changes are transferred and updated to Ucon-
nect Phone on the next phone connection.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 510
MULTIMEDIA 511
Deletion Of Phone Data
(Phonebook And Recent Calls)
Select "Delete Phone Data" on the display to delete
the list of recent calls and the phonebook copy.
Making A Phone Call
Dialing The Phone Number Using The "Keyboard"
Icon On The Display
Enter the phone number using the graphic keypad
displayed.
Proceed as follows:
1. Press the Keyboard icon on the display and
use the number buttons to enter the number.
2. Press the Call button to make a call.
Call By Saying A Phonebook Name Or Phone
Number
1. Push the PHONE button on the steering
wheel.
2. After the beep, say “dial” (or “call” a full name
or phone number).
Recent Calls
The list of the last calls made for each of the
following call types can be displayed:
Calls received
Calls made
Calls without a reply
All calls
To access these types of calls, press the Recent
Calls button on the Phone menu main screen.
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
When a phone conversation is active, a second
phone call can be made as follows:
Select the number/contact from the list of
recent calls.
Select the contact from the phonebook.
Press the Hold button and dial the number using
the graphic keyboard of the display.
Redial
To call the number/contact of last call made, press
the Redial button.
Answering An Incoming Call
Call Controls
The buttons on the display allow the following
phone call functions to be managed:
Answer
End
Ignore
Put on hold/resume
Deactivate/activate the microphone
Transfer the call
Switch from one call to the other
Conference/merge two active calls
Answering Or Ignoring A Call With No Call Currently
In Progress
When an incoming call rings or is announced on
the Uconnect system, push the Answer button on
the touchscreen, or push the PHONE button on the
steering wheel.
Answering Or Ignoring An Incoming Call With A Call
Currently In Progress
When an incoming call rings or is announced on
the Uconnect system, push the Answer button on
the touchscreen, or push the PHONE button on the
steering wheel to answer the call and put the
ongoing call on hold.
NOTE:
Not all mobile phones may support the
management of an incoming call when another
phone conversation is active.
Managing Two Phone Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), it is possible to switch between them
pressing the Call On Hold button or to merge the
two calls in a conference pressing the Merge Calls
button.
9
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 511
512 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
Check whether the mobile phone in use supports
the management of a second call and the
"Conference" mode.
Transferring/Call Continuation
Transferring
The ongoing calls can be transferred from the
mobile phone to the system and vice versa without
ending the call.
To transfer the call, press the Transfer button.
Call Continuation
After the engine is switched off, it is still possible to
continue a phone call.
The call continues until it is ended manually or for
a maximum period of about 20 minutes.
When the system is switched off, the call is
transferred to the mobile phone.
Ending A Call
Press the End button on the touchscreen or the
PHONE button on the steering wheel controls to
end a call in progress.
Only the ongoing call is ended and any call on hold
becomes the new active call.
Depending on the type of mobile phone, if the
ongoing call is ended by the caller, the call on hold
may not be activated automatically.
Uconnect Phone Features
MUTE/UNMUTE
1. During a call, push the VOICE COMMAND
button on the steering wheel.
2. After the beep, say “mute” or “mute off”.
READING MESSAGES
The system can read the messages received by the
mobile phone.
To use this function, the mobile phone must
support the SMS exchange function via
Bluetooth®.
If this function is not supported by the phone, the
corresponding message button is deactivated
(grayed out) or may only accept incoming
messages.
When a text message is received, the display will
show a screen where the options "Listen", "Call" or
"Ignore" can be selected.
Press the Message button to access the list of SMS
messages received by the mobile phone. The list
displays a maximum of 60 messages received.
BROWSING SMS
Using the steering wheel commands, you can view
and manage the last 10 SMS messages received
on the instrument panel. To use this function, the
mobile phone must support the SMS exchange
function through Bluetooth®.
Select the PHONE button on the instrument panel
menu, and then select “SMS Reader” using the
arrow keys on the steering wheel controls.
The “SMS Reader” submenu allows the last
10 SMS messages to be displayed.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
IF EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on
the back surface of the steering wheel. Reach
behind the wheel to access the switches.
Steering Wheel Audio Controls
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 512
MULTIMEDIA 513
The right-hand control is a rocker type switch with
a push button in the center. Pushing the top of the
switch will increase the volume, and pushing the
bottom of the switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the center button will make the radio
switch between the various modes available
(AM/FM/SXM or Media etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker type switch with a
push button in the center. The function of the
left-hand control is different depending on which
mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control
operation in each mode.
RADIO OPERATION
Pushing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the
next listenable station and pushing the bottom of
the switch will SEEK down for the next listenable
station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand
control will tune to the next preset station that you
have programmed in the radio preset button.
MEDIA MODE
Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the
next track on the selected media (AUX/USB/
Bluetooth®). Pushing the bottom of the switch
once goes to the beginning of the current track, or
to the beginning of the previous track if it is within
eight seconds after the current track begins to
play.
IPOD®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
Located on the center stack, just below the
instrument panel, is the main media hub. There
are four total USB Ports: Two Mini-USBs (Type C)
and two Standard USBs (Type A). There is also an
AUX Port located in the middle of the USB Ports.
Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB Port may
activate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay®
features, if equipped. For further information, refer
to “Android Auto™” or “Apple CarPlay®” in the
Owner’s Manual Supplement.
NOTE:
Two devices can be plugged in at the same time
and both ports will provide charging capabilities.
Only one port can transfer data to the system at a
time. A pop-up will appear and allow you to select
the device transferring data.
For example, if a device is plugged into the Type A
USB port and another device is plugged into the
Type C USB port, a message will appear and allow
you to select which device to use.
Center Stack USB/AUX Media Hub
A third and fourth USB Ports are located behind the
center console, above the power inverter. One is a
charge only port, and can only charge USB devices.
The other USB Port allows you to play music from
iPod®/MP3 players or USB devices through your
vehicle’s sound system.
1 — Standard USB Type A Port #1
2 — AUX Port
3 — Standard USB Type A Port #2
9
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 513
514 MULTIMEDIA
Rear Center Console Mini-USB (Type C) USB Ports
Rear Center Console Standard (Type A) USB Ports
Applicable to only Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With
8.4-inch Display, and Uconnect 4C NAV With
12-inch Display radios, different scenarios are
listed when a non-phone device is plugged into the
smaller and larger USB Ports, and when a phone
device is plugged into the smaller and larger USB
Ports:
A new device is now connected. Previous
connection was lost.
(Phone Name) now connected. Previous
connection was lost.
Another device is in use through the same USB
port. Please disconnect the first device to use
the second device.
Plugging in a phone or another USB device may
cause the connection to a previous device to be
lost.
If equipped, your vehicle may also contain a USB
Port located on the top tray of the vehicles center
console.
If equipped, two Mini-USB Ports (Type C), two
Standard USB Ports (Type A), and one AUX Port
may be located to the left of the center stack, just
below the climate controls.
Center Console USB/AUX Media Hub
Some USB ports support media and charging. You
can use features, such as Apple CarPlay®, Android
Auto™, Pandora® and others while charging your
phone.
NOTE:
Plugging in a phone or another USB device may
cause the connection to a previous device to be
lost.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect
Owner’s Manual Supplement or visit
UconnectPhone.com.
1 — Mini-USB Type C Port #1
2 — Mini-USB Type C Port #2
1 — Standard USB Type A Port #1
2 — Standard USB Type A Port #2
1 — Standard USB Type A Ports
2 — Mini-USB Type C Ports
3 — AUX Port
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 514
MULTIMEDIA 515
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being
on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy
performance from your radio. This condition may
be lessened or eliminated by repositioning the
mobile phone within the vehicle. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily improve from repositioning
the mobile phone, it is recommended that the
volume be turned down or off during mobile phone
operation when not using the Uconnect system.
REGULATORY AND SAFETY
I
NFORMATION
US/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless
radio is far below the FCC and IC radio frequency
exposure limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio
will be used in such a manner that the radio is
8 in (20 cm) or further from the human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within
guidelines found in radio frequency safety
standards and recommendations, which reflect
the consensus of the scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal
wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The
level of energy emitted is far less than the
electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless
devices such as mobile phones. However, the use
of wireless radios may be restricted in some
situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are
encouraged to ask for authorization before turning
on the wireless radio.
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with Innovation, Science and Economic
Development Canada license-exempt RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
9
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 515
516 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment gener-
ates, uses and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accor-
dance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interfer-
ence will not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interfer-
ence to radio or television reception, which can
be determined by turning the equipment off and
on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following
measures:
a. Increase the separation between the equip-
ment and receiver.
b. Consult an authorized dealer or an experi-
enced radio technician for help.
VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
INTRODUCING UCONNECT
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) with
these helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice
Commands and tips you need to know to control
your Uconnect system.
If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar, or in the
Apps menus, of your touchscreen, you have the
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display or the
Uconnect 4C NAV With 12-inch Display system.
If not, you have a Uconnect 4C With 8.4-inch
Display system.
GET STARTED
All you need to control your Uconnect system with
your voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
1. Visit
UconnectPhone.com
to check mobile
device and feature compatibility and to find
phone pairing instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind noise and
passenger conversations are examples of
noise that may impact recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume
while facing straight ahead. The microphone is
located in the headliner and aimed at the
driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you
must first push either the VR or Phone button,
wait until after the beep, then say your Voice
Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system
prompts by pushing the VR or Phone button
and saying a Voice Command from current
category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — Push To Begin Radio Or Media Functions
2 — Push To Initiate, Answer, End A Phone Call, Or
Send/Receive A Text
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 516
MULTIMEDIA 517
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
The following basic Voice Commands can be given
at any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After
the beep, say:
“
Cancel” to stop a current voice session
“
Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice
Commands
“
Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the
top of the touchscreen.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
Uconnect 4C NAV With 12-inch Display
9
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 517
518 MULTIMEDIA
RADIO
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio stations you would like
to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM®
Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After
the beep, say:
“
Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
“Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
TIP:
At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or
want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR
button on the steering wheel and say “
Help.”
The system provides you with a list of commands.
MEDIA
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth®
and auxiliary ports (if equipped). Voice operation is
only available for connected USB and AUX devices.
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After
the beep, say one of the following commands and
follow the prompts to switch your media source or
choose an artist.
“
Change source to Bluetooth®”
“Change source to AUX”
“Change source to USB”
“
Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album Greatest
Hits”; “
Play song Moonlight Sonata”; “Play genre
Classical”
TIP:
Press the
Browse button on the touchscreen to see
all of the music on your USB device. Your Voice
Command must match exactly how the artist,
album, song and genre information is displayed.
PHONE
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is
easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button
is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is
ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile
phone compatibility and pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button . After the beep, say one
of the following commands:
“
Call John Smith”
“Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system
prompts”
“
Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)”
“Call back (call previous incoming phone
number)”
TIP:
When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone
button and say “
Call,” then pronounce the
name
exactly as it appears in your phone book.
When a contact has multiple phone numbers, you
can say “
Call John Smith work.”
VOICE TEXT REPLY — IF EQUIPPED
Uconnect announces incoming text messages.
Push the VR button on the steering wheel or
Phone button (if enabled) and say “
Listen.”
(Must have compatible mobile phone paired to
Uconnect system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to
you, push the VR button
on the steering
wheel or Phone button (if enabled). After
the beep, say: “
Reply
.”
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the
beep, repeat one of the predefined messages
and follow the system prompts.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 518
MULTIMEDIA 519
NOTE:
Only use the numbering listed, otherwise the
system does not transpose the message.
TIP:
Your mobile phone must have the full implemen-
tation of the
Message Access Profile (MAP) to take
advantage of this feature. For details about MAP,
visit
UconnectPhone.com.
Apple® iPhone® iOS 5 or later supports reading
incoming text messages only. For further
information on how to enable this feature on your
Apple® iPhone®, refer to your iPhone’s® “User
Manual”.
TIP:
Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone®,
but if your vehicle is equipped with Siri® Eyes Free,
you can use your voice to send a text message.
CLIMATE (4C/4C NAV)
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep
everyone comfortable while you keep moving
ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate control.)
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After
the beep, say one of the following commands:
“Set driver temperature to 70 degrees”
“Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
TIP:
Voice Command for Climate may only be used to
adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle.
Voice Command will not work to adjust the heated
seats or steering wheel if equipped.
NAVIGATION (4C NAV)
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save
time and become more productive when you know
exactly how to get to where you want to go.
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
on the steering wheel. After the beep, say:
“
Find address
800 Chrysler Drive Auburn
Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP:
To start a POI search, push the VR button on the
steering wheel. After the beep, say: “
Find nearest
coffee shop.”
SIRI® EYES FREE — IF EQUIPPED
Siri lets you use your voice to send text messages,
select media, place phone calls and much more.
Siri uses your natural language to understand what
you mean and responds back to confirm your
requests. The system is designed to keep your
eyes on the road and your hands on the wheel by
letting Siri help you perform useful tasks.
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the
Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on the
steering wheel. After you hear a double beep you
can ask Siri to play podcasts and music, get
directions, read text messages and many other
useful requests.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in
traffic.
See you later.
No.
Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay.
Where are
you?
I will be 5 <or
10, 15, 20,
25, 30, 45,
60> minutes
late.
Call me.
Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you
later.
I need
directions.
See you in 5
<or 10, 15,
20, 25, 30,
45, 60>
minutes.
I’m on my way.
Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
9
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 519
520 MULTIMEDIA
USING DO NOT DISTURB
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications
from incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep
your eyes on the road and hands on the wheel. For
your convenience, there is a counter display to
keep track of your missed calls and text messages
while you were using Do Not Disturb.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text
message, a call, or both, when declining an
incoming call and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
“I am driving right now, I will get back to you
shortly”.
Create a custom auto reply message up to
160 characters.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be
selected so you can still place a second call
without being interrupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
Only the beginning of your custom message will
be seen on the touchscreen.
Reply with text message is not compatible with
iPhones®.
Auto reply with text message is only available on
phones that support Bluetooth® MAP.
ANDROID AUTO™ — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android Auto™
features may or may not be available in every
region and/or language.
Android Auto™ allows you to use your voice to
interact with Android’s™ best-in-class speech
technology through your vehicle’s voice recognition
system, and use your smartphone’s data plan to
project your Android™-powered smartphone and a
number of its apps onto your Uconnect
touchscreen. Connect your Android™ 6.0 or higher
to one of the media USB ports, using the
factory-provided USB cable, and press the new
Android Auto™ icon that replaces your “Phone”
icon on the main menu bar to begin Android Auto™.
Push and hold the VR button on the steering wheel,
or press and hold the “Microphone” icon within
Android Auto™, to activate Android’s™ VR, which
recognizes natural voice commands, to use a list of
your smartphone’s features:
Maps
Music
Phone
Text Messages
Additional Apps
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement for further information.
NOTE:
Requires compatible smartphone running
Android™ 6.0 or higher and download app on
Google Play. Android™, Android Auto™, and Google
Play are trademarks of Google Inc.
APPLE CARPLAY® — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple
CarPlay® features may or may not be available in
every region and/or language.
Apple CarPlay® allows you to use your voice to
interact with Siri through your vehicle’s voice
recognition system, and use your smartphone to
project your iPhone® and many apps onto your
Uconnect touchscreen (smartphone’s data plan
will be used for certain apps). Connect your
iPhone® 5 or higher to one of the media USB ports,
using the Apple® factory-provided Lightning cable,
and press the new Apple CarPlay® icon that
replaces your Phone icon on the main menu bar to
begin Apple CarPlay®.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 520
MULTIMEDIA 521
Push and hold the VR button on the steering wheel,
or press and hold the Home button within Apple
CarPlay®, to activate Siri, which recognizes natural
voice commands to use certain iPhone’s®
features such as:
Phone
Music
Messages
Maps
Additional Apps
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement for further information.
NOTE:
Requires compatible iPhone®. See dealer for
phone compatibility. Data plan rates apply. Vehicle
user interface is a product of Apple®. Apple
CarPlay® is a trademark of Apple® Inc. iPhone® is
a trademark of Apple® Inc., registered in the US
and other countries. Apple® terms of use and
privacy statements apply.
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with Innovation, Science and Economic
Development Canada license-exempt RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
© 2022 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar
Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC.
Android™ is a trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM®
and all related marks and logos are trademarks of
SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
Uconnect system Support:
US residents visit www.DriveUconnect.com or
call: 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a
week)
Canadian residents visit www.DriveUcon-
nect.ca
or call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French)
SiriusXM Guardian™ services support:
US residents visitwww.driveuconnect.com/
sirius-xm-guardian
or call: 1-844-796-4827
Canadian residents visithttps://www.driveuco-
nnect.ca/en/sirius-xm-guardian
or call:
1-877-324-9091
9
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 521
522
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to
have the right papers with you. Take your warranty
folder. All work to be performed may not be
covered by the warranty. Discuss additional
charges with the service manager. Keep a
maintenance log of your vehicle's service history.
This can often provide a clue to the current
problem.
PREPARE A LIST
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the
specific work you want done. If you've had an
accident or work done that is not on your
maintenance log, let the service advisor know.
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS
If you list a number of items and you must have
your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the
situation with the service advisor and list the items
in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you
may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily
charge.
If you need a rental, it is advisable to make these
arrangements when you call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are
vitally interested in your satisfaction. We want you
to be happy with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized
dealer. We strongly recommend that you take the
vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your
vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you
get prompt and high quality service. The
manufacturer's authorized dealers have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools,
and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is
fixed correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be
resolved with this process.
If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk
to the general manager or owner of the autho-
rized dealer. They want to know if you need
assistance.
If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the
concern, you may contact the manufacturer's
customer center.
Any communication to the manufacturer's
customer center should include the following
information:
Owner's name and address
Owner's telephone number
(home, mobile, and office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 522
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 523
FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (866) 726-4636
FCA CANADA INC. CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French
IN MEXICO CONTACT
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D.F.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568
PUERTO RICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (866) 726-4636
Fax: (787) 782-3345
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE
H
EARING OR SPEECH IMPAIRED
(TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties,
the manufacturer has installed special TDD
(Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf)
equipment at its customer center. Any hearing or
speech impaired customer, who has access to a
TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the
United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that
require assistance can use the special needs relay
service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY
teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers,
dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay
Service operator.
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have purchased a service contract for a
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of
unexpected repairs after the manufacturer's New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The Mopar
Vehicle Protection plans are the ONLY vehicle
extended protection plans authorized, endorsed
and backed by FCA US LLC to provide additional
protection beyond your vehicle’s warranty.
If you purchased a Mopar Vehicle Protection Plan,
you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner
Identification Card in the mail within three weeks
of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any
questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer's Service Contract National
Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian
residents, call (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French).
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service
contract you may have purchased from another
manufacturer. If you require service after the
FCA US LLC New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires,
please refer to the contract documents, and
contact the person listed in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major
investment when you purchased the vehicle. An
authorized dealer has also made a major
investment in facilities, tools, and training to
assure that you are absolutely delighted with the
ownership experience. You will be pleased with
their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues
or related concerns.
10
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 523
524 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to
this vehicle and market. Refer to
www.mopar.com/om for further information.
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA Canada Inc. warranties
applicable to this vehicle and market. Refer to
owners.mopar.ca/en/ for further information.
MOPAR PARTS
Mopar original equipment parts & accessories and
factory filled fluids are available from an
authorized dealer. They are recommended for your
vehicle to keep it operating at its best and maintain
its original condition.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND
W
ASHINGTON, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, an authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); or go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov.
IN CANADA
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department
immediately. Canadian customers who
wish to report a safety defect to the
Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
PCDB-BDPP.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines
only), some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In
addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain, or
emit, chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 524
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 525
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either
the website or the phone numbers listed below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a
complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components and is written in
straightforward language with illustrations,
diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with
diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These
manuals make it easy to find and fix problems on
computer-controlled vehicle systems and features.
They show exactly how to find and correct
problems, using step-by-step troubleshooting and
drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and
a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared
with the assistance of service and engineering
specialists to acquaint you with specific
FCA US LLC vehicles.
To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om
To order a hard copy of your Owner’s Information,
visit:
www.techauthority.com (US)
Or
Call Tech Authority toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (US)
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
10
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 525
526
INDEX
A
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
(Cruise Control)..............................................265
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............397
Adding Fuel.......................................... 300, 301
Additives, Fuel ...............................................429
Adjust
Down........................................................... 35
Forward ....................................................... 35
Rearward..................................................... 35
Up................................................................ 35
Adjustable Pedals............................................ 41
Air Bag
Air Bag Operation ......................................175
Air Bag Warning Light................................172
Enhanced Accident Response......... 178, 363
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .......................363
If Deployment Occurs................................178
Knee Impact Bolsters................................175
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ..............179
Maintenance .............................................179
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light .............173
Transporting Pets......................................197
Air Bag Light ............................... 126, 172, 199
Air Cleaner, Engine
(Engine Air Cleaner Filter).................... 383, 403
Air Conditioner Maintenance ........................ 385
Air Conditioner Refrigerant ........................... 385
Air Conditioner System ................................. 385
Air Conditioning.........................................56, 66
Air Conditioning Filter..............................67, 385
Air Conditioning System...................................66
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips.......................67
Air Filter ........................................................ 383
Air Pressure
Tires ......................................................... 413
Alarm
Panic ...........................................................17
Security Alarm ....................................26, 127
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle.........................................................14
Android Auto ................................................. 520
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................. 397, 434
Capacites ................................................. 435
Disposal ................................................... 398
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...................... 138
Anti-Lock Warning Light ................................ 131
Apple CarPlay................................................ 520
Assist, Hill Start............................................. 144
Audio Systems (Radio).................................. 440
Auto Down Power Windows .............................68
Automatic Door Locks......................................30
Automatic Headlights.......................................50
Automatic Tailgate Release .............................72
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)..............66
Automatic Transmission.......................221, 402
Adding Fluid.............................................. 402
Fluid And Filter Change............................. 402
Fluid Change............................................. 402
Fluid Level Check.............................400, 401
Fluid Type ...............................400, 437, 439
Shifting ..................................................... 226
Special Additives ...................................... 400
Automatic Transmission Limp
Home Mode .................................................. 224
AUX Camera .........................................293, 299
Auxiliary Driving Systems .............................. 146
Axle Fluid.....................................402, 437, 439
Axle Lubrication ............................................ 402
B
Back-Up......................................................... 291
Back-Up Camera ........................................... 291
Bar, Stabilizer/Sway System ......................... 244
Battery .................................................127, 380
Blanket ..................................................... 212
Charging System Light.............................. 127
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ....................17
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 526
527
Battery Saver Feature...................................... 52
Belts, Seat .....................................................198
Blind Spot Monitoring ....................................146
Body Builders Guide ........................................ 12
Body Mechanism Lubrication ........................393
B-Pillar Location.............................................410
Brake Assist System ......................................139
Brake Control System ....................................139
Brake Fluid .......................................... 399, 437
Brake System ...................................... 399, 427
Fluid Check ...............................................399
Master Cylinder .........................................399
Parking......................................................217
Warning Light ............................................126
Brake/Transmission Interlock .......................221
Bulb Replacement.........................................330
Bulbs, Light.......................................... 200, 330
C
Cab Top Clearance Lights..............................336
Camera..........................................................291
Camera, AUX........................................ 293, 299
Camera, Rear ...................................... 291, 294
Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant).........435
Capacities, Fluid .................................. 434, 435
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine)...................................... 376, 382
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ......................398
Car Washes ...................................................423
Carbon Monoxide Warning .................. 198, 431
Cargo Light.......................................................51
Cellular Phone .............................................. 515
Center High Mounted Stop Light................... 335
Center Seat Storage Compartment..................78
Charge Air Cooler.......................................... 399
Chart, Tire Sizing........................................... 407
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light)......................... 137
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ................. 197
Checks, Safety .............................................. 197
Child Restraint .............................................. 180
Child Restraints
Booster Seats........................................... 183
Child Seat Installation ..................... 191, 192
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .... 190
Infant And Child Restraints....................... 182
Locating The LATCH Anchorages .............. 188
Lower Anchors And Tethers
For Children ......................................... 185
Older Children And Child Restraints ......... 182
Seating Positions...................................... 184
Clean Air Gasoline......................................... 429
Cleaning
Wheels ..................................................... 418
Climate Control ................................................56
Automatic ....................................................60
Manual ........................................................56
Cold Weather Operation ............................... 204
Compact Spare Tire ...................................... 417
Contract, Service .......................................... 523
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ............ 398
Cooling System ............................................. 396
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................... 397
Coolant Level...................................396, 398
Cooling Capacity .............................. 434, 435
Disposal Of Used Coolant ......................... 398
Drain, Flush, And Refill ............................. 396
Inspection................................................. 398
Points To Remember ................................ 398
Pressure Cap ............................................ 398
Radiator Cap............................................. 398
Selection Of Coolant
(Antifreeze)............... 397, 434, 436, 437
Corrosion Protection ..................................... 423
Cruise Control (Speed Control)............. 263, 265
Cruise Light................................................... 135
Cupholders.......................................................83
Customer Assistance .................................... 522
Cybersecurity ................................................ 440
D
Daytime Running Lights ...................................48
Dealer Service............................................... 381
Defroster, Rear Window ...................................56
Defroster, Windshield ............................ 56, 199
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ..............................54
Diagnostic System, Onboard......................... 136
Diesel Exhaust Brake .................................... 219
Diesel Fuel .................................................... 431
Diesel Fuel Requirements............................. 431
11
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 527
528
Diesel Fuel System, Re-Priming .....................391
Differential, Limited Slip ................................254
Disabled Vehicle Towing ................................361
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant).......................398
Do Not Disturb...............................................520
Door Ajar........................................................128
Door Ajar Light...............................................128
Door Locks
Automatic.................................................... 30
Doors............................................................... 27
Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter ............388
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ..................................... 33
Driving
Off-Pavement ............................................245
Off-Road ....................................................245
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water .....................................322
Dual Rear Wheels................................ 421, 428
E
Electric Brake Control System .......................139
Anti-Lock Brake System.............................138
Electronic Roll Mitigation................. 142, 145
Electrical Power Outlets...................................84
Electronic Range Select (ERS)............. 225, 230
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ...................139
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ......127
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case .... 232, 235
Emergency Braking........................................217
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck..................... 360
Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 325
Jump Starting ........................................... 354
Emission Control System Maintenance ........ 137
Engine.........................................376, 377, 378
Air Cleaner................................................ 383
Block Heater.................................... 207, 216
Break-In Recommendations..................... 217
Compartment .................................. 377, 378
Compartment Identification...................... 376
Coolant (Antifreeze)......................... 436, 437
Exhaust Gas Caution ....................... 198, 431
Fails To Start ............................................ 204
Flooded, Starting ...................................... 204
Fuel Requirements .......................... 429, 434
Identification ................................... 377, 378
Idling ........................................................ 213
Jump Starting ........................................... 354
Oil ..................................381, 434, 436, 437
Oil Filler Cap .................................... 376, 382
Oil Filter .................................................... 383
Oil Reset................................................... 113
Oil Selection .................................... 381, 434
Oil Synthetic ............................................. 382
Overheating.............................................. 359
Runaway................................................... 300
Starting..................................................... 202
Engine Oil Viscosity....................................... 382
Enhanced Accident Response
Feature ................................................ 178, 363
Entry System, Illuminated ................................54
Ethanol.......................................................... 429
Exhaust Brake............................................... 219
Exhaust Gas Cautions..........................198, 431
Exhaust System ..........................198, 395, 403
Exterior Lighting ...............................................48
Exterior Lights ........................................ 48, 200
F
Filters
Air Cleaner ................................................ 383
Air Conditioning ................................. 67, 385
Engine Fuel............................................... 388
Engine Oil ...............................383, 436, 437
Engine Oil Disposal................................... 383
Flashers
Turn Signals.............................. 51, 135, 200
Flash-To-Pass...................................................49
Flat Tire Stowage .......................................... 352
Fluid Capacities ...................................434, 435
Fluid Leaks.................................................... 200
Fluid Level Checks
Brake........................................................ 399
Fluid, Brake................................................... 437
Fluids And Lubricants........................... 436, 437
Fog Lights .............................................. 51, 334
Fold Flat Load Floor .........................................82
Fold-Flat Seats .................................................33
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 528
529
Forward Collision Warning.............................152
Four Wheel Drive ...........................................232
Four-Way Hazard Flasher...............................325
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .................................360
Front Axle (Differential)..................................402
Fuel ..................................................... 429, 431
Adding ............................................. 300, 301
Additives ...................................................429
Capacity ....................................................435
Clean Air....................................................429
Diesel .............................................. 431, 437
Ethanol......................................................429
Filler Cap (Gas Cap)...................................301
Filter..........................................................388
Gasoline ....................................................429
Light ..........................................................130
Materials Added........................................429
Methanol...................................................429
Octane Rating ................................. 429, 436
Requirements ........................ 429, 431, 434
Specifications............................................431
Tank Capacity............................................434
Fueling...........................................................301
Fuses.............................................................337
G
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) .................... 74
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ...............................301
Gasoline, Clean Air ........................................429
Gasoline, Reformulated ................................ 429
Gauges
Voltage ..................................................... 210
Gear Ranges................................................. 226
Gear Selector Override ................................. 357
Glass Cleaning.............................................. 426
Gross Axle Weight Rating .............................. 307
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating......................... 306
Guide
Body Builders ..............................................12
GVWR............................................................ 305
H
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising,
Or Shallow Standing Water .................. 322
Hazard Warning Flashers.............................. 325
Head Restraints...............................................38
Head Rests ......................................................38
Headlights .................................................... 332
Automatic High Beam..................................49
Cleaning ................................................... 423
High Beam...................................................49
Lights On Reminder.....................................51
Passing........................................................49
Switch..........................................................48
Heated Mirrors.................................................45
Heater, Engine Block .................................... 216
Hill Descent Control ...................................... 142
Hill Descent Control Indicator ....................... 142
Hill Start Assist.............................................. 144
Hitches
Trailer Towing ........................................... 310
Hoisting......................................................... 406
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) .....................74
Hood Prop ........................................................72
Hood Release...................................................72
Hub Caps ...................................................... 353
I
Idle-Up Feature ............................................. 214
Ignition.............................................................19
Switch..........................................................19
Illuminated Entry..............................................54
In Vehicle Help
Vehicle User Guide ......................................15
Inside Rearview Mirror .................... 42, 43, 325
Instrument Cluster ............ 107, 108, 110, 111
Descriptions.............................................. 135
Display...................................................... 111
Engine Oil Reset ....................................... 113
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ................... 426
Integrated Trailer Brake Control.................... 312
Interior Appearance Care .............................. 425
Interior Lights...................................................52
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ..................54
Intervention Regeneration Strategy ..... 121, 392
Inverter Outlet (115V) ......................................85
iPod/USB/MP3 Control................................. 513
11
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 529
530
J
Jack Location.................................................344
Jump Starting ................................................354
K
Key Fob
Panic Alarm ................................................. 17
Programming Additional Key Fobs ....... 18, 24
Key Fob Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) ................................... 17
Key Fob Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry) ................................... 18
Keyless Enter-N-Go........................28, 201, 205
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors ....... 448, 469, 491
Passive Entry............................................... 28
Passive Entry Programming............. 469, 491
Keys................................................................. 16
Replacement............................................... 25
L
Lane Change And Turn Signals........................ 51
Lane Change Assist ......................................... 51
LaneSense ....................................................289
Latches..........................................................200
Hood ........................................................... 72
Lead Free Gasoline........................................429
Leaks, Fluid ...................................................200
Life Of Tires ...................................................415
Light Bulbs........................................... 200, 330
Lights............................................................ 200
Air Bag.................................... 126, 172, 199
Automatic High Beam..................................49
Brake Assist Warning ............................... 142
Brake Warning.......................................... 126
Bulb Replacement.................................... 330
Cab Top Clearance ................................... 336
Cargo...........................................................51
Center Mounted Stop ............................... 335
Courtesy/Reading .......................................53
Cruise ....................................................... 135
Daytime Running.........................................48
Electronic Stability Program(ESP)
Indicator............................................... 127
Exterior ...............................................48, 200
Fog ........................................................... 334
Four Wheel Drive Indicator ....................... 240
Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 325
Headlights ............................................48, 50
High Beam...................................................49
Hill Descent Control Indicator................... 142
Illuminated Entry .........................................54
Interior..................................................52, 53
Lights On Reminder.....................................51
Low Fuel ................................................... 130
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine)....... 128
Park.......................................................... 135
Passing........................................................49
Seat Belt Reminder .................................. 125
Security Alarm .......................................... 127
Service...................................................... 330
Side Marker .............................................. 336
Traction Control ........................................ 142
Transfer Case ........................................... 240
Turn Signals............51, 135, 200, 332, 334
Warning Instrument Cluster
Descriptions ................................127, 135
Limited-Slip Differential .......................254, 402
Load Shed Battery Saver Mode..................... 124
Load Shed Battery Saver On ......................... 124
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction ........... 124
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor............ 124
Loading Vehicle............................................. 305
Tires.......................................................... 410
Locks
Automatic Door............................................30
Child Protection ...........................................31
Power Door ..................................................28
Low Tire Pressure System ............................. 155
Lubrication, Body .......................................... 393
Lug Nuts/Bolts.....................................427, 428
M
Maintenance....................................................71
Maintenance Free Battery ............................ 380
Maintenance Plan......................................... 370
Maintenance Schedule ...............364, 368, 370
Malfunction Indicator Light
(Check Engine)..................................... 128, 137
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 530
531
Manual
Park Release.............................................358
Service ......................................................525
Media Hub.....................................................513
Memory Seat ................................................... 31
Memory Settings ............................................. 31
Methanol .......................................................429
Mirrors............................................................. 42
Electric Powered ......................................... 44
Heated ........................................................ 45
Memory ....................................................... 31
Outside........................................................43
Rearview .....................................42, 43, 325
Trailer Towing.............................................. 45
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle ........................................................ 14
Monitor, Tire Pressure System.......................155
Mopar Parts...................................................524
MP3 Control ..................................................513
Multi-Function Control Lever............................ 48
N
Navigation System (Uconnect GPS) ...............291
New Vehicle Break-In Period..........................217
Noise Control
Maintenance .............................................403
Tampering Prohibited................................404
Noise Emission Warranty..................... 403, 404
O
Occupant Restraints ..................................... 163
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ..................... 429
Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road).......... 245, 324
Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement).......... 245, 324
Oil Change Indicator ..................................... 369
Oil Filter, Change .......................................... 383
Oil Filter, Selection........................................ 383
Oil Pressure Light.......................................... 127
Oil Reset ....................................................... 113
Oil, Engine...................................381, 436, 437
Capacity........................................... 434, 435
Change Interval ........................................ 381
Dipstick .................................................... 379
Disposal ................................................... 383
Filter .......................................383, 436, 437
Filter Disposal........................................... 383
Identification Logo........................... 381, 382
Materials Added To .................................. 383
Pressure Warning Light ............................ 127
Recommendation............................ 381, 434
Synthetic .................................................. 382
Viscosity .......................................... 382, 434
Onboard Diagnostic System.......................... 136
Operating Precautions .................................. 136
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual..................................12, 525
Outside Rearview Mirrors ................................43
Overdrive ...................................................... 231
Overdrive OFF Switch .................................... 231
Overheating, Engine...................................... 359
P
Paint Care ..................................................... 423
Panic Alarm......................................................17
Parking Brake ............................................... 217
ParkSense System, Rear...................... 278, 284
Passive Entry....................................................28
Pedals, Adjustable ...........................................41
Perform Service Indicator, Reset .................. 369
Pets............................................................... 197
Pickup Box ................................................88, 90
Pinch Protection...............................................71
Placard, Tire And Loading Information .......... 410
Power
Distribution Center (Fuses)....................... 337
Door Locks...................................................28
Mirrors .........................................................44
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet)..........84, 85
Seats ...........................................................34
Side Steps ...................................................28
Sliding Rear Window....................................70
Steering .......................................................44
Sunroof........................................................70
Windows ......................................................68
11
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 531
532
Power Seats
Down........................................................... 35
Forward ....................................................... 35
Rearward..................................................... 35
Recline ........................................................ 35
Tilt ............................................................... 35
Up................................................................ 35
Power Steering Fluid......................................437
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts...................170
Pretensioners
Seat Belts..................................................170
R
Radial Ply Tires ..............................................413
Radiator Cap
(Coolant Pressure Cap)........................ 396, 398
Radio Operation ............................................515
Rain Sensitive Wiper System ........................... 55
Ramp Travel Index.........................................245
Rear Axle (Differential)...................................402
Rear Camera .................................................294
Rear Cargo Area Utility Rails ............................ 94
Rear Cross Path.............................................149
Rear ParkSense System ...................... 278, 284
Rear Window, Sliding....................................... 70
Reclining Rear Seats ....................................... 34
Recreational Towing ......................................318
Shifting Into Transfer Case
Neutral (N) ............................................320
Shifting Out Of Transfer Case
Neutral (N) ........................................... 321
Reformulated Gasoline................................. 429
Refrigerant.................................................... 385
Release, Hood .................................................72
Release, Tailgate .............................................72
Reminder, Seat Belt...................................... 164
Remote Keyless Entry......................................16
Panic Alarm .................................................17
Programming Additional Key Fobs........18, 24
Remote Start (Diesel) ......................................22
Remote Start (Gasoline) ..................................20
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode ..............................21
Uconnect Customer Programmable
Features.............................450, 471, 491
Uconnect Settings .................. 450, 471, 491
Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 330
Replacement Keys...........................................25
Replacement Tires........................................ 415
Reporting Safety Defects .............................. 524
Resetting Perform Service Indicator ............. 369
Restraints, Child ........................................... 180
Restraints, Head..............................................38
Rotation, Tires .............................................. 420
S
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ........................ 198
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ..................... 200
Safety Defects, Reporting ............................. 524
Safety Information, Tire................................. 406
Safety Tips .................................................... 197
Safety, Exhaust Gas ...................................... 198
Schedule, Maintenance ................................ 364
Seat Belt Reminder....................................... 125
Seat Belts ............................................ 164, 198
Adjustable Shoulder Belt .......................... 168
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ..... 168
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage ............................................ 168
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ........... 171
Child Restraints ........................................ 180
Energy Management Feature ................... 170
Extender ................................................... 170
Front Seat........................................ 164, 166
Inspection................................................. 198
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation.................... 166
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting................... 167
Operating Instructions .............................. 166
Pregnant Women...................................... 170
Pretensioners ........................................... 170
Reminder.................................................. 164
Seat Belt Extender.................................... 170
Seat Belt Pretensioner.............................. 170
Seat Belt Reminder .................................. 164
Untwisting Procedure................................ 167
Seat Belts Maintenance................................ 425
Seats..................................................33, 34, 35
Adjustment ...........................................33, 35
Easy Entry....................................................36
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 532
533
Folding Floor ...............................................82
Head Restraints .......................................... 38
Memory ....................................................... 31
Power .......................................................... 34
Rear Folding................................................ 33
Reclining Rear............................................. 34
Tilting .......................................................... 33
Security Alarm ........................................26, 127
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze)......... 436, 437
Sentry Key
Key Programming........................................ 24
Sentry Key (Immobilizer).................................. 24
Sentry Key Replacement ................................. 25
Service Assistance.........................................522
Service Contract ............................................523
Service Manuals............................................525
Shift Lever Override.......................................357
Shifting ..........................................................220
Automatic Transmission.................. 221, 226
Transfer Case............................................240
Transfer Case, Shifting Into Transfer
Case Neutral (N) ...................................320
Transfer Case, Shifting Out Of
Transfer Case Neutral (N) .....................321
Side Steps, Power............................................ 28
Signals, Turn..................................51, 135, 200
Siri .................................................................519
Sliding Rear Window, Power ............................ 70
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) .............................419
Snow Plow .....................................................316
Snow Tires .................................................... 416
Spare Tires .................................416, 417, 418
Spark Plugs................................................... 436
Speed Control
Accel/Decel .............................................. 265
Cancel ...................................................... 265
Resume .................................................... 265
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ............ 263, 265
Stabilizer/Sway Bar System.......................... 244
Starting .......................................201, 202, 205
Automatic Transmission .................. 201, 205
Button .........................................................19
Cold Weather............................................ 204
Engine Block Heater................................. 207
Engine Fails To Start................................. 204
Starting And Operating.................................. 202
Starting Procedures............................. 202, 205
Starting Procedures (Diesel Engines) ........... 205
Starting Procedures (Gas Engines) ............... 201
Steering
Tilt Column ..................................................40
Wheel, Heated......................................40, 41
Wheel, Tilt....................................................40
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ..................... 512
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound
System Controls............................................ 512
Steps, Power Side............................................28
Storage ............................................................78
Storage Compartment, Center Seat.................78
Storage, Vehicle......................................67, 422
Storing Your Vehicle ...................................... 422
Sun Roof ...................................................70, 71
Sunglasses Storage .........................................87
Sunshade Operation ........................................71
Sway Control, Trailer ..................................... 145
Synthetic Engine Oil ...................................... 382
T
Tailgate ............................................................95
Tailgate, Electronic Lowering ...........................72
Telescoping Steering Column...........................40
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC).............66
Tilt
Down ...........................................................35
Up ................................................................35
Tilt Steering Column.........................................40
Tip Start ...............................................201, 205
Tire And Loading Information Placard ........... 410
Tire Markings ................................................ 406
Tire Safety Information.................................. 406
Tires ......................... 200, 412, 416, 417, 421
Aging (Life Of Tires)................................... 415
Air Pressure .............................................. 412
Chains ...................................................... 419
Compact Spare......................................... 417
Dual ................................................. 421, 428
General Information ...............412, 416, 417
High Speed ............................................... 413
Inflation Pressure ..................................... 413
Life Of Tires .............................................. 415
11
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 533
534
Load Capacity.................................. 410, 411
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) ........................................ 130, 155
Quality Grading..........................................421
Radial........................................................413
Replacement.............................................415
Rotation ....................................................420
Safety.............................................. 406, 412
Sizes..........................................................407
Snow Tires.................................................416
Spare Tires............................. 416, 417, 418
Spinning ....................................................414
Trailer Towing............................................312
Tread Wear Indicators...............................414
Wheel Nut Torque .....................................427
To Open Hood.................................................. 72
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight .......................310
Tonneau Cover .......................................96, 423
Tonneau Cover Cleaning................................423
Torque Converter Clutch................................231
Towing ................................................. 306, 361
Disabled Vehicle........................................361
Guide.........................................................310
Recreational..............................................318
Weight.......................................................310
Towing Behind A Motorhome.........................318
Traction .........................................................322
Traction Control .............................................145
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)............................. 145
Trailer Towing ............................................... 306
Cooling System Tips ................................. 316
Hitches ..................................................... 310
Minimum Requirements........................... 311
Mirrors.........................................................45
Tips........................................................... 315
Trailer And Tongue Weight........................ 310
Wiring ....................................................... 314
Trailer Towing Guide ..................................... 310
Trailer Weight................................................ 310
Transfer Case ............................................... 403
Electronically Shifted....................... 232, 235
Fluid ................................................ 437, 439
Transmission ................................................ 221
Automatic ...............................221, 226, 400
Fluid ................................................ 437, 439
Maintenance ............................................ 400
Shifting ..................................................... 220
Transporting Pets.......................................... 197
Tread Wear Indicators .................................. 414
Turn Signals......................... 51, 135, 332, 334
U
Uconnect
Uconnect
Settings ........... 448, 450, 469, 471, 491
Uconnect Phone
Call Continuation ...................................... 512
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable
Features ... 28, 448, 450, 469, 471, 491
Passive Entry
Programming...............28, 448, 469, 491
Uconnect Voice Command............................ 516
Uniform Tire Quality Grades .......................... 421
Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) .....74
Universal Transmitter.......................................74
Unleaded Gasoline........................................ 429
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt.................... 167
USB............................................................... 513
Utility Rails, Rear Cargo Area ...........................94
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 534
535
V
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)...............427
Vehicle Loading ................................... 305, 411
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations.................... 14
Vehicle Storage ......................................67, 422
Vehicle User Guide
In Vehicle Help ............................................ 15
Navigation ................................................... 15
Operating Instructions................................. 15
Searching User Guide.................................. 15
Viscosity, Engine Oil .......................................382
Voice Recognition System (VR)......................516
Voltmeter.......................................................210
W
Warning Lights
(Instrument Cluster Descriptions) ................. 129
Warnings And Cautions....................................12
Warranty Information.................................... 524
Washers, Windshield ..............................54, 379
Washing Vehicle ........................................... 423
Water
Driving Through ........................................ 322
Water Separator
Diesel Fuel................................................ 388
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care .......................... 418
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim........................... 418
Wheel Covers................................................ 353
Winch............................................................ 254
Accessories .............................................. 256
Operation ................................................. 256
Rigging Techniques .................................. 262
Usage ....................................................... 254
Wind Buffeting ..........................................70, 71
Window Fogging...............................................67
Windows ..........................................................68
Power...........................................................68
Rear Sliding .................................................70
Reset Auto-Up..............................................69
Windshield Defroster .................................... 199
Windshield Washers .............................. 54, 379
Fluid................................................... 54, 379
Windshield Wiper Blades .............................. 393
Windshield Wipers ...........................................54
Wipers Blade Replacement........................... 393
Wipers, Intermittent .........................................54
Wipers, Rain Sensitive .....................................55
Wireless Charging Pad .....................................87
11
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 535
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and
personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the
road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle
is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you
find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit
the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Ram brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference for common
questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle, visit
www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owners-manual.html (U.S.), www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Ram brand dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously
impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with
a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use public transportation.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower
and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
`
20_DJD2_OM_EN_USC
THIRD EDITION V5
RAMTRUCKS.COM (U.S.) RAMTRUCK.CA (CANADA)
©2022 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
Ram est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF
THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
UCONNECT AND WARRANTY BOOKLET
OWNERS.MOPAR.CA
CANADA
MOPAR.COM/OM
U.S.
Whether it is providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your
vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next
appointment, we know you will find the app an important extension of your Ram vehicle.
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App
Store
®
or Google Play
®
Store and enter the search keyword “ram toolbox” (U.S. residents only).
